Basic Policy on Promoting Green Procurement 
(Provisional Translation) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
February 2021 Table of Contents 
 
1.  Basic Policy on Promoting Green Procurement by the Government and Incorporated 
Administrative Agencies …………………………………………………………..1 
2.  Designated Procurement Items, Evaluation Criteria, and Basic Matters Relating to 
the Procurement of their purchase ...……...………..……. .…….…….…….………3 
3.  Other Important Matters Regarding Green Procurement …....………….……..……6 
 
Appendix………………………………………………………………………………8 
1.  Terminology……………………………………………………………………...8 
2.  Paper……………………………………………………………………………8 
3.  Stationery……………………………………………………………………….17 
4.  Office Furniture, etc………………………………………………………….…27 
5.  Imaging Equipment,etc.…………………………………………………….…31 
5-1 Copiers, etc…………………………………………………………………31 
5-2 Printers, etc.……………………………………………………….…….….42 
5-3 Fax Machines……………………………………………………………….51 
5-4 Scanners………………………………………………………………….…55 
5-5 Projectors………………………………………………….…………….….58 
5-6 Cartridges, etc.…………………………………………….…………….… 61 
6.  Computers, etc………………………………………………………………….67 
6-1 Computers………………………………………………….……………… 67 
6-2 Magnetic Disc Drive Units…………………………………………………79 
6-3 Displays…………………………………………………………………….82 
6-4 Recording Medias…………………………………………………….……87 
7.  Office Equipment, etc………………………………………………………….89 
7-1 Paper Shredders……………………………………………………………89 
7-2 Digital Duplicators...………………………………………………………91 
7-3 Clocks…….……….………….………………………………………….…94 
7-4 Electronic Table Calculators.……………………………………………… 95 
7-5 Batteries...………………………………………………………………….96 
8.  Mobile Telephones, etc.….……………………………………………………98 
9.  Home Electronic Appliances…………………………………………………102 
9-1 Electric Refrigerators, etc.………………………………………………1 02 
9-2 Television Receivers………………………………………………………106 
9-3 Electric Toilet Seats……………………………………………………….110 
9-4 Microwave Ovens..………………………………………………………..112 
10.  Air Conditioners, etc....….…………………………………………………….114  
10-1 Air Conditioners..….…………………………………………………….114 
10-2 Gas Heat Pump Air Conditioners………………………………………. 118 
10-3 Space Heaters…………….…………………………………...…………120 
11.  Water Heaters, etc.………….………………………………………………122 
11-1 Electric Hot Water Supply Systems………………………………… …122 
11-2 Gas Water Heaters………….……………………………………………125 
11-3 Oil Water Heaters………….…………………………………………….128 
11-4 Gas Cooking Appliances….…………………………………………….130 
12.  Lighting. .…….………………….…………………………………………….133 
12-1 Lighting Equipment……………………………………………………133 12-2 Lamps……………………………………………………………………137 
13.  Vehicles, etc.………………………………………………………………......141 
13-1 Vehicles..…………………………………………………………………141 
13-2 Tires.……………………………………………………………………..151 
13-3 Engine Oil……………………………………………………………….152 
14.  Fire Extinguishers……………………………………………………………..153 
15.  Uniforms and Work Clothes, etc……………………………………….155 
16.  Interior Fixtures and Bedding…………………………………………………159  
16-1Curtains, etc……………………………………………………………....159 
16-2 Carpets..….………………………………………………………………162 
16-3 Blankets, etc..……………………………………………………………164 
16-4 Beds...……………………………………………………………………167 
17.  Work Gloves…………………………………………………………………..171 
18.  Other Textile Products……………………………………………………....172 
18-1 Tents and Sheets…………………………………………………………172 
18-2 Safety Nets……………………………………………………………….174 
18-3 Flags, Advertisement Flags, and Banners, etc.… ………………………176 
18-4 Mops..……………………………………………………………………178 
19.  Facilities...……………………………………………………………………..180 
20.  Stockpiles for Disaster………………………………………………………..195 
20-1 Stockpiles for disaster (Potable Water)………………… ………………195 
20-2 Stockpiles for disaster (Foods)………..………………………… ………196 
20-3 Stockpiles for disaster (Household items and m aterials, etc.)…………198 
21.  Public-Works Projects.….….………………………………………………….206 
22.  Services.……………………………………………………………………….247 
22-1 Energy Conservation Diagnosis…………………………………………2 47 
22-2 Printing…………………………………………………………………..248 
22-3 Cafeteria..…………………………………….………………………….261 
22-4 Recapped Automobile Tires………………..….…………………………2 63 
22-5 Automobile Maintenance…………………….…………………………..264  
22-6 Management of Government Office Buildings, etc ..…………………….266 
22-7 Transportation and Delivery………………….…………………………. 290 
22-8 Passenger Transportation….………..…………………………..……… .295 
22-9 Illumination Services.….…..………..…………………………..…… ....299 
22-10 Retail Businesses..……………………….………………………….…300 
22-11 Laundry and Dry Cleaning……….………………………………….…30 3 
22-12 Installation of Vending Machines…….………………………… ….…305 
22-13 Moving Transportation…….…………………………………….…..…31 1 
22-14 Meeting operation…….….….….….……………………………...……3 16 
22-15 Providing imaging equipment, etc., as a servi ce    …………….....……318 
23.  Trash bags, etc.……………………………………………………………….321 
 
 
  Fields and Items of Designated Procurement Items [2 2 field 282 items] 
Paper *Copier paper * Forms * Coated inkjet color p rinter paper  
* Non coated printing paper * Coated printing paper  * Toilet paper  
* Tissue paper 
Stationery * Mechanical pencils * Mechanical pencil  lead * Ball-point pens  
* Marking pens * Pencils * Ink pads * Vermilion ink  pads  
* Stamp case with inkpad * Stamp case * Official se al  
* Rubber stamp * Date stamp * Rulers * Trays * Eras ers  
* Staplers(general-purpose type)  
* Staplers(other than general-purpose type)  
* Staple removers * Clamp-on clip dispensers(main b ody)  
* Correction tape * Correction fluid * Masking tape   
* Adhesive tapes (cloth tape) * Double sided tapes  
* Book binding tapes * Bookstands * Pen stands * Cl ip cases  
* Scissors * Magnets (ball) * Magnets (bar) * Tape cutters  
* Hole punchers (manual) * Malt cases (sponge case)   
* Paper turning cream * Pencil sharpeners(manual)  
* Office machine cleaner (wet paper type)  
* Office machine cleaner (liquid type) * Dust blowe rs * Letter cases  
* Media cases * Mouse pads * Office machine filters  (with frame)  
* Paper cutters with round blades * Box cutters * C utting mats  
* Desk pads * OHP film * Paint brushes * Paints * I ndia ink  
* Glue (liquid)(including refills) * Glue (paste)(i ncluding refills)  
* Glue (solid)(including refills) * Glue (tape) * F iles * Binders  
* Filing supplies * Photo albums(including refills)   
* Binding string * Card cases * Business envelopes (paper product)  
* Envelopes with windows (paper product) * Graph pa per  
* Drafting paper * Notebooks  
* Reinforcement labels for hole-punch pages * Adhes ive labels  
* Indexes * Self-stick removable notes * Self-stick  removable film  
* Blackboard erasers * Whiteboard erasers * Picture  frames  
* Waste bins * Recycling boxes * Can and bottle cru shers (manual) 
* Name plates (desktop) * Name tags (pin or string)   
* Key hooks * Chalks * Line marking powder* Packing  straps 
Office 
Furniture, etc. * Chairs * Desks * Shelves * Storage furniture (wit hout shelf)  
* Low partitions * Coat hangers * Umbrella stands *  Bulletin boards  
* Blackboards * Whiteboards 
Imaging 
Equipment, 
etc. * Copiers * Multifunction devices * Upgradeable dig ital copiers  
* Printers * Multifunction Printers * Fax machines * Scanners  
* Projectors * Toner cartridges * Ink cartridges 
Computers, etc.  * Computers * Magnetic disk drive units * Displays  
* Recording medias 
Office 
Equipment, etc.  * Paper shredders * Digital duplicators * Clocks  
* Electronic table calculators 
* Disposable batteries and small rechargeable batte ries 
Mobile 
Telephones, 
etc. * Cellular phones  
* PHS * Smart Phones Home 
Electronic 
Appliances * Electric refrigerators * Electric freezers  
* Electric refrigerator- freezers * Television Rece ivers  
* Electric toilet seats * Microwave ovens 
Air 
Conditioners, 
etc. * Air conditioners * Gas heat pump air conditioners   
* Space heaters 
Water Heaters, 
etc. * Heat pump style electric hot water supply system  
* Gas water heaters * Oil water heaters * Gas cooki ng appliances 
Lighting * LED lighting equipment  
* Illuminated signage using LED as the light source   
* Fluorescent lamps (tube type 40 fluorescent lamps )  
* Light bulb-shaped lamps 
Vehicles * Passenger vehicles * Small buses * Small  freight vehicles  
* Buses, etc. * Trucks, etc. * Tractors * Tires for  passenger cars 
* 2 cycle engine oil 
Fire 
Extinguishers * Fire extinguishers 
Uniforms and 
Work Clothes, 
etc. * Uniforms * Work clothes  
* Caps *Shoes 
Interior 
Fixtures and 
Bedding * Curtains * Cloth blinds * Metal blinds * Tufted c arpets  
* Tile carpets * Woven carpets * Needle-punch carpe ts  
* Blankets * Comforters * Bed frames * Mattresses 
Work Gloves * Work gloves 
Other Textile 
Products * Tents * Tarps * Safety nets * Flags * Advertiseme nt flags  
* Banners * Mops 
Facilities * Solar power generation systems (for pu blic and industrial use)  
* Solar heating systems (for public and industrial use)  
* Fuel cells * Garbage disposals * Water saving equ ipment  
* Sunlight adjustment film 
* Software license for telework 
* Web conferencing system 
Stockpiles for 
Disaster * Drinking water for disaster stockpiling * Quick c ooking rice  
* Non-perishable bread for an emergency * Pilot bre ad  
* Retort processed food, etc. * Health foods/Nutrit ion foods  
* Freeze-dried foods * Emergency portable fuel * Po rtable generators 
* Portable power supply for emergency 
** Blankets ** Work gloves ** Tents ** Tarps  
** Disposable batteries    
Note:**The same items as the other fields 
Public-Works 
Projects ＜Material ＞ 
* Treated soil recycled from construction sludge  
* Granulated blast furnace slag for earth work  
* Caisson filler using copper slag  
* Caisson filler using ferro-nickel slag  
* Steel slag for Ground improvement 
* Blast furnace slag aggregate * Ferro-nickel slag aggregate 
* Copper slag aggregate  * Electric arc furnace oxidizing slag aggregate  
* Recycled heated asphalt compound 
* Asphalt compound with steel slag 
* Warm asphalt compound * Roadbed material with ste el slag  
* Recycled aggregate, etc. * Lumber from thinning 
* Portland blast furnace cement * Fly-ash cement 
* Eco-cement * Water permeable concrete * Steel sla g block 
* Spray on concrete with fly-ash * Base-coating pai nt (anti corrosive)  
* Water based road paint using low volatility organ ic solvent 
* High solar reflectance paints * High solar reflec tance water proof  
* Pavement blocks using recycled material (burnt) 
* Pavement block products using recycled material ( precast 
unreinforced concrete products)  
* Bark compost  
* Fermented compost using sewage sludge (sewage slu dge compost) 
* LED road illuminations  
* Central divider block manufactured with recycled plastic  
* Ceramic tiles * Heat insulating sash, doors  
* Lumber * Glued laminated timber  
* Plywood * Laminated veneer lumber *Cross Laminate d timber 
* Flooring * Particle board  
* Fiberboard * Wood-type cement board  
* Wood-plastic recycled composite 
* Vinyl floor covering  
* Insulation * Lighting control system * Transforme rs  
* Cold and hot water absorption units  
* Ice thermal storage air conditioning units  
* Gas heat pump air conditioning units * Fan * Pump   
* Recycle unplasticized polyvinyl chloride pipes fo r sewage or vent  
* Automatic shut off faucets 
* Toilet and urinal equipped with automatic flushin g system  
* Toilet bowls  
* Form utilizing recycled material * Plywood form 
[Construction machines] 
* Low-emission construction machines 
* Low-noise construction machines 
[Construction methods] 
* Effective usage of low quality soil 
* Recycling treatment of construction sludge 
* Recycling treatment of concrete masses 
* Road surface recycling method * Roadbed recycling  method 
* Slope surfaces greening method using thinning woo d or soil  
obtained from construction process 
* Soil cement pillar line wall method of reducing m ad 
[Others] 
* Porous pavement * Permeable pavement * Greening o f rooftops 
Services * Energy conservation diagnosis * Printing  * Cafeteria  
* Recapped automobile tires * Automobile maintenanc e  * Management of government office buildings  
* Landscape management * Smoke detectors test * Cle aning  
* Carpet tile cleaning * Treatment of confidential documents 
* Pest prevention  
* Transportation and delivery  
* Passenger transportation (Automobiles) 
* Fluorescent illumination services  
* Retail businesses that operate in government buil dings, etc. 
* Laundry and dry cleaning  
* Installation of vending machines for beverages  
* Moving Transportation *Meeting Operation 
* Providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service 
Trash Bags, etc.  * Plastic Trash Bags 
 1  
 
Basic Policy on Promoting Green Procurement 
 
 
 
This document defines the basic policies for promot ing comprehensive and planned 
procurement of materials, components, products and services with low environmental 
impact (hereinafter referred to as “eco-friendly go ods”). This is the basic policy of the 
national government (e.g. the Diet, government mini stries and agencies, and courts) and 
corporations defined by the government ordinance 55 6 of the year 2000 specifying 
corporations (hereinafter referred to as “Incorpora ted Administrative Agencies”) in Article 2, 
Paragraph 2 of Act on Promotion of Procurement of E co-friendly Goods and Services by the 
State and Other Entities. It is hoped that local go vernments, enterprises, and citizens will 
also make a commitment to the procurement of eco-fr iendly goods by taking this basic 
policy into consideration. 
The national government shall continue to work in e xisting dealings to promote 
environmental conservation in coordination with thi s basic policy. 
 
 
1.  Basic Direction for the Promotion of Green Procurem ent by the Government and 
Incorporated Administrative Agencies 
 
1.1  Background and Significance of the Promotion of Gre en Procurement 
Current concerns for global warming and waste manag ement, among other 
environmental issues, are rooted in the system of p roduction and consumption, which has 
promoted mass production, mass consumption, and mas s waste. In order to address these 
issues, it is essential that we transform our econo my and our societies into sustainable ones. 
This will require a commitment by all sectors to re duce environmental impact. We must 
immediately reduce the environmental impact of the goods and services that support our 
lifestyles and economic activities, and promote a s hift in demand toward eco-friendly goods. 
In order to shift demand toward eco-friendly goods and services, it is important to not 
only promote the supply of eco-friendly goods and s ervices, but also to promote prioritizing 
the purchase of eco-friendly goods and services. Pr ioritizing the purchase of eco-friendly 
goods and services will help form markets for these  goods and services, which in turn will 
promote their development and, as a result, increas ed purchase of eco-friendly goods and 
services. The resulting continuous improvement will  create a ripple effect in the market. It is 
necessary for all persons to make a strong commitme nt to prioritize the purchase of eco-
friendly goods and services as an integral part of their lives. This is the first step toward 
wider environmental conservation activities by the procurement entities. 
The Government and Incorporated Administrative Agen cies (hereinafter referred to as 
“the Government”) play a major role in the national  economy and have huge influence on 
the other entities. Their role is very important in  promoting a ripple effect in the market, by 
prioritizing and popularizing the purchase of eco-f riendly goods and services. That is to say, 
the Government’s initiative promoting the planned p urchase of eco-friendly goods and 
services will have a priming effect; expandin g this commitment to local governments and 
the private sector, promoting the shift in demand t oward eco-friendly goods and services in 
Japan as a whole. The promotion of green procuremen t based on this basic policy conforms 2 to Article 24, “Promotion of Use of Products Contri buting to Reduction of Environmental 
Load,” of the Basic Environment Act (Law No.91, 199 2), and Article 19, “Promotion of Use 
of Recycled Articles,” of The Basic Act for Establi shing a Sound Material-Cycle Society 
(Law No. 110, 2000). 
In addition, global warming is recognized as a prob lem related to the existence basis of 
human beings, from the magnitude and seriousness of  its expected influence, and it is one of 
the most important environmental problems. Furtherm ore, it is an urgent issue to address 
global issues such as resource, waste constraints a nd marine plastic waste problems. 
Therefore, in view of the importance of countermeas ures against global warming   or 
resource circulation, based on the “Global Warming Countermeasure Plan”(Cabinet decision 
on May 13, 2016) and “The Government Action Plan”  (Cabinet decision on May 13, 2016), 
in addition, based on the purpose of the “The Funda mental Plan for Establishing a Second 
Material-cycle Society”  (Cabinet decision on June 19, 2018) , the State and Other Entities 
need to take the initiative to procure eco-friendly  goods. 
 
1.2  Basic Approach toward the Promotion of Green Procur ement 
Each fiscal year, each institution of the governmen t (hereinafter referred to as “each 
institution”) shall formulate and publish a green p rocurement policy in conformance with 
this basic policy and based on Article 7, “Act on P romotion of Procurement of Eco-friendly 
Goods and Services by the State and Other Entities”  (Law No. 100, 2000; hereinafter 
referred to as “Act on Promoting Green Procurement” ) taking into consideration its budget 
and planned projects and activities for the fiscal year, and shall purchase goods and services 
during the fiscal year based on this green procurem ent policy.  
Specifically, each institution shall purchase and u tilize goods and services based on the 
following philosophy: 
 
(1)  In addition to conventional considerations such as price and quality, environmental 
conservation need to be considered when making proc urement decisions. This will make 
the reduction of the environmental impact of goods and services an element for a 
successful procurement contract, along with price a nd quality. The resulting competition 
between enterprises will lead to the popularization  of eco-friendly goods. In awareness of 
this, each institution shall consider the possibili ty to reduce environmental impact in its 
procurement for as wide a range of goods and servic es as possible, considering the 
business’s promotion for reduction of the environme nt impact not to mention the 
observance of regulations related to environment.  
 
(2)  In view of the maximum reduction of environmental i mpact, a wide range of 
environmental factors, including global warming, ai r pollution, waste, and the decrease of 
biodiversity, need to be considered in as holistic a manner as possible. At the same time, 
goods and services must be selected in consideratio n of the reduction of the environmental 
impact throughout the product lifecycle from resour ce acquisition to disposal. With 
regards to areas with specific environmental issues  such as local air pollution, such local 
environmental issues may be considered with priorit y in making procurement decisions. 
 
(3)  Respecting Article 11 of Act on Green Procurement, each institution shall take care that 
the purchase of environmental goods and services ba sed on Act on Green Procurement 
does not increase the total procurement amount of g oods and services. Each institution 
shall strive to use goods and services reasonably i n order to keep the total procurement 3 amount of goods and services to a minimum. Addition ally, each institution shall strive to 
realize the expected reduction of environmental imp act of the purchased environmental 
goods and services, considering their long-term use , proper use and separate disposal. In 
recent years, from the viewpoint of reducing the en vironmental load and responding to 
“New Normal”, there have been active attempts to sw itch to non-face-to-face work by 
introducing telework and web conferencing system th at utilize information and 
communication technology. When switching to such no n-face-to-face work, it is important 
to properly consider not to increase the total amou nt of goods procured and energy 
consumption. 
Additionally, each institution shall carefully cons ider that green procurement does not 
pose unnecessary impediment on international trade,  taking compliance with the WTO 
Agreement on Government Procurement (particularly t he stipulations of Article 10, 
Technical Specifications and Tender Documentation) into full account.   
 
 
2.  Basic Matters Relating to Designated Procurement It ems, Evaluation Criteria, and  
the Promotion of the Procurement of Designated Proc urement Goods 
 
2.1  Basic Approach 
 
2.1.a Basic Matters of Designated Procurement Items  
Designated Procurement Items are types of environme ntal goods, etc. that the national 
government should prioritize procurement, it is set  when there is a certain amount of 
procurement by the national government, etc. and it  is expected that the demand for 
environmental goods, etc. will change by promoting the procurement of environmental 
goods, etc.  
 
2.1.b Basic Matters of Evaluation Criteria etc. 
Evaluation Criteria are defined as requirements for  clarifying the goods, etc. that are 
subject to the setting of fiscal year procurement p olicy of each institution. 
Though it is preferable to take into account the re duction of environmental impact over 
the entire product lifecycle when making green proc urement decisions, evaluation criteria 
for each designated procurement item shall be estab lished on clear matters including the use 
of numerical criteria, so as to use them as objecti ve guideline for the actual purchase of eco-
friendly goods and services.  In establishing such matters, from the viewpoint of  
promoting procurement based on higher environmental  performance, a plurality of 
reference values are set in the same matter as nece ssary. 
In establishing such matters, from the viewpoint of  promoting procurement based 
on higher environmental performance, a plurality of  reference values are set in the 
same matter as necessary. 
Additionally, while each eco-friendly good makes a corresponding contribution toward 
reducing environmental impact, the evaluation crite ria are established to clarify the goods 
and services, and to be used as one of the standard  for the promotion of green procurement, 
goods and services meeting the evaluation criteria are neither the only ones that contribute to 
environmental conservation, nor the only ones recom mended for purchase. It is preferable 
for each institution to strive to purchase goods an d services not only meeting the evaluation 
criteria but also contributing to the reduction of environmental impact to the greatest extent 
possible, taking into account a variety of environm ental factors over the entire product 4 lifecycle in line with Basic Approach toward the Pr omotion of Green Procurement.  For the 
numerical value set in the evaluation criteria, "re ference value 1" is set as one that 
indicates higher environmental performance, and "re ference value 2" is set as the 
minimum to be satisfied. Each organization shall pr omote procurement based on 
"reference value 1" as much as possible and it is e xpected that transition from 
"reference value 2" to" reference value 1" will pro ceed at an early stage. 
Furthermore, factors which are important for reduci ng environmental impact but are not 
appropriate to be set as uniform evaluation criteri a at the present time are specified as 
“factors for consideration” to be considered in add ition to the evaluation criteria when 
making procurement decisions. Each institution shou ld specify the factors for consideration 
as concrete and explicit specifications for each pr ocurement, when applying the factors for 
consideration to their procurement, in order to ens ure transparency and fairness to the 
procurement process. 
Since Evaluation Criteria are determined from the v iewpoint of reducing the 
environmental load, requirements for procured goods , such as quality, functionality and 
prices, which are not directly or indirectly relate d to the reduction of environmental load, 
shall not be specified.  
 
2.1.c Revising and Adding Designated Procurement It ems and Evaluation Criteria 
The designated procurement items and evaluation cri teria shall be revised as appropriate, 
considering the progress of development and popular ization of the designated procurement 
goods and accumulation of scientific knowledge.  
Future revisions and additions to the designated pr ocurement items and evaluation 
criteria shall be made in accordance with the appro priate procedures as stipulated in Act on 
Green Procurement, and also incorporate the opinion s of experts from the academic and 
business worlds, while ensuring transparency. 
 
2.1.d Setting procurement targets for Designated Pr ocurement Items  
Each institution shall set procurement targets for specified procured goods, etc. every 
year in accordance with the method of setting each target set for each specified procured 
item in the procurement policy.  
 
2.1.e Approach toward Public Works 
Public works account for a large share of each inst itution’s procurement, and have a 
large impact on the national economy. Additionally,  it is believed that the Government’s 
initiative to conduct public works by methods which  contribute to reduce environmental 
impact promote effectively the same approaches cond ucted by local governments and 
private enterprise. Therefore, public works that co ntribute to reduction of environmental 
impact are included in designated procurement items  relating to services, and this type of 
procurement shall be actively promoted in accordanc e with the following points. 
As constructions (including architectural structure s) as the aim of public works are 
directly linked to the lives of the people, long te rm safety and functionality of those 
constructions must be ensured. Therefore, special c onsiderations to the strength, durability, 
and functionality of materials as the components of  public works are needed, based on the 
specific characteristics of the project concerned. Additionally, it is also taken into account 
that minimizing the costs of public works projects is severely required from the point of the 
appropriate use of the institution’s budget. More a ppropriate procurement targets will be 5 considered respecting the difference between types of usage of materials due to the objective 
of each project, the purpose of each structure, the  difficulty of construction, etc., and the 
limitation of the areas and/or quantities of materi als available for public works. 
There are many possible ways to reduce the environm ental impact of public works in 
addition to material utilization, such as the const ruction methods with low environmental 
impact. The issue shall be considered from a holist ic viewpoint spanning the entire lifecycle 
of the public works project. 
 
2.2  Designated Procurement Items and Evaluation Criteri a 
See Appendix. 
 
2.3  Eco-friendly Goods Other than Designated Procuremen t Goods 
The procurement of eco-friendly goods other than th e designated procurement items 
shall also be promoted by specifying the matters ab out the wide range of those goods and 
setting concrete procurement targets as far as poss ible in the procurement policy, considering 
the status of the administrative task or project. 
In particular, as to services category, each instit ution shall strive to take up services in 
which some of designated procurement goods are used  in their own procurement policy even 
if the services are not listed in this basic policy  as designated procurement items, because 
those services are thought to have a big potential to reduce environmental load.  
It is also important for each institution to extend  its efforts to reduce environmental 
impact to custom built or ordered goods and service s beyond ordinary commercially 
available products and services. It is therefore pr eferable to incorporate those special goods 
and services into the procurement policy and study the possibility of reducing environmental 
impact at as early a stage as possible, including t he planning stages.  
In addition, each institution shall strive to decre ase environmental load generated not 
only from the procured goods themselves but also fr om the procurement process as much as 
possible, requiring the use of fuel-efficient and/o r low pollution vehicle, the use of an 
appropriate size vehicle according to the amount of  procured goods, simplification of the 
documents to be submitted within the enforceable ra nge.  
  6 3.  Other Important Matters Regarding the Promotion of Green Procurement 
 
3.1  About Procurement Promotion System 
Each institution shall establish a system for promo ting green procurement. As a rule, this 
system shall be managed by a person with the abilit y to exercise control over all of the 
institution’s internal green procurement. (In the c ase of government ministries and agencies, 
the system shall be managed by the equivalent of a Director (Director-General), or higher). 
All organizations belonging to an institution shall  participate in the system. Note that 
environmental departments and accounting/procuremen t departments must independently 
contribute to this process. Each institution shall clearly describe a concrete green 
procurement promotion system in its procurement pol icy. 
 
3.2  Scope of Procurement Policy Application  
As a rule, the procurement policy shall be applied to all organizations belonging to the 
institution. However, in the case of specific depar tments where it is not feasible to uniformly 
promote green procurement, a separate procurements policy shall be created for those 
departments, after clearly noting the reasons in th e procurement policy. Each institution shall 
clearly note the scope of its application in the pr ocurement policy. 
 
3.3  Publication of Procurement Policy, Summery of Procu rement Track Record, and 
Methods Therein 
Publication of procurement targets of environmental  goods and services each fiscal year 
through publication of procurement policy assumed t o lead the supply of eco-friendly goods 
and services by the enterprises from the demand sid e. Additionally, in order to successfully 
promote green procurement, it is necessary to accur ately grasp the procurement track record, 
which will be reflected to procurement policy, and to show the summery of record in an 
easy-to-understand format to clarify the progress o f green procurement objectively. 
 
3.4  Establishment of Committee of Related Government Mi nistries and Agencies, etc. 
A committee of government ministries and agencies, etc. shall be formed to enhance 
communication between organizations and to study po licies for the promotion of green 
procurement so as to facilitate green procurement e ffectively. 
 
3.5  Employee Training and Other Educational Activities for the Promotion of Green 
Procurement 
Training, seminars, and other educational activitie s shall be actively implemented to give 
employees, especially those in charge of procuremen t, a greater awareness and practical 
knowledge concerning the promotion of green procure ment. 
 
3.6  Utilization and Provision of Information about Eco- friendly Goods and Services 
A wide variety of information about eco-friendly go ods and services is already available, 
including various environmental labels and product environmental information database. 
Therefore, each institution shall try to utilize in formation from environmental labels 
provided by third-party organization, such as Eco-M ark and Eco-Leaf, while taking into 
account its appropriateness, including reliability of information and transparency of its 
procedures. And each institution shall strive to pu rchase goods and services which contribute 
to reduce environmental load to the greatest extent  possible, referring to the Carbon Offset 
Attestation Label and the Carbon Footprint Mark, wh ich are programs for the reduction of 7 Greenhouse gas emission. The Government shall striv e to provide and spread the 
appropriate information about eco-friendly goods an d services as to promote the green 
procurement by the governmental organizations, busi nesses and citizens. Moreover, the 
business, each institution and other concerned part ies shall strive to ensure the reliability 
within the procurement of designated procurement go ods. 
 
 8 Appendix  
 
1. Terminology  
 
In this Appendix, the terms “evaluation criteria” “reference value  1” “reference value  2” 
and “factors for consideration” are used with the f ollowing meanings:  
 
Evaluation Criteria  
The requirement as “specified procurement goods” st ipulated in Article 2, Paragraph 2 of 
Act on Promotion of Procurement of Eco-friendly Goo ds and Services by the State and 
Other Entities.  
 
Reference value 1  
When multiple criteria to the same matter are set i n the evaluation criteria, it is a value of 
higher environmental performance in that matter and  is indicated as a criteria to promote 
procurement as much as possible.  
 
Reference value 2  
Indicated as the minimum level standard for procure ment at each institution when multiple 
criteria are set for the same items in the evaluati on criteria.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
While not criteria required for specified procureme nt goods, these factors should preferably 
be taken into account when procuring eco-friendly g oods.  
 
 
2. Paper  
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Printing Paper  
Non coated 
printing paper  
 
Coated printing 
paper  Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Fulfill one of the following.  
a.  For non coated printing paper, the composite rating  obtained 
by using the following numbers in the formula in no te 5 is 80 
or higher: content of recycled pulp, pulp certified  by forest 
certification system, pulp manufactured with lumber  from 
thinning and others, proportion of pulp content tha t is used in 
accordance with method of material procurement with  
sustainable goals, and degree of bleaching to be us ed for 
material.  
b.  For coated printing paper, the composite rating obt ained by 
using the following numbers in the formula in note 5 is 80 or 
higher: content of recycled pulp, pulp certified by  forest 
certification system, pulp manufactured with lumber  from 
thinning and others, proportion of pulp content tha t is used in 
accordance with method of material procurement with  
sustainable goals, and amount of coating to be used  for 
material.  9 (2)  If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pul pwood used is to 
be in compliance with the regulations concerning fo restry in its 
country or geographical area of origin. This does n ot apply to 
virgin pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pie ces obtained 
from plywood or lumber factories, material left ove r from forestry, 
or lumber with a small diameter. 
(3)  The composite rating and its breakdown (index or ad ditional 
rating, as well as rating for each index item) are readily available 
on website etc. 
(4)  Not processed in a way that makes difficult to recy cle. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  The recycled pulp content is as high as possible. 
(2)  When virgin pulp is used as material, the pulpwood was produced 
from forests that are operated using sustainable me thods. The 
content of pulp certified by forest certification s ystem and pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning and others i s to be as high 
as possible. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Pulp used in accordance with method of procurement of materials with sustainable 
goals , denotes one of the following: 
a.  Pulp used in accordance with policies for procuring  pulpwood only from those 
forests which are operated in accordance with the v iewpoint to use forest material 
both cyclically and sustainably by maintaining the diverse functions of the forests, 
while not contributing to the deterioration of the forest or the reduction of forest 
area, and which maintain environmental excellence, including preservation of 
biodiversity, and social excellence, including cons ideration for health and safety of 
workers. 
b.  Pulp used in accordance with policies for procuring  recycled and unused pulpwood 
that would contribute to the effective application of resources (scrap wood, 
pulpwood derived from construction, lower standard pulpwood (leftover pulpwood 
from forestry, shrubbery, tree root, pulpwood obtai ned from logs affected by vermin 
and natural disasters, bent material, material with  small diameter, etc.) and fiber 
from waste plants). 
2.  Lumber from thinning and others  denotes lumber from thinning and bamboo. 
3. Index item  denotes content of recycled pulp, pulp certified b y forest certification system, 
pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and oth ers, proportion of pulp content 
that is used in accordance with method of material procurement with sustainable goals, 
degree of bleaching, and amount of coating to be us ed for material. Proportion of pulp 
content that is used in accordance with material pr ocurement with sustainable goals  
denotes pulp to be used in accordance with material  procurement with sustainable goals, 
with the exception of pulp certified by forest cert ification system and pulp manufactured 
with lumber from thinning and others. 
4. Composite rating  stands for the amount Y1 or Y2 listed in note 5. 10 Index stands for amount per index item for x1, x2, x3, x4  as listed in note 5 ; Additional 
rating  stands for amount per index item for x5, x6 as list ed in note 5. 
Rating  stands for the amount calculated in accordance wit h formulas for y1, y2, y3, y4, 
y5 as listed in note 5. 
5. Composite rating, rating, index, and additional rating are to be derived from the 
following: 
Y1 = (y1+y2+y3)+y4 
Y2 = (y1+y2+y3)+y5 
y1 = x1-10 (60 ≤x1 ≤100) 
y2 = x2+x3 (0 ≤x2+x3 ≤40) 
y3=0.5 × x4 (0 ≤x4 ≤40) 
y4=-x5+75 (60 ≤x5 ≤75, x5<60 x5=60, x5>75 x5=75) 
y5=-0.5x6+20 (0 ≤x6 ≤10 x6=10, 10 ≤x6 ≤20  x6=20,20 ≤x6 ≤30  x6=30, 
x6>30  x6=40) 
 
Y1, Y2 and y1, y2, y3, y4, y5, x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6 stand for the following amount. 
Y1 (composite rating of non coated printing paper):  the sum of y1, y2, y3, y4 with 
the amount below decimal point eliminated. 
Y2 (composite rating of coated printing paper): the  sum of y1, y2, y3, y5 with the 
amount below decimal point eliminated. 
y1: calculated rating for recycled pulp content, ro unded to one decimal place. 
y2: calculated rating for the content of pulp certi fied by forest certification system 
and pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, ro unded to one decimal place. 
y3: calculated rating for proportion of pulp conten t that is used in accordance with 
method of material procurement with sustainable goa ls, rounded to one decimal 
place. 
y4: calculated sum of degree of bleaching, rounded to one decimal place (not applied 
for colored printing paper or fancy paper (includin g fine quality of colored paper 
and general colored paper used colorant)). 
5 point adding in case of colored printing paper an d fancy paper of Rank A (the 
one not obstructed in recycling to printing paper) that meet the criteria of 
“printing” (refer to printing  section), there is no adding point for other paper.  
y5: calculated sum of amount of coating, rounded to  one decimal place. 
x1: content ratio of recycled pulp satisfying minim al guarantee (%) 
x2: content ratio of pulp certified by forest certi fication system (%) 
 x2 = (pulp certified by forest certification syste m / virgin pulp) × (100-x1) 
x3: content ratio of pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others (%) 
 x3= (pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning a nd others / virgin pulp) × 
(100-x1) 
x4: content ratio of pulp that satisfy other sustai nable goals (%) 
 x4= (pulp that satisfy other sustainable goals / v irgin pulp) × (100-x1) 
x5: degree of bleaching (%) 
 Degree of bleaching is to be determined as managem ent standard per each  
product lot at the time of production. Amounts with in 3% of management 
standard are to be allowed. When coloring occurs wi th purposes other than to 
match the lot color (when bleaching is done intenti onally) does not count 
towards additional points. 11 x6: amount of coating (g/m2) 
 Amount of coating (coating on both sides) is to be  determined as management 
standard per each product lot at the time of produc tion.  
6. When using printing paper for the copiers and th e printers, each procurement 
organization must confirm the printability and prin t quality based on information offered 
by the paper manufacturer making public on the prod uct or websites. 
7. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainabil ity of the forest where pulpwood 
producing paper originates from is, as for Wood-rel ated Entities, to be conducted in 
accordance with  Clean Wood Act and the Forest Agen cy’s “Guideline for Verification 
on Legality and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Pro ducts (February 15, 2006).” For 
other than Wood-related Entities, to be conducted i n accordance with the Forest 
Agency’s Guideline. 
8. Confirmation of lumber from thinning to be used for pulp is to be done in accordance 
with “Guidelines for confirming thinning wood chips  (February 13, 2009).” 
9. As paper is produced from a mixture of multiple wood chips, it is permissible to take 
into consideration the difficulty of securing the a ctual proportion for each product during 
the manufacturing process, and use the credit metho d that is in accordance with 
“Operation guidelines for credit method for pulp ce rtified by forest certification system 
and pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning (Fe bruary 13, 2009) ,” stipulated by 
Ministry of Environment. 
Credit method  refers to a method whereby the appropriate use of p ulp certified by forest 
certification system and pulp manufactured with lum ber from thinning and others are 
determined for each product, in accordance with the  amount of usage for the two types 
of pulp in relation to other types of material used  in a given time, without consideration 
for whether or not it is actually used in individua l product. 
 
 
Hygienic Paper 
Toilet paper Evaluation Criteria  
100% recycled pulp content 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into account 
ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal. Tissue paper 
 
 
Information Paper 
Copier paper 
 Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  The composite rating obtained by using the followin g numbers in the 
formula in note 5 is 80 or higher: content of recyc led pulp, pulp 
certified by forest certification system, pulp manu factured with lumber 
from thinning and others, proportion of pulp conten t that is used in 
accordance with method of material procurement with  sustainable 
goals, degree of bleaching, and weight per unit to be used for material.  
(2)  If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pul pwood used is to be in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry  in its country or 
geographical area of origin. This does not apply to  virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained  from plywood 12 or lumber factories, material left over from forest ry, or lumber with a 
small diameter. 
(3)  The composite rating and its breakdown (index or ad ditional rating, as 
well as rating for each index item) are listed on t he product. When it is 
not possible to list the rating and its breakdown o n the product, the 
information is readily available on website, etc., which should be 
clearly noted. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  The recycled pulp content is as high as possible. 
(2)  When virgin pulp is used as material, the pulpwood was produced from 
forests that are operated using sustainable methods . The content of 
pulp certified by forest certification system and p ulp manufactured 
with lumber from thinning and others is to be as hi gh as possible. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
2.  Pulp used in accordance with method of procurement of materials with sustainable 
goals , denotes one of the following: 
a.  Pulp used in accordance with policies for procuring  pulpwood only from those 
forests which are operated in accordance with the v iewpoint to use forest material 
both cyclically and sustainably by maintaining the diverse functions of the forests, 
while not contributing to the deterioration of the forest or the reduction of forest 
area, and which maintain environmental excellence, including preservation of 
biodiversity, and social excellence, including cons ideration for health and safety 
of workers. 
b.  Pulp used in accordance with policies for procuring  recycled and unused 
pulpwood that would contribute to the effective app lication of resources (scrap 
wood, pulpwood derived from construction, lower sta ndard pulpwood (leftover 
pulpwood from forestry, shrubbery, tree root, pulpw ood obtained from logs 
affected by vermin and natural disasters, bent mate rial, material with small 
diameter, etc.) and fiber from waste plants). 
3.  Lumber from thinning  and others  denotes  lumber from thinning and bamboo. 
4.  Index item  denotes content of recycled pulp, pulp certified b y forest certification 
system, pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning  and others proportion of pulp 
content that is used in accordance with method of m aterial procurement with 
sustainable goals, degree of bleaching, and weight per unit to be used for material. 
Proportion of pulp content that is used in accordan ce with material procurement 
with sustainable goals  denotes pulp to be used in accordance with material  
procurement with sustainable goals, with the except ion of pulp certified by forest 
certification system and pulp manufactured with lum ber from thinning and others. 
5.  Composite rating  stands for the amount Y listed in note 5. 
Index stands for amount per index item for x1, x2, x3, x4  as listed in note 5 ; Additional 
rating  stands for amount per index item for x5, x6 as list ed in note 5. 
Rating  stands for the amount calculated in accordance wit h formulas for y1, y2, y3, 
y4, y5 as listed in note 5. 13 6.  Composite rating, rating, index, and additional rat ing are to be derived from the 
following: 
Y = (y1+y2+y3)+y4+y5 
y1 = x1-20 (70 ≤x1 ≤100) 
y2 = x2+x3 (0 ≤x2+x3 ≤30) 
y3 = 0.5 × x4 (0 ≤x4 ≤30) 
y4 = x5+75 (60 ≤x5 ≤75, x5<60 x5=60, x5>75 x5=75) 
y5 = -2.5x6+170 (62 ≤x6 ≤68, x6<62 x6=62, x6>68 x6=68) 
Y and y1, y2, y3, y4, y5, x1, x2, x3, x4, x5, x6 st and for the following amount. 
Y (composite rating): the sum of y1, y2, y3, y4, y5  with the amount below decimal 
point eliminated. 
y1: calculated rating for recycled pulp content, ro unded to one decimal place. 
y2: calculated rating for the content of pulp certi fied by forest certification system 
and pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and  others, rounded to one 
decimal place. 
y3: calculated rating for proportion of pulp conten t that is used in accordance with 
method of material procurement with sustainable goa ls, rounded to one 
decimal place. 
y4: calculated sum of degree of  bleaching, rounded  to one decimal place. 
y5: calculated sum of weight per unit, rounded to o ne decimal place. 
x1: content ratio of recycled pulp satisfying minim al guarantee (%) 
x2: content ratio of pulp certified by forest certi fication system (%) 
 x2 = (pulp certified by forest certification syste m/ virgin pulp) × (100-x1) 
x3: content ratio of pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others (%) 
 x3 = (pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning and others/ virgin pulp) 
× (100-x1) 
x4: content ratio of pulp that satisfy other sustai nable goals (%) 
 x4 = (pulp that satisfy other sustainable goals / virgin pulp) × (100-x1) 
x5: degree of bleaching (%) 
 Degree of bleaching is to be determined as managem ent standard per each 
product lot at the time of production. Amounts with in 3% of management 
standard are to be allowed. When coloring occurs wi th purposes other than to 
match the lot color (when bleaching is done intenti onally) does not count 
towards additional points. 
x6: weight per unit (g/m2) 
 Weight per unit is to be determined as management standard per each product 
lot at the time of production. Amounts within 5% of  management standard 
are to be allowed. 
7.  As copy paper with low weight per unit has a relati vely high risk of curling, jamming, 
and tearing at the time of copying, it is necessary  to pay attention when procuring 
paper with low weight per unit. 
8.  When using copier paper for the copiers and the pri nters, each procurement 
organization must confirm the printability and prin t quality based on information 
offered by the paper manufacturer making public on the product or website. 
9.  Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest where pulpwood 
producing paper originates from is, for Wood-relate d Entities, to be conducted in 
accordance with “the Act on Promotion of Use and Di stribution of Legally-Harvested 
Wood and Wood Products (Act No.48 of 2016. hereinaf ter “Clean Wood Act”.)” and 14 to be conducted in accordance with the Forest Agenc y’s “Guideline for Verification on 
Legality and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Produc ts (February 15, 2006).” For 
other than Wood-related Entities, to be conducted i n accordance with the Forest 
Agency’s Guideline. 
10.  Confirmation of lumber from thinning to be used for  pulp is to be done in accordance 
with the Forest Agency’s “Guidelines for confirming  thinning wood chips (February 
13, 2009).” 
11.  As paper is produced from a mixture of multiple woo d chips, it is permissible to take 
into consideration the difficulty of securing the a ctual proportion for each product 
during the manufacturing process, and use the credi t method that is in accordance with 
“Operation guidelines for credit method for pulp ce rtified by forest certification 
system, and pulp manufactured with lumber from thin ning (February 13, 2009),” 
stipulated by Ministry of Environment. 
Credit method  refers to a method whereby the appropriate use of p ulp certified by 
forest certification system and pulp manufactured w ith lumber from thinning and 
others are determined for each product, in accordan ce with the amount of usage for 
the two types of pulp in relation to other types of  material used in a given time, without 
consideration for whether or not it is actually use d in individual product. 
 
 
Forms Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  70% recycled pulp content and no more than approxim ately 70% 
bleaching. 
(2)  If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pul pwood used is to be 
in compliance with the regulations concerning fores try in its country 
or geographical area of origin. This does not apply  to virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained  from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forest ry, or lumber with a 
small diameter. 
(3)  If coated, coating on both sides totaling no more t han 12 g/m2. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pul pwood used is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustain able operation. The 
content of pulp certified by forest certification s ystem and pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning and others a re to be as high 
as possible. 
(2)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Coated inkjet 
color printer 
paper Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  At least 70% recycled pulp content. 
(2)  If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pul pwood used is to be in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry  in its country or 
geographical area of origin. This does not apply to  virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained  from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forest ry, or lumber with a 
small diameter. 15  (3)  Coating on both sides totaling no more than 20 g/m2 , coating on one 
side no more than 12 g/m2.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The recycled pulp content is as high as possible.  
(2)  If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pul pwood used is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustain able operation. The 
content of pulp certified by forest certification s ystem and pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning and others i s to be as high as 
possible.  
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
Notes:  
Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest where pulpwood producing 
paper originates from is, for Wood-related Entities , to be conducted in accordance with  
Clean Wood Act and  the Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality and 
Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” For other than Wood-
related Entities, to be conducted in accordance wit h the Forest Agency’s Guideline.  
 
 
 
 Recycled paper and the percentage of recycled paper  pulp content  
The definition of recycled paper and relating terms , and the percentage of recycled pulp 
content defining as Evaluation Criteria in each art icle is as follows.  
 
<The definition of recycled paper and relating term s> 
Recycled paper  Post-consumer recycled paper and pre-consumer recyc led paper.  
 
Post-consumer 
recycled paper  Used paper generated in shops, offices, or homes ut ilized as a raw 
material for papermaking by paper manufacturers (Pa pers shipped as a 
product to marketing channel once and returned agai n are included.).  
Pre-consumer 
recycled paper  Paper generated from converting process after the p apermaking process 
utilized as a raw material for papermaking by paper  manufacturer.  
However, paper used by the paper manufacturers as p aper material 
without being shipped as good prescribed hereinafte r is excluded: the one 
generated from such as a paper converting factory, paper product factory, 
printing factory and binding factory of paper manuf acturer, etc. (include 
those affiliates such as subsidiary companies and r elated companies) and 
the one when converting at the mills or operational  sites that uses paper as 
raw material and also those of generated from in ca se of converting by 
other business operators commissioned by paper manu facturers before 
shipping products (If the ownership of the paper ma terial has transferred 
to the third party from the proper paper manufactur ers, it will be treated as 
recycled paper, except intentionally attempted to h andle mill broke as 
recycled paper.).  
Mill broke  The one that corresponds as follows.  16  • Paper generated during the paper making process, an d directly returned 
to the papermaking process to use as a papermaking material (so called 
Flowing Mill Broke.  Wet broke and Dry broke).  
• Paper kept in at the paper mills or operational sit es and used as raw 
material (so-called Stored Mill Broke ). 
• The one provided for by Proviso  in definition of the above-mentioned as 
pre-consumer recycled paper.  
Paper  
manufacture  Paper industry (142) specified in a middle classification by a 
classification of Japan Standard Industry Classific ation (No.175 of the 
Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications Not ification on March 
23, 2009) , classified Paper manufacturing (1421), Corrugated board 
manufacturing (1422), Machine-made Japanese style p aper (1423) and 
Hand-made Japanese paper  manufacturing (1424)  in the small 
classification.  
Subsidiary 
companies,  
related 
companies,  
and affiliates  The one stipulated in each paragraph of Article 8 o f Regulations 
Concerning Terminology, Forms, and Preparation Meth ods of 
Consolidated Financial Statements （1963 Ministry of Finance 
Ordinance No.59 ）based on the regulations Article 193 of Financial 
Instruments and Exchange Act (Law No.25, 1948).  
 
<The definition of the percentage of recycled paper  pulp content>  
 
The percentage of recycled paper pulp content=  
recycled pulp/(virgin pulp +recycled pulp) ×100(%)  
 
Pulp containing 10% moisture is used to measure the  weight.  
Mill broke shall not be included in the denominator  and numerator, respectively, of the 
calculating formula above.  
 
 
 
 Target Setting Guideline  
Ratio of the amount of goods of a certain type (in kg) that meets the criteria, to the total amount 
of goods of that type to be purchased in the fiscal  year (in kg).  
  17 3. Stationery 
(1)  Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Common to all 
stationery Evaluation Criteria  
With the exception of metals, the primary material meets, of the criteria 
below, (1) for plastic, (2) for wood, and (3) for p aper. In addition, items 
whose secondary material includes wood meets (2). I tems whose secondary 
material include paper (with the exception of virgi n pulp manufactured with 
lumber from thinning, or with recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories)  meet (3)b. This does not appl y to virgin pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin p ulp manufactured by 
using recycled wood pieces obtained from plywood or  lumber factories, 
material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small diameter. 
 
(1)  Recycled plastic makes up no less than 40% in weigh t of the total 
plastic used or plant based plastics whose reductio n effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed used.  If recycled plastic 
consists solely of post-consumer material, the blen ding ratio shall be 
no less than 20 wt.%. 
(2)  Lumber from thinning, recycled wood pieces obtained  from plywood 
or lumber factories, or lumber used as raw material  that is in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry  in its country of 
origin. The pulpwood used is to be in compliance wi th the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. 
(3)  Fulfill the following. 
a.  At least 50% recycled pulp content.  
b.  If virgin pulp is used as the raw material for pape r, the pulpwood 
used is to be in compliance with the regulations co ncerning forestry 
in its country or geographical area of origin. This  does not apply to 
virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning,  or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained  from 
plywood or lumber factories material left over from  forestry, or 
lumber with a small diameter. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The recycled pulp content and recycled plastic cont ent is as high as 
possible. 
(2)  Organic solvent, or paint with as low odor as possi ble is used as 
coating. 
(3)  If the primary material is wood, lumber that is use d as the raw material 
is to be obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustainable 
operation. Lumber from thinning, or recycled wood p ieces obtained 
from plywood or lumber factories are to be excluded . 
(4)  If the primary material is paper, and furthermore, if virgin pulp is used, 
pulpwood that is used as the raw material is to be obtained from a forest 
that is conducting a sustainable operation. This do es not apply to virgin 
pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or vir gin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained  from plywood 18 or lumber factories, material left over from forest ry, or lumber with a 
small diameter. 
(5)  The content of lumber from thinning and pulp with l umber from 
thinning is to be as high as possible. 
(6)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
(7)  If plastic is used for product packaging or stowage , recycled plastic 
shall be used as much as possible, or plant based p lastics whose 
reduction effect of environmental load has been con firmed shall be 
used as much as possible.  
 
[Notes] Evaluation Criteria and Factors for Conside ration listed above 
apply to special procurement items that are include d in stationery. For 
special procurement items with specific evaluation criteria (marked with 
●), evaluation criteria for that item will be applie d in lieu of the evaluation 
criteria listed above. 
Mechanical 
pencils Factors for Consideration  
Its design and operation is such that as low as pos sible an amount of unused 
lead is left over or un-usable each time the user s upplies and replaces the 
lead in the mechanical pencil. 
Mechanical 
pencil lead Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
Ball-point pens  Evaluation Criteria 
●Meet the Evaluation Criteria common to all statione ry and ink cartridges 
are replaceable. 
Marking pens Factors for Consideration  
Consumable parts can be replaced or refilled. 
Pencils  
Ink pads 
 Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic makes 
up no less than 70% by weight of the total plastic used(excluding 
consumable parts). If recycled plastic consists sol ely of post-consumer 
material, the blending ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases, 
the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria common t o all stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Ink/fluid is refillable. 
Vermilion ink 
pads Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic  makes 
up no less than 70% by weight of the total plastic used (excluding 
consumable parts). If recycled plastic consists sol ely of post-consumer 
material, the blending ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases, 
the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria common t o all stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Ink/fluid is refillable 19 Stamp case 
with inkpad Factors for Consideration  
Refillable ink 
Stamp case  
Official seal  
Rubber stamp  
Date stamp  
Rulers  
Trays  
Erasers Evaluation Criteria apply to sleeve or case only 
Staplers(genera 
l-purpose type)  Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic  makes 
up no less than 70% by weight of the total plastic used (except the 
mechanical parts). In other cases, the item satisfi es the Evaluation Criteria 
common to all stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
The items are designed so that any consumable parts  can be replaced and, 
after the item’s useful life, it can be easily dism antled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and re cycling, or the appropriate 
disposal of its separated parts. 
Staplers(other 
than general-
purpose type) Factors for Consideration  
The items are designed so that any consumable parts  can be replaced and, 
after the item’s useful life, it can be easily dism antled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and re cycling, or the appropriate 
disposal of its separated parts.  
Staple 
removers  
Clamp-on clip 
dispensers(mai 
n body) Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic makes 
up no less than 70% by weight of the total plastic used (excluding 
replaceable parts). If recycled plastic consists so lely of post-consumer 
material, the blending ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases, 
the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria common t o all stationery. 
Correction tape  Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic  makes 
up no less than 70% by weight of the total plastic used  (excluding 
replaceable parts). If recycled plastic consists so lely of post-consumer 
material, the blending ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases, 
the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria common t o all stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Consumable parts can be replaced 
Correction 
fluid Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
Masking tape Evaluation Criteria  20 ●Roll is at least 40% recycled pulp content. If virg in pulp is used as the 
raw material, the pulpwood use is to be in complian ce with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber f rom thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obt ained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forest ry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Use of soluble and dispersible adhesive in water or  in the weak alkaline 
water solution, and no resin laminate processing. 
Adhesive tapes 
(cloth tape) Evaluation Criteria 
●Recycled plastic makes up at least 40% of plastic w eight for the roll 
(excluding laminate layer). 
Double sided 
tapes Evaluation Criteria 
●Rolls are at least 40% recycled pulp content. If vi rgin pulp is used as the 
raw material, the pulpwood use is to be in complian ce with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber f rom thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obt ained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forest ry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. 
 
Book binding 
tapes Evaluation Criteria apply to the rolls only. 
Bookstands Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic  makes 
up no less than 70% by weight of the total plastic used (excluding 
replaceable parts). If recycled plastic consists so lely of post-consumer 
material, the blending ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases, 
the item satisfies the Evaluation Criteria common t o all stationery. 
Pen stands  
Clip cases  
Scissors Factors for Consideration  
The items are designed so that it can be easily dis mantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and, r ecycling, or the 
appropriate disposal of its separated parts. 
Magnets (ball)  
Magnets (bar)  
Tape cutters  
Hole punchers 
(manual)  
Malt cases 
(sponge case)  
Paper turning 
cream Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 21 Pencil 
sharpeners 
(manual) Factors for Consideration  
The items are designed so that it can be easily dis mantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and re cycling, or the appropriate 
disposal of its separated parts. 
Office machine 
cleaner (wet 
paper type) Evaluation Criteria 
Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic makes 
up no less than 70% by weight of the total plastic used. If recycled plastic 
consists solely of post-consumer material, the blen ding ratio shall be no less 
than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies th e Evaluation Criteria 
common to all stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Refillable contents 
Office machine 
cleaner (liquid 
type) Evaluation Criteria 
Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Refillable contents 
Dust blowers Evaluation Criteria  
●Does not use Fluorocarbons. In cases where highly c ombustible materials 
are used, adequate instruction for its handling sho uld accompany the 
product. 
Letter cases  
Media cases  Evaluation Criteria 
●Fulfill at least one of below. 
(1)  If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic 
makes up no less than 70% by weight of the total pl astic used. If 
recycled plastic consists solely of post-consumer m aterial, the blending 
ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases , the item satisfies the 
Evaluation Criteria common to all stationery. 
(2)  Cases for CD, DVD and BD should be a slim-type case  that is 5mm or 
less in thickness. 
(3)  Uses plant based plastics whose reduction effect of  environmental load 
has been confirmed. 
Mouse pads  
Office machine 
filters  
(with frame) Evaluation Criteria 
●Fulfill at least one of below. 
(1)  Meets the Evaluation Criteria common to all station ery, or uses plant 
based plastics whose reduction effect of environmen tal load has been 
confirmed. 
(2)  Recycled plastic makes up more than 50% of frame we ight. 
Paper cutters 
with round 
blades Factors for Consideration 
The items are designed so that it can be easily dis mantled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and re cycling, or the appropriate 
disposal of its separated parts. 
Box cutters  22 Cutting mats Factors for Consideration 
Both sides of the mat can be used. 
Desk pads  
OHP film Evaluation Criteria 
●Fulfill at least one of below. 
(1)  Recycled plastic makes up at least 30% of plastic w eight. 
(2)  OHP film for inkjet printers fulfill either the abo ve criteria or use plant 
based plastics whose reduction effect of environmen tal load has been 
confirmed. 
Paint brushes Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic makes 
up no less than 70% by weight of the total plastic used. If recycled plastic 
consists solely of post-consumer material, the blen ding ratio shall be no less 
than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies th e Evaluation Criteria 
common to all stationery.  
Paints Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
India ink Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
Glue (liquid) 
(including 
refills) Evaluation Criteria apply to the container only 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Refillable contents Glue (paste) 
(including 
refills) 
Glue (solid) 
(including 
refills) Evaluation Criteria apply to the container or case only 
Factors for Consideration  
Consumable parts can be replaced Glue (tape) 
Files Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is paper, i t contains at least 70% 
recycled pulp content. If virgin pulp is used as th e raw material, the 
pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regul ations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of ori gin. This does not apply to 
virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning,  or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained  from plywood or 
lumber factories, material left over from forestry,  or lumber with a small 
diameter. Otherwise, the item fulfills at least one  of below: 
(1)  Meets the Evaluation Criteria common to all station ery. 
(2)  Clear holders fulfill either the above criteria or use plant based plastics 
whose reduction effect of environmental load has be en confirmed. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Structure allows separation of cover and closing me chanism to enable reuse 
and recycling of components, as well as their separ ate disposal. 
Binders Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is paper, i t contains at least 70% 
recycled pulp content. If virgin pulp is used as th e raw material, the 
pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regul ations concerning 23 forestry in its country or geographical area of ori gin. This does not apply to 
virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning,  or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained  from plywood or 
lumber factories, material left over from forestry,  or lumber with a small 
diameter. Otherwise, the item meets the Evaluation Criteria common to all 
stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Structure allows separation of cover and closing me chanism to enable reuse 
and recycling of components, as well as their separ ate disposal. 
Filing supplies   
Photo albums 
(including 
refills)  
Binding string Evaluation Criteria 
●Fulfill at least one of below. 
(1)  If the primary material excluding metal is paper, r ecycled pulp makes 
up no less than 70% of it. If virgin pulp is used a s the raw material, the 
pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regul ations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of ori gin. This does not 
apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obt ained from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over fro m forestry, or lumber 
with a small diameter. 
(2)  If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic 
makes up no less than 70% by weight of the total pl astic used. If 
recycled plastic consists solely of post-consumer m aterial, the blending 
ratio shall be no less than 35 wt.%. In other cases , the item satisfies the 
Evaluation Criteria common to all stationery. 
(3)  Otherwise, the item meets the Evaluation Criteria c ommon to all 
stationery. 
 
Card cases  
Business 
envelopes 
(paper product)  Evaluation Criteria  
● No less than 40% recycled pulp content. If virgin pulp is used as the raw 
material, the pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber f rom thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obt ained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forest ry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. 
 
Envelopes with 
windows 
(paper product)  Evaluation Criteria  
●No less than 40% recycled pulp content. If virgin p ulp is used as the raw 
material, the pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber f rom thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obt ained from plywood 24 or lumber factories, material left over from forest ry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. (Criteria regarding recycled pulp content  does not apply to 
windows that are made of paper.) 
●For envelopes with windows made of plastic film pro duct, the film 
contains no less than 40% recycled plastic, or use plant based plastics whose 
reduction effect of environmental load has been con firmed.  
Graph paper Evaluation Criteria  
●No less than 70% recycled pulp content. If virgin p ulp is used as the raw 
material, the pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regulations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. This does 
not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber f rom thinning, or virgin 
pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obt ained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forest ry, or lumber with a small 
diameter. 
●Coated paper: both sides totaling no more than 30 g /m2 or meet the 
Evaluation Criteria for “Coated printing paper”.  
●Non-coated paper: no more than approximately 70% bl eaching. Drafting paper 
Notebooks 
Reinforcement 
labels for hole-
punch pages  Factors for Consideration  
Use of soluble and dispersible adhesive in water or  in the weak alkaline 
water solution, and no resin laminate processing.  
Adhesive 
labels  Evaluation Criteria  
●If the primary material excluding metal is paper, r ecycled pulp makes up 
no less than 70%  (excluding the adhesive portion) of it. If virgin pulp is 
used as the raw material, the pulpwood used is to b e in compliance with the 
regulations concerning forestry in its country or g eographical area of origin. 
This does not apply to virgin pulp manufactured wit h lumber from thinning, 
or virgin pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over fro m forestry, or lumber 
with a small diameter. Otherwise, the item meets th e Evaluation Criteria 
common to all stationery. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Use of soluble and dispersible adhesive in water or  in the weak alkaline 
water solution, and no resin laminate processing. Indexes  
Self-stick 
removable 
notes 
Self-stick 
removable film  Factors for Consideration 
Use of soluble and dispersible adhesive in water or  in the weak alkaline 
water solution. 
Blackboard 
erasers  
Whiteboard 
erasers  
Picture frames  
Waste bins Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic makes 
up no less than 70% by weight of the total plastic used. If recycled plastic 
consists solely of post-consumer material, the blen ding ratio shall be no less 25 than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies th e Evaluation Criteria 
common to all stationery. 
Recycling 
boxes Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic  makes 
up no less than 70% by weight of the total plastic used. If recycled plastic 
consists solely of post-consumer material, the blen ding ratio shall be no less 
than 35 wt.%. In other cases, the item satisfies th e Evaluation Criteria 
common to all stationery. 
Can and bottle 
crushers 
(manual)  
Name plates 
(desktop)  
Name tags (pin 
or string)  
Key hooks  
Chalks Evaluation Criteria 
●Recycled material makes up no less than 10%.  
Line marking 
powder Evaluation Criteria 
●Recycled material makes up no less than 70%.  
Packing straps Evaluation Criteria 
●If the primary material excluding metal is paper, r ecycled paper makes 
up 100% of the entire item. 
●If the primary material excluding metal is plastic,  recycled plastic that 
utilizes post-consumer material makes up no less th an 25%. Recycled 
products from pet bottles are excluded.  
Notes:  
1.  Stapler (general-purpose type) under consideration in the Evaluation Criteria in t his 
section denotes handy-type one that use the No.10 s taples by JIS S 6036-2. Stapler 
(other than general-purpose type)  denotes other than  Stapler (general-purpose type) 
and includes those that do not use staples.  
2.  File includes types for paper with holes (flat file, pip e-style file, binder, fastener, cap-
style file for computer printouts) and types for pa per without holes (folder, holder, box 
file, document file, transparent pocket file, scrap  book, z-type file, clip file, letterhead 
holder, drawing file, case file, etc.). 
3.  Binder  includes MP binder, ring binder, etc. 
4.  Filing supplies include spine labels, file pockets, and dividers to  be used with files and 
binders. 
5.  The definition of Recycled paper  and The percentage of recycled paper pulp content   
is according to “2. Paper (2) Recycled paper and th e percentage of recycled paper pulp 
content” in this Basic Policy. 
6.  Recycled plastic  denotes  part or all of plastic once used as a part of a use ful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.) 
7.  Post-consumer material  denotes material or product that has been disposed of after 
being used as a product. 26 8.  Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed  denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative,  objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle.  
9.  Evaluation Criteria for stationery has been determi ned for products whose primary 
material other than metal is plastic, wood, or pape r. Under consideration in the 
evaluation criteria, it does not include products w hose primary material is metal and 
does not use plastic, wood, or paper. 
10.  Consumable part  denotes parts that wear out with use. For replaceab le consumable 
parts (i.e. cartridges), the entire replaceable por tion is to be excluded from the total 
product weight. For non-replaceable consumable part s (one-way), only the appropriate 
portion (i.e. ink) it to be excluded from denominat or and numerator for calculating the 
compounding ratio of recycled material of the produ ct.  
11.  Adhesive part  denotes the surface of labels, etc. that are treate d with a pressure sensitive 
adhesive. The adhesive and the backing paper or mat erial is to be excluded from 
denominator and numerator for calculating the compo unding ratio of recycled material 
of the product.  
12.  Fluorocarbons  under consideration in the Evaluation Criteria for  Dust blowers are 
defined as the Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 2, Paragraph 1 of the Act for 
Rationalized Use and Proper Management of Fluorocar bons, (Act No. 64 of 2001). 
Available materials include Carbon Dioxide, Dimethy l Ether and Hydro-Fluoro-Olefin 
(HFO-1234 ze ).  
13.  Evaluation Criteria for  Dust blowers  apply to the designated products prescribed in 
Article 2, Paragraph 2 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of 
Fluorocarbons (Act No. 64 of 2001).  
14.  Media cases  under consideration denotes dose for use with CD, DVD and BD. 
15.  Evaluation criteria of coated printing paper  referred to ”2. Paper Coated printing paper”  
in this basic policy. 
16.  Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest where pulpwood 
producing wood and paper originates from is to be c onducted in accordance with the 
Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Lega lity and Sustainability of Wood and 
Wood Products (February 15, 2006) .”  In addition, certification system of forest, timber , 
etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized for confir mation of legality. 
Regarding raw timber where the contract between the  lumber company and the 
processing and marketing companies has been made pr ior to April 1, 2006, a supplier 
who owns raw materials or products etc. as of April  1, 2006, specifies the raw materials 
or products etc., and reports them in advance to th e Forestry Agency once a year, and is 
a specified raw material or product etc. If it is s tated in the certificate, the proof that it 
is a legal wood prescribed in the above guidelines is unnecessary. 
The period of time for which this exceptional claus e is applicable will be determined in 
consideration with market trend. 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of goods of a certain type that  meets the criteria, to the total number of 
goods of that type to be purchased in the fiscal ye ar.  27 4. Office Furniture, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Chairs 
 
Desks 
 
Shelves 
 
Storage furniture 
(without shelf) 
 
Low partitions 
 
Coat hangers 
 
Umbrella stands 
 
Bulletin boards 
 
Blackboards 
 
Whiteboards Evaluation Criteria  
Shelves and storage furniture comprised primarily o f metal should 
fulfill requirements outlined in (1) and (5). For a ll other products, 
one of the following should be met. Products whose primary 
material aside from metal is plastic, wood and pape r should fulfill 
the requirements outlined in (2) and (5), (3) and ( 5), and (4) and (5), 
respectively. For products that include wood as a n on-primary 
material should fulfill (3) a, b and c ; products that include paper as 
a non-primary material should fulfill (4) b. 
 
(1)  Products included in Table 1 fulfill both a. b. and  c. listed below. 
Other products fulfill both b. and c. listed below.  
a.  Does not exceed criteria listed in Table 1 for each  category.  
b.  Ratio of dismantle-possibility into single material  is 90% or 
higher. 
c.  Takes into account environmentally conscious design  noted 
in Table 2 for each evaluation criteria. 
(2)  Fulfill one of the following. 
a.  Recycled plastic makes up at least 10% by weight. 
b.  Plant based plastics whose reduction effect of envi ronmental 
load has been confirmed makes up at least 25% by we ight of 
total plastic used and bio-based synthetic polymer rate 
accounts for no less than 10%. 
(3)  Fulfill the following d, and a, b or c according to  raw materials 
used: 
a.  Lumber from thinning, recycled wood pieces obtained  from 
plywood or lumber factories 
b.  Lumber from thinning is in compliance with the regu lations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of 
origin. 
c.  In the cases other than above a. used as the raw ma terial is in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry  in its 
country or geographical area of origin.  
d.  Discharge rate of formaldehyde from materials is no  greater 
than 0.02 mg/m²h, or the equivalent. 
(4)  Fulfill the following: 
a.  At least 50% recycled pulp content.  
b.  If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pul pwood used 
is to be in compliance with the regulations concern ing 
forestry in its country or geographical area of ori gin.  
c.  Above b. does not apply recycled wood pieces obtain ed from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over fro m forestry 
and lumber with a small diameter. 
(5)  Supply of the service parts and spare parts shall b e continued 
for 5 years or more after the termination of produc t 
manufacturing. 28  
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Designed for long-term use, taking into account mai ntenance, 
repair and the  replaceability of parts that wear. Designed to 
enable component reuse and easy disassembly for ref urbishment 
and recycling, or the appropriate disposal of the s eparated parts 
after the item’s useful life. Special care taken in  the design of 
item’s metal components to enable long-term use, co nservation 
of resources, and reuse of materials, based on the evaluation 
criteria of the Act on the Promotion of Effective U tilization of 
Resources (Law No. 48 of 1991). 
(2)  Organic solvent, or paint with as low odor as possi ble such as 
powder paint and water-based paint is used as coati ng. 
(3)  A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used  products, 
and a system for the proper disposal of components which 
cannot be reused or recycled is considered. 
(4)  If wood is one of the materials used in the product , lumber that 
is used as the raw material is to be obtained from a forest that is 
conducting a sustainable operation. This does not a pply to virgin 
pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or vir gin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained  from 
plywood or lumber factories. 
(5)  If paper is one of the material used in the product , and 
furthermore, if virgin pulp is used, pulpwood that is used as the 
raw material is to be obtained from a forest that i s conducting a 
sustainable operation. This does not apply to virgi n pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning, or virgin p ulp 
manufactured by lumber using recycled wood pieces o btained 
from plywood or lumber factories. 
(6)  Packaging and stowage is made as simple as possible , and takes 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environm ental 
impact upon disposal.  
(7)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, 
etc. is considered. 
Notes: 
1.  White board  under consideration in the evaluation criteria in t his section  includes all 
types of writing boards excluding chalk boards. 
2.  Comprised primarily of metal  indicates that metal used for the product comprises  95% 
or more of the total product by weight. 
3.  Ratio of dismantle-possibility into single material  in Evaluation Criteria (1) will be 
determined using the following formula.   
Ratio of dismantle-possibility into single material  = number of parts that can be 
dismantled into a single material / number of parts  in the product × 100 
Parts to which one of the following is applicable w ill not be included when 
calculating ratio of dismantle-possibility into sin gle material. 
(1)  Parts used to prevent overturning due to theft, ear thquakes or as a part of the 
operating process (including locks, overturning pre vention parts, drawer guide-
rails, etc.). 29 (2)  Parts that maintain sections that project from the main product (hinges, drawer 
guide-rails, etc.). 
(3)  Accessory bolts used to secure or connect a part th at meet the Japan Industrial 
Standards (hereinafter referred to as JIS) or its e quivalent.  
4.  The definition of Recycled paper  and The percentage of recycled paper pulp content   
is according to “2. Paper (2) Recycled paper and th e percentage of recycled paper pulp 
content” in this Basic Policy. 
5.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.) 
6.  Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed  denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative,  objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
7.   Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate  denotes the plant based material rate of 
weight, which is included in plant based plastics t hat account for weight of all plastic. 
8.   Discharge rate of no greater than 0.02 mg/m²h, or the equivalent, denotes the following. 
Office furniture-Desks and Tables that fills standa rd of JIS S 1031, Office furniture-
Chairs that fills standard of JIS S1032, Shelves an d Racks that fills standard of JIS S 
1039 and Office furniture-Storage cabinets that fil ls standard of JIS S 1033 meet its 
criteria. 
a.  Wood material with a corresponding JIS or Japan Agr icultural Standards, whose 
criteria for formaldehyde discharge is regulated, m eets the criteria for F ☆☆☆ . 
b.  Wood material that do not qualify for the standards  outlined in item (a.) above 
satisfies the below numbers when evaluated accordin g to the method determined 
by JIS A1460. 
Average Maximum 
0.5 mg/L 0.7 mg/L 
9.   Evaluation criteria 3b applies to items subject to  Clean Wood Act. 
10.   As for evaluation criteria 4c, in cases other than  items subject to the Clean Wood Act, 
does not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lum ber from thinning, virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces such as obtained from plywood or lumber 
factories, material left over from forestry or lumb er with a small diameter. 
11.  Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest where pulpwood 
producing wood and paper originates from is as foll ows. 
a.  In the case of items subject to Clean Wood Act, Woo d-related Entities  comply with 
Clean Wood Act, and conducted in accordance with th e Forest Agency’s 
“Guideline for Verification on Legality and Sustain ability of Wood and Wood 
Products (February 15, 2006) .” 
b.  In the case of items other than subject to Clean Wo od Act, to be conducted in 
accordance with the above Guideline. In addition, c ertification system of forest, 
timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized fo r confirmation of legality. 
Regarding raw timber where the contract between the  lumber company and the 
processing and marketing companies has been made pr ior to April 1, 2006, a supplier 
who owns raw materials or products etc. as of April  1, 2006, specifies the raw materials 
or products etc., and reports them in advance to th e Forestry Agency once a year, and 30 is a specified raw material or product etc. If it i s stated in the certificate, the proof that 
it is a legal wood prescribed in the above guidelin es is unnecessary. 
The period of time for which this exceptional claus e is applicable will be determined 
in consideration with market trend. 
 
 
 
Table 1: Function weight criteria for bookcase shel ves and office storage furniture shelves 
comprised primarily of metal 
Categories Criteria 
Shelves of storage furniture (excluding those for 
special purposes such as medical chart storage) 0.1 
Shelves of bookcases, lightweight shelving systems,  
and mid-weight shelving systems 0.1 
Notes:  
The formula for calculating the function weight cri teria to use for shelves is as follows: 
Function weight criteria = shelf weight (kg) / shel f resistance load (kg) 
 
 
Table 2: Items for environmentally conscious design  concerning bookcases and storage 
furniture comprised primarily of metal 
Purpose Evaluation items Evaluation criteria 
Design with 
consideration for 
reduction Reduction of raw material 
use Use of raw material is reduced. 
Reduction of weight, use of 
light-weight material Reduction of weight, use of light-
weight material is taken into 
consideration for parts and material. 
Design with 
consideration for 
recycling Use of recyclable material Material that can be rec ycled is used. 
Consideration for the ease of 
separating and dismantling 
reusable parts Assembly takes into consideration the 
ease of separating and dismantling 
reusable parts. 
All other parts can be easily taken 
apart. 
Use as recycled resource Material used in the synthetic resin 
portion is listed. 
Design takes into consideration 
separation of material. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of goods of a certain type that  meet the criteria, to the total number of 
goods of that type to be purchased in the fiscal ye ar. 
  31 5. Imaging Equipment, etc. 
5-1.Copiers, etc. 
(1)  Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Copiers 
 
Multifunction 
devices  
 
Upgradeable 
digital copiers Evaluation Criteria 
<Common Criteria> 
(1)  The papers which meet the criteria for specified pr ocurement goods 
are acceptable if the papers belong to the specifie d procurement items.  
(2)  Fulfills one of the following. 
a.  Copiers, multifunction devices, and upgradeable dig ital copiers   
(hereinafter referred to as copiers, etc.) with con sideration for 
reuse. 
b.  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the 
standard content rate. 
(3)  At least one of the parts more than 25g is made of recycled plastic 
parts or reused plastic parts. 
(4)  Systems for the collection of used device, recovery  of parts and/or 
material recycling are put in place. In addition, f or parts that cannot be 
reused or recycled from the collected equipment, af ter being reduced 
etc., they are properly processed and not simply la ndfilled. 
  
<Individual Criteria>  
1.  Copiers and Upgradeable digital copiers (including Copiers and 
Upgradeable digital copiers with consideration for reuse.) 
a.  Monochrome copiers and upgradeable digital monochro me 
copiers (excluding large format devices) meet the s tandards of the 
applicable category in Table 1-1. 
b.  Color copiers and upgradeable digital color copiers  (excluding 
large format devices) meet the standards of the app licable category 
in Table 1-2. 
c.  Large format copiers or upgradeable large format di gital copiers 
meet the standards of the applicable category in Ta ble 1-3. 
2.  Multifunction devices (excluding inkjet type.) 
a.  Monochrome multifunction devices (excluding large f ormat 
devices) meet standards of the applicable category in Tables 2-1, 3 
and 4.  
b.  Color multifunction devices (excluding large format  devices)  meet 
standards of the applicable category in Table 2-2, Tables 3 and 4. 
c.  Large format multifunction devices  meet standards of the 
applicable category in Table 5. 
d.  Monochrome multifunction devices and professional 
monochrome multifunction devices with consideration  for reuse 
(excluding large format devices.) meet standards of  the applicable 
category shown in Table 6-1. 
e.  Color multifunction devices and professional color multifunction 
devices (excluding large format devices.) meet stan dards of the 
applicable category shown in Table 6-2. 32 f.  Large format multifunction devices with considerati on for reuse, 
meet standards of the applicable category shown in Table 1-3. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Batteries do not include cadmium alloys, zinc alloy s, or mercury 
alloys. This requirement does not have to be met, i f batteries including 
these substances are collected, reused, or recycled  without failure, 
and/or properly processed. 
(2)  Design takes into consideration the reuse of compon ents, based on the 
evaluation criteria of the Act on the Promotion of Effective Utilization 
of Resources. Especially, if the components include  rare metals, 
reusing them should be taken into consideration whe n designing the 
products. 
(3)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment and  reuse. 
(4)  Paper-saver features are equipped. 
(5)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
(6)   A system for collection and reuse/recycling of pac kaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Multifunction Devices  denote products that have one or more function of print, 
scan, or fax in addition to copier function. 
2.  Professional Multifunction Devices  means devices that satisfy all of the 
following items (a) to (f), and among the following  items related to functions (g) 
to (m), meet five or more for color devices, four o r more for monochrome device. 
a.  Supports paper with basis weight greater than or eq ual to 141g m2 
b.  A3 - capable 
c.  If product is monochrome, monochrome product speed equal to or 
greater than 86 imp (for the product speed, see Not e 1 in Table 1-1 below) 
d.  If product is color, color product speed equal to o r greater than 50 ipm 
e.  Print resolution of 600 x 600 dots per inch or grea ter for each color 
f.  Weight of the base model greater than 180kg 
g.  Paper capacity equal to or greater than 8,000 sheet s 
h.  Digital front end 
i.  Hole punch 
j.  Perfect binding or ring binding (or similar, such a s tape or wire binding, 
but not staple saddle stitching 
k.  Dynamic random access memory(DRAM)equal to or great er than 
1,024MB 
l.  Third party color certification 
m.  Compatible with coated paper 
3.Copiers, etc. with consideration for reuse  denotes those machines created through 
a system for which reuse is accounted for during ma nufacture, and refers to 
Reproducing machines and  Partial reuse type machine .  
Reproducing machines  denotes products that are produced by disassembling , 
cleaning, and repairing used products, replacing th ose parts that are not of the 33 same quality as a new one or do not meet a set crit eria, and assembling them on 
an exclusive line.  
Partial reuse type machine  denotes products that are produced by disassemblin g, 
cleaning, and repairing used products, and assembli ng those parts that can be 
guaranteed the same quality as a new one on an asse mbly line that is the 
equivalent of a new product. 
4.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, 
polybrominated biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl  ether. 
5.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances  denotes the standard 
rate provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presen ce of the specific chemical 
substances for electrical and electronic equipment)  Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified 
chemical substances, chemical element symbol, subst ances applicable for 
calculation, and standard content rate). Items for which content rate exceeding the 
standard is allowed are to be determined in accorda nce with Appendix B of the above 
JIS. Handling of other accessories is to be determi ned in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
6.  Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful 
product that has been discarded, remnants discarded  during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles  (This excludes, however, plastic 
that has been recycled in the process of manufactur ing the product.).  
7.  For evaluation criteria <common items> (3) , apply to devices that fall under the 
Specified Reuse Industry of the Resource Effective Utilization Promotion Act. 
8.  Material recycling  denotes recycling materials into materials. It doe s not include 
energy recovery, degradation to oil, gasification, use as feedstock of reduction 
reaction in the blast-furnace and of coke furnace. 
9.  Large format devices include those designed for A2 size media and larger , including 
those designed to accommodate continuous-form media  at a width of 406 
millimeters (mm) or wider. 
10.  Rare metals  refers to the 31 types of metals (the seventeen ra re earth elements are 
considered as one metal type) specified at the Spec ial Meeting for the 
Comprehensive Assessment of Rare Metals at the Mini ng Panel of the Ministry of 
Economy, Trade and Industry. 
11.  Copiers, etc. with consideration for reuse may not be guaranteed to have a stable 
product supply, due to the fact that their producti on involves recovery of used 
material, which is supplied to its production only after a strict quality inspection. For 
the purposes of procurement in the case where each organization requires bidding 
conditions other than the fact that it is a specifi ed procurement, it is necessary to 
make a note of (2) a and b in the Common Criteria. 
12.  For the procurement of copiers, etc. that involves consumables that is comprised of 
an independent toner container, and when it fulfill s Evaluation Criteria (5) of “toner 
cartridge” titled “Chemical safety of toner is conf irmed,” they will be handled in the 
same way as specified procurements. 
13.  As for Evaluation Criteria <Common Criteria> (1), a s a precondition, papers are 
required not to have negative effect on the machine , and are able to be used for the 
print quality without trouble. 
14.  Due to the considerable amount of time necessary un til the recovery of used products, 
individual criteria for copiers, etc. with consider ation for reuse will be considered 
specified procurements if they fulfill appropriate criteria outlined in Tables 6-1 to 6-34 6.  This is until products that fulfill criteria wi ll be supplied in the market outlines in 
Tables 1-1, 1-2. The time period will be determined  based on the observation of the 
market trends. 
 
 
 
 
 
Table 1-1: Standards for Energy Consumption for Mon ochrome copiers and 
Upgradeable digital monochrome copiers (including C opiers and Upgradeable digital 
copiers with consideration for reuse, excluding lar ge format devices) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm ≤5 ≤0.3 
Not applied 5 < ipm ≤20 ≤ 0.04 × ipm+0.1 
20 < ipm ≤24 ≤ 0.06 × ipm-0.3 24 < ipm ≤30 Integral to the base product 
or optional accessory 30 < ipm <37 ≤ 0.11 × ipm-1.8 37 ≤ ipm ≤40 
Integral to the base product  40 < ipm ≤65 ≤ 0.16 × ipm-3.8 
65 < ipm ≤90 ≤ 0.2 × ipm-6.4 
90 < ipm ≤ 0.55 × ipm-37.9 
Notes: 
1.  Product speed  is the maximum, nominal, and one side print speed when the black and 
white image is generated, and the ipm speed calcula ted in all cases is rounded off to 
the nearest integer. 1ipm (number of images for eac h amount) is equal to single A4 
size or 8.5” x 11” sheet printed on one side. If th e maximum claimed speeds differ 
when producing images on A4 size or 8.5” x 11” pape r the higher of two shall be used. 
Same applies for all Tables except Table7 below. 
2.  Products for A3-capable (Standard format products w ith a paper path width equal to 
or greater than 275 mm.) are a 0.3kWh/wk allowance standards of the applicable 
category in the Tables. Same applies for Tables 1-2 , 6-1, and 6-2 below. 
3.  Measuring method for standard energy consumption sh all be measured in accordance 
with “International ENERGY STAR Program Requirement s, Product Specification for 
Imaging Equipment, Eligibility Criteria Version 2.0 .” Same applies for Tables 1-2, 6-
1 and 6-2 below. 
 
 
Table 1-2: Standards for Energy Consumption for Col or copiers and Upgradeable 
digital color copiers (including Copiers and Upgrad eable digital copiers with 
consideration for reuse, excluding large format dev ices) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm ≤ 10 ≤ 1.3 
Not applied 10 < ipm ≤ 15 ≤ 0.06×ipm+0.7 
15 < ipm ≤ 19 ≤ 0.15×ipm-0.65 35 19 < ipm ≤ 30 Integral to the base 
product or optional 
accessory  30 < ipm <35 ≤ 0.2×ipm-2.15 
35 ≤ ipm ≤75 Integral to the base 
product  75 < ipm ≤ 0.7×ipm-39.65 
 
 
 
Table 1-3 : Standards for Time required to switch i nto sleep, Energy consumption of 
base marking engine at sleep and Energy consumption  at standby for Large format 
copiers and Large format upgradeable digital copier s (including Large format copiers 
and Large format multifunction devices with conside ration for reuse.) 
Product speed 
(ipm) Time required to 
switch into sleep  Energy consumption 
of base marking 
engine at sleep Energy consumption at 
standby 
ipm ≤30 30 minutes ≤ 8.2W ≤ 0.5W 30 < ipm 60 minutes 
Notes:  
1.  Sleep  denotes the energy saving mode into which the machi ne will switch after a set 
time of inactivity without turning off the power. S ame applies for Tables 3, 4, 5 and 7 
below. 
2.  The standard of the power consumption at sleep is c alculated, adding the sleep mode 
power allowances for functional adders listed in Ta ble 7 to the energy consumption of 
base marking engine at sleep in this table, to judg e to meet the standard. 
3.  Measuring method for energy consumption shall be me asured in accordance with 
“International ENERGY STAR Program Product Requirem ents, Product Specification 
for Imaging Equipment, Eligibility Criteria Version  2.0.” 
 
 
 
  36 Table2-1 : Standard energy consumption for Monochro me multifunction devices 
 (excluding large format devices) 
Product speed(ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm ≤20 ≤0.263 Not applied  20<ipm ≤24 ≤0.018×ipm-0.115 24<ipm ≤40 Integral to the base 
product and print function 
is initial setting 40<ipm ≤60 ≤0.016×ipm-0.033 
60<ipm ≤80 ≤0.037×ipm-1.314 
80<ipm ≤0.086×ipm-5.283 
Notes: 
1.  For products that can handle A3 size paper, 0.05kWh  is added to the standard for each 
category. Same applies for Table 2-2. 
2.  For products set with Wi-Fi at the time of shipment , the standard for each category 
will be added 0.1 kWh to the standard. Same applies  for Table 2-2. 
3.  The method for measuring the standard power consump tion is based on “International 
Energy Star Program Requirements Product Standards for Imaging Equipment Test 
Methods for Judging Energy Use of Imaging Equipment ” (revised in December 
2018). Same applies for Table 2-2. 
 
 
 
Table2-2 : Standard energy consumption for Color mu ltifunction devices (excluding 
Large format devices.)  
Product speed(ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm ≤19 ≤0.254 Not applied 
ipm=20 
Integral to the base 
product and print function 
is initial setting 20<ipm ≤40 ≤0.024×ipm-0.250 
40<ipm ≤60 ≤0.011×ipm+0.283 
60<ipm ≤80 ≤0.055×ipm-2.401 
80<ipm ≤0.118×ipm-7.504 
 
  37 Table 3 : Standard for recovery time 
Product 
speed 
(ipm) Short default  Long default 
Time to 
sleep 
Ts(minute) Recovery time 
(second) Time to 
sleep(minute)  Recovery time 
(second) 
0<ipm ≤5 0<Ts ≤5 
≤min(0.42×ipm+5,30)  5<Ts 
≤min(0.51×ipm+15,60)  5<ipm ≤10 0<Ts ≤10 10<Ts ≤15 
10<ipm ≤20 0<Ts ≤10 10<Ts ≤20 
20<ipm ≤30 0<Ts ≤10 10<Ts ≤30 
30<ipm ≤40 0<Ts ≤10 10<Ts ≤45 
40<ipm 0<Ts ≤15 15<Ts ≤45 
1.   Recovery time(second) ＝Tact1 －Tact0  
 
Table4: Standards for Time to sleep for Monochrome multifunction devices or Color 
multifunction devices 
Product speed 
（ipm ） Time required to switch into 
sleep 
Initial setting  User 
adjustment  
ipm ≤10 ≤15min 
≤60min 10<ipm ≤20 ≤30min 
20<ipm ≤30 ≤45min 30<ipm ≤120min 
Note: 
User adjustment is the maximum sleep transition tim e that can be adjusted by the user. Same 
applies for Table 5. 
Table5 : Standard for Time required to switch into sleep, Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep and Energy Consumption at o ff mode 
Product speed 
（ipm ） Time required to 
switch into sleep  Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep Energy 
consumption 
at off mode  
 Initial 
setting  User 
adjustment  Inkjet Other marking 
technology 
ipm ≤10 ≤15min  
≤60min ≤5.4W ≤8.7W ≤0.3W 10<ipm ≤20 ≤30min  
20<ipm ≤30 ≤45min  30<ipm ≤120min 
Notes: 
1.  Other marking technology refers to a marking techno logy other than the impact 
method and the inkjet method. 
2.  The standard of the sleep mode power consumption is  to use the value calculated by 
adding the sleep mode power consumption allowable v alue for the additional 
functions in Table 7 to the sleep mode power consum ption of the basic marking 
engine in this table for the conformity determinati on. However, among the types of 38 additional functions in Table 7, the addition of th e sleep mode power consumption 
allowances are not applied to the scanner and the i nternal disk drive. 
3.  The method of measuring power consumption is based on “International ENERGY 
STAR PROGRAM Requirements Product Standards for Ima ging Equipment Test 
Methods for Judging Energy Use of Imaging Equipment ” (revised in December 
2018). 
 
 
 
Table 6-1 : Standards for energy consumption for Mo nochrome multifunction devices 
and Color multifunction devices for professional us e for copiers with consideration for 
reuse (excluding large format devices) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm ≤5 ≤0.4 Not applied 5 < ipm ≤24 ≤0.07×ipm+0.05 24 < ipm ≤30 Integral to the base 
product or optional 
accessory 30 < ipm <37 ≤0.11×ipm-1.15 
37 ≤ ipm ≤50 Integral to the base  
Product 50 < ipm ≤80 ≤0.25×ipm-8.15 
80 < ipm ≤0.6×ipm-36.15 
 
 
 
  39 Table 6-2: Standards for energy consumption for Col or multifunction devices for 
professional use for copiers with consideration for  reuse (excluding large format devices) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm ≤ 10 ≤1.5 
Not applied 10 <ipm ≤15 ≤0.1×ipm+0.5 
15 <ipm ≤19 ≤0.13×ipm+0.05 19 <ipm ≤30 Integral to the base 
product or optional 
accessory 30 <ipm <35 ≤0.2×ipm-2.05 
35 ≤ipm ≤70 Integral to the base 
product 70 <ipm ≤80 ≤0.7×ipm-37.05 
80 < ipm ≤0.75×ipm-41.05 
 
 
 
Table 7: Sleep mode power allowances for added func tionality 
Adder 
Type Connection 
Type Max. Data 
Rate, r 
(Mbit/ 
second) Details Functional 
Adder 
Allowance 
(watts) 
Interface  Wired r < 20 Includes: USB 1.x, IEEE 
488, IEEE 1284/Parallel/ 
Centronics, RS232  0.2 
20 ≤ r < 500  Includes: USB 2.x, IEEE 
1394/ FireWire/i.LINK, 
100Mb Ethernet  0.4 
r ≥ 500 Includes: USB 3.x,1G 
Ethernet  0.5 
Any Includes: Flash memory-
card/smartcard readers, 
camera interfaces, 
PictBridge  0.2 
Fax Modem Any Applies to MFDs only. 0.2 
Wireless, 
Radio-
frequency 
(RF) Any Includes: Bluetooth, 802.11  2.0 
Wireless, 
Infrared (IR)  Any Includes: IrDA.  0.1 
Cordless 
Handset N/A N/A Capability of the Imaging 
Equipment to communicate 
with a cordless handset. 
Applied only once, 
regardless of the number of 
cordless handsets the 
product is designed to 0.8 40 handle. Does not address the 
power requirements of the 
cordless handset itself. 
Memory  N/A  N/A  Applies to the internal 
capacity available in the 
Imaging Equipment for 
storing data. Applies to all 
volumes of internal memory 
and should be scaled 
accordingly for RAM. This 
adder does not apply to hard 
disk or flash memory.  0.5/GB  
Scanner N/A  N/A  Applies to MFDs and 
Copiers only.  Includes: 
Cold Cathode Fluorescent 
Lamp (CCFL) or a 
technology other than 
CCFL, such as Light-
Emitting Diode (LED), 
Halogen, Hot-Cathode 
Fluorescent Tube (HCFT), 
Xenon, or Tubular 
Fluorescent (TL) 
technologies. (Applied only 
once, regardless of the lamp 
size or the number of 
lamps/bulbs employed.)  0.5  
Power 
Supply N/A  N/A  Applies to both internal and 
external power supplies of 
Mailing Machines and 
Standard Format products 
using Inkjet and Impact 
marking technologies with 
nameplate output power 
(POUT) greater than 10 
watts.  0.02 x ( POUT 
– 10.0) 
Touch 
Panel 
Display N/A  N/A  Applies to both 
monochrome and color 
touch panel displays.  0.2  
Internal 
Disk 
Drives N/A  N/A  Includes any high-capacity 
storage product, including 
hard-disk and solid-state 
drives. Does not cover 
interfaces to external drives.  0.15  
Notes: Among adder type, the number of allowances claimed for interface functional adders, 
including any fax capability is 2 or less including  fax machines and the number of 
allowances of any non-interface functional adders i s unlimited.  
 41  
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of copiers (including multifunc tional devices and upgradeable digital 
copiers) that meets the criteria, to the total numb er of copiers to be purchased (including 
lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  42 5-2. Printers, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Printers 
 
Multifunction 
Printers Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Printers and Multifunction Printers (excluding larg e format 
devices) meet the standards of applicable category below. 
a.  Monochrome printers (including high performance ink jet 
and excluding inkjet and impact printers) meet the 
standards of applicable category in Tables 1-1, 2, and 3-1. 
Monochrome multifunction printers meet the standard s of 
applicable category in Tables 1-2, 2 and 3-2. 
b.  Color printers (including high performance inkjet a nd 
excluding inkjet and impact printers) meet the stan dards 
of applicable category in Tables 2, 3-1 and 4-1. Co lor 
multifunction color printers meet the standards of 
applicable category in Tables 2, 3-2 and 4-2. 
c.  Inkjet and Impact printers meet the standards of ap plicable 
category in Table 5-1.  Inkjet multifunction printers meet 
the standards of applicable category in Table 5-2. 
d.  Monochrome printers for professional use meet the 
standards applicable category in Table 6-1. Multifu nction 
monochrome printers for professional use meet the 
standards applicable category in Table 6-2. 
e.  Color printers for professional use meet the standa rds 
applicable category in Table 6-3. Multifunction col or 
printers for professional use meet the standards ap plicable 
category in Table 6-4. 
(2)  Large format printers meet the standards of applica ble 
category in Table 7-1, large format multifunction p rinters 
meet the standards of applicable category in Table 7-2. 
(3)  The papers which meet the criteria for specified pr ocurement 
goods are acceptable if the papers belong to the sp ecified 
procurement items. 
(4)  Amounts of specified chemical substances do not exc eed the 
standard content rate. 
(5)  At least one of the parts made of recycled plastic parts or 
reused plastic parts are used. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  Batteries do not include cadmium alloys, lead alloy s, or 
mercury alloys. This is not required, however, if b atteries 
including these substances are collected, reused, o r recycled 
without failure, and/or properly processed. 
(2)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, re use and 
recycling. 
(3)  The item uses a large amount of recycled components  that 
have already been used. 
(4)  Has paper-saver feature. 43 (5)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environm ental 
impact upon disposal. 
(6)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, 
etc. is considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Multifunction Printers  mean products that have one or more function of co pier, scan, 
or fax in addition to print function. 
2.  Printers for professional use and  Multifunction Printers for professional use  means 
devices that satisfy all of the following items (a)  to (f), and among the following items 
related to functions (g) to (m), meet five or more for color devices, four or more for 
monochrome device. 
a.  Supports paper with basis weight greater than or eq ual to 141g m2. 
b.  A3 - capable 
c.  If product is monochrome, monochrome product speed equal to or greater than 
86 imp (for the product speed, see Note 1 in Table 1-1 below) 
d.  If product is color, color product speed equal to o r greater than 50 ipm 
e.  Print resolution of 600 x 600 dots per inch or grea ter for each color 
f.  Weight of the base model greater than 180kg 
g.  Paper capacity equal to or greater than 8,000 sheet s 
h.  Digital front end 
i.  Hole punch 
j.  Perfect binding or ring binding (or similar, such a s tape or wire binding, but 
not staple saddle stitching 
k.  Dynamic random access memory(DRAM)equal to or great er than 1,024MB 
l.  Third party color certification 
m.  For coated paper 
3.  Large format devices include those designed for A2 size media and larger , including 
those designed to accommodate continuous-form media  at a width of 406 millimeters 
(mm) or wider. 
4.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
5.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. 
6.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
7.  When the printer to be procured includes consumable s comprised of a single toner 
container, or a single ink container and fulfills t he Evaluation Criteria (5) “The chemical 
safety of toner is confirmed” or “The chemical safe ty of ink is confirmed” in 5-6 
Cartridges, etc., Toner Cartridge  of the Basic Policy, it shall be treated as design ated 
procurement goods, etc. 44 8.  As for Evaluation Criteria (3), as a precondition, papers are required not to have 
negative effect on the machine, and are able to be used for the print quality without 
trouble. 
9.  Evaluation criteria (5) does not apply to impact pr inters and multifunction printers. 
 
 
 
 
Table1-1 : Standard energy consumption for Monochro me printers  (excluding Inkjet 
printers, Impact printers and Large format printers .) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm ≤20 ≤0.226 Not applied 20<ipm ≤24 ≤0.018×ipm-0.152 24<ipm ≤40 Integral to the base 
product and print function 
is initial setting 40<ipm ≤60 ≤0.025×ipm-0.439 
60<ipm ≤135 ≤0.049×ipm-1.903 
135<ipm ≤0.183×ipm-20.127 
Notes: 
1.  Product speed  is the maximum, nominal, and one side print speed when the black 
and white image is generated, and the ipm speed cal culated in all cases is rounded 
off to the nearest integer. 1ipm (number of images for each amount) is equal to 
single A4 size or 8.5” x 11” sheet printed on one s ide. If the maximum claimed 
speeds differ when producing images on A4 size or 8 .5” x 11” paper the higher of 
two shall be used. Same applies for all Tables exce pt Table 8 below. 
2.  Products for A3-capable are 0.3 kWh/wk allowance st andards of the applicable 
category in the Tables. Same applies for Tables 1-2 , 4-1, and 4-2 below. 
3.  For products set with Wi-Fi at the time of shipment , the standard for each 
category will be added 0.1 kWh to the standard. Sam e applies for Tables 1-2,4-1, 
and 4-2 below 
4.  The measuring method for the standard power consump tion is based on 
“International ENERGY STAR PROGRAM Requirements Pro duct Standards for 
Imaging Equipment Requirements for Imaging Equipmen t Test Methods for 
Judging Energy Use of Imaging Equipment” (revised i n December 2018). Same 
applies for Tables 1-2, 4-1, 4-2and Tables 6-1 to 6 -4. 
 
 
Table 1-2:  Standard energy consumption for Monochrome Multifun ction printers 
(excluding Inkjet printers, Impact printers and Lar ge format printers.) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm ≤20 ≤0.263 Not applied 20<ipm ≤24 ≤0.018×ipm-0.115 24<ipm ≤40 45 40<ipm ≤60 ≤0.016×ipm-0.033 Integral to the base 
product and print function 
is initial setting 60<ipm ≤80 ≤0.037×ipm-1.314 
80<ipm ≤0.086×ipm-5.283 
 
 
 
Table 2: Standard for Recovery time 
Product 
speed 
(ipm) Short default  Long default 
Time to 
sleep 
Ts(minute) Recovery time 
(second) Time to 
sleep(minute)  Recovery time 
(second) 
0<ipm ≤5 0<Ts ≤5 
≤min(0.42×ipm+5,30)  5<Ts 
≤min(0.51×ipm+15,60)  5<ipm ≤10 0<Ts ≤10 10<Ts ≤15 
10<ipm ≤20 0<Ts ≤10 10<Ts ≤20 
20<ipm ≤30 0<Ts ≤10 10<Ts ≤30 
30<ipm ≤40 0<Ts ≤10 10<Ts ≤45 
40<ipm 0<Ts ≤15 15<Ts ≤45 
1.  Sleep  denotes the energy saving mode into which the machi ne will switch after a set time 
of inactivity without turning off the power. Same a s Tables 3-1, 3-2, 5-1, 5-2, 7-1, 7-2 and 
8 below.Recovery time :  the time it takes for a device to return from a sle ep or off mode 
to a ready state. The calculation method is as foll ows.Recovery time(second) ＝Tact1 -Tact0  
Tact1 : Time (seconds) from sleep mode until the first sh eet is ejected from the device 
Tact0 : Time (seconds) from the ready state until the fir st sheet is ejected from the 
device 
3.  In this table, min (A, B) is the minimum function a nd represents the smaller value of A 
and B. For example, the reference min (0.42 × ipm +  5, 30) of the recovery time in the 
short initial setting is a smaller value of either “0.42 × ipm + 5 seconds or 30 seconds”. 
4.  There is no provision for a recovery time for produ cts that exceed the long default sleep 
transition time (Ts). 
 
Table3-1: Standards for time to sleep for Monochrom e printers or Color printers 
(including High-performance inkjet printers, exclud ing Inkjet printers and Impact 
printers.) 
Product speed 
（ipm ） Time required to switch into sleep 
Initial setting  User adjustment  
ipm ≤10 ≤15min 
≤60min 10<ipm ≤20 ≤30min 
20<ipm ≤30 ≤45min 30<ipm ≤120min 
Note:  46 User adjustment  is the maximum sleep transition time that can be a djusted by the user. 
Same applies for Tables 3-2, 5-1, 7-1 and 7-2. 
 
 
 
Table3-2: Standard for Time required to switch into  sleep for Monochrome 
multifunction printers or Color multifunction print ers (including High-performance 
inkjet printers, excluding Inkjet printers and Impa ct printers.) 
Product speed 
（ipm） Time required to switch into sleep  
Initial setting  User adjustment 
ipm ≤10 ≤15min 
≤60min 10<ipm ≤20 ≤30min 
20<ipm ≤30 ≤45min 30<ipm ≤120min 
 
 
 
Table4-1: Standard Energy Consumption for Color pri nters (excluding Inkjet printers 
and Impact printers.) 
Product speed (ipm) Standards (kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
ipm ≤19 ≤0.254 Not applied 
ipm ＝20 
Integral to the base 
product and print function 
is initial setting 20<ipm ≤40 ≤0.024×ipm-0.250 
40<ipm ≤60 ≤0.011×ipm+0.283 
60<ipm ≤80 ≤0.055×ipm-2.401 
80<ipm ≤0.118×ipm-7.504 
 
 
 
Table5-1 : Standard for Time required to switch int o sleep, Energy consumption of 
base marking engine at sleep and Energy consumption  at off mode for Inkjet printers 
and Impact printers (excluding Large format printer s.) 
Product speed 
(ipm) Time required to switch into 
sleep Energy 
consumption of 
base marking 
engine at sleep Energy 
consumption at 
off mode  
 Initial setting  User 
adjustment 
ipm ≤10 ≤5 min 
≤60 min ≤0.6W ≤0.3W 10<ipm ≤0 ≤15 min 
20<ipm ≤30 ≤30 min 
30<ipm ≤45 min ≤120 min 
Notes 
1.  The standard of the sleep mode power consumption is  to use the value calculated by 
adding the sleep mode power consumption allowable v alue for the additional 47 functions in Table 7 to the sleep mode power consum ption of the basic marking 
engine in this table for the conformity determinati on. 
2.  The method of measuring power consumption is based on “International ENERGY 
STAR Program Requirements Product Standards for Ima ging Equipment Test 
Methods for Judging Energy Use of Imaging Equipment ” (revised in December 
2018). 
 
 
 
Table5-2 : Standard for Time required to switch int o sleep, Energy consumption of 
base marking engine at sleep and Energy consumption  at off mode for Multifunction 
printers and Multifunction impact printers (excludi ng Large format printers.) 
Product 
Speed(ipm) Time required to switch into 
sleep Energy 
consumption of 
base marking 
engine at sleep Energy 
consumption at 
off mode  
 
ipm ≤10 ≤15min 
≤60min ≤1.1W ≤0.3W 10<ipm ≤20 ≤30min 
20<ipm ≤30 ≤45min 30<ipm ≤120min 
 
 
 
Table6-1 : Standard Energy Power Consumption for Pr ofessional Monochrome 
Printers 
Product Speed(ipm) Standard(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
85<ipm ≤90 ≤0.2×ipm-6.4 Integral to the base 
product  90<ipm ≤0.55×ipm-37.9 
Note:  
For products that can handle A3 size paper, 0.05kWh  is added to the standard for each 
category. Same applies for Tables 6-2, 6-3 and 6-4.  
 
Table6-2 : Standard Energy Power Consumption for Pr ofessional Monochrome 
Multifunction Printers 
Product Speed(ipm) Standard(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
85<ipm ≤0.6×ipm-36.15 Integral to the base 
product 
 
 
 48 Table6-3 : Standard Energy Power Consumption for Pr ofessional Color Printers 
Product Speed(ipm) Standard(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
49<ipm ≤75 ≤0.2×ipm-2.15 Integral to the base 
product 75<ipm ≤0.7×ipm-39.65 
 
 
 
Table6-4 : Standard Energy Power Consumption for Pr ofessional Color Multifunction 
Printers 
Product Speed(ipm) Standard(kWh) Factor of automatic duplex 
printing function 
49<ipm ≤70 ≤0.2×ipm-2.05 Integral to the base 
product 70<ipm ≤80 ≤0.7×ipm-37.05 
80<ipm ≤0.75×ipm-41.05 
 
 
 
Table7-1: Standard for Time required to switch into  sleep, Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep and Energy consumption at o ff mode for Large format 
Printers 
Product 
Speed(ipm) Time required to 
switch into sleep Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep Energy 
consumption 
at off mode  
 Initial 
setting  User 
adjustment  Inkjet Other marking 
technology 
ipm≤10 5min 
60min ≤4.9W ≤2.5W ≤0.3W 10<ipm ≤20 15min 
20<ipm ≤30 30min 
30<ipm 45min 120min 
Note: 
Other marking technology refers to a marking techno logy other than the ink jet method. 
Same applies for Table7-2 
 
 
 
Table7-2 : Standard for Time required to switch int o sleep, Energy consumption of 
base marking engine at sleep and Energy consumption  at off mode for Large format 
multifunction Printers 
Product 
Speed(ipm) Time required to 
switch into sleep Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep Energy 
consumption 
at off mode  
 Initial 
setting  User 
adjustment  Inkjet Other marking 
technology 
ipm ≤10 ≤15min  ≤60min ≤5.4W ≤8.7W ≤0.3W 49 10<ipm ≤20 ≤30min  
20<ipm ≤30 ≤45min  30<ipm ≤120min 
 
 
 
Table 8 : Sleep Mode Power Allowances for Added Fun ctionality 
Adder 
Type Connection 
Type Max. Data 
Rate, r 
(Mbit/ 
second) Details Functional 
Adder 
Allowance 
(watts) 
 
Interface  
 
 Wired r < 20 Includes: USB 1.x, IEEE 488, 
IEEE 1284/Parallel/ Centronics, 
RS232 0.2 
20 ≤ r < 500  Includes: USB 2.x, IEEE 1394/ 
FireWire/i.LINK, 100Mb 
Ethernet 0.4 
r ≥ 500 Includes: USB 3.x,1G Ethernet 0.5 
Any Includes: Flash memory-
card/smartcard readers, camera 
interfaces, PictBridge 0.2 
Fax Modem Any Applies to MFDs only. 0.2 
Wireless, 
Radio-
frequency 
(RF) Any Includes: Bluetooth, 802.11 2.0 
Wireless, 
Infrared (IR)  Any Includes: IrDA. 0.1 
Cordless 
Handset N/A N/A Capability of the Imaging 
Equipment to communicate 
with a cordless handset. Applied 
only once, regardless of the 
number of cordless handsets the 
product is designed to handle. 
Does not address the power 
requirements of the cordless 
handset itself. 0.8 
Memory  N/A N/A Applies to the internal capacity 
available in the Imaging 
Equipment for storing data. 
Applies to all volumes of 
internal memory and should be 
scaled accordingly for RAM. 
This adder does not apply to 
hard disk or flash memory. 0.5/GB  50 Power 
Supply N/A N/A Applies to both internal and 
external power supplies of 
Mailing Machines and Standard 
Format products using Inkjet 
and Impact marking 
technologies with nameplate 
output power (POUT) greater 
than 10 watts. 0.02 x 
(POUT – 
10.0)  
Touch 
Panel 
Display N/A N/A Applies to both monochrome 
and color touch panel displays. 0.2  
Notes: Among adder type, the number of allowances claimed for interface functional adders, 
including any fax capability is 2 or less and the n umber of allowances of any non-interface 
functional adders is unlimited. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of printers and multifunction p rinters meeting the criteria to the total 
number of printer/faxes to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal 
year. 
  51 5-3. Fax Machines 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Fax machines Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Monochrome fax machines (excluding inkjet types) me et the 
standards of appropriate category listed in Table 1 . 
(2)  Color fax machines (excluding inkjet types) meet th e standards of 
appropriate category listed in Table 2. 
(3)  Inkjet type fax machines meet the standards listed in Table 3 
(4)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the standard 
content rate. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  Batteries do not include cadmium alloys, zinc alloy s, or mercury 
alloys. This is not required, however, if batteries  including these 
substances are collected, reused, or recycled witho ut failure, and/or 
properly processed. 
(2)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment and  reuse. 
(3)  The item uses a large amount of recycled components  that have 
already been used, and uses as large amount of recy cled plastic as 
possible if plastic components are used. 
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(5)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI) compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
2.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. 
3.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
 
 
  52 Table 1: Standards for standard energy consumption for monochrome fax machines 
(excluding inkjet type machine) 
Product speed(ipm) Standard(kWh) 
ipm ≤5 ≤0.3 
5 < ipm ≤20 ≤ 0.04× ipm+0.1 
20 < ipm ≤30 ≤ 0.06× ipm-0.3 
30 < ipm ≤40 ≤ 0.11× ipm-1.8 
40 < ipm ≤65 ≤ 0.16× ipm-3.8 
65 < ipm ≤90 ≤ 0.2× ipm-6.4 
90 < ipm ≤ 0.55× ipm-37.9 
Notes: 
1.  Product speed  is the maximum, nominal, and one side print speed when the black and 
white image is generated, and the ipm speed calcula ted in all cases is rounded off to 
the nearest integer. 1ipm (number of images for eac h amount) is equal to single A4 
size or 8.5”  ×11” sheet printed on one side. If the maximum claim ed speeds differ 
when producing images on A4 size or 8.5” × 11” paper the higher of two shall be used. 
Same applies for Table 2 below. 
2.  Products for A3-capable (Standard format products w ith a paper path width equal to 
or greater than 275 mm) are a 0.3 kWh/wk allowance standards of the applicable 
category in the Tables. Same applies for Table 2 be low. 
3.  Measuring method for standard energy consumption sh all be measured in accordance 
with “International ENERGY STAR Program Requirement s, Product Specification for 
Imaging Equipment, Eligibility Criteria Version 2.0 .” Same applies for Tables 2 and 3 
below. 
 
 
 
Table 2: Standards for standard energy consumption for color fax machines (excluding 
inkjet type machines) 
Product speed (ipm) Standard(kWh) 
ipm ≤10 ≤1.3 
10 < ipm ≤15 ≤0.06×ipm+0.7 
15 < ipm ≤30 ≤0.15×ipm-0.65 
30 < ipm ≤75 ≤0.2×ipm-2.15 
75 < ipm ≤0.7×ipm-39.65 
 
 
 
  53 Table 3: Standards for default time to sleep, energ y consumption of base marking 
engine at Sleep mode and energy consumption at stan dby for inkjet fax machines 
Default time to 
sleep  Energy consumption of base 
marking engine at sleep mode  Energy consumption 
at standby 
5 minutes ≤ 0.6W ≤ 0.5W 
Notes: 
1.  Sleep  denotes the energy saving mode into which the machi ne will switch after a set 
time of inactivity without turning off the power. 
2.  The standard of the power consumption at sleep mode  is calculated, adding the sleep 
mode power allowances for functional adders listed in Table 4 to the energy 
consumption of base marking engine at sleep mode in  this table, to judge to meet the 
standard.  
 
 
 
Table 4: Sleep Mode Power Allowances for Functional  Adders 
Adder 
Type Connection 
Type Max. Data 
Rate, r 
(Mbit/ 
second) Details Functional 
Adder 
Allowance 
(watts) 
Interface  Wired r < 20 Includes: USB 1.x, IEEE 488, 
IEEE 1284/Parallel/ 
Centronics, RS232 0.2 
20 ≤ r < 500  Includes: USB 2.x, IEEE 1394/ 
FireWire/i.LINK, 100Mb 
Ethernet 0.4 
r ≥ 500 Includes: USB 3.x, 1G 
Ethernet 0.5 
Any Includes: Flash memory-
card/smartcard readers, camera 
interfaces, PictBridge 0.2 
Fax Modem Any Applies to Fax Machines only. 0.2 
Wireless, 
Radio-
frequency 
(RF) Any Includes: Bluetooth, 802.11 2.0 
Wireless, 
Infrared (IR)  Any Includes: IrDA. 0.1 
Cordless 
Handset N/A N/A Capability of the Imaging 
Equipment to communicate 
with a cordless handset. 
Applied only once, regardless 
of the number of cordless 
handsets the product is 
designed to handle. Does not 
address the power 
requirements of the cordless 
handset itself. 0.8 54 Memory  N/A N/A Applies to the internal capacity 
available in the Imaging 
Equipment for storing data. 
Applies to all volumes of 
internal memory and should be 
scaled accordingly for RAM. 
This adder does not apply to 
hard disk or flash memory. 0.5/GB  
Power 
Supply N/A N/A Applies to both internal and 
external power supplies of 
Mailing Machines and 
Standard Format products 
using Inkjet and Impact 
marking technologies with 
nameplate output power 
(POUT) greater than 10 watts. 0.02 x 
(POUT – 
10.0)  
Touch 
Panel 
Display N/A N/A Applies to both monochrome 
and color touch panel displays.  0.2  
Internal 
Disk 
Drives N/A N/A Includes any high-capacity 
storage product, including 
hard-disk and solid-state 
drives. Does not cover 
interfaces to external drives. 0.15  
Notes: Among adder type, the number of allowances claimed for interface functional adders, 
including any fax capability is 2 or less and the n umber of allowances of any non-interface 
functional adders is unlimited. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of fax machines meeting the cri teria to the total number of fax machines 
to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements)  in the fiscal year. 
  55 5-4. Scanners 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Scanners Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Meet the standard of applicable category in Table 1 . 
(2)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the standard 
content rate. 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used  machines, and a 
system for the proper disposal of components which cannot be reused or 
recycled is considered. 
(2)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its materials 
separated to facilitate refurbishment, reuse and re cycling. 
(3)  The item uses a large amount of recycled components  that have already 
been used, and uses as large amount of recycled pla stic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(5)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
2.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances  denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. 
3.  Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic onc e used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
 
 
 
Table 1: Standards for default time to sleep, energ y consumption of base marking engine 
at sleep mode and off mode energy consumption for s canners 
Product speed 
(ipm) Default time to sleep Energy 
consumption of 
base marking 
engine at sleep 
mode 
Energy 
consumption at 
standby Off mode energy 
consumption 
Default time 
to sleep User 
adjustment  56 ipm ≤10 ≤15 minutes 
≤60minutes ≤2.5W ≤0.3W 10<ipm ≤20 ≤30minutes 
20<ipm ≤30 ≤45minutes 30<ipm ≤120minutes  
Notes:  
1.  Sleep  denotes the energy saving mode into which the machi ne will switch after a set 
time of inactivity without turning off the power. 
2.  User adjustment  is maximum time to sleep that can be adjustable by  the user. 
3.  The standard of the power consumption of base marki ng engine at sleep mode is 
calculated, adding the sleep mode power allowances for functional adders listed in 
Table 2 to the energy consumption of base marking e ngine at sleep mode in this table, 
to judge to meet the standard. 
4.  Measuring method for standard energy consumption sh all be measured in accordance 
with “International ENERGY STAR Program Requirement s, Product Specification for 
Imaging Equipment, Eligibility Criteria Version 2.0 .”  
 
 
 
Table 2: Sleep mode power allowances for functional  adders 
Adder 
Type Connection 
Type Max. Data 
Rate, r 
(Mbit/ 
second) Details Functional 
Adder 
Allowance 
(watts)  
Interface 
 
 Wired r < 20 Includes: USB 1.x, IEEE 488, 
IEEE 1284/Parallel/ Centronics, 
RS232 0.2 
20 ≤ r < 500 Includes: USB 2.x, IEEE 1394/ 
FireWire/i.LINK, 100Mb 
Ethernet 0.4 
r ≥ 500 Includes: USB 3.x,1G Ethernet 0.5 
Any Includes: Flash memory-
card/smartcard readers, camera 
interfaces, PictBridge 0.2 
Fax Modem Any Applies to Fax Machines and 
MFDs only. 0.2 
Wireless, 
Radio-
frequency 
(RF) Any Includes: Bluetooth, 802.11 2.0 
Wireless, 
Infrared (IR) Any Includes: IrDA. 0.1 
Cordless 
Handset N/A N/A Capability of the Imaging 
Equipment to communicate with 
a cordless handset. Applied only 
once, regardless of the number of 
cordless handsets the product is 
designed to handle. Does not 0.8 57 address the power requirements 
of the cordless handset itself. 
Memory N/A N/A Applies to the internal capacity 
available in the Imaging 
Equipment for storing data. 
Applies to all volumes of internal 
memory and should be scaled 
accordingly for RAM. This adder 
does not apply to hard disk or 
flash memory. 0.5/GB  
Power 
Supply N/A N/A Applies to both internal and 
external power supplies of 
Mailing Machines and Standard 
Format products using Inkjet and 
Impact marking technologies 
with nameplate output power 
(POUT) greater than 10 watts. 0.02 x 
(POUT – 
10.0)  
Touch 
Panel 
Display N/A N/A Applies to both monochrome and 
color touch panel displays. 0.2  
Notes:  Among adder type, the number of allowances claimed  for interface functional adders, 
including any fax capability is 2 or less and the n umber of allowances of any non-interface 
functional adders is unlimited. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of scanners meeting the criteri a to the total number of scanners to be 
purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in th e fiscal year.  
  58 5-5. Projectors  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Projectors Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  The weight of product body shall not exceed the num ber obtained by 
the formula of applicable category in Note 3. 
(2)  The power consumption shall not exceed the number o btained by the 
formula of applicable category in Note 4. 
(3)  Standby power consumption shall be 0.4W or less. Ho wever, this is 
not applicable on the network latency. 
(4)  If a mercury lamp is used as a light source, fulfil l the following: 
a.  Make it known to users that mercury is used and pro vide the 
information about appropriate disposal method. 
b.  A system is in place for the collection of used lam ps or products. 
(5)  Supply of the service parts and spare parts shall b e continued for 5 
years or more after the termination of product manu facturing. 
(6)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the standard 
content rate. The content rate can be easily confir med on websites, etc.  
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Time for lamp replacement is 3,000 hours or more. 
(2)  Solid state light source should be used for light s ource lamp as much 
as possible. 
(3)  The noise is as low as possible. 
(4)  A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used  products, and a 
system for the proper disposal of components which cannot be reused 
or recycled is considered. 
(5)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, re use and recycling. 
(6)  The use of halogenenate noncombustibles on the casi ng is as 
minimized as possible. 
(7)  If plastic components are used for either the body or the parts, the item 
uses as large amount of recycled plastic as possibl e,  
(8)  Manuals or accessories provided with the product ar e eliminated as 
much as possible. 
(9)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
(10)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Projectors  under consideration in this section refers to thos e having the computer input 
terminal and possible to project the images on such  as computers and front projection 
whose effective flux is under 5,000 lm used in meet ing rooms or class rooms, including 
projectors capable to project on the screen with 60  inches (width 1.2 m) or more in 
width within a distance of 1 meter (referred to as Short focus projector  hereinafter, 
especially, the one within a distance of 0.5m refer red to as Super short focus projector ).  
 59 2.  Solid state light source refers to a solid device that supplies energy such as electricity to 
a solid (substance) such as a light emitting diode (LED) or a semiconductor laser (LD) 
and emits light peculiar to the substance when exci ted. 
3.  The method of calculating the standard of the weigh t of product body is as follows. 
Standard of the weight of product body (kg) = 0.001 2 × Φ × α × β 
Φ: effective luminous flux (lm) 
α: 1.5 for an super short focus projector, 1.2 for a  short focus projector, 1.0 for 
other ones 
β: 2.0 for a solid state light source, 1.0 for other  ones 
4.  The calculation method of power consumption standar ds is as follows. 
Power consumption standard (W) = 0.070 × Φ × α × β + 85 
Φ: effective luminous flux (lm) 
α: 1.2 for an super short focus projector, 1.1 for a  short focus projector, 1.0 for 
other ones 
β: 1.5 for a solid-state light source, 1.0 for other  ones 
5.  Standby power consumption  refers to minimum power consumption at which a pro duct 
may be connected to a main power source and possibl y maintained for an indefinite 
period of time without connecting to external devic es. Standby is a minimum power 
consumption mode of the product. 
6.  Evaluation Criteria (3) does not applies for the pr oducts having AC interception device 
and the portable one for mobile use mainly. 
7.  Provide the information  in Evaluation Criteria (4) a. denotes that specifi c information 
for use of mercury and appropriate disposal method of a used lamp is provided to the 
user, by indicating on package of the lamp or the p roduct main body, enclosed printed 
material, user’s manual and websites. 
8.  A system is in place for the collection  in Evaluation Criteria (4) b. denotes the fulfillm ent 
of the below requirements.  
a.  The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a coll ection system located at the 
store, or collection in response to the user’s requ est) for voluntarily collecting 
(collecting on its own or commissioning other compan ies to collect; includes 
situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection together) used lamp 
and the product main body. 
b.  In order to precipitate appropriate collection, the  product name and business name 
(manufacturer brand name is permissible) are marked  on the lamp and product 
main body for easy acknowledgement at the time of d isposal. 
c.  Specific information for the collection (collection  method, collection location, 
etc.), is provided to the user by either package of  the lamp and product main body, 
printed matter, manual or websites concerning used lamp and used product. 
9.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
10.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances  denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate).  Items for which content ra te exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance  with JIS C 0950. 60 11.  Time for lamp replacement  denotes average hours of lamp operating till the 
effective flux when a product is used falls below 5 0% of the nominal effective flux 
and standard hours to lead a proper lamp replacemen t. 
12.  Recycled Plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.). 
13.  Each procurement organization is to take the follow ing into careful account: 
a.  When procuring, consider the objective of use and b usiness type in order to 
determine the necessary type and function. 
b.  Consider the type of contract that would enable the  minimum amount necessary 
for manuals and accessories. 
c.  Confirm and consider the factors for consideration specified in the user’s manual 
when procuring the merchandise, when using and disp osing. 
d.  If a system for the collection of used lamps or pro ducts is in pace, proper disposals 
of them should be done by utilizing the system. 
 
 
  
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of products meeting the criteri a to the total number of projectors to be 
purchased (including lease or rental) in the fiscal  year. 
 
 
  61 5-6. Cartridges, etc.  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Toner cartridges  Evaluation Criteria 
Fulfill the following criteria (1) or (2). 
(1)Fulfill the following criteria (a) to (g). 
a.  A system is put in place for the recovery and mater ial recycling 
of used toner cartridges. 
b.  Parts of used and recovered toner cartridges that a re reused or 
have undergone material recycling comprises 50% or more by 
total weight of the collected used item (excluding toner). 
c.  Parts of used and recovered toner cartridges whose resources 
are recycled comprise 95% or more by total weight o f the 
collected used item (excluding toner). 
d.  Parts cannot be reused or recycled from the collect ed used 
toner cartridges, after being reduced etc., they ar e properly 
processed and not simply landfilled. 
e.  Chemical safety of toner is confirmed. 
f.  Photosensitive component does not include as prescr ibed 
component cadmium, lead, mercury, selenium, or thei r 
compounds. 
g.  When the paper used meets the criteria for specifie d 
procurement, the product is capable of using the sp ecified 
procurement material. 
(2)  Meet the Eco Mark Certification Criteria or equival ent.  
Factors for Consideration 
(1) A system is put in place for using plastics fro m collected toner 
cartridges as a material or parts of the new ones.  
(2) Providing with certificate, etc. that show the evaluation criteria is 
filled about construction of various systems and re cycling rate, 
etc. 
(3) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as pos sible and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environm ental impact 
upon disposal. 
Ink cartridges Evaluation Criteria 
Fulfill the following criteria (1) or (2). 
(1)Fulfill the following criteria (a) to (f). 
a.  A system is put in place for the recovery of the us ed ink 
cartridges. 
b.  Parts of used and recovered ink cartridges that are  reused or 
have undergone material recycling comprises 25% or more by 
total weight of the collected used item (excluding ink). 
c.  Parts of used and recovered ink cartridges whose re sources are 
recycled comprise 95% or more by total weight of th e 
collected used item (excluding ink). 
d.  Parts of used toner cartridges that have been colle cted cannot 
be reused or recycled do reduction of volume etc., and 
prevention of direct landfill disposal. Parts canno t be reused or 62 recycled from the collected used ink cartridges, af ter being 
reduced etc., they are properly processed and not s imply 
landfilled. 
e.  Chemical safety of ink is confirmed. 
f.  When the paper used meets the criteria for specifie d 
procurement, the product is capable of using the sp ecified 
procurement material. 
(2) Meet the Eco Mark Certification Criteria or equ ivalent. 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) Providing with certificate, etc. that show the evaluation criteria is 
filled about construction of various systems and re cycling rate, 
etc. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as pos sible and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environm ental impact 
upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1.  Toner cartridges  or Ink cartridges  (hereinafter referred to as cartridges, etc.) unde r 
consideration refers to products newly purchased to  supply copiers, printers, etc., and 
does not include those that accompany those machine s at the time of purchase. 
2.  Toner cartridges refers to new toner cartridges  or recycled toner cartridges , and are 
cartridges for the purpose of printing using a meth od that utilizes two of the following: 
copiers that use electronic photocopying; toner con tainers supplied with toner that are 
used for printers, faxes, etc.; and exposure or dev elopment unit. For cartridges 
comprised of exposure or development units, only th ose that are sold as a unit with 
toner container will be considered. Products that a re comprised only of toner container, 
exposure unit, or development unit will not be cons idered as toner cartridges. 
a.  New toner cartridges  refers to toner cartridges manufactured by the man ufacturer 
of the main machine unit, or consigned to an outsid e source. 
b.  Recycled toner cartridges  refers to toner cartridges that are created by sup plying 
a used toner cartridge with toner, and replacing ne cessary consumables. The fact 
that it is a recycled toner cartridge is noted on e ither the packaging, printed 
material included in the packaging, or instruction material. 
3.  Ink cartridges  refers to new ink cartridges  or recycled ink cartridges , and are 
cartridges for the purpose of printing with an ink- tank filled with ink, or ink-tank with 
a printing head that are used in copiers, printers,  fax machines, etc. that utilize inkjet 
method. Products that are comprised of a single ink  container will not be considered 
as ink-cartridges. 
a.  New ink cartridges  refer to ink cartridges manufactured by the manufa cturer of 
the main machine unit, or consigned to an outside s ource. 
b.  Recycled ink cartridges  refer to ink cartridges that are created by supplyi ng a used 
ink cartridge with ink, and replacing necessary con sumables. The fact that it is a 
recycled ink cartridge is noted on either the packa ging, printed material included 
in the packaging, or instruction material. 
4.  Material recycling  refers to recycling of the material. It does not i nclude energy 
recovery, petrochemicals, gasification, high-furnac e reduction, coke furnace chemical 
recycling process. 
5.  Reuse/Material recycling ratio  refers to the ratio by weight of parts that are ei ther 
reused or have undergone the process of material re cycling, to the total weight of 63 collected cartridges, etc. that has been disposed o f after use. However, the cartridges, 
etc. made public in the Web site or the catalog, et c. are excluded from the object of 
collected cartridges, etc.  as a collection off the subject. 
6.  Recycled ratio  refers to the ratio by weight of parts that have g one through the process 
of recycling, material recycling, energy recovery, conversion into petrochemicals, 
gasification, high-furnace reduction, or coke furna ce chemical recycling process, to 
the total weight of cartridges, etc. that have been  disposed of after use. However, the 
cartridges, etc. made public in the Web site or the  catalog, etc. are excluded from the 
object of collected cartridges, etc.  as a collection off the subject. 
7.  A system is put in place for recovery noted in criteria (1) in toner cartridges and ink 
cartridges indicates that the following criteria ar e met: 
a.  A method (recycling by the merchant, recycling usin g a reverse marketing 
recycling system that responds to the demands of th e user, etc.) is considered 
where either the manufacturer or the retailer have voluntarily collected used 
cartridges etc. (collection is undertaken either by  themselves, or by an entity 
commissioned to do the task.  Multiple entities may  work together in the 
collection.)  
b.  The name of the product and manufacturer (brand nam e may be accepted) is 
clearly labeled on the main part of the cartridge. 
c.  The user may obtain, from either the product packag ing, printed matter included 
in the packaging, user instructions for the main de vice, or on the website, specific 
information pertaining to the recycling of used car tridges (method of and location 
for recycling). 
8.  Appropriate treatment  noted in criteria (1) d. for toner cartridges and criteria (1) d. for 
ink cartridges indicates that the company involved in the recovery of used cartridges 
takes responsibility for adequately disposing those  parts that cannot be reused or 
recycled. This does not include those instances in which a recovery system by another 
company is used (excluding those instances where re covery is undertaken based on a 
contract or agreement made between companies). Howe ver, the cartridges, etc. made 
public in the Web site or the catalog, etc. are exc luded from the object of collected 
cartridges, etc.  as a collection off the subject. 
9.  Eco Mark Certification Criteria  in Evaluation Criteria (2) of Toner Cartridge and 
Evaluation Criteria (2) of Ink Cartridge are the Ec o Mark product types operated by 
the product category of the Eco Mark system operate d by the Eco Mark Office of the 
Japan Environment Association. The certification cr iteria for product type No. 132 
"Toner cartridges" that came into effect as of Apri l 1, 2014, and the latter refers to the 
certification criteria for product type No. 142 "In k cartridges". 
10.  Chemical safety  of toner and ink will be based on the following: 
 
a.  Toner and ink must meet the following conditions (1 ) to (4). However, if the use 
of substances that fall under (2) and (3) is techni cally unavoidable and it is difficult 
to replace them immediately, it is permitted if inf ormation such as grounds for 
exemption from application will be disclosed and ea sily confirmed.  
(i)  Cadmium, lead, mercury, chromium (VI) compound , nickel, and their 
compound are not added as prescription components. However, nickel 
complex compounds with a large molecular weight use d as colorants are 
excluded. 64 (ii)  Each substance listed in Appendix Table 1 tha t are classified into CMR 
category 1A, 1B (appendix Table1) or 2 of Table 3.1  in Annex VI of 
Regulation (EC) No.1272/2008 are not added as presc ription components. 
 
Appendix Table 1: Hazard Category with restricted u se 
Hazard Category Class Hazard Category Code CLP-regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008  
H phrase 
Carcinogenicity Carc. 1A, 1B H350: May cause cancer   
Carcinogenicity Carc. 1A, 1B H350i: May cause cance r if inhaled 
Carcinogenicity Carc. 2 H351: Suspected of causing cancer 
Germ cell mutagenicity Muta. 1A, 1B H340: May cause  genetic damage 
Germ cell mutagenicity Muta. 2 H341:Suspected of ca using genetic 
defects 
Reproductive toxicity Repr. 1A, 1B H360:May damage fertility or the 
unborn child  
Reproductive toxicity Repr. 2 H361:Suspected of dam aging 
fertility or the unborn child 
Substances of (so-called candidate list) according to REACH Article 59. The version of the 
candidate list at the point of application applies.  
 (iii) Toner and ink shall not be classified as a m ixture in the hazard categories 
STOT SE1, SE2, RE1 and RE2 (Appendix 2) specified i n Annex I of 
Regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008. 
 
Appendix Table 2:  Target Hazard Category  
Hazard Category Class Hazard Category Code  CLP-regulation (EC) No. 1272/2008 
H phrase 
Specific target organ toxicity  
Single exposure STOT SE 1 H370:Causes damage to organs  
Specific target organ toxicity  
Single exposure STOT SE 2 H371:May cause damage to organs 
Specific target organ toxicity  
Repeated exposure STOT RE 1 H372:Causes damage to organsthrough 
prolonged or repeated exposure  
Specific target organ toxicity  
Repeated exposure STOT RE 2 H373:May cause damage to organs 
through prolonged or repeated exposure  
 
 (iv) Azo coloring agents (dyes and pigments) that generate carcinogenic aromatic 
amines listed in Appendix Table 3, Annex XVII of RE ACH Regulation ((EC) 
(1907/2006)) are not added as prescription componen ts. 
 
Appendix Table 3: Amines that must not be generated  due to the reduction of azo 
groups 
 Chemical name CAS No. 
1 4-aminobiphenyl 92-67-1  
2 Benzedrine 92-87-5  
3 4-chloro-o-toluidine 95-69-2  65 4 2-naphthylamine 91-59-8  
5 o-aminoazotoluene 97-56-3  
6 2-amino-4-nitrotoluene 99-55-8  
7 p-chloroaniline 106-47-8  
8 2,4-diaminoanisole 615-05-4  
9 4,4’-diaminodiphenylmethane 101-77-9  
10 3,3’-dichlorbenzidine 91-94-1  
11 3,3’-dimethoxybenzidine 119-90-4  
12 3,3’-dimethylbenzidine 119-93-7  
13 4,4’-diamino-3,3’ –dimethyldiphenylmethane 838-8 8-0 
14 p-cresidine 120-71-8  
15 4,4’-Methylene-bis –(2-Chloroaniline) 101-14-4  
16 4,4’-oxydianiline 101-80-4  
17 4,4’-4-Aminophenyl Sulfide Bis  139-65-1  
18 o-toluidine 95-53-4  
19 2,4-diaminotoluene 95-80-7  
20 2,4,5-trimethylaniline 137-17-7  
21 o-anisidine 90-04-0  
22 4-amino-azo-benzen 60-09-3  
 
b.  If any insecticidal or bactericidal substances used  in toners or inks, only 
constituents listed in Annex I of “REGULATION (EU) No 528/2012 OF THE 
EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 22 May 20 12 
concerning the making available on the market and u se of biocidal products and 
classified in product type 6 shall be added as pres cribed constituents. However, 
when using materials not listed, it is permitted if  application for approval has 
been submitted on the basis of the command, but if it is not limited to when the 
disallowance is determined. 
c.  Toner and ink has yielded a negative result to the Ames test. 
d.  SDS (Safety Data Sheet) is provided for toner and i nk. 
 
11.  When procurement cartridges, etc., each procurement  group is to take into account the 
impact on the main machine as well as printing qual ity, and carefully consider the 
following: 
a.  Quality of cartridges, etc. is guaranteed. 
i.  Quality if sufficiently controlled through in-house  regulations, and quality is 
guaranteed (replacement or repair in case of inadeq uate quality resulting from 
the product used) against bad quality including low -quality printing, paper jam, 
leak of toner/ink, clogged nozzle, and damage of th e main machine (handling 
of defective cases resulting from the use of cartri dges, etc. that is not covered 
by the insurance of the main machine would not be f ree of cost even if it is 
handled within the period during which the guarante e of the main machine is 
effective). 
ii.  In cases of damage etc., to the main component of t he photo copier or printer 
due to the use of products that satisfy the require ments listed in this category, 
it is encouraged that the information of the produc t (product name, 66 manufacturer, brand name, name of the main machine,  etc.) and the resulting 
problem is recorded. 
b.  Ink cartridges should be selected with consideratio n for its objective and use. 
i.  Quality if sufficiently controlled through in-house  regulations, and quality is 
guaranteed (replacement or repair in case of inadeq uate quality resulting from 
the product used) against bad quality including low -quality printing, paper jam, 
leak of toner/ink, clogged nozzle, and damage of th e main machine (handling 
of defective cases resulting from the use of cartri dges, etc. that is not covered 
by the insurance of the main machine would not be f ree of cost even if it is 
handled within the period during which the guarante e of the main machine is 
effective). 
ii.  Select an ink cartridge with consideration for the possibility that ink from a 
new ink cartridge and ink that was used to refill a  recycled ink cartridge may 
not produce the same color. 
12.  Each procurement group carefully consider that the business should be providing with the 
following document from the viewpoint of securing r eliability concerning the chemical 
safety of the product and business’s collecting sys tem, recycling system, and appropriate 
treatment systems, etc. when the cartridge etc. are  procured (For instance, it is possible to 
confirm it on the Website, etc. opened to the publi c in the business’s judgment).  
a.  Ames test report etc. for toner and ink. 
b.  SDS (Safety Data Sheet) for toner and ink 
c.  Certificate, etc. that show the evaluation criteria  is filled about construction of 
various systems and recycling rate, etc. shown in F actors for Consideration. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of toner cartridges and ink car tridges meeting the criteria to the total 
number of toner cartridges and ink cartridges to be  purchased in the fiscal year. 
  67 6. Computers, etc. 
6-1. Computers 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Computers Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Server-type computers shall not have an energy cons umption 
efficiency lower than the value obtained by multipl ying the standard 
energy consumption efficiency for each category lis ted in Table 1.  
(2)  Client-type computers shall meet one of the followi ng a, b, c, or d. 
a.  Energy consumption efficiency calculated by the for mula for each  
category shown in Table 2 must be multiplied by 100 /85 and 
should not exceed the figure rounded down to one de cimal place.  
b.  For Desktop computers, Integrated desktop computers  and 
Notebook computers, typical energy consumption obta ined by 
calculation formula in Note 5 a. shall not exceed m aximum typical 
energy consumption obtained by calculation formula in Note 5 b.  
c.  For Work station, weighted power consumption obtain ed by 
calculation formula in Note 6 a. shall not exceed m aximum power 
consumption obtained by calculation formula in Note  6 b. 
d.  For Thin Client, typical energy consumption obtaine d by 
calculation formula in Note 5 a. shall not exceed M aximum typical 
energy consumption obtained by calculation formula in Note 7. 
(3)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the standard 
content rate. The content rate can be easily confir med on websites, etc.  
(4)  Equipment and function are simplified for notebook computers used 
for ordinary administrative tasks. 
(5)  If plastic is used for product the body or the part s, recycled plastic or 
“plant based plastics whose reduction effect of env ironmental load has 
been confirmed” shall be used at least one of the b ody or parts. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Design consideration takes into account product lif e, efficient use of 
material, reuse of parts, or recycling of raw mater ial, in compliance 
with evaluation criteria for Standards for the Prom otion of Efficient 
Use of Material. 
(2)  The operation time of secondary power (battery) is not longer than 
necessary for notebook computers used for ordinary administrative 
tasks. 
(3)  The product makes the maximum use of recycled mater ial taken from 
a previously used product. 
(4)  If plastic components are used for either the body or the parts, the item 
uses in the highest possible content ratio recycled  plastics or “plant 
based plastics whose reduction effect of environmen tal load has been 
confirmed”. 
(5)  If magnesium alloy is used for either the body or t he parts, the item 
uses as large amount of recycled magnesium alloy as  possible. 
(6)  Accessories including manuals, recovery CD’s etc. i s eliminated as 
much as possible. 68 (7)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(8)  A system for collection and reuse/recycling of pack aging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Product that meets one of the following criteria  is not to be included in Computers  
under consideration in this section. 
(1)  Arithmetic processing unit, main storage unit, inpu t-output control unit and 
power supply unit are all multiplexed. 
(2)  The number of input-output signal transmitter chann els (only in the case of 
products whose maximum data transmission speed exce eds 10 gigabits per a 
second) exceeds 512. Computers that can execute ope rations using more than 
4 central processing units. 
(3)  Computers that can execute calculations using more than 4 central processing 
units. 
(4)  Server-type computers that use a central processing  unit designed to execute 
instructions with different numbers of bits, and th at are equipped with a 
central processing unit designed specifically for e ach computer. 
(5)  Server-type computers equipped with a central proce ssing unit designed 
exclusively for 64-bit computer architecture, among  those using a central 
processing unit designed to execute instructions wi th different bit numbers 
thing. 
(6)  Server-type computers that uses a central processin g unit other than the central 
processing unit that is designed to execute instruc tions with different numbers 
of bits. Equipped with central processing unit not provided. 
(7)  Product primarily uses its internal battery and wit hout receiving power from a 
power source. 
2. Server-type Computers denote computers designed to provide service and th e like via 
a network. 
3. Client-type Computers  denote computers other than server-type computers.  
4. Product types and modes which applied in Evaluat ion Criteria (2) b, c, d, and Note 5 to 
8 are as follows: 
a. Product Types  
i.  Desktop Computer: A computer whose main unit is des igned to be located 
in a permanent location, often on a desk or on the floor, and is not designed 
for portability and is designed for use with an ext ernal display, keyboard, 
and mouse.  
ii.  Integrated Desktop Computer: A Desktop Computer in which the computing 
hardware and display are integrated into a single h ousing, and which is 
connected to ac mains power through a single cable.  
iii.  Notebook Computer: A computer designed specifically  for portability and 
to be operated for extended periods of time both wi th and without a direct 
connection to an AC mains power source with an inte grated display. 
iv.  Work Station: A high-performance, single-user compu ter typically used for 
graphics, CAD, software development, financial and scientific applications 
among other compute intensive tasks. 69 v.  Thin Client: An independently-powered computer that  relies on a 
connection to remote computing resources to obtain primary functionality 
designed for use in a permanent location such as on  a desk and not for 
portability (Limited to devices with no rotational storage media integral to 
the compute.). Thin Clients covered by this specifi cation. And include 
integrated thin client computer in which computing hardware and display 
are connected to ac mains power through a single ca ble. Computers which 
meet the definition of both thin client and noteboo k computer designed for 
portability treated as notebook in this section. 
b. Operational Modes  
i.  Off Mode: The lowest power mode which cannot be swi tched off (not 
affecting) by the user and that may persist for an indefinite time when the 
appliance is connected to the main electricity supp ly and used in accordance 
with the manufacturer’s instructions. 
ii.  Sleep Mode: A low power mode that the computer ente rs automatically after 
a period of inactivity or by manual selection. 
iii.  Idle State: The power state in which the operating system and other software 
have completed loading, a user profile has been cre ated, activity is limited 
to those basic applications that the system starts by default, and the computer 
is not in Sleep Mode. Idle State is composed of two  sub-states: Short Idle 
and Long Idle. 
iv.  Long Idle: The mode where the Computer has reached an idle condition and 
the main computer display has entered a low-power s tate where screen 
contents cannot be observed. 
v.  Short Idle: The mode where the Computer has reached  an idle condition, the 
screen is on, and Long Idle power management featur es have not engaged.  
Measuring method for energy consumption on each ope rational mode shall be 
measured in accordance with “International ENERGY S TAR Program 
Operating Specification (conducted in February, 201 9), Appendix Table 2-1.”  
 
5. Measuring method of Typical Energy Consumption f or Desktop computer, Integrated 
desktop computer, Notebook computer and Thin client  and measuring method of 
Maximum Typical Energy Consumption for Desktop comp uter, Integrated desktop 
computer and Notebook computer are as follows.  
a. Typical Energy Consumption 
E=(8,760/1,000)×(P OFF ×TOFF +PSL ×TSL +PLI ×TLI +PSI ×TSI) 
E:Typical Energy Consumption (unit:kWh/year)  
POFF :Measured power consumption in Off Mode (unit:W)  
PSL :Measured power consumption in Sleep Mode (unit:W)  
PLI :Measured power consumption in Long Idle Mode (unit :W)  
PSI :Measured power consumption in Short Idle Mode (uni t:W)  
TX: Percentage of hour per year specified in Table 3- 1 and 3-2 (unit:%) 
Desktop computer, Integrated desktop computer and N otebook computer shall 
be capable of Sleep Mode on instead alternative low  power modes with power 
less than or equal to 10 watts and Thin client with out sleep mode on discrete 
system shall be used measured power consumption in Long Idle Mode (P LI ) 70 instead of measured power consumption in Short Idle  (PSI) Mode in the above 
calculating formula. 
b. Maximum Typical Energy Consumption 
EMAX =(1+A)*(TEC BASE +TEC MEM +TEC GR +TEC ST +TEC DIS +TEC SW +TEC EEE ) 
EMAX : Maximum Typical Energy Consumption (unit:kWh/year ) 
A: Adder allowance given to the power-supply unit t hat fills efficiency 
specified in Table 3-3.  
TEC BASE : Base Allowance in Table 3-4 (Desktop computer or integrated 
desktop computer), Table 3-5 (Notebook computer )(unit:kWh)  
TEC MEM : Adder allowance of memory equipped with system sp ecified in 
Table 3-6 (unit : kWh/Gigabit)  
TEC GR : Adder allowance of discrete graphics specified in  Table 3-
6(unit:kWh)  
TEC ST :Adder allowance of memory unit (storage) specified  in Table 3-6 if 
applicable(unit:kWh)  
TEC DIS :Adder allowance of enhanced-performance display sp ecified in Table 
3-6 if applicable(unit:kWh)  
TEC SW :Adder allowance of Switchable Graphics specified i n Table 3-6 if 
applicable(unit:kWh)  
TEC EEE : allowance per IEEE 802.3az-compliant (Energy Effi cient Ethernet) 
Gigabit Ethernet specified in Table 3-6 if applicab le (unit: kWh/ Gigabit) 
6. Measuring method of weighted power consumption a nd Maximum power 
consumption for Workstations are as follows. 
a.   Weighted power consumption 
Weighted power consumption (W)=0.35×P OFF +0.10×P SL +0.15×P LI +0.40×P SI  
POFF :Measured power consumption in Off Mode (unit:W)  
PSL :Measured power consumption in Sleep Mode (unit:W)  
PLI :Measured power consumption in Long Idle Mode (unit :W)  
PSI :Measured power consumption in Short Idle Mode (uni t:W)  
b.   Maximum weighted power consumption 
Maximum weighted power consumption (W) 
=0.28×(P MAX +N HDD ×5)+8.76×P EEE ×0.65 
PMAX :Measured maximum power consumption(unit:W)  
NHDD :Number of installed hard disk drives (HDD) or soli d state drives (SSD) 
PEEE : EEE allowance of 0.2W per IEEE 802.3az-compliant (Energy Efficient 
Ethernet) Gigabit Ethernet port. 
7. Measuring method of Maximum Typical Energy Consu mption for Thin Clients as 
follows. 
ETMAX =TEC BASE +TEC GR +TEC WOL +TEC DIS +TEC EEE  
ETMAX :Maximum Typical Energy Consumption (unit : kWh/yea r) 
TEC BASE : Base Allowance 31W  
TEC GR :Discrete Graphics allowance 36W  
TEC WOL :Wake-on-LAN (WOL) allowance 2W  
TEC DIS : Integrated Display allowance for Integrated Deskt ops (unit:kWh) 
specified in Table 3-6.  71 TEC EEE : Energy Efficiency Ethernet incentive for Desktops  specified in 
Table 3-6 if applicable, per IEEE 802.3az-compliant  (Energy 
Efficient Ethernet) Gigabit Ethernet port (unit : k Wh/ Gigabit) 
However, adding adder allowance TEC GR, TEC WOL, TEC DIS  and TEC EEE shall only be 
applied to products that offer enabled by default u pon shipment. 
8.Specified chemical substances denotes lead and it s compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
9.Evaluation Criteria (3) is to be applied to perso nal computers. The standard content rate 
of specified chemical substances denotes the standa rd rate provided by JIS C 0950 (The 
marking for presence of the specific chemical subst ances for electrical and electronic 
equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemica l substances, chemical element 
symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and standard content rate).  Items for 
which content rate exceeding the standard is allowe d are to be determined in accordance 
with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of other  accessories is to be determined in 
accordance with JIS C 0950.  
10.Notebook computers used for ordinary administrat ive tasks  denotes battery-driven 
client-type computers that are primarily used for a dministrative tasks (excluding cases 
where the computers are transported, or used for ta sks outside of ordinary administrative 
tasks). 
11.Simplification of Equipment and Function  fulfill the following. It is desirable that the 
product is not equipped with interface devices such  as infrared ray communication port, 
serial port, parallel port, PC card, S video termin al. 
a.  Internal modem, CD/DVD, BD, etc., are not included in the basic package, but 
can be added at the time of procurement, or connect ed externally at a later time. 
b.  The product is equipped with multiple USB interface  for connecting peripherals. 
12.The necessary operation running time on a second ary power source (battery) for notebook 
computers used for ordinary administrative tasks in cludes the time necessary to close all 
programs and shut the computer down in case of an e mergency such as a blackout. 
13.Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been recycled 
in the process of manufacturing the product.) 
14.Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental  load has been confirmed  by a third 
party such as an LCA expert of its alleviating effe ct on environmental load, by quantitative, 
objective and scientific analysis and evaluation of  such effect, including possible trade-offs, 
throughout the lifecycle of the product. 
15.Computer body or parts of Evaluation criteria (5 ) include AC adapters etc. attached to main 
equipment. Also, Evaluation criteria (5) is not app lied to server-type computers. 
16.Each procurement organization pays considerable attention to the following: 
a.  Information regarding specified chemical substances  confirmed at the time of 
procurement is maintained and preserved until the p roduct is disposed of in order 
to appropriately manage chemical substances. 
b.  Intended use and business content are carefully rev iewed at the time of 
procurement so that only those equipment and functi ons necessary will be 
acquired. 72 c.  A licensed contract method that involves minimizing  of accessories including 
manuals and recovery CD’s will be considered. 
17. Energy Consumption Efficiency Evaluation Criter ia (2) a. shall be examined appropriately 
taking into account the market trends of products t hat meet the criteria.  
 
 
 
Table 1：Standard energy consumption for Server type compute rs 
Category  Standard energy 
consumption  Type of CPU Number of CPU  
sockets  
x86 1 8.9  
2 11.9  
4 8.9  
SPARC 1 6.3  
2 4.2  
4 3.5  
Power 1 4.6  
2 4.9  
4 4.2  
Notes: 
1.  x86  is a central processing unit designed to be able t o execute an instruction having a 
different number of bits, other than a central proc essing unit specifically designed for 
each computer, and is a 32-bit processor. 64-bit co mpatible with the architecture. 
2.  SPARC  is a central processing unit other than the central  processing unit designed to be 
able to execute instructions with different numbers  of bits, with a function to execute 
decimal floating-point arithmetic and a register co ntrol function. The register control 
function has a mechanism for saving and restoring t he contents of a register in the 
central processing unit, so that the contents of a register used in the main program can 
be saved and restored in a subroutine program witho ut saving and restoring the contents 
in a memory. Refers to the function that can be use d. 
3.  Power  means that among the central processing units othe r than the central processing 
unit designed to execute instructions with differen t number of bits, it has a function to 
execute decimal floating point arithmetic, but it d oes not have register control function. 
4.  The method of calculating energy consumption effici ency according to “3. Energy 
Consumption Efficiency” in “Criteria for Judgment o f Manufacturers of Energy 
Consumption Equipment, etc. for Improving Energy Co nsumption Performance of 
Computers” (Notification 69 of Ministry of Economy,  Trade and Industry in 2019) 
Measurement method (1)”. 
 
 
 
  73 Table 2: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for  Crient-type Computers 
Category  
Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency Type of product  Pscor e Screen 
size case 
capacity  C
at 
eg 
or 
y  
na 
m
e  
Notebook 
Computer Less 
than 8 Less 
than 15   - A E=5.21+TEC MEM +TEC DIS +TEC ST +TEC GR  
15 or 
more  - B E=7.75+TEC MEM +TEC DIS +TEC ST +TEC GR  
8or 
more  - - C E=11.34+TEC MEM +TEC DIS +TEC ST +TEC GR  
Des kto 
p 
persona 
l 
comput 
er Integr 
ated 
type Less 
than 8 - - D E=39.87+TEC MEM +TEC DIS +TEC ST +TEC GR  
8or 
more  - - E E=53.32+TEC MEM +TEC DIS +TEC ST +TEC GR  
Separ 
able 
type - - Less 
than 5L  F E=29.59+TEC MEM + TEC ST +TEC GR  
- - 5L or 
more  
Less than 
20L  G E=31.33+TEC MEM +TEC ST +TEC GR +TEC PW  
- - 20L or 
more 
Less than 
35L  H E=28.45+TEC MEM +TEC ST +TEC GR +TEC PW  
- - 35L or 
more  I E=40.47+TEC MEM +TEC ST +TEC GR +TEC PW  
Notes: 
1. Integrated desktop personal computer  refers to a desktop computer in which a 
computer main body and a display receive AC power v ia one AC power cable and 
function as a single device. 
2. Separable desktop personal computer  refers to a desktop computer comprising a 
computer body without a display and an external dis play. 
3. P score  is a numerical value obtained by multiplying the n umber of cores of the central 
processing unit by the clock frequency (unit: gigah ertz) of the central processing unit. 
4.Screen size  is a value obtained by dividing the numerical valu e of the diagonal outer 
diameter of the display screen in centimeters by 2. 54 and rounding to the second 
decimal place. 
5. Case capacity  is a numerical value, expressed in liters, of the capacity of a case for 
housing components constituting hardware in an elec tronic computer. 
6 E represents the following numerical value. 
E：Standard energy consumption efficiency Unit : kWh/y ear ） 
7.The value of TEC  MEM  shall be calculated by the following formula. 
TEC MEM ＝MMAX ×αM 74 MMAX ：Maximum storage capacity excluding cache memory (gi gabytes). 
The numerical value of αM shall be the numerical value listed in the right column 
of the following table according to the category li sted in the left column of the 
following table. 
Category  αM 
Category A, B and C 0.186  
Category D, E, G H and I 0.248  
 
8. TEC DIS  shall be calculated according to the categories li sted in the left column of the 
following table, using the calculation formulas lis ted in the right column of the table 
Category Screen 
size  TEC DIS  
Category A, B 
and C - TEC DIS  
Category D and 
E Less 
than 17.4  TEC DIS ＝(8.76×0.30 )×(( S÷2.54 2)× 
0.0300 ＋r×0.244 ) 
17.4 or 
more  TEC DIS ＝(8.76×0.35 ）×(( S÷2.54 2)× 
0.0300 ＋r×0.244 ) 
S: Numerical value obtained by multiplying the vert ical dimension of the display 
screen by the horizontal dimension and rounding off  two decimal places (unit: 
square centimeter) 
r: Total number of pixels displayed on the screen ( unit: megapixel) 
 
9. TEC ST  shall be the numerical value shown in the right co lumn of the following table 
according to the Category shown in the left column of the following table, and shall be 0 
if neither 2.5 type magnetic disk device nor 3.5 ty pe magnetic disk device is provided. 
Category  Type of magnetic disk unit  TEC ST  
Category A, B and C  - 2.510  
Category D, E, F, G, H 
and I Having a 2.5 -inch magnetic disk 
drive  3.140  
Having a 3.5 -inch magnetic disk 
drive  20.380  
 
10. TEC GR  shall be calculated according to the category show n in the left column of 
the following table by the calculation formula show n in the right column of the 
table, and shall be set to 0 when there is no indep endent GPU. 
Category  TEC GR  
Cate gory A, B and C TEC GR ＝4.198  
Category D, E, F,G, H and I TEC GR ＝0.587 ×.5 ＋30.463  
FB: Memory area for temporarily storing image data to be displayed on the screen 
(unit: gigabit / second) 
However, if the TEC GR  is 130 or more as a result of the above calculatio n formula, 
the value of 130 shall be used. 
 
11.The value of TEC PW  shall be calculated by the following formula. 75 TEC PW  = P AC  ×0.0543 
PAC : Rated input of internal power supply (unit: W) 
 
12.Energy consumption efficiency is calculated acco rding to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (2),” based on “Crit eria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. re lated to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of computers. (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.69 of 2019) 
 
 
 
Table 3-1: Mode Weightings for Desktop, Integrated Desktop Computers and Thin 
Clients  
Mode Conventional Proxy Base Capability / Full 
Capability 
TOFF  45% 20% 
TSL  5% 45% 
TLI  15% 5% 
TSI  35% 30% 
Notes: 
Products that use the proxy-compatible / all-compat ible mode ratio satisfy either 
Condition 1 or Condition 2 below. Same applies for Table 3-2. 
[Condition 1] 
Complete non-patented complete network connectivity  (proxy compatible / all 
compatible) standards. 
Full network connectivity capabilities that you act ually use are enabled by default at 
the factory. 
[Condition 2] 
Enable sleep mode or alternative low power modes th at maintain network connection 
with less than 2W power. 
 
 
 
Table 3-2: Mode Weightings for Notebook Computers 
Mode Conventional Proxy Capability, Full Capability  
TOFF  25% 25% 
TSL  35% 45% 
TLI  10% 5% 
TSI  30% 25% 
 
 76  
Table3-3 : Internal Power Supply Efficiency Allowan ce (A) 
Supply 
Type Computer 
Type Minimum Efficiency at 
Specified Proportion of Rated 
Output Current Minimum 
Average 
Efficiency  Allowance 
PSU 
10% 20% 50% 100%  
Internal 
Power 
Supply 
(IPS) Desktop 0.86  0.92 0.92 0.89 - 0.015 
0.90  0.90 0.94 0.90 - 0.03 
Integrated 
Desktop 0.86  0.90 0.92 0.89 - 0.015 
0.90  0.92 0.94 0.90 - 0.04 
 
 
 
Table 3-4 : Base TEC (TEC BASE ) Allowances for Desktop Computers or Integrated 
Desktop Computers 
Category 
Name Graphics Capability Desktop or Integrated Desktop 
Performance Base Allowance 
0 Any Graphics P≤3 69.0 
I1 
Integrated or Switchable 
Graphics  3<P≤6 112.0 
I2 6<P≤7 120.0 
I3 P>7 135.0 
D1 Discrete Graphics 3<P≤9 115.0 
D2 P>9 135.0 
Notes: 
Calculation formula of P is as follows. Same applie s for Table3-5. 
P = [number of CPU cores] × [CPU clock speed (GHz)]  
Where number of cores represents the number of phys ical CPU cores and CPU clock 
speed represents the Max TDP core frequency, not th e turbo boost frequency. 
 
 
 
Table 3-5 : Base TEC (TEC BASE ) Allowances for Notebook Computers  
Category Name Notebook 
Performance Base TEC Allowances  
0 P≤2 6.5 
1 2<P<8 8.0 
2 P≧8 14.0 
 
 77 Table3-6: TEC GR  Functional Adder Allowances for Desktop, Integrate d Desktop, 
Notebook Computers and Thin Client 
Adder Allowances Category Desktop Integrated Deskto p Notebook 
TEC MEM (kWh) 0.8 2.4×(0.294GB) 
TEC GR 
(kWh) G1 FB_BW ≤16 36 
29.3×tanh(0.003 
8×FB_BW-
0.137)+13.4 G2 16<FB_BW ≤32 51 
G3 32<FB_BW ≤64 64 
G4 64<FB_BW ≤96 83 
G5 96<FB_BW ≤128 105 
G6 FB_BW>128 
Frame Buffer Data 
Width  
<192bit 115 
G7 FB_BW>128 
Frame Buffer Data 
Width  
≥192bit 130 
TEC SW (kWh) 0.5×G1 N/A 
TEC EEE (kWh) 8.76×0.2×(0.15+0.35) N/A 
TEC ST (kWh) 26 2.6 
TEC DIS (kWh) N/A 8.76×0.35× 
(1+EP)× 
(4×r+0.05×A) 8.76×0.30× 
(1+EP)× 
(2×r+0.02×A) 
Notes: 
1.  TEC MEM Adder: GB applies per GB installed in the system. 
2.  TEC GR Adder: Applies to only the first dGfx installed in the system, but not 
switchable Graphics. 
3.  FB_BW: Is the display frame buffer bandwidth in gig abytes per second (GB/s), 
calculated as follows:  
BF_BW=Data Rate [Mhz] × Frame Buffer Data Width [bi ts] / ( 8 × 1000 ) 
4.  TEC SW  Applies to automated switching that is enabled by default in Desktops and 
Integrated Desktops. However, for Desktop and Integ rated Desktop systems 
providing Switchable Graphics and enabling it by de fault, an allowance equal to 
50% of the G1 graphics allowance for the platform t ype (Desktop or Integrated 
Desktop) may be applied. 
5.  TEC EEE : Applies per IEEE 802.3az-compliant (Energy Effici ent Ethernet) Gigabit 
Ethernet port enabled as shipped. 
6.  TEC ST  applies once if system has more than one Additiona l Internal Storage 
element. 
7.  EP on TEC DIS  is the allowance for Enhanced-performance Display,  as follows. 
EP=0: No Enhanced Performance Display 78 EP=0.3: Enhanced Performance Display, the diagonal of the screen is less 
than 27 inches 
EP=0.75: Enhanced Performance Display, the diagonal  of the screen is 27 
inches or more 
r i s the Screen resolution in megapixels; and A is vie wable screen area in 
square inches.  
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of computers that meets the cri teria, to the total number of computers to 
be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in  the fiscal year. 
  79 6-2. Magnetic Disk Drive Units 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Magnetic disk 
drive units Evaluation Criteria  
The energy consumption efficiency shall not exceed the standard 
energy consumption obtained by the formula of appli cable category in 
Table. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the 
standard content rate.  
(2)  A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used  machines, and 
a system for the proper disposal of components whic h cannot be 
reused or recycled is considered. 
(3)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, re use and 
recycling. 
(4)  The item uses a large amount of recycled components  that have 
already been used, and uses as large amount of recy cled plastic as 
possible if plastic components are used. 
(5)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.   
(6)  If plastic is used for product packaging or stowage , recycled 
plastic or “plant based plastics whose reduction ef fect of 
environmental load has been confirmed” shall be use d as much as 
possible. 
Notes:  
1.  Magnetic disc drive units that meet any of the foll owing criteria will not be regarded 
as a magnetic disc drive unit  under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this 
section. 
a.  Memory less than 1 gigabyte. 
b.  Disc diameter less than 40 mm. 
c.  Maximum data transfer speed exceeds 70 gigabytes/se cond. 
2.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether   
3.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances  denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance  with JIS C 0950 
4.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 80 5.  Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed  by a third 
party such as an LCA expert of its alleviating effe ct on environmental load, by 
quantitative, objective and scientific analysis and  evaluation of such effect, including 
possible trade-offs, throughout the lifecycle of th e product. 
 
 
 
Table: Calculation Formula of Standard Energy Consu mption Efficiency for Magnetic 
Disc Drive Units 
Category Calculation formula 
of 
standard energy 
consumption 
efficiency Type of 
magnetic 
disk unit Shape and 
performance of 
Magnetic disk unit Revolution 
Speed Use 
Single unit  
Disk Disk size exceeding 
75 mm; 1 disk   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
30.8) 
Disk size exceeding 
75 mm; 2 or 3 disks   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
31.2) 
Disk size exceedi ng 
75 mm; 4 disks or 
more   E=exp(2.11×ln(N)-
23.5) 
Disk size exceeding 50 
mm 
but not over 75 mm; 1 
disk 5,000 rpm or 
less  E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
29.8) 
Over 5,000 
rpm but less 
than 6,000 rpm   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
31.2) 
Over  6,000 
rpm  E=exp(4.30×ln(N)-
43.5) 
Disk size exceeding 50 
mm 
but not over 75 mm; 2 
or 3disks 5,000 rpm or 
less  E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
31.5) 
Over 5 ,000 
rpm but less 
than 6,000 rpm   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
32.2) 
Over  6,000 
rpm  E=exp(4.58×ln(N)-
46.8) 
Disk size exceeding 50 
mm 
but not over 75 mm ; 4 
disks or more   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
31.9) 
Disk size exceeding 40 
mm 
but not over 50 mm; 1 
disk   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
30.2) 
Disk size exceeding 40 
mm 
but not over 50 mm; 2  
disks   E=exp(2.98×ln(N)-
30.9) 
Subsystem    Ones for 
main E=exp(1.85×ln(N)-
18.8) 81 frame 
server 
  Other E=exp (1.56 ×ln (N)-
17.7) 
Notes: 
1. Main frame server  refers to server-type computers (computers designe d to provide 
service and the like via a network) mounted with a dedicated CISC (which is, among 
CPUs designed to be able to execute multiple comman ds differing in the number of bits, 
ones each of which is designed for exclusive use by  a computer). 
2. E and N represent the following values. 
E : Standard energy consumption efficiency 
N : Number of revolutions (per minute) 
3. ln represents a logarithm having e as the base. 
4. Single unit Disk refers to a single disk drive. Subsystem refers to a product with multiple disk 
drives. 
5. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated acco rding to “3 Energy Consumption Efficiency 
Measurement Methods” of “Criteria for Judgments by Manufacturers of Energy 
Consumption Equipment, etc. for Improving Energy Co nsumption Performance of 
Magnetic Disk Drives” (2010 Ministry of Economy, Tr ade and Industry Notification No. 
75). 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of magnetic disk units meeting the criteria to the total number of magnetic 
disk units to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
 
  82 6-3. Displays 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Displays Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  For computer monitors, the total energy consumption  calculated on 
the calculation formula in Note 3 shall not exceed the maximum 
total energy consumption calculated on the calculat ion formula in 
Note 4 a. 
(2)  For signage displays, following requirements shall be met. 
(3)  On mode power consumption calculated on the calcula tion formula 
in Note 5 shall not exceed the maximum on mode powe r 
consumption calculated on the calculation formula i n Note 6 a. 
(4)  Sleep mode power consumption shall not exceed the s leep mode 
power consumption standard rate calculated on the c alculation 
formula in Note 7. 
(5)  Off mode power consumption shall be 0.5W or less. 
(6)  Equipped with a function which allows instantaneous  full-power 
operation on resuming working. 
(7)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the 
standard content rate. The content rate can be easi ly confirmed on 
websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used  products, and 
a system for the proper disposal of components whic h cannot be 
reused or recycled shall be in place. 
(2)  The item shall have an improved design for its long  life, resource 
efficiency, and reuse of its parts or recycling of its material, 
complying with the standards of the Act on the Prom otion of 
Effective Utilization of Resources. 
(3)  The item uses as many recycled components as possib le or as much 
recycled plastic as possible, in case plastic compo nents are applied.  
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(5)  A system for collection and reuse/recycling of pack aging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1. Displays under consideration in the evaluation criteria of t his section denotes products 
with a display screen and associated electronics, o ften encased in a single housing, that 
as their primary function produce visual informatio n from a computer, workstation, or 
server via one or more inputs, external storage, or  a network connection (computer 
monitors and signage displays). Computer monitors a re intended for one person to use at 
a desk. Signage displays are intended for a number of people to use them away from the 
desk and shall meet two or more criteria listed bel ow from (1) to (4): 
(1)  Diagonal screen size is greater than 30 inches 
(2)  Maximum reported luminance per square meter is grea ter than 400 candelas 
(400cd/m2) 
(3)  Pixel density is 5,000 pixels per square inch (5,00 0 pixels/in2) or less 83 (4)  Shippable without a mounting stand 
2.  The operation modes to be used in evaluation criter ia (2), (3) and Note 3 to 7 are as follows. 
However, in the case of products without an off mod e, evaluation criteria (3) shall not be 
applied.  
a.  On mode: The mode in which the display has been act ivated, and is providing 
the primary function. 
b.  Sleep mode: A low-power mode in which the display p rovides one or more non-
primary protective functions or continuous function s. During the sleep mode 
following functions can be activated. 
・ Facilitate the activation of on mode via remote swi tch, touch technology, 
and internal sensor/timer 
・ Providing information or displaying status includin g time 
・ Keep sensor-based functions 
・ Maintain a network presence 
c.  Off mode: The mode where the display is connected t o a power source, 
produces no visual information, and cannot be switc hed into any other mode 
with the remote control unit, an internal signal, o r an external signal. The 
display may only exit this mode by direct user actu ation of an integrated power 
switch or control. Some products may not have an of f mode. 
 
3.  The total energy consumption related to a computer monitor is calculated by the following 
formula. 
ETEC ＝8.76 ×(0.35 ×PON ＋0.65 ×PSLEEP ) 
ETEC ：Total energy consumption (unit : kWh) 
PON ：On mode power consumption (unit : W) 
PSLEEP ：Sleep mode power consumption (unit : W) 
4.  The maximum total energy consumption, the automatic  brightness control allowance, and 
the touch technology allowance for a computer monit or are calculated by the following 
formula. 
(1)  Maximum total energy consumption 
Maximum total energy consumption (kWh) 
＝(E TEC MAX ＋EEP ＋EABC ＋EN＋EOS ＋ET)×eff AC_DC  
ETEC_MAX  is the maximum total energy consumption requiremen t calculated by 
Table 1 (unit: kWh) 
EEP  is the enhanced performance display allowance calc ulated by Table 2 (unit: 
kWh) 
EABC  is the automatic brightness control allowance calc ulated by (2)below (unit: 
kWh) 
EN is the full network connectivity allowance: E N=2.9 (kWh) 
EOS  is the occupancy sensor allowance: E OS =1.7 (kWh) 
ET is the Touch Technology allowance calculated by fo llowing (3) (unit: kWh) 
eff AC DC  is the standard adjustment for AC-DC power convers ion losses that occur 
at the device powering the display, and equals to 1 .0 for AC-powered displays 
and 0.85 for DC power displays. 
 
(2)  Energy automatic brightness control 84 For computer monitors with automatic brightness con trol enabled by default, an 
energy allowance (E ABC ) shall be added to E TEC_MAX if the on mode power 
reduction (R ABC ) is 20% or more. 
On mode power reduction (R ABC ) and energy automatic brightness control （EABC ）
calculation method are calculated by the following formulas. 
RABC ＝100 ×((P300 －P12) ／P300 ） 
P300 : the On Mode power, as measured at an ambient ligh t level of 300 lux 
(unit: W) 
P12 : the On Mode power, as measured at an ambient ligh t level of 12 lux 
(unit: W) 
EABC (kWh) ＝0.05 ×ETEC_MAX  
ETEC_MAX ：the Maximum total energy consumption(unit: kWh) 
 
(3)  Touch technology allowance  for monitors 
ET (kWh)=0.15 ×ETEC MAX  
ETEC_MAX: the maximum total energy consumption (unit: kWh) 
5. Maximum on mode power for signage displays is ca lculated by the following formulas. 
PON_MAX ＝(4.0 ×10-5×ℓ×A)+119 ×tanh (0.0008 ×(A －200.0)+0.11)+6 
PON_MAX  is the Maximum on Mode Power (unit: W) 
A: screen area (unit: square inches) 
ℓ : maximum measured luminance (unit: cd/m2) 
6. On mode power consumption and P ABC  for signage displays  
a.  On mode power consumption 
On mode power consumption =P ON MAX  +P ABC  
PON_MAX  is the maximum on mode power consumption (unit: W)  
PABC  is the on mode power allowance for ABC calculated by b. below (unit: 
W) 
b.  Energy allowance for automatic brightness control  
In the case of a signage display with automatic bri ghtness control by default, 
the on mode power reduction rate R ABC  is calculated by Note 4 b, and when 
the R ABC  is 20% or more, the automatic brightness control a llowance P ABC  
is applied. The automatic brightness control allowa nce P ABC  is calculated 
by the following formula. 
 
PABC  (W) ＝0.05 ×PON_MAX 
PON_MAX  : the Maximum On Mode Power requirement (unit: W) 
 
7. The sleep mode power consumption standard relate d to the signage display is  calculated 
by the following formula. The maximum sleep mode po wer consumption and allowance 
are shown in the table below. 
Sleep mode power consumption ＝PSLEEP_MAX +P N+P OS +P T 
PSLEEP  : measured sleep mode power (unit: W) 
PSLEEP_MAX  : maximum sleep mode power requirement (unit: W) 
PN: full network connectivity allowance (unit: W) 
POS: occupancy sensor allowance (unit: W) 
PT: touch technology allowance (unit: W) 
 85 Table : Sleep mode power requirement and energy all owance by screen size 
Screen size  
(inches) PSLEEP_MAX  
(W) PN 
(W) POS  
(W ） PT 
(W ） 
Screen size  
≦30 0.5 3.0 0.3 0.0 
Screen size  
＞30 1.5 
 
8. Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
9. Evaluation criteria (5) is to be applied to pers onal computer monitors. The standard content 
rate of specified chemical substances denotes the o ne provided by JIS C 0950 (The 
marking for presence of the specific chemical subst ances for electrical and electronic 
equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemica l substances, chemical element 
symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and standard content rate). Items whose 
content rates are allowed to exceed the standard sh all be determined in accordance with 
Appendix B of the JIS. Handling of other accessorie s is to be determined in accordance 
with JIS C 0950. 
10.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic of products that hav e been discarded after 
use, remnants discarded during the manufacturing pr ocess, or the  defective articles (this 
excludes, however, plastic that has been recycled i n the process of manufacturing the 
product). 
11. In order to manage chemical substances adequate ly, each procurement organization is to 
manage and maintain content information of specific  chemical substances until the 
product is discarded. 
12. As the measuring method for standard energy con sumption applies the “Appendix Table 
2-2 (Effective in October, 2016) of the Internation al ENERGY STAR Program Operating 
Specification (enforced in July, 2014). 
 86 Table 1: Standard of maximum total energy consumpti on at on mode for displays  
Viewable screen area(in 2)  E TEC MAX (kWh) 
A＜130 （6.13×r ）+（0.06×A ）+9 
130 ≦A＜150 （6.13×r ）+（0.69×A ）-72.38 
150 ≦A＜180 （6.13×r ）+（0.21×A ）-0.50 
180 ≦A＜200 （6.13×r ）+（0.05×A ）+28 
200 ≦A＜230 （6.13×r ）+（0.03×A ）+31.33 
230 ≦A＜280 （6.13×r ）+（0.2×A ）-7 
280 ≦A＜300 （6.13×r ）+49 
300 ≦A＜500 （6.13×r ）+（0.2×A ）-11 
A≧500 （6.13×r ）+89 
Note: 
r represents screen resolution in megapixel(MP), and  A represents viewable screen 
area(in 2). 
 
Table2: Calculation of energy Allowance for Enhance d Performance Displays for 
computer monitor  
Color gamut criteria Allowance (kWh) 
Color gamut support is 32.9% 
of CIE LUV or greater 0.15g(E TEC_MAX -6.13r) 
Color gamut support is 38.4% 
of CIE LUV or greater 0.65g(E TEC_MAX -6.13r) 
Note: 
1. For computer monitors meeting all of the followi ng a. to c., the allowable value of the 
power consumption of the performance enhanced displ ay calculated according to this 
table can be used as the maximum total energy consu mption. 
a.  Contrast ratio of at least 60:1 shall be measured a t a horizontal viewing angle 
of at least 85° from the perpendicular on a flat sc reen and at least 83° from the 
perpendicular on a curved screen, with or without a screen cover glass;  
b.  A native resolution shall be 2.3 megapixels (MP) or  more ; 
c.  Color gamut shall be 32.9% of CIE LUV or more. 
2.  ETEC_MAX  represents the maximum total energy consumption re quirement, and r 
represents the screen resolution (in MP). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of displays meeting the criteri a to the total number of displays to be 
purchased (including lease/rental agreements) in th e fiscal year. 
  87 6-4. Recording Medias  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Recording 
medias Evaluation Criteria 
Meet one of the criteria below (Evaluation Criteria  applies to the case).  
(1)  Recycled plastic makes up at least 40% of the weigh t of the plastic 
part. 
(2)  Slim-type case that is 5 mm or less in thickness or  assembled type 
case (spindle-type case etc.). 
(3)  Uses plant based plastics whose reduction effect of  environmental 
load has been confirmed. 
(4)  In case of paper products, recycled pulp content is  70% or more. If 
virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwo od used is to be 
in compliance with the regulations concerning fores try in its 
country or geographical area of origin. This does n ot apply to virgin 
pulp manufactured with lumber from thinning, or vir gin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces obtained  from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over fro m forestry, or 
lumber with a small diameter. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  In case of products that include paper as its mater ial, and if virgin 
pulp is used as the raw material, the pulpwood used  is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustain able operation. 
This does not apply to virgin pulp manufactured wit h lumber from 
thinning, or virgin pulp manufactured by using recy cled wood 
pieces such as obtained from plywood or lumber fact ories, material 
left over from forestry, or lumber with a small dia meter. 
(2)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
Notes: 
1.  Recording medias  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section denotes 
CD-R, CD-RW, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD-RAM, BD-R, BD-RE wi th a diameter of 
12cm. 
2.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.). 
3.  Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed  denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative,  objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
4.  Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest where pulpwood 
producing paper originates from is to be conducted in accordance with the Forest 
Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality an d Sustainability of Wood and 88 Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” In addition, ce rtification system of forest, 
timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized fo r confirmation of legality. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of recording media meeting the criteria to the total number of recording 
medias to be purchased in the fiscal year.  
 
  89 7. Office Equipment, etc. 
7-1. Paper Shredders 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Paper shredders  Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Stand-by mode power consumption is 1.5W or less. 
(2)  If the machines equipped with low power mode or off  mode, the 
transition time to low-power mode or off mode is se t under 10 
minutes at the time of shipment. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the standard 
content rate. 
(2)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of used machines, 
and a system for the proper disposal of components which cannot be 
reused or recycled is considered. 
(3)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, re use and recycling. 
(4)  The item uses a large amount of recycled components  that have 
already been used, and uses as large amount of recy cled plastic as 
possible if plastic components are used. 
(5)  The item takes into consideration the reduction in volume of 
shredded paper and ease of recycling. 
(6)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(7)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1.  Paper shredders that meet any of the following crit eria will not be regarded as a Paper 
shredder  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section. 
a. The output of shredding motor exceeds 500W. 
b. Shredding motor does not stop automatically when  not in use. 
2.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
3.  Stand-by mode power consumption denotes electricity that is consumed during 
inactivity with the power turned on. However, it de notes power consumption in low 
power mode or off mode, if the machines equipped wi th these mode. 
4.  Low-power mode.  This is the low power consumption state that the p aper shredder 
automatically enters after a specified period of in activity. 
5.  Off mode . This is the state after the power is shut off by the automatic shut off function 
that operates after a specified period of inactivit y. 
6.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether.   90 7.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate).  Items for which content rate exceeding the standard  is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS.  
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of paper shredders meeting the criteria to the total number of paper 
shredders to be purchased (including lease/rental a greements) in the fiscal year.  91 7-2. Digital Duplicators  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Digital 
duplicators Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Energy consumption rate does not exceed the number noted for each 
category in Table. 
(2)  When the paper used meets the criteria for specifie d procurement, the 
product is capable of using the specified procureme nt material. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the standard 
content rate. 
(2)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of used ink cartridges 
is considered. 
(3)  Batteries do not include cadmium alloys, lead alloy s, or mercury 
alloys. This is not required, however, if batteries  including these 
substances are collected, reused, or recycled witho ut failure, and/or 
properly processed. 
(4)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, re use and recycling. 
(5)  The item uses a large amount of recycled components  that have 
already been used, and uses as large amount of recy cled plastic as 
possible if plastic components are used. 
(6)  Default time to low power mode (the low power consu mption state 
that the copier automatically enters after a specif ied period of 
inactivity. Same definition applies below.) and aut o shut-off mode (the 
power is shut off by the automatic off function aft er a specified period 
of inactivity. Same definition applies below) are t o be set at 5 minutes 
or less at the time of shipment. For machines whose  default time 
cannot be changed after shipment, the original defa ult time should be 
maintained. 
(7)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(8)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Digital duplicators  are full-auto duplicator system through the method  of stencil 
duplicating with digital reproduction function. 
2.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
3.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS 92 4. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been recycled 
in the process of manufacturing the product) 
 
 
 
Table: Energy Efficiency Criteria for Digital Dupli cators 
 Energy Efficiency for Digital Duplicators(W) 
A3 adaptable machines B4 adaptable machines, 
A4 adaptable machines 
Printer 
function 
In operation Printer 
function 
Idle Printer 
function 
In operation Printer 
function 
Idle 
 Printer-interface built-in 
type 35.5 28 22 20 
Printer-
interface 
non-
built-in 
type With printer 
interface 35.5 - 22 - 
Without 
printer 
interface - 24 - 19 
Notes: 
1.  Printer-interface built-in type  denotes those printers equipped, as a standard feat ure 
that cannot be removed as a product, a function to work as an output printer for 
personal computers. 
2.  Printer-interface non-built-in type  denotes those printers to which a function to work  
as an output printer for personal computers can be added, and those printers that cannot 
function as an output printer for personal computer s. 
3.  A3 adaptable machines, B4 adaptable machines, and A4 adaptable machines follow 
the criteria below: 
A3 adaptable machines: maximum print-out size is 28 7mm x 409 mm, or larger. 
B4 adaptable machines: maximum print-out size is 25 0 mm x 353 mm, or larger. 
A4 adaptable machines: maximum print-out size is 20 4 mm x 288 mm, or larger. 
4.  Energy efficiency should be calculated using the be low formula: 
E = (A+ 7 × B) / 8 
A: Electricity consumption per hour at start up (Wh ) 
Turn on the machine, and set printing speed at defa ult. Create the first plate using 
the test chart, and print using the criteria design ated in (1). Immediately follow 
by creating the second plate under the same conditi ons, and print using the 
criteria designated in (1). Leave the machine inact ive in that condition. 
The printing speed may not be changed after the mac hine is turned on. 
B: Electricity consumption per hour during normal u se (Wh) 
After completing the “A” measurement, create the fi rst plate and print using the 
criteria designated in (1). Immediately follow by c reating the second plate under 
the same conditions, and print using the criteria d esignated in (1). Leave the 
machine inactive in that condition. 
 
Measurement criteria for A and B 93 (1)  Number of copies per a plate: 200 copies/plate 
(2)  Number of plates per hour: 2 plates 
(3)  Number of copies per hour: 400 copies / hour 
(4)  Printing speed: The default speed for start-up set at the time of shipment 
(5)  Test chart: A4, area covered by image 4-7 % 
(6)  Standard printing paper: Good quality paper at 64g/ m² 
(7)  Environmental criteria during measurement:  
Temperature: 21±3 degrees C  
Humidity: 65±10% 
Leave the machine inactive for at least 12 hours be fore measurement 
(8)  For measurement while printer function is idle, con firm the auto shut-off 
mode or the switch to low power mode during the ina ctivity period. 
(9)  The default transition time to low power mode and a uto shut-off mode 
should be set at 5 minutes. This does not apply to machines whose settings 
cannot be changed after shipment. 
(10)  For measurement while printer function is in operat ion, the auto shut-off 
mode cannot be operated. Confirm the switch to low power mode during the 
inactivity period. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of digital duplicators meeting the criteria to the total number of digital 
duplicators to be purchased (including lease/rental  agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  94 7-3. Clocks 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Clocks Evaluation Criteria 
Fulfill one of the criteria below. 
(1)  Move with solar battery or rechargeable battery (secondary cell) , 
without using disposable batteries. 
(2)  In the case of using both of solar battery and disp osable batteries, 
the disposable batteries will last at least 5 years  in usual use 
situation. 
(3)  In the case of using disposable batteries only, the  battery will last 
at least 5 years. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  The disposable battery number of use is as less as possible. 
(2)  The item is made of as large amount of recycled pla stic as possible 
if plastic components are used. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
Notes: 
1. Clocks under consideration in the evaluation criteria of t his section denote wall clocks 
uses in ordinary office and meeting room, excluding  large sized clocks uses in the hall, 
etc.  
2. Usual use situation denotes the clocks are used putting on the opened w all and pillar in 
the room. 
3. Disposable battery’s life of Evaluation Criteria  (3) is to be measured in accordance with 
JIS B 7026. 
4. Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles. (This excludes , however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.) 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of clocks meeting the criteria to the total number of clocks to be purchased 
in the fiscal year. 
  95 7-4. Electronic Table Calculators  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Electronic 
table 
calculators Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  50% or more of its power source is obtained from so lar battery. 
(2)  Recycled plastic comprises 40% or more by weight of  the total 
plastic used. 
(3)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the 
standard content rate.  
 
Factors for Consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1.  Electronic table calculators under consideration in this section refer to calcul ators 
used for ordinary administrative tasks. 
2.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles. (This excludes , however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.) 
3.  Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
4.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the one provided by 
JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of the specifi c chemical substances for electrical 
and electronic equipment) Appendix A, chart A.1 (sp ecified chemical substances, 
chemical element symbol, substances applicable for calculation, and standard content 
rate). Items whose content rates are allowed to exc eed the standard shall be determined in 
accordance with Appendix B of the JIS. Handling of other accessories is to be determined 
in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of electronic table calculators  meeting the criteria to the total number of 
electronic table calculators to be purchased in the  fiscal year. 
  96 7-5. Batteries  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Disposable 
batteries and 
small 
rechargeable 
batteries Evaluation Criteria 
Meet one of the criteria below.  
(1)  Disposable batteries exceed the smallest average du ration listed in 
accordance with load resistance in Table below. 
(2)  The battery is a small rechargeable battery (second ary cell).  
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of used small 
rechargeable battery, and a system for the proper d isposal of 
components which cannot be reused or recycled is co nsidered. 
(2)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
Notes: 
1.  Disposable batteries and small rechargeable batteri es  under consideration in the 
evaluation criteria of this section denote “D”C” AA ” or “AAA.” 
2.  Smallest average duration is to be measured in accordance with the electric d ischarge 
test criteria designated in JIS C 8515. Disposable batteries that comply with the 
alkaline battery designated in JIS C 8515 meets thi s Evaluation Criteria.  
 
Table: Smallest Average Duration for Disposable Bat teries 
Common 
name Main 
applications  Discharge test conditions Smallest Average Duration  
Load 
Resistanc 
e 
(Ω) Discharg 
e time 
per day Cut-
off 
voltag 
e Initial 
Usage After 12 
Months 
Storage and 
Recommende 
d Period of 
Usage 
D 
(61.5mm 
: 
34.2mm)  Portable 
light 2.2 Ω Note 1 0.9V 750minuit 
s 675minuits 
Equipment 
and toys 
using motors  2.2 Ω 1hour 0.8V 16hours 14hours 
Portable 
stereo 600mA 2hours 0.9V 11hours 9.9hours 
C 
(50.0mm 
: 
26.2mm)  Equipment 
and toys 
using motors  3.9 Ω 1hour 0.8V 14hours 12hours 
Portable 
stereo 3.9 Ω Note 1 0.9V 790minuit 
s 710minuits 
Portable 
stereo 400mA 2hours 0.9V 8hours 7.2hours 
AA 
(50.5mm 
: Digital 
camera 1,500mW  
650mW Note 2 1.05V  40times 36times 
Portable 3.9 Ω Note3 0.9V 230minuit 205minuits 97 14.5mm)  light (LED) s 
Equipment 
and toys 
using motors  3.9 Ω 1hour 0.8V 5hours 4.5hours 
Toys(withou 
t motor)  250mA 1hour 0.9V 5hours 4.5hours 
CD player, 
electronic 
games 100mA 1hour 0.9V 15hours 13hours 
Radio, clock, 
Remote 
controller 50mA Note 4 1.0V 30hours 27hours 
AAA 
(44.5mm 
: 
10.5mm)  Portable 
light 5.1 Ω Note 5 0.9V 130minuit 
s 115minuits 
equipment 
used motor, 
toys 5.1 Ω 1hour 0.8V 120minuit 
s 105minuits 
Digital audio  50mA Note 5 0.9V 12hours 10hours 
Remote 
controller 24 Ω Note 6 1.0V 14.5hours  13.0hours 
Note 1: The cycle of 4 minutes discharge and 11 min utes discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 
Note 2: The cycle of 5 minutes discharge (alternate  discharge of 1,500 mW for 2 seconds 
and 650 mW for 28 seconds) and the 55 minutes disch arge pause are repeated 
continuously for 24 hours. 
Note 3: The cycle of 4 minutes discharge and 56 min ute discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 
Note 4: The cycle of 1 hour discharge and 7 hours d ischarge pause is continuously repeated 
for 24 hours. 
Note 5: The cycle of 1 hour discharge and 11 hours discharge pause is continuously repeated 
for 24 hours. 
Note 6: The cycle of 15 seconds discharge and 45 se cond discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of batteries (D, C, AA, AAA) me eting the criteria to the total number of 
batteries to be purchased in the fiscal year.  
  98 8. Mobile Telephones, etc.  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Cellular phones 
 
PHS 
 
Smart Phones Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Cellular Phones and PHS fulfill either following a.  or b. 
a.  Simplification of additional equipment and function s is 
considered. 
b.  The system allows for upgrading of applications add ed to 
the terminal without exchanging the main body of th e 
machine. 
(2)  The design takes into account the environmental con siderations 
that are included in the evaluation criteria in Tab le, including the 
ease of dismantling for the reuse of parts or recyc ling of 
material. The implementation of environmentally con scious 
design can be easily confirmed on websites and othe r public 
environmental reports. 
(3)  A system is in place for the collection and materia l recycling of 
used products. The implementation rate of system fo r collection 
and material recycling can be easily confirmed on w ebsites of 
manufacturers, communication companies, and sales 
companies, as well as other environmental reports.  
(4)  A system is in place by the manufacturer, communica tion 
company, or sales company for the appropriate dispo sal of parts 
of collected products that cannot be recycled or re used. 
(5)  A system for the repair and storage by the manufact urer, 
communication company, or sales company of renewing  
expendable parts such as the batteries (maintain su pply for six 
years or more after the termination of product manu facturing), 
etc. is in place. 
(6)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the 
standard content rate. The content rate can be easi ly confirmed 
on websites, etc. 
(7)  If plastic is used in the product, information on t he content ratio 
of recycled plastic in the weight of the plastic an d the content 
ratio of “plant based plastic whose reduction effec t of 
environmental load has been confirmed” shall be dis closed. In 
addition, the information can be easily confirmed o n the 
website, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Energy saving devices such as the conservation of e lectricity 
and lower electricity consumption in wait mode are put in place.  
(2)  When rare metals are used for the casing or parts, a system is in 
place to decrease or replace the rare metals as muc h as possible.  
(3)  A system is in place for the repair and for the sto rage of 
replaceable parts for parts other than the main bod y and 
expendables. 
(4)  The use of halogenenate noncombustibles on the casi ng is as 
minimized as possible. 99 (5)  The item is made of as large amount of recycled pla stic as 
possible or “plant based plastic whose reduction ef fect of 
environmental load has been confirmed” if plastic c omponents  
are used for the casing or the parts (including the  recharger). 
(6)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environm ental 
impact upon disposal.  
(7)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, 
etc. is considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Cellular Phones  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section denote a 
mobile station telephone device that connects with cellular phone wireless base station 
by mobile station telephone, and is installed in th e device portable, used for ordinary 
administrative tasks. 
2.  PHS  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section denote a mobile 
station telephone device that without connecting wi th wireless base station public by 
mobile station telephone, and is installed in the d evice portable, used for extension 
ordinary administrative tasks. 
3.  Smart Phones  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section denote a 
terminal that combined portable terminal with the c ellular phone or PHS, the voice call 
function and the Web browse function are attached, and users can extend features 
themselves by adding application softs. 
4.  Simplification of additional equipment and function s  refers to the limiting of 
functions to conversations and mail whenever possib le. 
5.  Evaluation Criteria (2) refers to environmentally c onscious design indicated in each 
evaluation criteria of Table. 
6.  A system is in place for the collection and materia l recycling  in Evaluation Criteria 
(3) denotes the fulfillment of the below requiremen ts.  
A system for collection should fulfill the below re quirements a. b. and c. 
a.  The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a coll ection system located at the store, 
or collection in response to the user’s request) fo r voluntarily collecting (collecting 
on its own or commissioning other comp anies to collect; includes situations where 
multiple businesses undertake the collection togeth er) used products, etc. 
b.  In order to precipitate appropriate collection, the  product name and business name 
(manufacturer brand name is permissible) are marked  on the main body of the 
products for easy acknowledgement at the time of di sposal. 
c.  Specific information for the collection of used pro ducts, etc. (collection method, 
collection location, etc.) are available for the us ers on the package, enclosed printed 
matter, user’s manual, or the website. 
A system for material recycling should fulfill the below requirements d and e. 
d.  A system is in place to recycle metal and plastic, etc. as materials. 
e.  The information for the material used for the parts  is listed as much as possible to 
enable separation upon disposal. 
 
7.  As for Evaluation Criteria (5),  with respect to smartphones, "maintain for six year s or 
more after the termination of product manufacturing ", shall be "maintain for three 
years or more after the termination of product manu facturing", until sufficient products 
are supplied to the market. For this period, consid eration will be made while taking 100 market trend into consideration. For Evaluation Cri teria (5) does not apply in cases 
when applicable machine cannot be used continuously  due to change in the 
communication system 
8.  Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
9.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance  with JIS C 0950. 
10.  Rare metals  refers to the 31 types of metals (the seventeen rar e earth elements are 
considered as one metal type) specified at the Spec ial Meeting for the Comprehensive 
Assessment of Rare Metals at the Mining Panel of th e Ministry of Economy, Trade and 
Industry. 
11.  Recycled Plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
12.  Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed  denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative,  objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
13.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate based on the bio-based synthetic polymer 
content is multiplied by the bio-based synthetic po lymer content rate (ratio of the 
weight of the plant-derived material component cont ained in the plastics based on the 
plant to the plastic weight). 
14.  .Each procurement organization is to take the follo wing into careful account: 
a.  When procuring, consider the objective of use and b usiness type in order to 
determine the necessary type and function. 
b.  Consider the type of contract that would enable the  minimum amount necessary for 
manuals and accessories such as a recharger. 
c.  Confirm and consider factors for consideration spec ified in the user’s manual when 
procuring the merchandise. 
d.  When disposing the terminal due to a renewal of the  mobile phones, etc. terminal, 
etc., proceed in an appropriate manner using the co llection system. 
 
 
 
Table: Design Criteria for Environmental Considerat ion in Mobile Phones, etc. 
Objective Evaluation Criteria Evaluation Standard 
Design with 
considerations for 
reduction Resource efficiency of product 
(minimization of size and 
weight) The volume and weight of product 
is reduced. 101 Energy efficiency of product The energy consumption of product 
is reduced. Attempt is made for 
developing low energy 
consumption technology. 
Longer life of product Reliability and durability of the 
product are either maintained or 
improving. 
Design with 
considerations for 
reuse Design for joint ownership The recharger etc. is designed with 
consideration for ease of reuse. 
Design for easy separation and 
dismantling Separation and dismantling for 
reuse can be performed with ease. 
Design with 
considerations for 
recycling Reduction of environmental 
load when recycling Parts that include rare metals as 
well as types of ordinary metals 
such as steel, copper and aluminum 
are understood. 
Use of complex material and 
processed material that interferes 
with recycling is reduced. 
Structure allows for ease of 
separation and dismantling Structure allows for separation and 
dismantling to convert into material 
and parts that can be used as 
recycled material. 
The structure allows for easy 
dismantling of different materials. 
Separation and dismantling for 
recycling is easy. 
Ease of separation is considered  Material can be easily 
distinguished for recycling. 
The type and quality of plastic used 
for the casing is unified as much as 
possible. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of products meeting the criteri a to the total number of cellular phones, 
PHS and smart phones to be purchased (including lea se and rental) in the fiscal year. 102 9. Home Electronic Appliances  
9-1. Electric Refrigerators, etc.  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Electric 
refrigerators 
 
Electric 
freezers 
 
Electric 
refrigerator- 
freezers Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  For Electric refrigerators and Electric refrigerato r-freezers energy 
consumption rate does not exceed the result using t he formula of each 
category listed in Table as follows. 
a.  Reference value 1 is the standard energy consumptio n rate. 
b.  Reference value 2 is the standard energy consumptio n rate 
calculated using the formula for each category list ed in Table 
multiplied by 100/86 . 
(2)  For Electric freezers energy consumption rate does not exceed the 
result, rounded down to eliminate decimals, of the standard energy 
consumption rate calculated using the formula for e ach category listed 
in Table multiplied by 100/90. 
a.  Reference value 1 is the standard energy consumptio n rate. 
b.  Reference value 2 is the standard energy consumptio n rate 
calculated using the formula for each category list ed in Table 
multiplied by 100/90. 
(3)  Fluorocarbons are not used as refrigerant or expand ing agent for 
insulation. 
(4)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the standard 
content rate. The content rate can be easily confir med on websites, etc.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The item is designed with consideration for long-te rm use and 
conservation of resources. It should be designed so  that it can be easily 
dismantled and its materials separated to facilitat e refurbishment and 
reuse, based on the evaluation criteria of the Act on the Promotion of 
Effective Utilization of Resources. 
(2)  The item is made of as large amount of recycled pla stic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3)  Organic solvent or paint with as low odor as possib le is used as 
coating. 
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(5)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1.  Electric refrigerators and electric refrigerator-fr eezers that meet any of the following 
criteria from a to d will not be considered as Electric refrigerators or Electric 
refrigerator-freezers  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section. 
(1) Those that were manufactured for professional use.  
(2)Those that use thermo-element. 
(3)Those that use an absorber. 
(4)Those that main purpose is wine storage 103 Electric freezers that meet any of the above criter ia a, b or c are not be considered as 
Electric-freezers  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section. 
2.  Fluorocarbons  are the materials defined as the Fluorocarbons pre scribed in Article 2, 
Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Pro per Management of Fluorocarbons, 
(Act No. 64 of 2001). 
3.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
4.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance  with JIS C 0950. However 
Evaluation Criteria (4) does not apply to Electric freezers. 
5.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
6.  In order to manage chemical substances adequately, each procurement organization is 
to manage and maintain content information of speci fic chemical substances until the 
machine is discarded. 
 
Table: Formula for calculating standard energy cons umption efficiency rate for electric 
refrigerators, electric freezers and electric refri gerator-freezers category 
Category Calculation formula of 
standard energy 
consumption efficiency Type Cooling type Rated internal 
volume 
Refrigerator and 
refrigerator-freezer  Cold air-natural 
convection type － E1=0.73V 1+122 
Cold air-forced 
circulation type Up to 375liter  E1=0.199V 1+265 
Over 375liter E 1=0.281V 1+112 
Freezer Cold air-natural 
convection type － E2=0.589V 2+74 
Cold air-forced 
circulation type － E2=1.328V 2+80 
Notes: 
1 E 1, V1 and E 2, V2 represent the following numerical values. 
E1: standard energy consumption efficiency (unit: kWh /year) 
V1: Adjusted internal volume (numerical value obtaine d by multiplying the rated  
internal volume of each storage room by the adjuste d internal volume 
coefficient, calculated by the following formula an d rounded off to the nearest 
whole number) (unit: L) 
V1 = ∑(Kci×Vi)(i=1, ･･･ ,n) 104 Kc i: Adjusted internal volume coefficient (the numbers  listed in the right 
column for each type of storage room listed in the left column of the 
following table) 
Vi: Rated internal volume 
n: Number of storage rooms of electric refrigerator  and electric refrigerator-
freezer 
 
Type of storage room Adjusted internal volume 
coefficient(Kc i) 
Pantry 0.38 
Cellar 0.62 
Refrigerated 1 
Chiller 1.1 
Zero star 1.19 
One star 1.48 
Two stars 1.76 
Three stars or four stars 2.05 
 
E2: standard energy consumption efficiency (unit : kW h/year) 
V2: Adjusted internal volume (numerical value obtaine d by multiplying the rated  
internal volume of each storage room by the adjuste d internal volume 
coefficient, calculated by the following formula an d rounded off to the nearest 
whole number) (unit: L) 
V2 = ∑(Kci×Vi)(i=1, ･･･ ,n) 
Kc i: Adjusted internal volume coefficient (the numbers  listed in the right 
column for each type of storage room listed in the left column of the 
following table) 
Vi: Rated internal volume 
n: Number of storage rooms in the electric freezer 
 
Type of storage room Adjusted internal volume 
coefficient (Kc i) 
One star 1.48 
Two stars 1.76 
Three stars or four stars 2.05 
 
2.  Energy consumption efficiency of electric refrigera tors and Electric refrigerator-freezers 
is calculated according to “3 Energy Consumption Ef ficiency Measurement Methods (3),” 
based on “Criteria for judgment of manufacturers of  energy consuming equipment etc. 
related to improvement of energy consumption perfor mance of electric refrigerators and 
electric refrigerator-freezers (Ministry of Economy , Trade and Industry notification No.38 
of 2016).  
3.  Energy consumption efficiency of freezers is calcul ated according to “3 Energy 
Consumption Efficiency Measurement Methods (3),” ba sed on “Criteria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. re lated to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of freezers (Ministry of Ec onomy, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.39 of 2016).  105 4.  Energy consumption efficiency is calculated accordi ng to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (3),” based on “Crit eria for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to impro vement of energy consumption 
performance of electric refrigerators and Electric refrigerator-freezers (Ministry of 
Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.39 of 2 016).  
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of refrigerators, etc. (refrige rators, freezers, and refrigerator-freezers) 
meeting the criteria of each reference value 1 and reference value 2  to the total number of 
refrigerators, etc. to be purchased (including leas e/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  106 9-2. Television Receivers 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Television 
Receivers Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  For television receivers that employ liquid crystal  panel (referred 
to as liquid crystal television hereinafter) energy  consumption rate 
does not exceed the result, rounded down to elimina te decimals, 
of the standard energy consumption rate calculated using the 
formula for each category listed in Table multiplie d by 100/198. 
(2)  The power consumption in the remote control standby  mode is 
0.5W or less. 
(3)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the 
standard content rate. The content rate can be easi ly confirmed on 
websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Design consideration takes into account product lif e, efficient use 
of material, reuse of parts, or recycling of raw ma terial, in 
compliance with evaluation criteria for Standards f or the 
Promotion of Efficient Use of Material. 
(2)  The item uses as large amount of recycled plastic a s possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(4)  A system for collection and reuse/recycling of pack aging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Those products that satisfy one of the below criter ia is not included in Television 
receivers  under consideration: 
(1)  Television with Cathode-ray Tube. 
(2)  Those manufactured for use by the industry. 
(3)  Cathode-ray tube style that can respond to multi-sc anning, whose horizontal 
frequency exceeds 33.8 kilo hertz. 
(4)  Those manufactured for use by tourists from abroad.  
(5)  Plasma display type 
(6)  Rear projection style products. 
(7)  The size of the receiver is 10V or less. 
(8)  Wireless products. 
(9)  Display for electronic calculators that are capable  of receiving television. 
2.  The consumed power in the remote control standby mo de  in Evaluation Criteria (2) 
denotes power consumption in the state to turn off power by remote control, applies to 
the infrared remote control. 
3.  Specified chemical substances denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
4.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 107 for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance  with JIS C 0950. 
5.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles. (This excludes , however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.) 
6.  In order to manage chemical substances adequately, each procurement organization is 
to manage and maintain content information of speci fic chemical substances until the 
item in question is discarded. 
7.  Evaluation criteria (1) for television receivers wh ose size is less than 39V size, one 
year transition period will be applied in the fisca l year 2021. The products shall be 
considered as meet evaluation criteria (1) if energ y consumption rates of those do not 
exceed the result, rounded down to eliminate decima ls, of the standard energy 
consumption rate calculated using the formula for e ach category listed in the Table 
multiplied by 100/149. The period of time for which  the exception is applicable will 
be determined in consideration with market trend. 
  
 
 
Table: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency and i ts Calculation Formula of Liquid 
Crystal Television 
Category Standard energy 
consumption 
efficiency or 
calculation 
formula Number 
of 
pixels Television 
receiver size Dynamic 
image 
Display Additional function(s) 
FHD Below 
19V size Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=59 
With 1 added function E=71 
With 2 added functions E=83 
With 3 added functions E=95 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=74 
With 1 added function E=86 
With 2 added functions E=98 
With 3 added functions E=110 
Not below 
19V size, but 
below 32V 
size Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=2.0×S+21 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+33 
With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+45 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+57 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=2.0×S+36 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+48 
With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+60 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+72 
Liquid crystal  
quadruple With no added functions E=2.0×S+58 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+70 108 speed With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+82 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+94 
32V size 
or larger Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=6.6×S-126 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-114 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-102 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-90 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=6.6×S-111 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-99 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-87 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-75 
Liquid crystal  
quadruple 
speed With no added functions E=6.6×S-89 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-77 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-65 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-53 
Others Less than 
19V type Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=44 
With 1 added function E=56 
With 2 added functions E=68 
With 3 added functions E=80 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=59 
With 1 added function E=71 
With 2 added functions E=83 
With 3 added functions E=95 
19V type 
or more 
Less than 
32V type Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=2.0×S+6 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+18 
With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+30 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+42 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=2.0×S+21 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+33 
With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+45 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+57 
Liquid crystal  
quadruple 
speed With no added functions E=2.0×S+43 
With 1 added function E=2.0×S+55 
With 2 added functions E=2.0×S+67 
With 3 added functions E=2.0×S+79 
32V type 
or more Liquid crystal 
normal With no added functions E=6.6×S-141 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-129 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-117 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-105 
Liquid crystal 
double-speed With no added functions E=6.6×S-126 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-114 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-102 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-90 
Liquid crystal  
quadruple 
speed With no added functions E=6.6×S-104 
With 1 added function E=6.6×S-92 
With 2 added functions E=6.6×S-80 
With 3 added functions E=6.6×S-68 109 Notes: 
1. FHD  refers to ones having 1,080 or more pixels in the vertical direction and 1,920 or 
more in the horizontal direction. 
2. Television receiver size  refers to the centimeter-denominated quotient, rou nded at the 
decimal point, of division of the diagonal dimensio n of the driven display area of the 
display screen by 2.54. 
3. Dynamic image display  refers to or another of the following. 
Liquid crystal normal: Those that use a liquid crys tal panel to display 60 or more but 
less than 120 still frames per second. 
Liquid crystal double speed: Those that use a liqui d crystal panel to display 120 or more 
but less than 240 still frames per second. 
Liquid crystal quadruple speed: Those that use a li quid crystal panel to display 240 or 
more still frames per second. 
4. Additional functions  refers to DVD (solely those having a video recordi ng function), 
Magnetic disc drive units drive unit, double digita l tuner and blue ray disk recorder. 
5. E and S represent the following numeric values. 
E : standard energy consumption efficiency (unit:kW h/ year) 
S : Television receiver size 
6. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated acco rding to “2 Energy Consumption Efficiency 
Measurement Methods 2-2,” based on “Criteria for ju dgment of manufacturers of energy 
consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption performance of 
television receivers (Ministry of Economy, Trade an d Industry Notification No.24 of 2010). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of television receivers meeting  the criteria to the total number of 
television receivers to be purchased (including lea se and rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  110 9-3. Electric Toilet Seats 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Electric toilet 
seats Evaluation Criteria  
Energy consumption efficiency shall not exceed the formula for each 
category listed in Table. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(2)  The item uses a large amount of recycled components  that have already 
been used, and uses as large amount of recycled pla stic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(4)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Products that meet the below criteria will not b e considered Electric toilet seats  under 
consideration in the evaluation criteria of this se ction: 
(1)  Electric toilet seats that use warm water supplied from a separate warm water 
system. 
(2)  Electric toilet seats, those are equipped only with  warm water washing apparatus. 
(3)  Portable electric toilet seats that are used for we lfare purposes. 
(4)  Electric toilet seats that are primarily used in tr ain cars, etc. 
(5)  Electric toilet seats for potties.  
2. Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
 
 
 
Table: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for E lectric Toilet Seats 
Category Standard Energy 
Consumption 
Efficiency Availability of the shower 
function Availability of the water tank 
Warm toilet seat (Without a 
shower function) - 
 141 
Warm-water-shower toilet 
seat (With a shower function) 
(without cleansing function) Warm-water storage type (With a 
warm-water tank) 175 
Instantaneous type (Without a 
warm-water tank) 97 
Notes: 
1.  Warm toilet seat  refers to toilet seats with a warming function onl y. 111 2.  Warm-water-shower toilet seat refers to warm toilet seats equipped with built-in 
warm-water-shower equipment. 
3.   Energy consumption efficiency is calculated accord ing to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (2),” based on “Crit eria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. re lated to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of electric toilet seats (M inistry of Economy, Trade and 
Industry Notification No.288 of 2007). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of electric toilet seats meetin g the criteria to the total number of electric 
toilet seats to be purchased (including lease/renta l agreements) in the fiscal year. 
 
  112 9-4. Microwave Ovens  
(1)  Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Microwave 
ovens Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Energy consumption efficiency does not exceed the a mount listed in 
the appropriate category in the Table. 
(2)  Stand-by mode power consumption does not exceed 0.0 5W. 
(3)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the 
standard content rate. The content rate can be easi ly confirmed on 
websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its 
materials separated to facilitate either reuse of c omponents or 
recycling of materials. 
(2)  The item uses a large amount of recycled components  that have 
already been used, and uses as large amount of recy cled plastic as 
possible if plastic components are used. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(4)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:  
1. Products that meet the criteria below will not b e considered Microwave ovens  under 
consideration in the evaluation criteria of this se ction: 
(1)  Products equipped with gas ovens. 
(2)  Products manufactured for commercial use. 
(3)  Products that exclusively use rated power input of 200 voltages.  
(4)  Products with interior height of less than 135 mill imeters. 
(5)  Products that are integrated into system kitchens, etc. 
2.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
3.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of other 
accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
4.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
5.  In order to manage chemical substances adequately, each procurement organization is 
to manage and maintain content information of speci fic chemical substances until the 
item in question is discarded. 113  
 
Table: Standard Energy Consumption Rate for Microwa ve Ovens 
Category Standard Energy 
Consumption Rate Function Heating method Interior capacity 
Products that are not 
equipped with the 
conventional oven 
function (single 
function microwave 
oven)   60.1 
Products that are 
equipped with the 
conventional oven 
function Heater is exposed 
(does not include 
those with 
convection function)  Less than 30 L 73.4 
30L or more 78.2 
Heater is not 
exposed (does not 
include convection 
function) Less than 30L 70.4 
30L or more 79.6 
Convection oven 
style  73.5 
Notes: 
1. Interior capacity is calculated in accordance with the effective size  of the heating 
compartment determined by regulations for designati ng product quality of electric 
appliances based on household appliance quality dis play regulations (1962 regulation 
No.104). 
2. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated acco rding to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria  for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to impro vement of energy consumption 
performance of microwave ovens. (Ministry of Econom y, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.6 of 2006) 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of microwave ovens meeting the criteria to the total number of microwave 
ovens to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
  114 10. Air Conditioners, etc. 
10-1. Air Conditioners 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Air conditioners  Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Energy consumption efficiency of air conditioners t hat are applicable 
to Appendix 3(7) of Rules for Indicating Quality of  Domestic Products 
(Ordinance No. 390, 1962) and are wall-mounted non- ducted type 
(excluding multi-types with ability to control indo or units 
individually) with cooling ability of 4.0kW or lowe r, does not fall 
below the energy consumption rate from Table 1, mul tiplied by 
114/100, calculated to two decimal places and then rounded off to one 
decimal place.  
(2)  Energy consumption efficiency of domestic-use air c onditioners that 
do not fit into criteria (1) does not fall below th e energy consumption 
rate from Table 2, multiplied by 114/100, calculate d to two decimal 
places and then rounded off to one decimal place.   
(3)  Energy consumption efficiency of industrial-use air  conditioners does 
not fall below the applicable standard energy consu mption efficiency 
or its calculation formula listed in Table 3. 
a.  Reference value 1 is the standard energy consumptio n rate. 
b.  Reference value 2 is the standard energy consumptio n rate 
calculated using the formula for each category list ed in Table 
3 multiplied by 88/100 . 
(4)  Global warming potentials of the materials used for  the refrigerant are 
750 or smaller .  
(5)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the standard 
content rate. The content rate can be easily confir med on websites, etc.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The material with a small global warming potential to the extent 
possible are used for the refrigerant.  
(2)  The item is designed with consideration for long-te rm use and 
conservation of resources. It should be designed so  that it can be easily 
dismantled and its materials separated to facilitat e refurbishment and 
reuse, based on the evaluation criteria of the Act on the Promotion of 
Effective Utilization of Resources. 
(3)  In the designing and manufacturing the product, red uction of the 
amount of the filled refrigerant, the further preve ntion of leakage and 
the ease of recovery of refrigerant are considered.  Moreover, the 
information above is disclosed. 
(4)  The item is made of as large amount of recycled pla stic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(5)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
consideration ease of recycling and reduced environ mental impact 
upon disposal.  
(6)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 115 Notes: 
1. Items that meet any of the criteria below will n ot be considered as Air conditioners 
under consideration in the evaluation criteria of t his section:  
(1)  Cooling capacity exceeds 28kW (for multi-type air c onditioner, cooling 
capacity exceeds 50.4kW). 
(2)  Wind type or Wall type and only for cooling. 
(3)  Uses water-cooled engine. 
(4)  Does not use compressed motor. 
(5)  Uses energy other than electricity as a source of h eat. 
(6)  The maintenance of machinery function or hygienic r egulation of food. 
(7)  Primary function of the structure is to convey cool ed outdoor air indoors. 
(8)  Target air conditioners. 
(9)  Air conditioners designed for use in automobiles an d other vehicles. 
(10)  Duct air control system for highly airtight and hig hly insulated   
(11)  Structure includes regenerator (includes those that  are also used for heating) 
exclusively for the purpose of storing heat for coo ling. 
(12)  Structure operates compressor, fan, and other major  components by electricity 
generated by own solar cell module. 
(13)  One having floor heating function or hot-water supp ly function. 
(14)  Heat recovery method multi air conditioner. 
2. Multi-type air conditioners  refer to a type that has two or more indoor units connected 
to an outdoor unit.  
3. Evaluation criteria (4)  apply to the products f or which target values and target fiscal 
year are determined by Ministry of Economy, Trade a nd Industry Notification No. 50 
(items to be judged by manufacturers of air conditi oners) of the household air 
conditioners and shops / office air conditioners (r efrigeration capacity per day is less 
than 3 tons) prescribed in Article 3 of the Enforce ment Regulation (Ministry of Economy, 
Trade and Industry Ordinance No. 29 of 2015) concer ning rationalization of use of CFCs 
and management of CFCs Ministry of Economy, Trade a nd Industry. 
4. Global warming potential  in this section denotes the numerical value that s howed degree 
to which is heat-trapping gas brings global warming  in ratio to which carbon dioxide 
brings global warming. 
5. Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
6. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of other 
accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
7. Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 116 8. In order to manage chemical substances adequatel y, each procurement organization is to 
manage and maintain content information of specific  chemical substances until the item 
in question is discarded. 
 
 
 
Table 1 : Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for the Air -conditioners, applicable 
to Appendix 3(7) of Rules for Indicating Quality of  Domestic Products (Ordinance No. 
390, 1962), is a wall-mounted non-ducted type (excl uding multi-types with ability to 
control indoor units individually), with cooling ab ility of up to 4.0kW 
Category Standard energy 
consumption 
efficiency Cooling capacity  Dimension type of indoor units 
Up to 3.2kW Dimension-defined type 5.8 
Free-dimension type 6.6 
Over 3.2 kW up to 4.0kW Dimension-defined type 4.9 
Free-dimension type 6.0 
Notes: 
1.  Dimension type of indoor units denotes indoor unit means that air conditioner mode ls 
whose indoor unit has horizontal width of 800 mm or  less and height of 295 mm or less 
shall be defined as a dimension-defined type. Air c onditioners other than those of 
dimension-defined type shall be free-dimension type . 
2. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated acco rding to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (2),” based on “Crit eria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. re lated to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of air conditioners (Minist ry of Economy, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.213 of 2009). Same applies for Tabl e 2. 
 
 
 
Table 2 : Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Domesti c Air Conditioners  
Category Standard energy 
consumption 
efficiency Unit type Cooling capacity 
Non-ducted window/ wall-installed 
type Over 4.0 kW up to 5.0 kW 5.5 
Over 5.0 kW up to 6.3 kW 5.0 
Over 6.3 kW up to 28.0 kW  4.5 
Non-ducted wall-mounted type 
(except multi-type operating 
indoor units individually) Up to 3.2 kW  5.2 
Over 3.2 kW up to 4.0 kW 4.8 
Over 4.0 kW up to 28.0kW 4.3 
Multi-type operating indoor units 
individually Up to 4.0 kW 5.4 
Over 4.0 kW up to 7.1 kW 5.4 
Over 7.1 kW up to 28.0 kW  5.4 
  117 Table 3 : Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Industr ial-use Air Conditioners 
Category Standard energy 
consumption efficiency or 
its calculation formula Unit type and 
function Indoor unit 
type Cooling capacity 
Several 
combination or 
other than the 
below Cassette 
type for all 
sides Up to 3.6 kW E=6.0 
Over 3.6 kW up to 10.0 kW E=6.0-0.083 x (A-3.6) 
Over 10.0 kW up to 20.0 kW  E=6.0-0.12 x (A-10) 
Over 20.0 kW up to 28.0 kW  E=5.1-0.060 x (A-20) 
Other than 
cassette 
type for all 
sides Up to 3.6 kW  E=5.1 
Over 3.6 kW up to 10.0 kW E=5.1-0.083 x (A-3.6) 
Over 10.0 kW up to 20.0kW E=5.1-0.10 x (A-10) 
Over 20.0 kW up to 28.0kW E=4.3-0.050 x (A-20) 
Multi-type 
operating 
indoor units 
individually  Up to 10.0 kW E=5.7 
Over 10.0 kW up to 20.0 kW  E=5.7-0.11 x (A-10) 
Over 20.0 kW up to 40.0 kW  E=5.7-0.065 x (A-20) 
Over 40.0 kW up to 50.4 kW  E=4.8-0.040 x (A-40) 
Floor type 
Indoor units 
duct connected 
type or 
anything like 
this Non-
ducted type  Up to 20.0 kW E=4.9 
Over 20.0 kW up to 28.0 kW  E=4.9 
Ducted 
type Up to 20.0 kW E=4.7 
Over 20.0 kW up to 28.0 kW  E=4.7 
Notes: 
1.  Ducted type air conditioners  refer to systems connected to ducts at the outlet.  
2.  E and A denotes the following. 
 
E: Standard Energy Consumption (unit: annual perfor mance factor) 
A: Cooling capacity (unit: kW) 
 
3.  Energy consumption efficiency is calculated accordi ng to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (3),” based on “Crit eria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. re lated to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of air conditioners (Minist ry of Economy, Trade and 
Industry Notification No.213 of 2009). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Domestic-use air conditioners: ratio of the number of air conditioners meeting the criteria to 
the total number of domestic-use air conditioners t o be purchased (including lease/rental 
agreements) in the fiscal year. 
Industrial-use air conditioners: ratio of the numbe r of air conditioners meeting the criteria of 
each reference value 1 and reference value 2 to the  total number of industrial-use air 
conditioners to be purchased (including lease/renta l agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  118 10-2. Gas Heat Pump Air Conditioners  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Gas heat pump 
air conditioners Evaluation criteria  
(1)  Annual performance factor is no less than 1.07. 
(2)  Refrigerant does not include material capable of de stroying the ozone 
layer.  
 
Factors for consideration 
(1)  The materials with a low global warming potential t o the extent 
possible are used for the refrigerant. 
(2)  Contents of specified chemical substances do not ex ceed the standard 
content rate. 
(3)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled for recycling.  
(4)  The item is made of as large amount of recycled pla stic as possible 
if plastic components are used.  
(5)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(6)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Gas heat pump air conditioner  includes units defined by JIS B 8627 whose rated co oling 
capacity is between 7.1 and 28kW under consideratio n in the evaluation of this section. 
2. Annual performance factor is calculated using JI S B 8627. 
3. Global warming potential  in this section denotes the numerical value that s howed degree 
to which is heat-trapping gas brings global warming  in ratio to which carbon dioxide 
brings global warming. 
4. Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
5. The standard content rate of specified chemical substances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of other 
accessories is to be determined in accordance with JIS C 0950. 
6. Recycled plastic denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
 
 
 
 
 119 (2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of gas heat pump air conditione rs meeting the criteria to the total number 
of gas heat pump air conditioners to be purchased ( including lease/rental agreements) in the 
fiscal year.  
 
  120 10-3. Space Heaters 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Space heaters Evaluation Criteria  
Fulfill at least one of below. 
(1)  Energy consumption efficiency in gas space heaters shall not fall below 
the standard energy consumption efficiency of appli cable category in 
Table 1. 
(2)  Energy consumption efficiency in oil space heaters shall not fall below 
the standard energy consumption efficiency or its c alculation formula 
of applicable category in Table 2. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(2)  The item is made of as large amount of recycled pla stic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(4)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Space heaters under consideration in the evaluation criteria of t his section use gas or 
oil, and should not meet any of the criteria below:  
(1)  The item employs non-vented types. 
(2)  The item uses gas (excluding city gas categorized u nder group 13A (Group 
specified in Article 25 Section 3 of Gas Industry L aw Enforcement Regulation 
(Ministry of International Trade and Industry Ordin ance 97, 1970) and liquefied 
petroleum gas) as its energy source. 
(3)  Vented gas space heaters. 
(4)  Vented oil space heaters with maximum fuel consumpt ion rate greater than 4.0L/h. 
(5)  Direct vent type oil space heaters with maximum fue l consumption rate greater than 
2.75L/h. 
2.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
 
 
Table 1: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for  Gas Space Heaters 
Category Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency 
Direct vent type 82.0 
Note: Energy consumption efficiency is calculated accordi ng to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria  for judgment of manufacturers of 
energy consuming equipment etc. related to improvem ent of energy consumption performance 121 of stoves (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.55 of 2006). Same 
applies for Table 2. 
 
 
 
Table2: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency or I ts Calculation Formula for Oil 
Space Heaters 
Category Standard Energy 
Consumption Efficiency or 
Its Calculation Formula Air supply and 
exhaust type Heat transfer type 
Direct Vent Type  Natural convection type 83.5 
Forced convection type 86.0 
Vented type Radiation type 69.0 
Radiating type with maximum fuel 
consumption amount of 1.5L/h or less  67.0 
Radiating type with maximum fuel 
consumption amount of over 1.5L/h E = -3.0 x L + 71.5 
Notes: E and L stand for the following:  
E: Standard energy consumption efficiency (unit: %)  
L: Maximum fuel consumption amount (unit: L/h) 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of space heaters meeting the cr iteria to the total number of space heaters 
to be purchased (including lease/rental agreements)  in the fiscal year. 
  122 11. Water Heaters, etc. 
11-1 Electric Hot Water Supply System 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Heat pump 
style electric 
hot water 
supply system  Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  For residential use heat pump style electric hot wa ter supply system, 
energy consumption efficiency does not fall below t he standard energy 
consumption efficiency of applicable category in Ta ble. 
(2)  For business use heat pump style electric hot water  supply system, 
annual heating performance is 3.20 or higher. 
(3)  Fluorocarbons are not used as refrigerant. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The materials with a low global warming potential t o the extent possible 
are used for the refrigerant. 
(2)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(3)  The item is made of as large amount of recycled pla stic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(5)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Equipment having a heating function will not be con sidered as Heat pump style 
electric hot water supply system  in the evaluation criteria. 
2.  The annual heating  performance for business use he at pump style electric hot water 
supply system is according to JRA 4060 ：2018,  to be calculated using the below 
formula: 
 
Annual heating performance : Annual heating volume/ Annual energy consumption  
 
Annual heating performance : Annual total of the va lue obtained by multiplying 
the heating amount per day of each period (summer, intermediate period, winter, 
frosting period) by the target number of days. 
 
Annual energy consumption :  Annual total of the va lue of power consumption per 
day of each period (summer, intermediate period, wi nter, frosting period) 
multiplied by the target number of days. 
 
3.  Fluorocarbons  are the materials defined as the Fluorocarbons pre scribed in Article 2, 
Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Pro per Management of Fluorocarbons, 
(Act No. 64 of 2001). 
4. Global warming potential in this section denotes the numerical val ue that showed degree 
to which is heat-trapping gas brings global warming  in ratio to which carbon dioxide brings 
global warming. 123 5.Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that has 
been discarded, remnants discarded during the manuf acturing process, or the recycle/reuse 
of defective articles (This excludes, however, plas tic that has been recycled in the process 
of manufacturing the product). 
6. Evaluation Criteria (3) does not apply to the pr oducts for business use heat pump style 
electric hot water supply system.  However substanc es harmful to the ozone layer are not 
used. 
 
 
 
Table: Standard of Energy Consumption for Residenti al Use Heat Pump Style Electric 
Hot Water Supply System 
Assumed 
number of 
household Tank 
capacity  Specification Warm keep 
function Tank number  Standard of 
energy 
consumption 
efficiency  
Normal 
(4 persons) Less 
than 
 240 L Other than 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.8 
Multi tank 2.4 
without One tank 3.0 
Multi tank 2.6 
Specification for 
Cold Region With One tank 2.3 
Multi tank 2.0 
without One tank 2.6 
Multi tank 2.3 
Over 
240 L 
less 
than  
320 L Other than 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.8 
Multi tank 2.8 
without One tank 3.2 
Multi tank 2.8 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.3 
Multi tank 2.0 
without One tank 2.7 
Multi tank 2.3 
Over 
320 L 
less 
than  
550 L Other than 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 3.3 
Multi tank 2.8 
without One tank 3.2 
Multi tank 2.8 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.7 
Multi tank 2.3 
without One tank 2.7 
Multi tank 2.3 
Over 
550 L Other than 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.9 
Multi tank 2.5 
with One tank 2.9 
Multi tank 2.5 
Specification for 
Cold Region with One tank 2.4 
Multi tank 2.1 
without One tank 2.5 124 Multi tank 2.2 
Few 
(2 persons) － Other than 
Specification for 
Cold Region with 
－ 2.4 
without 2.8 
Specification for 
Cold Region with 2.0 
without 2.4 
Notes: 
1.  Tank capacity  denotes the tank capacity in volume based on JIS C  9220, which could 
storage water. 
2.  Specification for Cold Region denotes a specification based on JIS C 9220, assume d 
to be used in terrible cold region in winter. 
3.  Warm keep function  denotes the circulation heating function for hot w ater of bath. 
4.  Energy consumption efficiency is calculated accordi ng to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria  for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to impro vement of energy consumption 
performance of electric hot water heaters (Ministry  of Economy, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.38 of 2013). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of heat pump style electric hot  water supply system meeting the criteria 
to the total number of heat pump style electric hot  water supply system to be purchased 
(including lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal y ear.  
  125 11-2 Gas Water Heaters 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Gas water 
heaters Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Energy consumption efficiency is 90 or more for  latent heat recovery 
type gas water equipment. 
(2) Except for latent heat recovery type gas water equipment, energy 
consumption efficiency shall not fall below the ene rgy consumption 
efficiency listed in Table for each category.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(2)  The item is made of as large amount of recycled pla stic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(4)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Items that meet any of the criteria below will not be considered as Gas water heaters 
under consideration in the evaluation criteria of t his section: 
(1)  Storage-style hot water supply system. 
(2)  Items that were designed for commercial use. 
(3)  Items that use gas (excluding city gas categorized under group 13A and liquefied 
petroleum gas) as its fuel source. 
(4)  Gas bath furnaces that are designed to be installed  at a bath tub for heating bath 
water, and equipped with a function to prevent impe rfect combustion. 
(5)  Direct vent type gas bath furnaces which require a duct connection for combustion 
air supply and exhaust. 
2.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t). 
 
 
  126 Table:  Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Gas Wate r Heaters 
Category Standard 
energy 
consumption 
efficiency Type of gas 
water 
heater Ventilation 
type Circulation 
type Air supply and exhaust type 
Gas instant 
water 
heater Natural 
ventilation 
type  Non-vented type 83.5 
Other than non-vented type 78.0 
Forced 
ventilation 
type  Other than outdoor type 80.0 
Outdoor type 82.0 
Bath tub 
gas water 
heater(with 
no hot 
water 
supply 
functions) Natural 
ventilation 
type Natural 
circulation 
type Vented type or direct vent 
type (the height where the air 
supply and exhaust part 
penetrates external wall is as 
vented types) 75.5 
Direct vent type (other than 
types of the height where the 
air supply and exhaust part 
penetrates external wall is as 
vented types) 71.0 
Outdoor type 76.4 
Forced 
ventilation 
type Natural 
circulation 
Type  70.8 
Forced 
circulation 
Type  77.0 
Bath tub 
gas water 
heater 
(with hot 
water 
supply 
functions) Natural 
ventilation 
type Natural 
circulation 
Type Vented type or direct vent 
type (the height where the air 
supply and exhaust part 
penetrates external wall is as 
vented types) 78.0 
Direct vent type (other than 
types of the height where the 
air supply and exhaust part 
penetrates external wall is as 
vented types) 77.0 
Outdoor type 78.9 
Forced 
ventilation 
Type Natural 
circulation 
type  76.1 
Forced 
circulation 
Type Other than outdoor type 
 78.8 
Outdoor type 80.4 
Gas heating 
equipment 
(with no    83.4 127 hot water 
supply 
functions) 
Gas heating 
equipment 
(with hot 
water 
supply 
functions)    83.0 
Note: 
Energy consumption efficiency is calculated accordi ng to “3 Energy Consumption Efficiency 
Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria for judgme nt of manufacturers of energy 
consuming equipment etc. related to improvement of energy consumption performance of gas 
water heaters (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Indus try Notification No.58 of 2006). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of gas water heaters meeting th e criteria to the total number of gas water 
heaters to be purchased (including lease/rental agr eements) in the fiscal year.  
  128 11-3 Oil Water Heaters  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Oil water 
heaters Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Energy consumption efficiency is 90 or more for  latent heat recovery 
type old water equipment. 
(2) Except for latent heat recovery type oil water equipment, Energy 
consumption efficiency shall not fall below the ene rgy consumption 
efficiency listed in Table for each category.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(2)  The item is made of as large amount of recycled pla stic as possible if 
plastic components are used. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
(4)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1. Items that meet any of the criteria below will n ot be considered as Oil water heaters 
under consideration in the evaluation criteria of t his section: 
(1)  Pot style bath furnace equipped with a burner. 
(2)  Items that were designed for commercial use. 
(3)  Items equipped with a structure for burning firewoo d. 
(4)  Hot water boilers with gauge pressure of over 0.1MP a. 
2.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.). 129 Table:  Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Oil Wate r Heaters 
Category Standard 
Energy 
consumption 
efficiency Usage Heating type Air supply and 
exhaust system or 
control method 
For hot water 
supply Instantaneous type 
  86.0 
Storage type with rapid 
heating system  87.0 
Storage type other than 
rapid heating system  85.0 
For heaters Instantaneous type 
 Non-vented type 85.3 
Vented type 79.4 
Direct vent type 82.1 
Storage type with rapid 
heating system On/off control 87.0 
Other than on/off 
control 82.0 
Storage type other than 
rapid heating system  84.0 
For baths Water heaters with a center 
flue heat exchanger  75.0 
Water heaters without a 
center flue heat exchanger  61.0 
Notes: 
1.  For hot water supply  refers to those used primarily for hot water supply , and includes 
those equipped with functions for heating or to hea t bath water. 
2.  For heating  refers to those used primarily for heating, and inc ludes those equipped 
with functions for hot water supply or to heat bath  water. 
3.  For baths  refers to those used primarily to heat bath water,  and includes those 
equipped with functions for hot water supply or for  heating. 
4.  Rapid heating system  refers to heating period of 200 seconds or less (me asured in 
accordance with the measurement method for heating period as determined by JIS 
S3031). 
5.  Center flue heat exchanger  refers to the duct that penetrates the hot water ta nk. 
6.  On/off control refers to systems that are controlled only by ignit ion and extinguishing. 
7.  Energy consumption efficiency is calculated accordi ng to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria  for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to impro vement of energy consumption 
performance of oil water heaters (Ministry of Econo my, Trade and Industry 
Notification No.58 of 2006). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of oil water heaters meeting th e criteria to the total number of oil water 
heaters to be purchased (including lease/rental agr eements) in the fiscal year.  
  130 11-4 Gas Cooking Appliances 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Gas cooking 
appliances Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Energy consumption efficiency for burner compon ent shall not fall 
below the criteria listed in Table 1 for each categ ory.  
(2) Energy consumption efficiency for the grill com ponent shall not 
exceed the standard energy consumption efficiency c alculated by 
using the formula listed in Table 2 for each catego ry. 
(3) Energy consumption efficiency for the oven comp onent shall not 
exceed the standard of energy consumption efficienc y calculated by 
using the formula listed in Table 3 for each catego ry. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)The item is designed so that it can be easily di smantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate either reuse of c omponents or 
recycling of materials. 
(2) The item is made of as large amount of recycled  plastic as possible 
if plastic components are used. 
(3)Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as poss ible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(4)A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. 
is considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Items that meet any of the criteria below will not be considered as Gas cooking 
appliances under consideration in the evaluation criteria of t his section: 
(1)  Items that were designed for commercial use. 
(2)  Items that use gas (excluding city gas categorized under group 13A and liquefied 
petroleum gas) as its fuel source. 
(3)  Gas grills. 
(4)  Gas cooking tables. 
(5)  Gas rice cookers. 
(6)  Portable cooking stoves. 
2.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.). 
 
 131 Table1: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for Burner Component of Gas 
Cooking Appliances 
Category Standard Energy 
Consumption 
Efficiency for 
Burner 
Component Type of gas 
cooking appliance  Installation type Number of burners 
Gas burners Tabletop type  51.0 
Built-in type  48.5 
Gas burners with 
grill Tabletop type 2 or less 56.3 
3 or more 52.4 
Built-in type 2 or less 53.0 
3 or more 55.6 
Cabinet or stationary 
type  49.7 
Gas range   48.4 
Notes: 
1.  Gas range  refers to a combination of oven and burner. 
2.  Tabletop type  refers to an item that is to be placed on a table or a base for use. 
3.  Built-in type  refers to an item that is to be built into a wall or a base. 
4.  Cabinet type  refers to an item that is to be installed into its  own cabinet. 
5.  Stationary type  refers to an item that is to be installed on a bas e or a floor surface. 
6.  Energy consumption efficiency for burner component is calculated according to “3 
Energy Consumption Efficiency Measurement Methods ( 1),” based on “Criteria for 
judgment of manufacturers of energy consuming equip ment etc. related to 
improvement of energy consumption performance of ga s cooking equipment (Ministry 
of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.56 o f 2006). 
 
 
 
Table 2 : Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency fo r Grill Component of Gas Cooking 
Appliances 
Category Calculation Formula of 
Standard Energy 
Consumption Efficiency for 
Grill Component Combustion type  Cooking method 
Single sided With water E=25.1Vg+123 
Without water E=25.1Vg+16.4 
Double sided With water E=12.5Vg+172 
Without water E=12.5Vg+101 
Notes: 
1. E and Vg express the following numeric values. 
    E : Glill section standard energy consumption e fficiency (unit:Wh) 
Vg : Internal volume (unit:liter)   
2. Single sided  refers to a method where food is heated from one s ide. 
3. Double sided refers to a method where food is heated from both s ides. 
4. With water  refers to a method where cooking is performed with  the grill pan filled with 
water. 132 5. Without water  refers to a method where cooking is performed with  the grill pan not 
filled with water. 
6.  Internal volume  is obtained by the formula: grill area x  height from the bottom of the 
grill plate to the top of the inlet (round to one d ecimal place). 
7. Energy consumption efficiency for grill componen t is calculated according to “3 
Energy Consumption Efficiency Measurement Methods ( 2),” based on “Criteria for 
judgment of manufacturers of energy consuming equip ment etc. related to 
improvement of energy consumption performance of ga s cooking equipment (Ministry 
of Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No.56 o f 2006). 
 
 
 
 
Table3 : Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for  Oven Component of Gas Cooking 
Appliances (includes Gas Ovens)  
Oven type Calculation formula of standard energy 
consumption efficiency for oven 
component 
Tabletop or Stationary Type E=18.6V o+306 
Built in Type E=18.6V o+83.3 
Notes: 
1. E and V o express the following numeric values. 
E: Oven section standard energy consumption efficie ncy (unit:Wh) 
V o:Internal volume(unit:liter)   
2.  Tabletop type  refers to an item that is to be placed on a table or a base for use. 
3.  Built-in type  refers to an item that is to be built into a wall or a base. 
4.  Stationary type  refers to an item that is to be installed on a bas e or a floor surface. 
5.  Internal volume  is obtained by the formula: grill area x  height from the bottom of the 
grill plate to the top of the inlet (rounded to one  decimal place). 
6.  Energy consumption efficiency for oven component is  calculated according to “3 
Energy Consumption Efficiency Measurement Methods ( 2),” based on “Criteria for 
judgment of manufacturers of energy consuming equip ment etc. related to improvement 
of energy consumption performance of gas cooking eq uipment (Ministry of Economy, 
Trade and Industry Notification No.56 of 2006). 
 
 
 
 (2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of gas cooking appliances meeti ng the criteria to the total number of gas 
cooking appliances to be purchased (including lease /rental agreements) in the fiscal year.  
  133 12. Lighting 
12-1. Lighting Equipment 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
LED lighting 
equipment Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  LED lighting equipment excluding floodlight and sec urity light shall 
satisfy the following requirements. 
a.  Reference value 1: the intrinsic energy consumption  efficiency 
meets the standard of the applicable category in Ta ble 1-1. Or 
is the intrinsic energy consumption efficiency meet s the 
standard of the applicable category in Table 1-2, h aving high 
effect of energy conservation such as initial illum inance 
correction control, passive sensor control, the bri ghtness sensor 
control and dimming control. 
b.  Reference value 2: the intrinsic energy consumption  efficiency 
meets the standard of the applicable category in Ta ble 1-2. 
c.  Average color rendering index Ra of products are 80  or more.  
Exceptionally, average color rendering index Ra of downlights 
and high ceiling luminaries is 70 or more. 
(2)  Floodlight and security light shall satisfy the fol lowing requirements.  
a.  Intrinsic energy consumption efficiency meets the s tandard of 
the applicable category in Table 2. 
b.  Average color rendering index Ra of products are 70  or more.   
(3) LED module rated lifespan is 40,000 hours or lo nger. 
(4) Contents of specified chemical substances does not exceed standard 
content ratio. Content ratio information of applica ble chemical 
material is easily available on websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  The function with high effect of energy conservatio n such as initial 
illuminance correction control, passive sensor cont rol, the brightness 
sensor control and dimming control should be append ed. 
(2)  The item should be designed so that it can be easil y dismantled and 
its materials separated to facilitate recycling. 
(3)  Organic solvent, or paint with as low odor as possi ble is used as 
coating. 
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(5)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Illuminated 
signage using 
LED as the 
light source Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Rated lifespan is 30,000 hours or longer. 
(2)  Contents of specified chemical substances does not exceed standard 
content ratio. Content ratio information of applica ble chemical 
material is easily available on websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 134 (1)  The item should be designed so that it can be easil y dismantled and 
its materials separated to facilitate recycling. 
(2)  Organic solvent, or paint with as low odor as possi ble is used as 
coating. 
(3)  Plastic parts, when used, shall be comprised as muc h as possible of 
recycled plastic. 
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(5)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  LED lighting equipment  in this section refers to lighting equipment that uses white 
illuminating LED, hanging type, direct-mount type, built-in type, wall putting type and 
floodlight and security light. However, LED lightin g equipment to attach LED lamps 
that have a structure of feeding power to the LED l amp through the cap, among LED 
lighting equipment that can install the LED lamp th at used with traditional fluorescent 
lamps that have the same shape cap are excluded for  the meanwhile. In addition, the 
guidance light specified in the "Guidelines for gui dance lights and guidance signs (1999 
Public Notice No. 2 of the Fire and Disaster Manage ment Agency)" shall not be included 
in LED lighting  equipment. 
2.  Intrinsic energy consumption efficiency of LED ligh ting equipment in LED lighting 
equipment in this section refers to the amount obta ined by dividing luminous flux 
emitted by the equipment by rated energy efficiency  (In the case where it is necessary 
to install an independent power source externally t o the equipment, rated energy 
efficiency of the power source will be used in the calculation.). In addition, intrinsic 
energy consumption efficiency of equipment with a f unction to regulate amount of light 
and color temperature is assumed to be the ratio ca lculated from the total luminous flux 
at the maximum power consumption. 
3.  Measuring method of Average color rendering index Ra  is in accordance with light 
source color and color rendition evaluation method of source of light by JIS C 
7801(Measuring methods of lamps for general lightin g) and JIS C 8152-2 (Photometry 
of white light emitting diode (LED) for general lig hting-Part 2: LED modules and LED 
light engines). 
4.  Downlight  in this section of LED lighting equipment denote t he one specified in JIS Z 
8113:1998” Lighting vocabulary.” 
5.  High ceiling luminaire  in this section of LED lighting equipment denote t he one with 
11,000lm or more of luminous flux specified in JIS Z 8113:1998” Lighting vocabulary”. 
6.  Floodlight  in this section of LED lighting equipment denote t he one specified in JIS Z 
8113:1998” Lighting vocabulary.” 
7.  "Security light"   in this section of LED lighting equipment denote th e lighting lamps 
aimed at securing the necessary illuminance from th e viewpoint of prevention of crime 
and securing safe passage through installation on a  road or the like. 
8.  LED module rated lifespan  of LED lighting equipment in this section refers t o the 
amount of time it takes for the initial luminous fl ux to decrease by 70%. Measuring 
method is in accordance with JIS C 8152-3 (Photomet ry of white light emitting diode 
(LED) for general lighting-Part 3: measurement meth ods for lumen maintenance). 135 9.  Measuring method of the total luminous flux for LED  lighting equipment is in 
accordance with JIS C 8105-5:2011, The Illuminator 5th:  Method of Measuring 
Light Distribution . 
10.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, polybrominated 
biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl ether. 
11.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical substances 
for electrical and electronic equipment) Appendix A , chart A.1 (specified chemical 
substances, chemical element symbol, substances app licable for calculation, and 
standard content rate). Items for which content rat e exceeding the standard is allowed 
are to be determined in accordance with Appendix B of the above JIS. Handling of 
other accessories is to be determined in accordance  with JIS C 0950. 
12.  Illuminated signage using LED as the light source  in this section refers to panels and 
signs whose letters, etc. are illuminated by an int ernal LED light. The light source, 
including heat radiation, is protected.  In addition, the guidance light specified in the 
"Guidelines for guidance lights and guidance signs (1999 Public Notice No. 2 of the 
Fire and Disaster Management Agency)" shall not be included in LED lighting  
equipment . 
13.  Rated lifespan  of Illuminated signage using LED as the light sour ce in this section 
refers to the amount of time it takes for the initi al luminous flux to decrease by 50%. 
14.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or 
the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This exclu des, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.). 
15.  Each procurement organization makes compare and exa mine to select the one that 
safety and quality control will be performed enough . 
16.  In order to achieve an adequate management of chemi cal substances, each 
procurement organization will manage and preserve c ontent information of 
specified chemical substances that had been confirm ed upon acquisition of the 
product. 
 
 
 
Table 1-1: Reference value 1 of Intrinsic Energy Co nsumption Efficiency of LED 
Lighting Equipment (excluding floodlight and securi ty light) 
Light source 
color Intrinsic energy 
consumption efficiency  
Daylight 
144lm/W or more Daylight white 
White 
Warm white 
102lm/W or more Usual electric 
bulb color 
Notes: 
1.  Light source color is in accordance with the category of the light sou rce color by JIS 
Z 9112(Classification of fluorescent lamps and ligh t emitting diodes by chromaticity 
and color rendering property) (same applies Table 1 -2 and Table 2). 136 2.  Equipment emitting any color of other than daylight , daylight white, white, warm 
white and usual electric bulb color will not be con sidered as  LED lighting equipment  
under consideration in the evaluation criteria in t his section. 
3.  As for downlights of mount hole size for equipment are 300 mm or smaller, emitting 
color of daylight, daylight white, white, standard of intrinsic energy consumption 
efficiency shall be 114 lm/W or more, as for warm w hite and usual electric bulb color, 
standard of intrinsic energy consumption efficiency  shall be 96lm/W or more. 
4.  As for high ceiling luminaire emitting color of day light, daylight white, white, standard 
of intrinsic energy consumption efficiency shall be  156 lm/W or more. 
 
 
Table 1-2: Reference value 2 of Intrinsic Energy Co nsumption Efficiency of LED 
Lighting Equipment (excluding floodlight and securi ty light) 
Light source color Intrinsic energy 
consumption efficiency 
Daylight 
120lm/W or more Daylight white 
White 
Warm white 85lm/W or more Usual electric bulb color 
Notes: 
1.  As for downlights of mount hole size for equipment are 300 mm or smaller, emitting 
color of daylight, daylight white, white, standard of intrinsic energy consumption 
efficiency shall be 95 lm/W or more, as for warm wh ite and usual electric bulb color, 
standard of intrinsic energy consumption efficiency  shall be 80lm/W or more. 
2.  As for high ceiling luminaire emitting color of day light, daylight white, white, standard 
of intrinsic energy consumption efficiency shall be  130 lm/W or more. 
 
 
Table 2: Standard of Intrinsic Energy Consumption E fficiency of floodlight and security 
light 
Light source color Intrinsic energy consumption efficiency 
Floodlight Security light 
Daylight 
105lm/W or more 80lm/W or more Daylight white 
White 
Warm white 90lm/W or more Not coverd Usual electric bulb color 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of LED lighting equipment exclu ding floodlight and security light 
meeting the criteria of each reference value 1 and reference value 2 to the total number of 
products to be purchased (including lease/rental ag reements) in the fiscal year. 
For floodlight and security light, ratio of the num ber of meeting the criteria to the total number 
of products to be purchased (including lease/rental  agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  137 12-2. Lamps 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Fluorescent 
lamps (tube 
type 40 
fluorescent 
lamps) Evaluation Criteria  
Product meets one of the following criteria. 
(1) High-frequency lighting (Hf) lamps meet the fol lowing criteria. 
a.  Lamp efficiency is no less than 100lm/W. 
b.  Average color rendering index Ra of 80 or more. 
c.  Tube diameter of no more than 25.5( ± 1.2) mm. 
d.  No more than average of 5 mg encapsulated mercury p er 
product. 
e.  Rated life of at least 10,000 hours. 
(2) Rapid-start fluorescent lamps or fluorescent la mps with starter, 
meet the following criteria. 
a.  Lamp efficiency is no less than 851m/W. 
b.  Average color rendering index Ra of 80 or more. 
c.  Tube diameter of no more than 32.5 ( ± 1.5) mm. 
d.  No more than average of 5 mg encapsulated mercury p er 
product. 
e.  Rated life is at least 10,000 hours. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Light bulb-
shaped lamps Evaluation Criteria 
Meet one of the following criteria. 
(1)  Self-ballasted LED-lamps meet the following criteri a. 
a.  If the type and shape of the lamp is type A and the  type of base 
is E26 or E17, meet the criteria for each classific ation of light 
source color shown in Table 1. 
b.  Other than above a., lamp efficiency meets the stan dard for the 
applicable category of light source color in Table 2. However, 
for reflective lamps whose divergence is less than 90 degrees, 
the lamp efficiency is no less than 50lm/W. 
c.  Average color rendering index Ra of 70 or more. 
d.  Rated life is at least 40,000 hours. However, for r eflective 
lamps whose divergence is less than 90 degrees, rat ed life shall 
be at least 30,000 hours. 
(2)  Self-ballasted fluorescent lamps meet the following  criteria. 
a.  Energy consumption efficiency is not lower than the  standard 
energy consumption efficiency of applicable categor y in Table 
3. 
b.  No more than average 4 mg encapsulated mercury per product.  
c.  Rated life is at least 6,000 hours 
 
Factors for Consideration 138 Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1.  Self-ballasted LED lamps and  Self-ballasted fluorescent lamps under consideration 
in the evaluation criteria in this section fit dire ctly into an incandescent socket. 
However, it will not apply for lamps equipped with such as passive sensor and 
emergency lighting (direct current circuit). 
2.  Measuring methods of Average color rendering index Ra  is in accordance with light 
source color and color rendition evaluation method of source of light by JIS C 7801 
(Measuring methods of lamps for general lighting). 
3.  Light source color is in accordance with the category of the light sou rce color by JIS 
Z 9112(Classification of fluorescent lamps and ligh t emitting diodes by chromaticity 
and color rendering property). 
4.  Equipment emitting any color of other than daylight , daylight white, white, warm 
white and usual electric bulb color will not be con sidered as  Fluorescent lamps and 
Light bulb-shaped lamps under consideration in the evaluation criteria in t his section. 
5.  Self-ballasted LED lamps  in this section denotes white LED light bulb-shape d lamps 
used for general lighting purpose. 
6.  The lamp type and shape is type A of the bulb-shaped LED lamp of this section means 
that the symbol indicating the type and shape presc ribed in JIS C 8158 (bulb type 
LED lamp for general lighting (power supply voltage  is over 50 V)) is "type A (LDA) 
". 
The type of base is E26 or E17  means that the symbol representing the type of 
mouthpiece of JIS is "E 26" or "E 17". 
7.  Rated life  of Self-ballasted LED lamps  in this section refers to the total amount of 
lighting time until the initial luminous flux to de crease by 70%. The method of 
measurements is in accordance with JIS C 8152-3 (Ph otometry of white light 
emitting diode for general lighting-Part 3: measure ment methods for lumen 
maintenance). 
8.  Rated life of Self-ballasted  fluorescent lamps in this section refers to the sho rt one 
either the total amount of lighting time until lamp s no longer start or the total amount 
of lighting time until the initial total luminous f lux to decrease by 60%. The method 
of measurements is in accordance with JIS C 7620-2 (Self-ballasted fluorescent 
lamps for general lighting services-Part 2: Perform ance specifications). 
9.  When procuring lamp for emergency lighting equipmen t, each procurement 
organization confirms the applicability of the equi pment enough. 
 
 
 
Table 1: Standard of Lamp Efficiency for Self-balla sted LED Lamps of type A (E26 and 
E17 base) 
Light source color Lamp efficiency 
Daylight 
110.0lm/W or more Daylight white 
White 
Warm white  98.6lm/W or more  Usual electric bulb color  139 Notes:   
When any of the following applies, the criteria for  each division of light source color 
shown in Table 2 shall be satisfied. 
1. Those with a power supply voltage of 50 V or les s. 
2. Those having an average color rendering index Ra  of 90 or more. 
3. Those with dimmer compatible function. 
 
 
Table 2: Standard of Lamp Efficiency for Self-balla sted LED Lamps (excluding type A 
(E26 and E17 base)) 
Light source color Lamp efficiency 
Daylight 
80lm/W or more Daylight white 
White 
Warm white  70lm/W or more  Usual electric bulb color  
Notes: 
For the Self-ballasted LED Lamps regulate amount of  light and light color temperature, the 
standard of the lamp efficiency is the value in whi ch 5lm/W is subtracted from the 
applicable category of light source color in Table 2. The lamp efficiency of that is assumed 
to be the ratio calculated from the total luminous flux at the maximum power consumption.  
 
 
 
 
Table 3: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency of Self-ballasted Fluorescent Lamp 
Category Standard 
energy 
consumption 
efficiency Fluorescent 
lamp size 
category Light source color 
of  
Fluorescent lamp  Shape of fluorescent lamp 
10 Usual electric bulb 
color  60.6 
Daylight white 58.1 
Daylight 55.0 
15 Usual electric bulb 
color  67.5 
Daylight white 65.0 
Daylight 60.8 
25 Usual electric bulb 
color Fluorescent lamp is exposed 72.4 
Fluorescent lamp is not 
exposed  69.1 
Daylight white Fluorescent lamp is exposed  69.5 
Fluorescent lamp is not 
exposed  66.4 
Daylight Fluorescent lamp is exposed  65.2 
Fluorescent lamp is not 
exposed  62.3 140 Notes: 
1. Equipment that meet any of the following criteri a will not be considered as Self-
ballasted fluorescent lamp  under consideration in the evaluation criteria. 
(1)  Ones structured as to have a reflector. 
(2)  Ones having a function to regulate light. 
(3)  Ones designed for use in henhouse. 
(4)  Ones allowing separation of fluorescent lamp. 
(5)  Ones whose globe for fluorescent lamp protection is  transparent. 
2. Fluorescent lamp size category  refers to the category of size prescribed under JI S C 
7620-2. 
3. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated acco rding to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods,” based on “Criteria  for judgment of manufacturers 
of energy consuming equipment etc. related to impro vement of energy consumption 
performance of Lighting equipment that uses only fl uorescent lamps as the main light 
source (Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry Not ification No.54 of 2010). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of each item meeting the criter ia to the total number of items to be 
purchased in the fiscal year. 
  141 13. Vehicles, etc. 
13-1. Vehicles  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Passenger 
vehicles 
 
Small buses 
 
Small freight 
vehicles 
 
Buses, etc. 
 
Trucks, etc. 
 
Tractors Evaluation criteria 
 (1)For passenger vehicles, following a. satisfies the reference value 1 and 
following b. satisfies the reference value 2. Howev er, in the case of 
vehicles with an internal combustion engine (limite d to vehicles fueled 
by gasoline, light oil or LP gas), the emission sta ndards for the 
categories shown in Table 1 (limited to vehicles fu eled by gasoline or 
LP gas) and the fuel consumption standard values fo r each category 
shown in Table 2 shall be met. 
a. Electric Vehicles, etc. 
b. Next generation vehicles. 
(2) For small buses, following a. satisfies the ref erence value 1 and 
following b. satisfies the reference value 2. In ad dition, in the case of 
vehicles fueled by gasoline, the exhaust gas standa rds for the categories 
shown in Table 1 shall be met. 
a. Next generation vehicles. 
b. Next generation vehicles or vehicles that satisf ies the fuel efficiency 
standard values of the categories shown in Table 3.  
(3)  For small freight vehicles, following a. satisfies the reference value 1 
and following b. satisfies the reference value 2. I n addition, in the case 
of gasoline or LP gas as fuel, the exhaust gas stan dards for the 
categories shown in Table 1 shall be met. 
a. Next generation vehicles. 
b. Next generation vehicles or vehicles that satisf ies the fuel efficiency 
standard values of the categories shown in Table 4- 1, Table 4-2 and 
Table 4-3 corresponding to the fuel used. 
(4)  For buses, etc., following a. satisfies the referen ce value 1 and 
following b. satisfies the reference value 2. 
a. Next generation vehicles. 
b. Next generation vehicles or vehicles that satisf ies the fuel efficiency 
standard values of the categories shown in Table 5.  
(5) For trucks, etc., following a. satisfies the re ference value 1 and 
following b. satisfies the reference value 2. 
a. Next generation vehicles. 
b. Next generation vehicle or vehicles that satisfi es the fuel efficiency 
standard values of the categories shown in Table 6.  
(6) For tractors, the standard value 1 must satisfi es a. and the reference 
value 2 satisfies b. 
a. Next generation vehicles. 
b. Next generation vehicles or vehicles that satisf ies the fuel efficiency 
standard values of the categories shown in Table 7.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  Global warming potential of the material used for a ir conditioner is 150 
or small.  142 (2)  The item is designed for long-term use, taking into  account 
conservation of resources so that reuse of its mate rials is facilitated 
after its useful life, based on the evaluation crit eria of the Act on the 
Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. Es pecially, if the 
components include rare metals, reusing them should  be taken into 
consideration when designing the products.  
(3)  The item uses recycled material as much as possible . 
(4)  Plastic or synthetic fiber made from plant whose re duction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed is used as mu ch as possible. 
(5)  The eco-drive support function is installed. 
Notes: 
1.  Vehicles  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section  include 
passenger vehicles, small-size vehicles, and mini-s ized vehicles (excluding 
motorcycles), Article 2 of Road Transportation Vehi cle Law Enforcement Rule 
(No.74 of Transportation Ministerial Ordinance on A ugust 16, 1951).  
2.  Gross vehicle weight  denotes the total vehicle weight in accordance wit h Article 40 
of Road Transportation Vehicle Law Enforcement Rule . The same applies below. 
3.  Electric vehicles, etc., includes Electric vehicles, Hybrid vehicles, Plug-i n hybrid 
vehicles, Fuel cell vehicles and Hydrogen vehicles .  
4.  Next generation vehicles  includes Electric vehicles, etc., Natural gas vehi cles and 
Clean diesel vehicles.  
5.  Passenger vehicles means vehicles with a passenger capacity of 10 or l ess and a gross 
vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or less, and refers to o rdinary vehicles, compact vehicles 
and light vehicles.   
6.  Small buses  means passenger vehicles with a passenger capacity  of 11 or more and 
a gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or less. 
7.  Small freight vehicles  means freight vehicles with a gross vehicle weight  of 3.5 tons 
or less. 
8.  Buses, etc.  means a passenger car with a passenger capacity of  10 or more and a gross 
vehicle weight of more than 3.5 tons 
9.  Trucks, etc.  means freight vehicles (excluding towing vehicles)  with a gross vehicle 
weight of over 3.5 tons. 
10.  Tractors  means freight vehicles (limited to towing vehicles ) with a gross vehicle 
weight of over 3.5 tons 
11.  Factors for consideration (1) apply to the designat ed products defined as the 
Fluorocarbons prescribed in Article 2, Paragraph 2 of the Act for Rationalized Use 
and Proper Management of Fluorocarbons (Act No. 64 of 2001) 
12.  Global warming potential  in this section denotes the numerical value that s howed 
degree to which is heat-trapping gas brings global warming in ratio to which carbon 
dioxide brings global warming. 
13.  Rare metals  refers to the 31 types of metals (the seventeen rar e earth elements are 
considered as one metal type) specified at the Spec ial Meeting for the Comprehensive 
Assessment of Rare Metals at the Mining Panel of th e Ministry of Economy, Trade 
and Industry. 
14.  Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed  denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative,  objective and scientific analysis 143 and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
15.  The eco-drive support function  is such as support functions to those who drive ab out 
the best accelerator operation, shift change, displ ay of eco-drive execution condition, 
functions of analysis or diagnosis and select funct ion of energy conservation route 
that synchronizes with car navigation system. For v ehicles that use gasoline as fuel, 
it is necessary to proactively utilize bioethanol-b lend gasoline (E3, E10 and ETBE) 
in the region where the supply system have already in place. 
16.  For vehicles using diesel oil as fuel, it is necess ary to proactively utilize biodiesel 
fuel mixed diesel fuel (B5) in the region where the  supply system is already in place. 
 
 
 
Table 1: Emission Standards for Gasoline Vehicles a nd LP gas Vehicles  
Category Nitrogen 
oxide Non-methane 
hydrocarbon Carbon 
monoxide 
Passenger vehicles 
 JC08mode 1.15g/km or 
less 0.013g/km or less  0.013g/km or 
less 
WLTCmode  1.15g/km or 
less 0.05g/km or less 0.025g/km or 
less 
Small buses(1.7tons or 
less) 
Light-duty freight 
vehicles JC08mode 1.15g/km or 
less 0.025g/km or less  0.025g/km or 
less 
WLTCmode  1.15g/km or 
less 0.05g/km or less 0.025g/km or 
less 
Small buses(1.7tons or 
more) 
Medium-duty freight 
vehicles JC08mode 2.55g/km or 
less 0.025g/km or less  0.035g/km or 
less 
WLTCmode  2.55g/km or 
less 0.075g/km or less  0.035g/km or 
less 
Mini-size freight 
vehicles JC08mode 4.02g/km or 
less 0.025g/km or less  0.025g/km or 
less 
WLTCmode  4.02g/km or 
less 0.05g/km or less 0.025g/km or 
less 
Notes: 
1.  Particle-state matter should be extent considered t hat there is no exhaust. 
2.  Light-duty freight vehicles  refer to freight vehicles with a gross vehicle wei ght of 1.7tons 
or less. The same applies below.  
3.  Medium-duty freight vehicles  refer to freight vehicles with a gross vehicle wei ght of 
1.7tons or more and 3.5 tons or less. The same appl ies below. 
4.  Mini-size freight vehicles refer to mini vehicles among freight vehicles. The same applies 
below. 
5.  Depending on the measurement mode of the exhaust ga s, the value in either JC08 mode 
or WLTC mode shall be satisfied. 
 
 
 144 Table 2: Standard Fuel Efficiency in JC08 Mode or W LTC Mode for Gasoline 
Passenger Vehicles, Diesel Passenger Vehicles and L P Gas Passenger Vehicles 
Category Standard fuel efficiency 
(minimum)  
Gasoline  Diesel  LP Gas  
Vehicle weight of less than 741kg 24.6km/L 27.1km/L  19.2km/L 
Vehicle weight of  741kg  or 
more,  but less than 856kg  24.5km/L 27.0km/L 19.2km/L 
Vehicle weight of  856kg  or 
more,  but less than 971kg 23.7km/L 26.1km/L 18.5km/L 
Vehicle weight of  971kg  or 
more,  but less than 1,081kg 23.4km/L 25.8km/L 18.3km/L 
Vehicle weight of  1,081kg  or 
more,  but less than 1,196kg 21.8km/L 24.0km/L 17.1km/L 
Vehicle weight of  1,196kg  or 
more,  but less than 1,311kg 20.3km/L 22.4km/L 15.9km/L 
Vehicle weight of  1,311kg  or 
more, but less than 1,421kg 19.0km/L 20.9km/L 14.9km/L 
Vehicle weight of  1,421kg  or 
more, but less than 1,531kg 17.6km/L 19.4km/L 13.8km/L 
Vehicle weight of  1,531kg  or 
more, but less than 1,651kg 16.5km/L 18.2km/L 12.9km/L 
Vehicle weight of  1,651kg  or 
more, but less than 1,761kg 15.4km/L 17.0km/L 12.1km/L 
Vehicle weight of  1,761kg  or 
more, but less than 1,871kg 14.4km/L 15.9km/L 11.3km/L 
Vehicle weight of  1,871kg  or 
more, but less than 1,991kg 13.5km/L 14.9km/L 10.6km/L 
Vehicle weight of  1,991kg  or 
more, but less than 2,101kg 12.7km/L 14.0km/L 10.0km/L 
Vehicle weight of  2,101kg  or 
more, but less than 2,271kg 11.9km/L 13.1km/L 9.3km/L 
Vehicle weight of  2,271kg  or 
more 10.6km/L 11.7km/L 8.3km/L 
Notes:  
Vehicle weight  refers to the weight of a vehicle when empty as sp ecified in Item 6, Article 1 
of the safety standards for road trucking vehicles (No.67 statute of the Transport Ministry 
enacted in 1951). The same applies below.  
 
 
 
Table 3: Standard Fuel Efficiency in JC08 Mode or W LTC Mode for Small Buses (with a 
gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or less)  
Category Standard fuel efficiency 
(minimum ) 
Small buses fueled with gasoline 8.5km/L 145 Small buses fueled with diesel oil 9.7km/L 
 
 
 
Table 4-1: Standard Fuel Efficiency in JC08 Mode or  WLTC Mode for Gasoline Small 
Freight Vehicles  
Category Standard fuel 
efficiency 
(minimum) Type of motor 
vehicle  Type of 
transmissio n Vehicle weight Structure of 
motor vehicle  
Mini-size 
freight 
vehicles Manual  Less than 741kg 
A 23.2km/L 
 741kg or more 20.3km/L 
Other than 
manual Less than 741kg 20.9km/L 
741 kg or  more , but  less 
than  856kg  19.6km/L 
856kg or more 18.9km/L 
Manual Less than 741kg 
B 18.2km/L 
741 kg or  more , but l ess 
than  856kg  18.0km/L 
856 kg or  more , but  less 
than  971kg  17.2km/L 
971kg or more 16.4km/L 
Other than 
manual Less than 741kg 16.4km/L 
741 kg or  more , but  less 
than  856kg  16.0km/L 
856 kg or  more , but  less 
than  971kg  15.4km/L 
971kg or more 14.7km/L 
Light-duty 
freight 
vehicles Manual  Less than 1,081kg  18.5km/L 
1,081kg or more  17.1km/L 
Other than 
manual  Less than 1,081kg  17.4km/L 
1,081 kg or  more , but  less 
than1,196kg   15.8km/L 
1,196kg or more  14.7km/L 
Medium-duty 
freight 
vehicles Manual  
A 14.2km/L 
Other than 
manual  Less than 1,311kg 13.3km/L 
1,311kg or more 12.7km/L 
Manual  Less than 1,311kg B1 11.9km/L 
B2 11.2km/L 
1,311kg or more, but less 
than1,421kg B1 10.6km/L 
B2 10.2km/L 
1,421kg or more, but less 
than1,531kg B1 10.3km/L 
B2 9.9km/L 
B1 10.0km/L 146 1,531 kg or  more , but  less 
than1,651kg  B2 9.7km/L 
1,651kg or more, but less 
than1,761kg B1 9.8km/L 
B2 9.3km/L 
1,761kg or more B1 9.7km/L 
B2 8.9km/L 
Other than 
manual  Less than 1,311kg B1 10.9km/L 
B2 10.5km/L 
1,311kg or more, but less 
than1,421kg B1 9.8km/L 
B2 9.7km/L 
1,421kg or more, but less 
than1,531kg B1 9.6km/L 
B2 8.9km/L 
1,531kg or more, but less 
than1,651kg B1 9.4km/L 
B2 8.6km/L 
1,651kg or more B2 7.9km/L 
1,651 kg or  more , but  less 
than1,761kg  
B1 9.1km/L 
1,761 kg or  more , but  less 
than1,871kg  8.8km/L 
1,871kg or more 8.5km/L 
Notes: 
1.  The term Structure A  in this table refers to structures that meet to al l of the criteria 
listed below. The same applies below. 
a.  The value obtained by dividing maximum authorized f reight mass by gross 
vehicle weight is 0.3 or less.  
b.  The passenger seating section and the cargo carryin g section are installed in the 
same vehicle compartment, and the said compartment and the exterior are 
separated by a fixed roof and dividing walls such a s window glass, etc.  
c.  The engine is located in front of the driver's comp artment.  
2.  The term Structure B  in this table refers to all structures other than Structure A. The 
same applies below. 
3.  The term Structure B1  in this table refers to all structures that fulfil l the requirements 
set forth in 1b. The same applies below. 
4.  The term Structure B2  in this table refers to all structures other than B1. The same 
applies below. 
 
 
 
Table4-2: Standard Fuel Efficiency in JzC08 Mode or  WLTC Mode for Diesel Small 
Freight Vehicles  
Category Standard fuel 
efficiency 
(minimum) Type of 
motor vehicle  Type of 
transmission  Vehicle weight Structure of  
motor vehicle  
Manual Less than 741kg A 25.5 km/l 147 Mini-size 
freight 
vehicle 741kg or more 22.3 km/l 
Other than 
manual Less than 741 kg 23.0 km/l 
741 kg or more, but 
less than 856 kg 21.6 km/l 
856 kg or more 20.8 km/l 
Manual Less than 741 kg 
B 20.0 km/l 
741 kg or more, but 
less than 856 kg 19.8 km/l 
856 kg or more, but 
less than 971 kg 18.9 km/l 
971 kg or more 18.0 km/l 
Other than 
manual Less than 741 kg 18.0 km/l 
741 kg or more, but 
less than 856 kg 17.6 km/l 
856 kg or more, but 
less than 971 kg 16.9 km/l 
971 kg or more 16.2 km/l 
Light-duty 
freight 
vehicles Manual Less than 1,081kg  20.4 km/l  
1,081kg or more  18.8 km/l  
Other than 
manual Less than 1,081 kg  19.1 km/l  
1,081 kg or more, but 
less than 1,196 kg  17.4 km/l 
1,196 kg or more  16.2 km/l 
Medium-duty 
freight 
vehicles 
 Manual Less than 1,421 kg A or B1 14.5 km/l 
B2 14.3 km/l 
1,421 kg or more, but 
less than 1,531 kg A or B1 14.1 km/l 
B2 12.9 km/l 
1,531 kg or more, but 
less than 1,651 kg A or B1 13.8 km/l 
B2 12.6 km/l 
1,651 kg or more, but 
less than 1,761 kg A or B1 13.6 km/l 
B2 12.4 km/l 
1,761 kg or more, but 
less than 1,871 kg A or B1 13.3 km/l 
B2 12.0 km/l 
1,871 kg or more, but 
less than 1,991 kg A or B1 12.8 km/l 
B2 11.3 km/l 
1,991 kg or more, but 
less than 2,101 kg A or B1 12.3 km/l 
B2 11.2 km/l 
2,101 kg or more A or B1 11.7 km/l 
B2 11.1 km/l 
 
 Less than 1,421 kg A or B1 13.1 km/l 
B2 12.5 km/l 148 Other than 
manual 1,421 kg or more, but 
less than 1,531 kg A or B1 12.8 km/l 
B2 11.8 km/l 
1,531 kg or more, but 
less than 1,651 kg A or B1 11.5 km/l 
B2 10.9 km/l 
1,651 kg or more, but 
less than 1,761 kg A or B1 11.3 km/l 
B2 10.6 km/l 
1,761 kg or more, but 
less than 1,871 kg A or B1 11.0 km/l 
B2 9.7 km/l 
1,871 kg or more, but 
less than 1,991 kg A or B1 10.8 km/l 
B2 9.5 km/l 
1,991 kg or more, but 
less than 2,101 kg A or B1 10.3 km/l 
B2 9.0 km/l 
2,101 kg or more A or B1 9.4 km/l 
B2 8.8 km/l 
 
 
Table 4-3: Standard Fuel Efficiency in 10-15 Mode f or LP Gas Small Freight Vehicles  
Category Standard fuel 
efficiency 
(minimum) Type of 
motor vehicle  Type of 
transmissi 
on Vehicle weight Structure of 
motor vehicle  
Mini-size 
freight 
vehicles Manual Less than 703 kg A 15.8 km/l 
B 13.3 km/l 
703 kg or more, but less 
than 828 kg A 14.1 km/l 
B 13.1 km/l 
828 kg or more  12.1 km/l 
Other than 
manual Less than 703 kg A 14.8 km/l 
B 12.7 km/l 
703 kg or more, but less 
than 828 kg A 12.9 km/l 
B 12.1 km/l 
828 kg or more  11.7 km/l 
Light-duty 
freight 
vehicles Manual Less than 1,016 kg  13.9 km/l 
1,016 kg or more  12.3 km/l 
Other than 
manual Less than 1,016 kg  11.7 km/l 
1,016 kg or more  10.8 km/l 
Medium-
dutyfreigh 
t vehicles 
(limited to 
gross 
vehicle 
weight of 
2.5tons or 
less) Manual Less than 1,266 kg A 11.3 km/l 
B 9.6 km/l 
1,266 kg or more, but 
less than 1,516 kg  8.4 km/l 
1,516 kg or more  7.3 km/l 
Other than 
manual Less than 1,266 kg A 9.8 km/l 
B 8.8 km/l 
1,266 kg or more  8.1 km/l 
 
 
 149   
Table 5: Standard Fuel Efficiency in Heavy Vehicle JH15Mode for Route Buses and 
General Buses (with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5 t ons or more)  
Category Standard fuel efficiency 
(minimum ) 
Route buses  General buses  
Gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or more, 
but less than 6 tons 6.97km/L 9.04km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 6 tons or more, 
but less than 8 tons 6.52km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 8 tons or more, 
but less than 10 tons 6.30km/L 6.37km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 10 tons or more, 
but less than 12 tons 5.77km/L 5.70km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 12 tons or more, 
but less than 14 tons  5.14km/L 5.21km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 14 tons or more, 
but less than 16 tons 4.23km/L 4.06km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of 16 tons  3.57km/L 
Notes: 
1.  Route buses  refer to the vehicles for public service vehicle t ransportation business 
that decides routes other than route such as nation al expressway and operates 
regularly, with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5tons o r more and with a riding capacity 
of 11 persons or more. 
2.  General buses refer to other than route buses, with a gross vehic le weight of 3.5tons 
or more and with a riding capacity of 11 persons or  more. 
 
 
 
Table 6: Standard Fuel Efficiency in Heavy Vehicle JH15Mode for Tracks (with a gross 
vehicle weight of 3.5tons or more) 
Category Maximum 
authorized freight 
mass Standard fuel 
efficiency 
(minimum) 
Gross vehicle weight of 3.5 tons or more, 
but less than 7.5tons 1.5tons or less 10.83 km/L  
1.5tons or more, 
but less than 2tons  10.35km/L 
2tons or more, but 
less than 3tons 9.51km/L 
3tons or more 8.12 km/L  
Gross vehicle weight of 7.5  tons or more, 
but less than 8 tons   7.24km/L 
Gross vehicle weight  of  8 tons  or more, but 
less  than 10 tons   6.52km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of  10  tons  or more, 
but l ess  than 12 tons   6.00km/L 
Gross vehicle weight of  12  tons or more, 
but  less than 14 tons   5.69km/L 150 Gross vehicle weight of 14  tons  or more, 
but less than 16 tons   4.97km/L 
Gross vehicle weight 1 6 tons  or more but 
less than 20  tons   4.15 km/L  
Gross v ehicle weight 20  tons   4.04  km/L  
 
 
 
Table 7: Standard Fuel Efficiency in Heavy Vehicle JH15Mode for Tractors (towing 
engine with a gross vehicle weight of 3.5tons or mo re) 
Category Standard fuel efficiency 
(minimum) 
Gross vehicle weight of no more than 20 tons 3.09 k m/l  
Gross vehicle weight 20 tons or more 2.01 km/l  
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
The ratio of the number of vehicles that meet the c riteria of standard value 1 and standard 
value 2 to the total number of vehicles to purchase  (including lease/rental agreements) in the 
fiscal year. 
  151  13-2. Tires  
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Tires for 
passenger cars  Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Rolling resistance coefficient is 9 or less.  
(2)  Product is not a spiked tire.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  Increased life of product is considered.  
(2)  Noise reduction during operation is considered.  
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(4)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered.  
Notes:  
1.  Tires for passenger cars  under consideration for evaluation criteria in thi s section 
refers to those sold on the market (excluding stud- less tires), and does not regulate 
tires that the car is equipped with at the time of purchase.  
2.  Testing method of the rolling resistance coefficien t is based on JIS D 4234.  
3.  Item (1) in the Evaluation Criteria, wet grip perfo rmance must be 110 or more, 
measured by TEST METHOD FOR TYRE WET GRIP GRADING (C1 TYRES))   
4.  Item (2) in the Evaluation Criteria takes in to con sideration the aims of Regulations 
regarding the prevention of dust from spiked tires  (Regulation No.55, 1990) whose 
aim is the prevention of dust from spiked tires in order to protect people’s health and 
to preserve the living environment.  
 
 
 
 Target Setting Guideline  
Ratio of the number of tires for passenger cars mee ting the criteria to the total number of tires 
to be purchased in the fiscal year.  
  152 13-3 Engine Oil 
(1)Items and Evaluation Criteria 
2 cycle engine 
oil Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  The rate of biodegradation within 28 days is 60% or  more. 
(2)  The 96 hour LC50 value for acute toxicity test usin g fish is 100 mg/l or 
more. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1) A system for collection and reuse/recycling of used oil container.  
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as pos sible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(3) A system for the collection and reuse/recycling  of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Biodegradation testing should employ one of the fol lowing methods. 10-d window 
shall not be used for these testing methods. 
*OECD (Organization for Economic Co-Operation and D evelopment) Chemical 
Substance Testing Guideline 
• 301B (CO2 Production Testing) 
• 301C (Modified MITI (I) Testing) 
• 301F (Manometric Respirometry Testing) 
*ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 
• D5864 (Standard testing method to determine the deg ree of aerobic 
biodegradation in water environment for lubricants and lubricant components) 
• D6731 (Standard testing method to determine the deg ree of aerobic 
biodegradation in water environment for lubricant i nside an airtight respirometer 
and lubricant components) 
2.  Acute toxicity testing using fish should employ one  of the following methods. 
*JIS (Japan Industrial Standards) 
• K 0102 (Factory Drainage Testing Method) 
• K 0420-71 Series (10, 20, 30) 
(Water quality - Measurement of acute toxicity of c hemical substance for fresh-
water fish (zebra fish (cartilaginous, carps) – Par t 1: Still water method; Part 2 : 
Pa rtially still water method; Part 3 : Streaming method) 
*OECD (Organization for Economic Co-Operation and D evelopment) 
• 203 (Acute toxicity test for fish) 
For testing of insoluble products, WAF (Water Accom modated Fraction) or WSF 
(Water Soluble Fraction) that have been prepared in  accordance with ASTM 
D6081 (Standard Practice for Aquatic Toxicity Testi ng of Lubricants: Sample 
Preparation and Results Interpretation) may be used . The 96hour LL50 value 
need to be 100mg/l or higher for this purpose. 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio per each category of the amount (liters) meet ing the criteria to the total amount (liters) 
to be purchased in the fiscal year.   153 14. Fire Extinguishers 
(1)Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Fire 
extinguishers Evaluation Criteria  
(1) Fire protection fluid shall use no less than 40 % by weight of recycled 
material. 
(2) A system is in place for collection and reuse/r ecycling of used 
materials, and a system for the proper disposal of components which 
cannot be reused or recycled. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The item is designed so that it can be easily disma ntled and its materials 
separated to facilitate either reuse of components or recycling of 
materials. 
(2)  The item uses as large amount of recycled plastic a s possible if plastic 
components are used. 
(3)  Organic solvent, or paint with as low odor as possi ble is used as 
coating. 
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
(5)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes:   
1.  Fire extinguisher under consideration in the evaluation criteria of t his section 
denotes powder (ABC) fire extinguisher (powder fire  extinguisher that is in 
accordance with “Ordinance to determine technical s tandards for fire extinguishers 
(Ministry of Home Affairs Ordinance 27, September 1 7, 1964).” applicable to all of 
A fire, B fire and Electric fire, and does not incl ude aerosol type handy fire 
extinguishers, fire extinguishers for the ships and  fire extinguishers for the aircraft.) 
and includes replacement fire protection fluid to b e used during inspection. 
2.  A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling  denotes the fulfillment 
of the below requirements. 
A system for collection  should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a c ollection system located at the store, 
or collection in response to the user’s request) fo r voluntarily collecting (collecting 
on its own or commissioning other co mpanies to collect; includes situations where 
multiple businesses undertake the collection togeth er) used fire extinguisher. 
b. Specific information for the collection of used mobile phones, etc. (collection 
method, collection location, etc.) are available fo r the users on the package, 
enclosed printed matter, user’s manual, or the webs ite. 
A system for reuse and recycling  should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of c ollected products must energy 
recovered. 
3.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.). 154  
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of fire extinguishers meeting t he criteria to the total number of fire 
extinguishers to be purchased in the fiscal year.  
  155 15. Uniforms and Work Clothes, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Uniforms and 
work clothes Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical)  includes polyester 
fiber and/or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfil l one of the following.  
(1)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used except lining. If polye ster fiber are used less 
than 50% by weight of all fiber except lining, acco unts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber, and no less than 50% by  weight of polyester 
fiber except lining. 
(2)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used, and a system for colle cting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is establishe d. 
(3)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r used. 
(4)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic  polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(5)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic  polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a system fo r collecting, reuse 
and recycling materials after product use is establ ished. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after product use 
is established. 
(2)  Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or re constructed fiber as 
much as possible.  
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Caps Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical)  includes polyester 
fiber and/or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfil l one of the following. 
(1)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used. If polyester fiber are  used less than 50% by 
weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber, 
and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used, and a system for colle cting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is establishe d. 
(3)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r used. 
(4)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 156 by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic  polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(5)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic  polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a system fo r collecting, reuse 
and recycling materials after product use is establ ished. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling after 
product use. 
(2)  Fiber used for products  or   accessories contains unused fiber or 
reconstructed fiber and bamboo fiber as much as pos sible.  
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Shoes Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose fiber content on the upper (natural and chemical) includes 
polyester fiber and/or synthetic fiber made from pl ant fulfill one of the 
following. 
(1)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used except lining. If polye ster fiber are used less 
than 50% by weight of all fiber except lining, acco unts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber, and no less than 50% by  weight of polyester 
fiber except lining. 
(2)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r used. 
(3)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic  polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling after product 
use. 
(2)  Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or re constructed fiber as 
much as possible.  
(3)  Where plastics are used on the upper or the lower p art, recycled 
plastics, plastics made from plants or synthetic fi bers that have been 
confirmed to have an environmental impact reducing effect have been 
used as much as possible. 
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes:   
1.  PET resins  denote material that use recycled PET bottles and T extile products, etc. 
2.  Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accesso ries such as 
button, fastener, hook and sewing thread, etc. from  all of product. The weight of 157 accessories used recycled plastic (part or all of p lastic once used as a part of a useful 
product that has been discarded, remnants discarded  during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles  (This excludes, however, plastic 
that has been recycled in the process of manufactur ing the product.), and synthetic 
fiber or plastics made from plant that is acknowled ged for its environmental load 
reduction effects may be include “the weight of all  fiber” and “the weight of polyester 
fiber from recycled PET resins, the weight of polye ster fiber from recovered fiber or 
synthetic fiber made from plant that is acknowledge d for its environmental load 
reduction effects” . 
3.  Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used  clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and  from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materia lly or chemically recycling 
processes. 
5.  Unused fiber  denoted fiber made from such as reusing short fiber  produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
6.  Reconstructed fiber denoted fiber made from linear form materials creat ed by 
decomposition of recovered fiber.  
7.  A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling  denotes the fulfillment 
of the below requirements. 
A system for collection  should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a.  The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a coll ection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in respon se to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or co mmissioning other companies 
to collect; includes situations where multiple busi nesses undertake the collection 
together) used products. 
b.  In order to precipitate appropriate collection, spe cific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location,  etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling  should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c.  The collected products must be reused, material rec ycled and chemical recycled.  
d.  The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of coll ected products must energy 
recovered. 
8.  Upper material  means the part material corresponding to the parts  of JIS S 5050 
(leather shoes) Appendix 1 "Name of each part", par ts of decorative leather, waist, 
leather, wholecut and backstay. 
9.  Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environme ntal load has been confirmed  
denotes material whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed 
by a third party such as an LCA expert through a qu antitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade  off, of the environmental load of 
the product throughout its lifecycle. 
10.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate  denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material which is included in plant based synthetic  fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
11.  When cleaning the uniform and work cloths, each pro curement organization should 
consider about the following: 
a.  Choose the business who executes cleaning that fulf ills the evaluation criteria of 
“Laundry and dry cleaning” (refer to Laundry and dry cleaning  section).  158 b.  Acknowledge thoroughly the labeling based on JIS L 0217 or JIS L 0001 (Textiles 
- Care labelling code using symbols). 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
1. Uniforms and work clothes, shoes: ratio of the n umber of uniforms and work clothes or 
shoes that meets the criteria to the total number o f those containing polyester fiber or plant 
based synthetic fiber to be purchased in the fiscal  year. 
2. Caps: ratio of the number of caps that meets the  criteria to the total number of those 
containing polyester fiber or plant based synthetic  fiber to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
 
  159 16. Interior Fixtures and Bedding 
16-1. Curtains, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Curtains 
 
Cloth blinds Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical)  includes polyester fiber 
and/or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill one of the following. 
(1)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used. If polyester fiber are  used less than 50% by 
weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber, 
and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used, and a system for colle cting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is establishe d. 
(3)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers accounts 
for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber used. 
(4)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of environmental 
load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 2 5% by weight of all 
fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer content rate accounts for no 
less than 10%. 
(5)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of environmental 
load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 1 0% by weight of all 
fiber used  and  bio-based synthetic polymer content rate accou nts for 
no less than 4%, also a system for collecting, reus e and recycling 
materials after product use is established. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The use of brominated fire retardants is as minimiz ed as possible. 
(2)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after product use 
is established. 
(3)  Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or re constructed fiber as 
much as possible.  
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Metal blinds Evaluation Criteria  
Solar reflectance is no less than the numeric value  shown in Table . 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into account 
ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal.  
Notes:  
1.  PET resins  denote material that use recycled PET bottles and f iber products, etc. 
2. Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accesso ries such as hook, 
runner, bracket and sewing thread, etc. from all of  product. The weight of accessories 
used recycled plastic (part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 160 recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.)), and synthetic fiber or plastic 
made from plant whose reduction effect of environme ntal load has been confirmed 
may be include “the weight of all fiber” and “the w eight of polyester fiber from 
recycled PET resins, the weight of polyester fiber from recovered fiber or synthetic 
fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of env ironmental load has been 
confirmed.”  
3. Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used  clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and  from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from reco vered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materia lly or chemically recycling 
processes. 
5. Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environme ntal load has been confirmed  
denotes material whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed by 
a third party such as an LCA expert through a quant itative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade  off, of the environmental load of the 
product throughout its lifecycle. 
6．Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate  denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material, which is included in plant based syntheti c fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
7. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling  denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection  should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a c ollection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in respon se to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or co mmissioning other companies to 
collect; includes situations where multiple busines ses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the collection 
(collection method, collection location, etc.) of u sed products is available from the 
products body, package, catalog and website for the  users. 
A system for reuse and recycling  should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical recycled. 
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of c ollected products must energy 
recovered. 
8. Unused fiber  denotes fiber made from  such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
9. Reconstructed fiber denotes fiber made from linear form materials creat ed by 
decomposition of recovered fiber. 
10. The measuring method and calculating method for  solar reflectance are according to 
JIS R 3106. L*value of those are according to JIS Z  8781-4. 
11. When cleaning the products, procurement organiz ation should consider to choice the 
business who executes cleaning that fulfills the ev aluation criteria of “Laundry and dry 
cleaning” (refer to Laundry and dry cleaning  section).   
 
  161 Table: The standard for solar reflectance 
L* value The solar reflectance(%) 
70.0 or less 40.0 
More than 70.0, but less 
than 80.0 50.0 
More than 80.0 60.0 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the units of curtains, cloth blinds those containing polyester fiber or synthetic fiber 
made form plant and metal blind meet the criteria t o the total number of to be purchased in 
the fiscal year. 
  162 16-2. Carpets 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Tufted carpets 
 
Tile carpets 
 
Woven carpets 
 
 Evaluation Criteria  
Recycled material including unused fiber, fiber fro m recovered fiber, 
recycled plastic and other recycled material makes up at least 25% of 
weight of entire product. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after product use 
is established. 
(2)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact when 
disposing. 
Needle-punch 
carpets Evaluation Criteria  
Fulfill one of the following. 
(1)  Recycled material including unused fiber, fiber fro m recovered fiber, 
recycled plastic and other recycled material makes up at least 25% of 
weight of entire product. 
(2)  Products includes synthetic fiber made from plant f ulfill one of the 
following. 
a. Products whose fiber content includes biodegrada ble synthetic fiber 
or plastic made from plant whose reduction effect o f environmental 
load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 2 5% by weight 
of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic polymer c ontent rate 
accounts for no less than 10%.  
b. Synthetic fiber or plastic made from plant whose  reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synth etic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a s ystem for 
collecting, reuse and recycling materials after pro duct use is 
established. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1) A system for collecting, reuse and recycling ma terials after product use 
is established. 
(2) Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as pos sible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes:  
1.  Weight of entire product  denotes that weight of all fiber, added resins and  inorganic 
fraction, etc. 
2.  Unused fiber  denoted fiber made from  such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
3.  Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used  clothing and 
used cloth material or generated from a weaving mil l and from a sewing plant in 
the manufacturing process.  163 4.  Fiber from recovered fiber  denotes fiber made mainly from recovered fiber cre ated 
by materially or chemically recycled. 
5.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or 
the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This exclu des, however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.). 
6.  Recycled material  denotes material from part or all of products disca rded  after 
used , remnants discarded during the manufacturing process or defective articles 
(This excludes material that has been recycled in t he same process of manufacturing 
the product). 
7.  Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environme ntal load has been confirmed  
denotes material whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed 
by a third party such as an LCA expert through a qu antitative, objective and 
scientific analysis and evaluation, including effec ts of trade off, of the 
environmental load of the product throughout its li fecycle. 
8.   Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate  denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material, which is included in plant based syntheti c fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
9.  A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling  denotes the fulfillment 
of the below requirements. 
A system for collection should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a c ollection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in respon se to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or co mmissioning other companies 
to collect; includes situations where multiple busi nesses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location,  etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling  should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products must be reused, material recycled and chemical recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of c ollected products must energy 
recovered. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of products that meet the criteria (m2) to th e total amount of products to be purchased 
in the fiscal year (m2). 
  164 16-3. Blankets, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Blankets Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical)  includes 
polyester fiber fulfill one of the following. 
(1)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 25% by weight of all fibe r used. If 
polyester fiber are used less than 50% by weight of  all fiber, 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r, and no less 
than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less 
than 10% by weight of all fiber used, and a system for collecting, 
reuse and recycling materials after product use is established. 
(3)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r used. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after 
product use is established. 
(2)  Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or re constructed 
fiber as much as possible. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environm ental impact 
upon disposal. 
Comforters Evaluation Criteria  
Fulfill one of the following. 
(1)  Comforters that use either as fiber (natural and ch emical) for 
both cover and filling polyester fiber products ful fill one of the 
following. 
a.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no 
less than 50% by weight of all fiber of comforter’s  cover and 
the filling. If polyester fiber are used less than 50% by 
weight of all fiber of comforter’s cover and the fi lling, 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r of 
comforter’s cover and the filling, and no less than  50% by 
weight of polyester fiber. 
b.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no 
less than 10% by weight of all fiber, and a system for 
collecting, reuse and recycling materials after pro duct use is 
established. 
c.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered 
fibers accounts for no less than 25% by weight of b oth cover 
and filling polyester fiber used. 
(2)  The filling contains 80% or more by weight of filli ng obtained 
from used comforters that have been appropriately w ashed and 
disinfected for recycled use. 
 165 Factors for Consideration  
(1)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after 
product use is established. 
(2)  Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or re constructed 
fiber as much as possible. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environm ental impact 
upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1.  PET resins  denote material that use recycled PET bottles and f iber products, etc. 
2.  Weight of all fiber denotes the weight of all product excluding accesso ries such as 
button, fastener, hook and sewing thread, etc. from  all of product.  The weight of 
accessories used recycled plastic (part or all of p lastic once used as a part of a useful 
product that has been discarded, remnants discarded  during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles  (This excludes, however, plastic 
that has been recycled in the process of manufactur ing the product.)), may be include 
“the weight of all fiber” and “the weight of polyes ter fiber from recycled PET resins 
or polyester fiber from recovered fiber.” 
3.  Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used  clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and  from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materia lly or chemically recycling 
processes. 
5.  Unused fiber  denotes fiber made from such as reusing short fiber  produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
6.  Reconstructed fiber denotes fiber made from linear form materials creat ed by 
decomposition of recovered fiber. 
7.  Filling  in the evaluation criteria for comforters refer to  cotton, lamb wool, down and 
synthetic material that are used to fill comforters . 
8.  A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling  denotes the fulfillment 
of the below requirements. 
A system for collection  should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a.  The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a coll ection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in respon se to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or co mmissioning other companies to 
collect; includes situations where multiple businesses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b.  In order to precipitate appropriate collection, spe cific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location,  etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c.  The collected products must be reused, material rec ycled and chemical recycled.  
d.  The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of coll ected products must energy 
recovered. 
9. When cleaning the products, procurement organiza tions should consider to choose the 
business who executes cleaning that fulfills the ev aluation criteria of “Laundry and dry 
cleaning” (refer to Laundry and dry cleaning  section). 166  
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
1. Blankets: ratio of the number of blankets meetin g the criteria to the total number of those 
containing polyester fiber to be purchased (includi ng lease/rental agreements) in the 
fiscal year. 
2. Comforters: ratio of the number of comforters me eting the criteria to the total number of 
those containing polyester fiber, or containing rec ycled filling, to be purchased (including 
lease/rental agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  167 16-4. Beds 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Bed frames Evaluation Criteria  
With the exception of metals, the primary material meets, of the criteria 
below, (1) for plastic, (2) for wood, and (3) for p aper. In addition, items whose 
secondary material include wood meets (2) a, b, and  c. Items whose 
secondary material include paper (with the exceptio n of virgin pulp 
manufactured with lumber from thinning, or with rec ycled wood pieces 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories) meets (3 ) b. 
(1)  Recycled plastic makes up no less than 10% in weigh t of all plastic used.  
(2)  Fulfill the following d, and depending on the raw m aterials used, fulfill   
the following a, b or c. 
a.  Lumber from thinning, recycled wood pieces obtained  from 
plywood or lumber factories. 
b.  Lumber from thinning is in compliance with the regu lations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. 
c.  Other than above  a, lumber used as raw material is in compliance 
with the regulations concerning forestry in its cou ntry or 
geographical area of origin. 
d.  Discharge rate of formaldehyde from materials is no  greater than 
0.02 mg/m²h, or the equivalent. 
(3)  Fulfill the following. 
a.  At least 50% recycled pulp content. 
b.  If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pul pwood used is to be 
in compliance with the regulations concerning fores try in its country 
or geographical area of origin. 
c.  Above b. does not apply recycled wood pieces obtain ed from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over fro m forestry and 
lumber with a small diameter. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(4)  Designed for long-term use, taking into account mai ntenance, repair, and 
the replaceability of parts that wear. Designed to enable component reuse 
and easy disassembly for refurbishment and recyclin g, or the appropriate 
disposal of the separated parts after the item’s us eful life. Special care 
taken in the design of the item’s metal components to enable long-term 
use, conservation of resources, and reuse of materi als. 
(5)  If the material includes wood, lumber that is used as the raw material 
(with the exception of lumber from thinning, or rec ycled wood pieces 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories) is to be  obtained from a 
forest that is conducting a sustainable operation. 
(6)  If the material includes paper, and furthermore, if  virgin pulp is used, 
pulpwood that is used as the raw material is to be obtained from a forest 
that is conducting a sustainable operation. 
(7)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 168 (8)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Mattresses Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Products include polyester fiber or synthetic fiber  made from plant used 
for filling components fulfill one of the following . 
a.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 25% by weight of all fibe r used. 
b.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r used. 
c.  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synth etic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(2)  All fiber used for felt are unused fiber or reconst ructed fiber. 
(3)  The amount of free formaldehyde excreted from mater ial not to exceed 
75 ppm. 
(4)  Fluorocarbons are not used as expanding agent for u rethane foam. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The item is designed for long-term use, so that any  consumable parts can 
be replaced and, after the item’s useful life, it c an be dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, re use and recycling, or the 
appropriate disposal of its separated parts. 
(2)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into account ease 
of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal.  
Notes: 
1.  Items that are used for special purposes such as me dical care, nursing, or advanced 
medical care shall not be included in bed frames  under consideration in the evaluation 
criteria of this section. 
2.  Items that are used for advanced medical care (oper ating table, ICU bed, etc.) shall not be 
included in mattresses  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section. 
3.  Fluorocarbons are the materials defined as the Fluo rocarbons prescribed in Article 2, 
Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Pro per Management of Fluorocarbons, 
(Act No. 64 of 2001). 
4.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part  of a useful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been recycled 
in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
5.  PET resins  denote material that use recycled PET bottles and fiber products, etc. 
6.  Weight of all fiber  denotes the weight of all product excluding access ories such as button, 
fastener, hook and sewing thread, etc. from all of product. The weight of accessories used 
recycled plastic and synthetic fiber or plastic mad e from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed may be includ e “the weight of all fiber”, “the 
weight of polyester fiber from recycled PET resins,  the weight of polyester fiber from 
recovered fiber or synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction effect of 
environmental load has been confirmed”. 169 7.  Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used  clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and  from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
8.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materia lly or chemically recycling processes. 
9.  Discharge rate of no greater than 0.02 mg/m²h, or t he equivalent denotes the following.  
Beds for domestic use which meet this formaldehyde discharge according to JIS S 1102 
fill this standard. 
a.  Wood material with a corresponding JIS or Japan Agr icultural Standards, whose 
criteria for formaldehyde discharge is regulated, m ust meet the criteria for F ☆☆☆ . 
b.  Wood material that does not qualify for the standar ds outlined in item (a.) above must 
satisfy the below numbers when evaluated according to the method determined by JIS 
A 1460. 
Average Maximum 
0.5 mg/L 0.7 mg/L 
 
10.  Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environme ntal load has been confirmed  
denotes material whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed by  a 
third party such as an LCA expert through a quantit ative, objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle. 
11.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate  denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material, which is included in plant-based syntheti c fiber to the weight of all fiber.  
12.  Felt denotes items created by forming linear fiber mate rial into a sheet by needle-punch 
processing method. (This does not include items tha t use thermoplastic material or 
employ a bonding agent.) 
13.  Unused fiber  denoted fiber made from  such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
14.  Reconstructed fiber denotes fiber made from linear form materials creat ed by 
decomposition of recovered fiber.  
15.  Evaluation criteria for bed frames were determined for products whose primary material 
other than metal is plastic, wood, or paper. Under consideration in the evaluation criteria, 
it does not include products whose primary material  is metal and does not use plastic, 
wood, or paper. 
16.  When procurement bed frame and mattress as a unit, each part shall comply with the 
respective criteria above. 
17.  Evaluation criteria (2) b for bedframes applies to the subject of Clean Wood Act. 
18.  Evaluation criteria (3) c for bedframes, for other than the subject of the Clean Wood Act, 
does not apply to virgin pulp manufactured with lum ber from thinning, or virgin pulp 
manufactured by using recycled wood pieces such as obtained from plywood or lumber 
factories, material left over from forestry, or lum ber with a small diameter. 
19.  Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest where pulpwood 
producing wood and paper originates from is to be c onducted. 
a. For subject of Clean Wood Act, Wood-related Enti ties is in accordance with Clean 
Wood Act and the Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Ver ification on Legality and 
Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” For other than 170 Wood-related Entities, to be conducted in accordanc e with the Forest Agency’s 
Guideline. 
b. In the case of items other than subject to Clean  Wood Act, to be conducted in 
accordance with the above Guideline. In addition, c ertification system of forest, timber, 
etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized for confir mation of legality. 
Regarding raw timber where the contract between the  lumber company and the 
processing and marketing companies has been made pr ior to April 1, 2006, a supplier 
who owns raw materials or products etc. as of April  1, 2006, specifies the raw materials 
or products etc., and reports them in advance to th e Forestry Agency once a year, and 
is a specified raw material or product etc. If it i s stated in the certificate, the proof that 
it is a legal wood prescribed in the above guidelin es is unnecessary. 
 The period of time for which this exceptional clau se is applicable will be determined 
in consideration with market trend. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of bed frames, mattresses, and bed frames and mattresses acquired as a 
unit meeting the criteria to the total number of th ose to be purchased (including lease/rental 
agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  171  17. Work Gloves  
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Work gloves  Evaluation Criteria  
Products whose main material is fiber content (natu ral and chemical) fulfill 
one of the following.  
(1)  Polyester fiber products shall include polyester fi ber from recycled PET 
resins. At least 50% by weight of all natural and c hemical fiber used 
(excluding anti-slip coating) shall be polyester fi ber from recycled PET 
resins.  
(2)  Fiber comprised of post-consumer material makes up at least 50% by 
weight of the entire product weight (excluding anti -slip coating).  
(3)  Unused fiber makes up at least 50% by weight of the  entire product 
weight (excluding anti-slip coating).  
(4)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used (excluding anti-slip co ating) and bio-based 
synthetic polymer content rate accounts for no less  than 10%.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  Fiber other than polyester fiber from recycled PET resin should also be 
made of unused fiber or reconstructed fiber (exclud ing anti-slip coating).  
(2)  Does not use bleaches.  
Notes:  
1.  PET resins  denote material that use recycled PET bottles and products, etc.  
2.  Post-consumer material refers to material or product discarded after used as a product.  
3.  Unused fiber  denotes fiber made from  such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter).  
4.  Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environme ntal load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed by 
a third party such as an LCA expert through a quant itative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade  off, of the environmental load of the 
product throughout its lifecycle.  
5.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material, which is included in plant based syntheti c fiber to the weight of all fiber.  
6.  Reconstructed fiber is created by decomposing and creating into linear form materials 
such as remnants from manufacturing of clothing, an d products that are no longer in 
use.  
 
 
 
 Target Setting Guideline  
Ratio of the number of pairs of gloves meeting the criteria to the total number of pairs of 
gloves to be purchased in the fiscal year.  
  172 18. Other Textile Products 
18-1. Tents and Sheets 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Tents Evaluation criteria  
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical)  includes polyester 
fiber or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill on e of the following. 
(1)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber. If polyester fiber are used less than 50% 
by weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 1 0% by weight of all 
fiber, and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber, and a system for collec ting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is establishe d. 
(3)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r used. 
(4)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synth etic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(5)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synth etic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a s ystem for collecting, 
reuse and recycling materials after product use is established. 
 
Factors for consideration  
(1)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after product 
use is established. 
(2)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Tarps Evaluation criteria  
At least 50% by weight of fiber (natural and chemic al) used in 
polyethylene fiber products shall be recycled polye thylene fiber. 
 
Factors for consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into account 
ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal.  
Notes: 
1.  PET resins  denote material that use recycled PET bottles and textile products, etc. 
2.  Weight of all fiber  denotes the weight of all product excluding access ories such as pole, 
fastener and metal parts, etc. from all of product.  The weight of accessories used 
recycled plastic (part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product that has 
been discarded, remnants discarded during the manuf acturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.)), may be include “the weight of 173 all fiber”, “the weight of polyester fiber from rec ycled PET resins or the weight of 
polyester fiber from recovered fiber”. 
3.  Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used  clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and  from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materia lly or chemically recycling 
processes. 
5.  Recycled polyethylene  denotes part or all of polyethylene once used as a part of a 
useful product that has been discarded, remnants di scarded during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles  (This excludes, however, 
polyethylene that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
6.  Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environme ntal load has been confirmed  
denotes material whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed by 
a third party such as an LCA expert through a quant itative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade  off, of the environmental load of the 
product throughout its lifecycle. 
7.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate  denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material which is included in plant based synthetic  fiber to the weight of all fiber 
8.  A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling  denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection  should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a.  The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a coll ection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in respon se to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or co mmissioning other companies to 
collect; includes situations where multiple busines ses undertak e the collection 
together) used products.  
b.  In order to precipitate appropriate collection, spe cific information for the collection 
(collection method, collection location, etc.) of u sed products is available from the 
products body, package, catalog and website for the  users. 
A system for reuse and recycling  should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c.  The collected products must be reused, material rec ycled and chemical recycled.  
d.  The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of coll ected products must energy 
recovered. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of tents that use polyester fib er or synthetic fiber made from plant, or 
tarps that use polyethylene fiber meeting the crite ria to the total number of tents that use 
polyester fiber or tarps that use polyethylene fibe r to be purchased (including lease/rental 
agreements) in the fiscal year. 
  174 18-2. Safety Nets 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Safety nets Evaluation criteria 
All fiber products (natural and chemical) that use polyester fiber, 
polyethylene fiber and/or synthetic fiber made from  plant shall meet one 
of the following.  
(1)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber. If polyester fiber are used less than 50% 
by weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 1 0% by weight of all 
fiber, and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber, and a system for collec ting, reuse and 
recycling materials after product use is establishe d. 
(3)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r used. 
(4)  At least 50% by weight of fiber used in polyethylen e fiber products 
shall be recycled polyethylene. 
(5)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synth etic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
 
Factors for consideration 
(1)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after product 
use is established. 
(2)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1.  PET resins  denote material that use recycled PET bottles and textile products, etc. 
2.  Weight of all fiber  denotes the weight of all product excluding access ories of metal 
parts, etc. from all of product. The weight of acce ssories used recycled plastic (part 
or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful p roduct that has been discarded, 
remnants discarded during the manufacturing process , or the recycle/reuse of 
defective articles (This excludes, however, plastic  that has been recycled in the 
process of manufacturing the product)) and syntheti c fiber or plastics made from 
plant that is acknowledged for its environmental lo ad reduction effects may be 
include “the weight of all fiber” and “the weight o f polyester fiber from recycled PET 
resins, the weight of polyester fiber from recovere d fiber or synthetic fiber made from 
plant that is acknowledged for its environmental lo ad reduction effects”. 
3.   Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used  clothing and 
used cloth material or generated from a weaving mil l and from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4.   Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from reco vered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materia lly or chemically recycling 
processes. 175 5.  Recycled polyethylene  denotes part or all of polyethylene once used as a part of a 
useful product that has been discarded, remnants di scarded during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles  (This excludes, however, 
polyethylene that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
6.  Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environme ntal load has been confirmed  
denotes material whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed 
by a third party such as an LCA expert through a qu antitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade  off, of the environmental load of 
the product throughout its lifecycle. 
7.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate  denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material, which is included in plant based syntheti c fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
8.  A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling  denotes the fulfillment 
of the below requirements. 
A system for collection  should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a.  The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a coll ection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in respon se to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or co mmissioning other companies 
to collect; incl udes situations where multiple businesses undertake  the 
collection together) used products.  
b.  In order to precipitate appropriate collection, spe cific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location,  etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse and recycling  should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c.  The collected products must be reused, material rec ycled and chemical recycled.  
d.  The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of coll ected products must energy 
recovered. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of safety nets that use polyest er, polyethylene, or plant based synthetic 
fiber meeting the criteria, to the total number of safety nets that use either polyester, 
polyethylene, or plant based synthetic fiber to be purchased in the fiscal year.  
  176 18-3. Flags, Advertisement Flags and Banners, etc. 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Flags 
 
Advertisement 
flags 
 
Banners 
 
 
 
 
 Evaluation criteria 
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical)  includes polyester 
fiber and/or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfil l one of the following.  
(1)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber used. If polyester fiber  are used less than 
50% by weight of all fiber, accounts for no less th an 10% by weight 
of all fiber, and no less than 50% by weight of pol yester fiber. 
(2)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber used, and a system for c ollecting, reuse 
and recycling materials after product use is establ ished. 
(3)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r used. 
(4)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
25% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synth etic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(5)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synth etic polymer 
content rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a s ystem for 
collecting, reuse and recycling materials after pro duct use is 
established. 
 
 Factors for consideration 
(1)  The use of brominated fire retardants is as minimiz ed as possible. 
(2)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after product 
use is established. 
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1. Banners  under the evaluation criteria of this section deno te horizontal banners and 
vertical banners. 
2. PET resins  denote material that use recycled PET bottles and textile products, etc. 
3. Weight of all fiber  denotes the weight of all product excluding access ories such as pole 
and metal parts, etc. from all of product. The weig ht of accessories used recycled 
plastic (part or all of plastic once used as a part  of a useful product that has been 
discarded, remnants discarded during the manufactur ing process, or the recycle/reuse 
of defective articles (This excludes, however, plas tic that has been recycled in the 
process of manufacturing the product)) and syntheti c fiber or plastics made from plant 
that is acknowledged for its environmental load red uction effects may be include “the 
weight of all fiber” and “the weight of polyester f iber from recycled PET resins, the 
weight of polyester fiber from recovered fiber or s ynthetic fiber made from plant that 
is acknowledged for its environmental load reductio n effects”. 177 4. Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used  clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and  from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
5.  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from reco vered fibers denotes fiber made 
mainly from recovered fiber created through materia lly or chemically recycling 
processes. 
6.  Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed 
denotes material whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed by 
a third party such as an LCA expert through a quant itative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade  off, of the environmental load of the 
product throughout its lifecycle. 
7. Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate  denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material which is included in plant based synthetic  fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
8. A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling  denotes the fulfillment of 
the below requirements. 
A system for collection  should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a.  The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a coll ection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in respon se to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or co mmissioning other companies to 
collect; includes situations where multiple busines ses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b.  In order to precipitate appropriate collection, spe cific information for the collection 
(collection method, collection location, etc.) of u sed products is available from the 
products body, package, catalog and website for the  users. 
A system for reuse and recycling  should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c.  The collected products must be reused, material rec ycled and chemical recycled.  
d.  The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of coll ected products must energy 
recovered. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of flags, advertisement flags a nd banners, etc. that use polyester fiber or 
synthetic fiber which is made from plant based plas tics meeting the criteria to the total number 
of flags, advertisement flags, banners, etc. to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
  178  18-4. Mops 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Mops Evaluation criteria 
Fulfill one of the following. 
(1)  Recycled material including unused fiber, recycled fiber, and other 
recycled material makes up at least 25% of weigh of  all fiber. 
(2)  A system for collecting and reuse after product use  is established. 
 
Factors for consideration 
(1)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after product 
use is established. 
(2)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1.  Weight of all fiber  denotes the weight of all product excluding access ories such as 
handle, grip and metal parts, etc. from all of prod uct.  The weight of accessories used 
recycled plastic may be includes “the weight of all  fiber” and “the weight of unused 
fiber, recycled fiber and other recycled material.”  
2.  Recycled plastic  denotes part or all of plastic once used as a part of a useful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles. (This excludes , however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.) 
3.  Unused fiber  denoted fiber made from such as reusing short fiber  produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
4.  Recycled fiber  is created from part or all of material discarded f rom the production 
of recycled fiber, from remnants discarded during t he manufacturing process, or from 
the reuse of defective articles. 
5.  Reconstructed fiber is created by decomposing and creating into linear form 
materials such as remnants from manufacturing of cl othing, and products that are no 
longer in use. 
6.  Recycled material  denotes part or all of material once used as a part  of a useful 
product that has been discarded, remnants discarded  during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles  (This excludes, however, material 
that has been recycled in the process of manufactur ing the product). 
7.  A system is in place for the collection and reuse denotes the fulfillment of the below 
requirements. 
A system for collection  should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a.  The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a coll ection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in respon se to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or co mmissioning other companies 
to collect; includes situations where multiple busi nesses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b.  In order to precipitate appropriate collection, spe cific information for the 
collection (collection method, collection location,  etc.) of used products is 
available from the products body, package, catalog and website for the users. 
A system for reuse  should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 179 c.  The collected products must be reused. 
d.  The parts that cannot be reuse of collected product s must material recycled, 
chemical recycled or energy recovered. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of mops that meeting the criter ia to the total number of mops to be 
purchased (including lease, rental agreements) in t he fiscal year. 
  180 19. Facilities 
(1)Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Solar power 
generation 
systems (for 
public and 
industrial use) Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  The cell effect conversion efficiency of the solar cell module does not 
fall below the standard conversion efficiency at ea ch category shown 
in Table 1. 
(2)  Information for solar cell module and peripherals l isted for each 
category in Table 2 is publicly listed on website, etc., and easy to 
acknowledge. 
(3)  Electric power generated can be easily acknowledged . 
(4)  The product is designed and manufactured in such a way that the solar 
cell module can maintain at least 80% of nominal ma ximum output for 
at least 10 years. 
(5)  The power conditioner is designed and manufactured in such a way 
that the effectiveness of its rated load factor and  the partial load factor 
at half load can be maintained at a minimum of 90% of its 
effectiveness at shipping. 
(6)  The energy payback time of solar cell module is no more than three 
years. 
(7)  Regarding the solar cell module, the preliminary as sessment of the 
environmentally conscious design listed in Table 3 is being conducted, 
and its contents can be confirmed. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The product is designed either for easy repair and exchange of parts to 
enable long term use, or designed so that any consu mable parts can be 
replaced and, after the item’s useful life, it can be easily dismantled 
and its materials separated to facilitate refurbish ment, reuse and 
recycling, or the appropriate disposal of its separ ated parts. 
(2)  Devices to be installed in facilities with a large number of visitors 
should be equipped with a system that enables effec tive description to 
the visitors through the display of generated power , etc., as much as 
possible. 
(3)  At the time of removal of facilities, collection, r euse or recycling is 
possible by contractor of removal and disposal, and  appropriate 
processing is possible for parts that are not reuse d or recycled. 
(4)  In cases where secondary battery containing specifi ed chemical 
substances is used, a collection and recycling syst em for the secondary 
battery is put in place. 
(5)  Products that use aluminum alloy on the frame or pl atform of the 
battery module use an alloy that uses aluminum seco ndary ore 
(regenerated ore) as a part of its primary material . 
(6)  Hazardous substances such as heavy metals are not u sed for 
manufacturing the products, or to reduce the amount  used as much as 
possible. 
 
 181 Notes: 
1.  Solar power generation system under consideration in the Evaluation Criteria refe rs 
to systems for public and industrial use that suppl y energy through solar power 
generation using solar cell module of 10kW or more as a replacement for commercial 
energy. 
2.  The cell effect conversion efficiency of the solar cell module  denotes the cell effect 
conversion efficiency after modularization based on  the effect conversion efficiency 
according to JIS C 8960 and to be calculated using the following formula. 
 
The cell effect conversion efficiency = nominal max imum power/ 
(Total area of the solar cell module × irradiance) 
 
Total area of solar battery cell × Total area of on e cell × Number of cell in one module  
 
Irradiance =1000W/m2 
  
The total area of one cell includes non-power gener ation part in the cell. However, 
the total area of one cell as to thin-film silicon solar cell and compound-
semiconductor solar cell excludes the integrated pa rt. 
 
3.  Rated load factor  and Partial load factor  are to be calculated in accordance with JIS 
C 8961. 
4.  The eligibility confirmation test and type approval  of the solar cell module shall be 
in accordance with JIS C 8990 or JIS C 8991 JIS C 6 1215-1, JIS C 61215-2, JIS C 
61730-1, JIS C 61730-2 and it shall comply with one  of JIS C 61215-1-1 to JIS C 
61215-1-4 according to the cell format. 
5.  Each procurement organization should take the follo wing into full consideration:  
a.  For proper understanding and management of power ge nerated, the information 
in the installment report items in Tables 2, obtain ed at the time of procurement, 
must be maintained and preserved until the product is discarded.  
b.  Installation requirements and methods of the equipm ent for power generation 
must be fully considered upon procurement. Excess e nlargement of platform for 
installation should be avoided.  
c.  For the introduction of solar power generation syst ems, adequate installation 
requirements and methods must be considered by taki ng into full consideration 
the characteristics of the solar cell. For the intr oduction of thin membrane solar 
cells, reduction of environmental load, such as the  adequate installation structure 
on the side of the installation dealer, should be f ully considered.  
d.  When procuring the facilities, the details of the i nstallation should be requested 
from the installation dealer, and its contents conf irmed. The information required 
for the maintenance and management of the facilitie s concerned (including 
information from the manufacturer) should be obtain ed from the installation dealer.  
e.  Upon removal or disposal of used solar power genera tion system, reuse or 
recycling shall be conducted from the viewpoint of resource recycling. For parts 
that could not be reused or recycled, proper treatm ent shall be carried out in 
accordance with its properties, etc. based on infor mation on the content of harmful 
substances such as heavy metals. 
 182  
Table 1: Standard for the cell effect conversion ef ficiency of solar cell module 
Category Standard Conversion Efficiency 
Single-crystal silicon solar cell 16.0% 
Poly-crystal silicon solar cell 15.0% 
Thin-film silicon solar cell 8.5% 
Compound-semiconductor solar cell 12.0% 
 
 
Table 2: Items for Display of Information Regarding  Solar Power Generation 
Equipment 
Category Items Articles for confirmation 
Solar cell 
module Display of estimation 
device for generated 
energy (standard 
condition) Annual estimated generated energy  
Conditions for calculation (sunlight data 
used, loss of solar cell and power 
conditioner, etc.) 
Conditions and factors for 
inability to obtain 
generated energy at 
standard condition Influence of shadows, sunlight 
conditions (note specifically the 
correspondence between the amount of 
shadow on the module or sunlight 
conditions and the decrease in generated 
energy) 
Influence of temperature (note 
specifically the correspondence between 
module temperature and the decrease in 
generated energy) 
Climatic conditions, geographic 
conditions (note specifically the 
correspondence between climatic and 
geographic conditions and amount of 
generated energy) 
Others (note specifically losses due to 
wiring and stains on the reception 
surface) 
Peripheries Power conditioner Format, nominal capac ity, output energy 
method, frequency, system connecting 
method, etc. 
Connector box Format, etc. 
Connector protection 
device Possible installation methods 
Secondary cell Whether used or not. If used, method  of 
collection and recycling 
Requirements 
for 
maintenance, Maintenance and testing  Scope and method 
Repair Scope and method 183 testing and 
repair 
Modules and 
peripheries Disposal Method of disposal, points to consider 
when disposing, etc. (Necessary 
information for proper disposal at the 
time of final disposal of used product, 
etc.)   
Warranty condition Warranty period, etc. 
 
 
 
Table 3: Preliminary evaluation method etc., of env ironmentally conscious design 
related to solar cell module 
Purpose  Evaluation item  Preliminary evaluation method etc.  
Weight 
reduction / 
commonality  Weight reduction  Mass has been evaluated to reduce raw 
materials used for modules.  
Parts reduction  The number and type of parts used in the 
module have been evaluated.  
Parts commonality  The  proportion of parts common to other 
models have been evaluated.  
Use of 
recycled 
resources  Use of recycled 
resources  The proportion of parts using recycled 
resources among the parts used in the module 
has been evaluated.  
Long-term use  Improvement of 
durability for long-
term use  The reliability test result of the module has 
been evaluated.  
Improvement of 
contamination 
resistance  The contamination resistance of the module 
surface has been evaluated.  
Ease of 
removal work  Ease of removal work  The structure that makes it easy to remove 
used modules (the time required for removal) 
has been evaluated.  
Utilization of 
recyclable 
resources  Improvement of  
recyclability  The ratio of the mass of recyclable parts and 
materials among the overall module mass has 
been evaluated.  
Easier 
dismantling / 
sorting 
process  Ease of frame 
disassembly  For separation processing, the structure of the 
module frame is easy to disassemble (the time 
required for removal) has been evaluated.  
Reduction of quantity 
and type of screws to 
be removed by frame 
disassembly  The number and type of screws to be removed 
during frame disassembly must be evaluated.  
Provide information 
for frame disassembly  Necessary information for 
disassembling/sorting, such as the method of 
fixing the frame is provided when removing 
the frame, or have a providing system.  184 Ease of disassembling 
the terminal box  Whether the structure of the terminal box is 
easy to remove from the module (the time 
required for removal) is evaluated.  
Reduction of quantity 
and type of screws to 
be removed by 
disassembling the 
terminal box The number and type of screws to be removed 
when removing the terminal box shall be 
evaluated.  
Provide information 
for frame disassembly  Necessary information for 
disassembling/sorting, such as the method of 
fixing the frame is provided when detaching 
the terminal box, or have a providing system.  
Environmental 
conservation  Reduction of 
substances with 
environmental impact Evaluate the mass of environmentally 
hazardous substances contained in the module, 
the mass of the raw material that becomes a 
load factor in the proper disposal / recycling 
process. 
Provision of 
information  Information on use, 
maintenance and safety  Information on usage precautions, trouble 
diagnosis and measures, maintenance 
inspection / repair, safety etc. are provided or 
have a providing system.  
Provide necessary 
information for 
removal, dismantling, 
proper disposal / 
recycling  Necessary information for removal, 
dismantling, proper disposal / recycling is 
provided or provided or have a providing 
system.  
Reduction of 
environmental 
impact at each 
stage of life 
cycle Implementation of Life 
Cycle Assessment  The environmental impact at each stage of a 
series of life cycles from resource extraction, 
manufacturing stage, use stage, removal, 
dismantling, proper disposal / recycling is 
quantitatively evaluated.  
 
 
Solar heating 
systems (for 
public and 
industrial use) Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Daily heat collection efficiency fulfill one of the  following criteria. 
a． The reference value 1 is a reference for each categ ory of the 
collector shown in the column of the reference valu e 1 in Table 1.  
b． The reference value 2 is the reference for each cat egory of the 
collector shown in the column of the reference valu e 2 in Table 1.  
(2)  The items listed in Table 2 for the energy collecto r and its peripheries 
can be easily confirmed on websites, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  The product is designed either for easy repair and exchange of parts to 
enable long term use, or designed so that any consu mable parts can be 
replaced and, after the item’s useful life, it can be easily dismantled 185 and its materials separated to facilitate refurbish ment, reuse and 
recycling, or the appropriate disposal of its separ ated parts. 
(2)  The design enables minimum energy requirements for the operation of 
the energy collectors. 
(3)  At the time of removal of facilities, collection, r euse or recycling is 
possible by contractor of removal and disposal, and  appropriate 
processing is possible for parts that are not reuse d or recycled. 
(4)  Products that use aluminum alloy on the frame or pl atform use an alloy 
that uses aluminum secondary ore (regenerated ore) as a part of its 
primary material. 
(5)  Hazardous substances such as heavy metals are not u sed for 
manufacturing the products, or to reduce the amount  used as much as 
possible. 
Notes: 
1.  Solar heating system  under consideration in the Evaluation Criteria ref ers to systems 
for public and industrial use that uses solar energ y for hot water and heating. 
2.  Daily heat collection efficiency  is the amount of heat collected per unit area of t he 
heat collector per day (the value obtained by subtr acting the ambient temperature 
from the average temperature of the heat collecting  medium is 10K and the amount 
of solar radiation is 20,000kJ / (m2/ day). A value  obtained by dividing the value at 
a certain time (calculated in accordance with JIS A  4112) by the daily integrated value 
of the solar radiant energy per unit area incident on the total area of the collector or 
the energy received by the solar simulator. 
3.  Each procurement organization should take the follo wing into full consideration:  
a.  For proper understanding and management of collecte d power, the information in 
the installment report items in Tables 2, obtained at the time of procurement, must 
be maintained and preserved until the product is di scarded.  
b.  Installation requirements and methods of the equipm ent for power or collection 
must be fully considered upon procurement. Excess e nlargement of platform for 
installation should be avoided.  
c.  The introduction of the solar heating system should  be implemented through a 
design that takes the current energy usage in full consideration.  
d.  When procuring the facilities, the details of the i nstallation should be requested 
from the installation dealer, and its contents conf irmed. The information required 
for the maintenance and management of the facilitie s concerned (including 
information from the manufacturer) should be obtain ed from the installation dealer.  
 
 
 
Table 1: Standard for Daily heat collection efficie ncy of solar cell module 
Category Daily heat collection efficiency  
Heat collecting 
medium/function Heat collecting 
shape/transmitter Reference 
value1 Reference 
value2 
Liquid Plat plate type with 
transparent body 60% or more 40% or more 
Vacuum glass tube type 50% or more 40% or more 186 Air Flat 
plate 
type With 
transparent 
body 40% or more 30% or more 
Without 
transparent 
body － 10% or more 
With solar power 
generation function  － － 10% or more 
Note: 
For air collector type heat collector without trans parent body among flat plate type and heat 
collector with solar power generation function shal l be applied reference value 2 only. 
 
 
Table 2: Preliminary evaluation method etc., of env ironmentally conscious design 
related to solar cell module 
Purpose  Evaluation item  Preliminary evaluation method etc.  
Weight 
reduction / 
commonality  Weight reduction  Mass has been evaluated to reduce raw 
materials used for modules.  
Parts reduction  The number and type of parts used in the 
module have been evaluated.  
Parts commonality  The  proportion of parts common to other 
models have been evaluated.  
Use of 
recycled 
resources  Use of recycled 
resources  The proportion of parts using recycled 
resources among the parts used in the module 
has been evaluated.  
Long-term use  Improvement of 
durability for long-
term use  The reliability test result of the module has 
been evaluated.  
Improvement of 
contamination 
resistance  The contamination resistance of the module 
surface has been evaluated.  
Ease of 
removal work  Ease of removal work  The structure that makes it easy to remove 
used modules (the time required for removal) 
has been evaluated.  
Utilization of 
recyclable 
resources  Improvement of  
recyclability  The ratio of the mass of recyclable parts and 
materials among the overall module mass has 
been evaluated.  
Easier 
dismantling / 
sorting 
process  Ease of frame 
disassembly  For separation processing, the structure of the 
module frame is easy to disassemble (the time 
required for removal) has been evaluated.  
Reduction of quantity 
and type of screws to 
be removed by frame 
disassembly  The number and type of screws to be removed 
during frame disassembly must be evaluated.  
Provide information 
for frame disassembly  Necessary information for 
disassembling/sorting, such as the method of 187 fixing the frame is provided when removing 
the frame, or have a providing system.  
Ease of disassembling 
the terminal box  Whether the structure of the terminal box is 
easy to remove from the module (the time 
required for removal) is evaluated.  
Reduction of quantity 
and type of screws to 
be removed by 
disassembling the 
terminal box The number and type of screws to be removed 
when removing the terminal box shall be 
evaluated.  
Provide information 
for frame disassembly  Necessary information for 
disassembling/sorting, such as the method of 
fixing the frame is provided when detaching 
the terminal box, or have a providing system.  
Environmental 
conservation  Reduction of 
substances with 
environmental impact Evaluate the mass of environmentally 
hazardous substances contained in the module, 
the mass of the raw material that becomes a 
load factor in the proper disposal / recycling 
process. 
Provision of 
information  Information on use, 
maintenance and safety  Information on usage precautions, trouble 
diagnosis and measures, maintenance 
inspection / repair, safety etc. are provided or 
have a providing system.  
Provide necessary 
information for 
removal, dismantling, 
proper disposal / 
recycling  Necessary information for removal, 
dismantling, proper disposal / recycling is 
provided or provided or have a providing 
system.  
Reduction of 
environmental 
impact at each 
stage of life 
cycle Implementation of Life 
Cycle Assessment  The environmental impact at each stage of a 
series of life cycles from resource extraction, 
manufacturing stage, use stage, removal, 
dismantling, proper disposal / recycling is 
quantitatively evaluated.  
 
 
Table 1: Items for Display of Information Regarding  Solar Power Generation 
Equipment 
Category Items Articles for confirmation 
Solar cell 
module Display of estimation 
device for generated 
energy (standard 
condition) Annual estimated generated energy  
Conditions for calculation (sunlight data 
used, loss of solar cell and power 
conditioner, etc.) 
Conditions and factors for 
inability to obtain 
generated energy at 
standard condition Influence of shadows, sunlight 
conditions (note specifically the 
correspondence between the amount of 
shadow on the module or sunlight 188 conditions and the decrease in generated 
energy) 
Influence of temperature (note 
specifically the correspondence between 
module temperature and the decrease in 
generated energy) 
Climatic conditions, geographic 
conditions (note specifically the 
correspondence between climatic and 
geographic conditions and amount of 
generated energy) 
Others (note specifically losses due to 
wiring and stains on the reception 
surface) 
Peripheries Power conditioner Format, nominal capac ity, output energy 
method, frequency, system connecting 
method, etc. 
Connector box Format, etc. 
Connector protection 
device Possible installation methods 
Secondary cell Whether used or not. If used, method  of 
collection and recycling 
Requirements 
for 
maintenance, 
testing and 
repair Maintenance and testing  Scope and method 
Repair Scope and method 
Modules and 
peripheries Disposal Method of disposal, points to consider 
when disposing, etc. (Necessary 
information for proper disposal at the 
time of final disposal of used product, 
etc.)   
Warranty condition Warranty period, etc. 
 
 
 
Table 2: Items for Display of Information Regarding  Solar Heating Systems 
Category Articles Items for confirmation 
Energy 
collector Display of method of 
estimation for amount of 
energy collected Estimated amount of energy collected 
annually 
Conditions for calculation (sunlight data 
used, loss of solar cell and power 
conditioner, etc.) 
Conditions and factors for 
inability to obtain  the Influence of shadows, sunlight 
conditions (note specifically the 
correspondence between the amount of 189 heating collection of 
evaluation criteria (1) shadow on the module or sunlight 
conditions and the decrease in generated 
energy) 
Influence of temperature (note 
specifically the correspondence between 
module temperature and the decrease in 
generated energy) 
Climatic conditions, geographic 
conditions (note specifically the 
correspondence between climatic and 
geographic conditions and amount of 
generated energy) 
Others (note specifically losses due to 
wiring and stains on the reception 
surface) 
Energy 
collector and 
peripheries Disposal Method of disposal, points to consider 
when disposing, etc.  (Necessary 
information for proper disposal at the 
time of final disposal of used product, 
etc.)    
Maintenance and testing Conditions for maintenance and testing 
(frequency of testing), etc. 
Warranty condition Conditions for warranty (scope a nd 
content of repair and exchange), 
warranty period, etc. 
  
Fuel cells Evaluation Criteria  
System generates electric or heat energy by chemica l reaction between 
hydrogen in the fuel and oxygen in the air, as an a lternative to 
commercial power. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
The items are designed so that any consumable parts  can be replaced 
and, after the item’s useful life, it can be easily  dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, re use and recycling, or 
the appropriate disposal of its separated parts. 
Energy 
management 
System Evaluation Criteria  
System that can visualize energy such as electric p ower used in the 
building by measuring at each point of acceptance, conversion 
transportation and consumption at each application,  facility or 
equipment, etc. at the installation site, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
A management system that efficiently controls facil ities or equipment, 
etc.  
Garbage 
disposals Evaluation Criteria  
Equipment decreases the amount of garbage by biodeg rading or 
dehydration. 190  
Factors for Consideration  
(1) The items are designed so that any consumable p arts can be replaced 
and, after the item’s useful life, it can be easily  dismantled and its 
materials separated to facilitate refurbishment, re use and recycling, 
or the appropriate disposal of its separated parts.  
(2) Functions that allow for energy saving while in  use are built into 
design. 
(3) Product generated from disposal is reused as fe rtilizer, feed, and 
energy. 
Water saving 
equipment Evaluation Criteria  
<Common Criteria> 
(1)No electric energy shall be used.  
(2)The type to be installed on faucets should be ad aptable to a variety of 
faucets. 
 
< Individual Criteria> 
(1)  For water saving top, meet the following requiremen ts: 
a.  When the handle is opened 120 degrees, the discharg e rate shall 
be more than 20% but not be more than 70% of that w hen the 
water tap equipped with an ordinary top. 
b.  When the handle is fully opened, the discharge rate  shall be not 
less than 70%. 
(2)  For flow-control valve, when the handle is fully op ened, the proper 
flow shall be in the range of 5-8 liters/min at a w ater pressure of 0.1 
MPa or more and at 0.7MPa or lower. 
(3)  For aerator cap, meet the following requirements. 
a.  At a water pressure of 0.1 MPa or more and at a wat er pressure of 
0.7 MPa or less, the discharge shall not be more th an 80% of that 
of the tap without the aerator cap. 
b.  The discharge shall not be less than 5 liters/min a t a water supply 
pressure of 0.1 MPa with a fully opened lever. 
(4) For Flow control valve, meet the following requ irements. 
a. At a water pressure of 0.1 MPa or more and at a water pressure 
of 0.7 MPa or less, the proper flow shall not be mo re than 80% 
of that of the faucet without the aerator cap. 
b. The discharge rate at the installed place with t he handle (lever) 
fully opened and at water pressure of 0.1 MPa shall  not be less 
than the following table. 
   
Table: Discharge rate of flow control valve by inst allation location 
Installation 
locations Discharge rate 
Washroom 5L/minute 
Kitchen 5L/minute 
Shower room 8L/minute 
 191 (5)For faucet with the mechanism of stopping water at hand, equipped 
with the mechanism of discharging and stopping with  such switches 
as buttons or sensors which are installed within th e area of users’ 
operation, which are independent from the discharge  switching 
mechanism or flow and temperature adjustment mechan ism. 
(6) For faucet with the small volume discharging me chanism, the 
discharging power from shower head satisfies either  of a or b below.  
a. Without the mechanism of aeration into the flow:  0.6N or more 
b. With the mechanism of aeration into the flow: 0. 55N or more 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Replacement water saving pieces should be easily re placeable with 
regular pieces. 
(2)  After installing the equipment, it shall have the u sual feeling in use 
for use applications.  
Notes: 
1.  Water saving top  refers to pieces produced to be placed on stopcock  for water saving 
purposes. Water supply device supplemented with a w ater saving piece will yield much 
less water when compared to a device with regular p iece when the handle is opened to 
the sane angle. Fixed type tops are included. 
2.  Water saving top  in Evaluation Criteria in this section is the type  to be used for single 
stopcock with an internal diameter of 13mm. It shou ld enable water savings through a 
simple replacement by changing the shape of the sta bilizing nut of the valve packing 
into a special shape, etc. 
3.  Measuring method for the discharge rate of water sa ving top is according to measuring 
method of flow volume based on JIS B 2061(Faucets, ball taps and flush valves). Water 
saving equipment that comply with The water tap equipped with a water-saving top  
designated in JIS B 2061 meets the Evaluation Crite ria <Individual Criteria> (1). 
4.  Flow-control valve  refers to flow rate setting is fixed type, and an adjustment valve 
that maintains water flow at a fixed rate regardles s of the water pressure of either side 
of the valve. 
5.  Flow-control valve  under consideration in this section are those used  for washing 
hands and face, as well as dishes. They are to fulf ill the following criteria: 
a.  The valve allows for water savings, when replaced w ith a conventional one, by 
controlling the amount of water discharged. 
b.  There is not to be a branching out except for at th e installment locations. Flow-
control valve should be placed after the branching out.  Each Flow-control valve 
should correspond to one stopcock. 
c.  Installment criteria for each use are outlined in t he user’s manual so that installment 
can be executed according to use. 
6.  Aerator cap  under consideration in this section refers to caps  that enable water savings 
by mixing air into water flow. 
7.  Among the control valves that maintain the flow at a fixed amount regardless of 
changes in the pressure at the inlet or the outlet of the valve, the faucet which has a 
control valve with variable flow amount settings. 
8.  Faucet with the mechanism of stopping water at hand  refers to for kitchens or bathroom 
showers, refers to any one of two types of hot and cold water faucets: single, mixing, 
and thermostat. 192 9.  Faucet with the small volume discharging mechanism refers to for bathroom 
showers, refers to any one of two types of hot and cold water faucets: single, mixing, 
and thermostat. 
10.   The measurement of the water spillage power in<Ind ividual Criteria>6 of the 
Evaluation criteria prescribed in the “Technologica l Information Concerning the 
Criteria for Energy-saving of Houses and other Buil dings and the Recognition of 
Low-carbon Architecture (method of measuring the de signed amounts of primary 
energy consumption of residents)” by the Building R esearch Institute. 
 
Sunlight 
adjustment film  Evaluation criteria 
(1)  Shielding coefficient is less than 0.7 and transmis sion rate for visible 
ray is 10% or more. 
(2)  Heat transmission rate is less than 5.9W/(m2.k). 
(3)  Adequate weather resistance is confirmed for sunlig ht adjustment 
function. 
(4)  After use of the product, decrease in environmental  load is confirmed 
when compared to the condition before use. 
(5)  (1) to (4) above can be easily confirmed on website s, etc., or 
otherwise, is judged objectively by a third party. 
(6)  Adequate information is displayed concerning the ap plication of 
film. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Shielding coefficient is as low as possible. 
Notes: 
1.  Sunlight adjustment film  refers to films applied onto window glass of buildi ngs and 
is equipped with the ability to shield sunlight in order to increase the efficiency of air 
conditioning. 
2.  Shielding coefficient, transmission rate for visibl e ray, and heat transmission rate are 
to be calculated in accordance with JIS A 5759. 
3.  As for evaluation criteria (1), if transmission rat e for visible ray is more than 70%, 
shielding coefficient is less than 0.8. 
4.  In order to confirm the weather resistance  of sunlight adjustment function, conduct 
1,000 hour testing in accordance with weather resis tance testing designated in JIS A 
5759, and make sure that the change in shielding co efficient is within ±0.10 of the 
standards designated in Evaluation Criteria (1). 
5.  After use of the product, decrease in environmental  load is confirmed when 
compared to the condition before use means that decrease in cooling load is confirmed 
in a simulation of heat load calculation system tha t takes radiant heat into account. At 
the same time, disclose information on the environm ental impact throughout the year.  
6.  Each procurement organization must take into accoun t the following. 
a.  In procuring sunlight adjustment film , construction by the person having a 
technological qualification of "1st or 2nd  grade Certified Skilled Worker of 
Architectural Film" or the equal, to avoid the heat  crack, etc. of the glass. 
b.  Consider the influence by the electric wave cover w hen attaching the one to have 
the electric wave cover performance.  
c.  Confirm the influence on a peripheral building, etc . when attaching it in the 
situation of remarkable sunlight reflection is conc erned. 193 d.  In case requiring illumination efficiency and passa ge of daylight, consider to 
attaching the film with high transmission rate for visible ray.   
 
 
Software 
license for 
telework Evaluation criteria 
A system account that can perform business in remot e areas via the 
Internet. 
Factors for Consideration 
The effect of reducing the environmental load befor e and after the 
introduction of telework can be confirmed. 
Notes: 
1.  Telework  refers to a flexible work style that utilizes info rmation and communication 
technology, regardless of location and time. 
2.  Environmental loads expected to be reduced by the i ntroduction of telework include 
energy associated with movement and energy used in offices, etc., while environmental 
loads expected to increase include energy used in h omes and base facilities. Therefore, it 
is desirable to compare these increases and decreas es to calculate the environmental load 
reduction effect. 
 
 
Web 
conferencing 
system Evaluation criteria 
(1)  The system must be able to hold meetings between re mote locations 
via the Internet. 
(2)  The conference system must be mutually usable with other 
institutions. 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  The effect of reducing the environmental load befor e and after the 
introduction of the Web conferencing system can be confirmed. 
(2)  An online business card exchange function can be in troduced. 
 
Notes: 
1.  Web conferencing system  refers to a system that enables remote participati on in meetings 
held at the relevant institution, etc., so that eve n teleworking staff can carry out their duties 
as well as other staff. 
2.  Environmental loads that are expected to be reduced  by the introduction of the Web 
conferencing system include reduction of energy and  paper resources (paperless) 
associated with movement. 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
1.  For solar power generation systems, target is deter mined by the total capacity of power 
generation by the facility that meets the criteria to be purchased in the fiscal year (kW). 
2.  For solar heating systems, target is determined by the total of solar collection 
equipment that meets the criteria to reference valu e 1 and reference value 2 to be 
purchased in the fiscal year (m2). 
3.  For systems combining solar power generation and so lar heating, target is determined 
by both the total capacity of power generation (kW)  and the total area of solar 194 collection equipment (m2) of the facility that meet s the criteria to be purchased in the 
fiscal year. 
4.  For fuel cells, target is determined by the total c apacity of power generation (kW) in 
the fiscal year. 
5.  For energy management system, the number of procure ment in the fiscal year.  
6.  For garbage disposals, target is determined by the number of equipment to be 
purchased (including lease, rental agreements, and acquisition by companies 
commissioned to operate cafeterias) in the fiscal y ear.  
7.  For water saving equipment, target is determined by  the total number of devices 
meeting the criteria to the total number of devices  to be purchased in the fiscal year. 
8.  For sunlight adjustment films, target is determined  by the total area of the product (m2) 
that meets the criteria to the total number of prod uct (m2) to be purchased in the fiscal 
year. 
9.  For software licenses for telework, target is deter mined by the total number  of 
procurements (number of licenses) that meet the cri teria to be purchased in the fiscal 
year.   
10.  For Web conferencing systems, target is determined by the total number of 
procurements (number of systems) that meet the crit eria to be purchased in the  fiscal 
year 
. 195 20. Stockpiles for Disaster 
20-1 Stockpiles for Disaster (Potable Water) 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
 Drinking water 
for disaster 
stockpiling Evaluation Criteria 
(1) Expiration date is over five years. 
(2) Name, ingredients, content amount, expiration d ate, recommended 
method of storage, and name of manufacturer are lis ted on the 
product and the external package. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  A system exists for minimizing waste production thr ough collection 
and recycling. 
(2)  Bottles are designed to be as thin and light weight  as possible. 
(3)  Taking environmental issues into consideration, con tainers, 
labels/label printing, caps etc., are designed to c reate a container with 
superior adaptability for recycling and reuse. 
Notes: 
1.  Drinking water for disaster stockpiling under consideration in this section is to be 
obtained with an objective of long term stockpiles for disaster. 
2.  Evaluation Criteria (2) concerning ingredients does  not apply for the external 
package. 
3.  If the products had purchased for its own business,  it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster.  
4.  Each procurement organization must take into accoun t the following.  
a.  In procuring  drinking water for disaster stockpili ng, take into consideration use 
of automatic vending machines equipped with the free-vend  function, which is a 
disaster prevention measure that allows products in side the machine to be vended 
free of charge in case of distribution stockpile or  an outbreak of disaster.  
b.  In procuring stockpiles for disaster, design a syst em for storage and purchase of 
products based on their expiration date to enable a dequate maintenance and 
regular renewal of storage and purchase quantities.  
c.  In order to lengthen the storage time of products, consider a contract method that, 
for example, allows a set amount of time until deli very date, so that the supplier 
may prepare products that are as new as possible. 
d.  In procuring PET bottled water for the disaster, co nfirming enough beforehand 
such as quality and safety in the best-before date of a product on account of 
savings and keeping over a long period of time. 
5.  For PET Bottled Water, In order to consider environ mental issues, reference will be 
made to “Designated PET Bottle V oluntary Design Gui deline” created by PET Bottle 
Recycle Promotion Association when designing bottle s, labels/label printing, caps 
etc.  
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of drinking water for disaster stockpiling meeting the criteria to the total 
number of drinking water for disaster stockpiling p urchased in the fiscal year. 196 20-2. Stockpiles for Disaster (Foods) 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Quick cooking 
rice 
 
Non-
perishable 
breads for an 
emergency 
 
Pilot breads Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Expiration date is over five years. 
(2)  Name, ingredients, content amount, expiration date,  recommended 
method of storage, and name of manufacturer are lis ted on the product 
and the external package. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
A system exists for minimizing waste production thr ough collection and 
recycling.  
Retort 
processed 
foods, etc. 
 Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Fulfills one of the following. 
a.  Expiration date is over five years. 
b.  Expiration date is over three years later, and a sy stem is in place 
for the collection and recycling of the container, accessory 
material and heat generating material. 
(2)  Name, ingredients, content amount, expiration date,  recommended 
method of storage, and name of manufacturer are lis ted on the product 
and the external package. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
A system exists for minimizing waste production thr ough collection and 
recycling. 
Health foods/ 
Nutrition 
foods 
 
Freeze-dried 
foods Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Expiration date is over three years. 
(2)  Name, ingredients, content amount, expiration date,  recommended 
method of storage, and name of manufacturer are lis ted on the product 
and the external package. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
A system exists for minimizing waste production thr ough collection and 
recycling.   
Notes: 
1.  Quick cooking rice, Non-perishable breads for an em ergency, Pilot breads, and 
Retort processed foods, etc., Health foods/Nutritio n foods and Freeze-dried foods 
under consideration in this section is limited to t hose procured for the purpose of 
stockpiles for disaster. 
2.  Retort processed food, etc.  refers to products that have been processed for lo ng term 
preservation at room temperature by packing food in  air-tight containers and sealing 
with heat melting method. 
3.  Health foods / Nutrition foods  refer to foods of usual food form and strengthened  
nutritional contents such as the vitamins and miner als.  
4.  Evaluation Criteria (1) concerning expiration date for Quick cooking rice  and Pilot 
breads  will be reconsidered taking into consideration fut ure market movements. 
5.  Evaluation Criteria (2) concerning ingredients does  not apply for the external 
package. 197 6.  If the products had purchased for its own business,  it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster. 
7.  Each procurement organization must take into accoun t the following.  
a.  In procuring stockpiles for disaster, design a syst em for storage and purchase of 
products based on their expiration date to enable a dequate maintenance and 
regular renewal of storage and purchase quantities.  
b.  In order to lengthen the storage time of products, consider a contract method that, 
for example, allows a set amount of time until deli very date, so that the supplier 
may prepare products that are as new as possible. 
c.  In procuring foods for the disaster, confirming eno ugh beforehand such as quality 
and safety in the best-before date of a product on account of savings and keeping 
over a long period of time. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of products meeting the criteri a to the total number of products purchased 
in the fiscal year.  
  198 20-3. Stockpiles for Disaster (Household items and materials, etc.) 
(1)Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Blankets Evaluation Criteria 
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical)  includes polyester 
fiber fulfill one of the following. 
(1)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber. If polyester fiber are used  less than 50% by 
weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber, 
and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber, and a system for collecting , reuse and recycling 
materials after product use is established. 
(3)  Polyester from recovered fiber of PET resins accoun ts for no less than 
10% by weight of all fiber used.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after product use 
is established. 
(2)  Fiber used for products contains unused fiber or re constructed fiber as 
much as possible.   
(3)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Work gloves Evaluation Criteria  
Fulfill one of the following. 
(1)  Polyester fiber products shall include polyester fi ber from recycled PET 
resins. At least 50% by weight of all natural and c hemical fiber used 
(excluding anti-slip coating) shall be polyester fi ber from recycled PET 
resins. 
(2)  Fiber comprised of post-consumer material makes up at least 50% by 
weight of the entire product weight (excluding anti -slip coating). 
(3)  Unused fiber makes up at least 50% by weight of the  entire product 
weight (excluding anti-slip coating). 
(4)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used (excluding anti-slip co ating) and bio-based 
synthetic polymer content rate accounts for no less  than 10%. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Fiber other than polyester fiber from recycled PET resin should also be 
made of unused fiber or reconstructed fiber (exclud ing anti-slip 
coating). 
(2)  Does not use bleaches. 
Tents Evaluation criteria  
Products whose fiber content (natural and chemical)  includes polyester 
fiber or synthetic fiber made from plant fulfill on e of the following. 199 (1)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber. If polyester fiber are used  less than 50% by 
weight of all fiber, accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fiber, 
and no less than 50% by weight of polyester fiber. 
(2)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins accounts f or no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber, and a system for collecting , reuse and recycling 
materials after product use is established. 
(3)  Polyester fiber from recycled PET resins from recov ered fibers 
accounts for no less than 10% by weight of all fibe r used.  
(4)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% 
by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic  polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 10%. 
(5)  Synthetic fiber made from plant whose reduction eff ect of 
environmental load has been confirmed accounts for no less than 10% 
by weight of all fiber used and bio-based synthetic  polymer content 
rate accounts for no less than 4%, also a system fo r collecting, reuse 
and recycling materials after product use is establ ished. 
 
Factors for consideration  
(1)  A system for collecting, reuse and recycling materi als after product use 
is established. 
(2)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Tarps Evaluation criteria  
At least 50% by weight of fiber (natural and chemic al) used in polyethylene 
fiber products shall be recycled polyethylene fiber . 
 
Factors for consideration 
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into account 
ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1.  PET resins  denote material that use recycled PET bottles and textile products, etc. 
2.  Weight of all fiber  denotes the weight of all product excluding access ories such as 
button, fastener, hook, sewing thread and the metal  parts (i.e. pole), from all of 
product.  The weight of accessories used recycled p lastic (part or all of plastic once 
used as a part of a useful product that has been di scarded, remnants discarded during 
the manufacturing process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes, 
however, plastic that has been recycled in the proc ess of manufacturing the product)) 
may be include “the weight of all fiber”, “the weig ht of polyester fiber from recycled 
PET resins or the weight of polyester from recovere d fiber”. 
3.  Recovered fiber denotes lint or cutting wastage created by the used  clothing and used 
cloth material or generated from a weaving mill and  from a sewing plant in the 
manufacturing process. 
4.  Polyester from recovered fiber denotes fiber made mainly from recovered fiber 
created by materially or chemically recycled.  200 5.  Unused fiber  denoted fiber made from  such as reusing short fiber produced during 
spinning (i.e. linter). 
6.  Reconstructed fiber denotes fiber made from linear form materials creat ed by 
decomposition of recovered fiber.  
7.  Post-consumer material refers to material or product discarded after used as a 
product. 
8.  Recycled polyethylene  denotes part or all of polyethylene once used as a part of a 
useful product that has been discarded, remnants di scarded during the manufacturing 
process, or the recycle/reuse of defective articles  (This excludes, however, 
polyethylene that has been recycled in the process of manufacturing the product). 
9.  Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environme ntal load has been confirmed  
denotes material whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed 
by a third party such as an LCA expert through a qu antitative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade  off, of the environmental load of 
the product throughout its lifecycle. 
10.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate  denotes the rate by weight of plant-based 
material which is included in plant based synthetic  fiber to the weight of all fiber. 
11.  A system is in place for the collection, reuse and recycling  denotes the fulfillment 
of the below requirements. 
A system for collection  should fulfill the below requirements a. and b. 
a. The manufacturer or the seller has a system (a c ollection system located at the 
manufacturer or the seller, or collection in respon se to the user’s request) for 
voluntarily collecting (collecting on its own or co mmissioning other companies to 
collect; includes situations where multiple busines ses undertake the collection 
together) used products.  
b. In order to precipitate appropriate collection, specific information for the collection 
(collection method, collection location, etc.) of u sed products is available from the 
products body, package, catalog and website for the  users. 
A system for reuse and recycling  should fulfill the below requirements c. and d. 
c. The collected products is reused, material recyc led and chemical recycled.  
d. The parts that cannot be reuse or recycling of c ollected products must energy 
recovered. 
10.  If the products had purchased for its own business,  it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster. 
11.  In procuring stockpiles for disaster, design a syst em for storage and purchase of 
products based on their expiration date to enable a dequate maintenance and regular 
renewal of storage and purchase quantities. 
 
 
 
Disposable 
batteries  Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Disposable batteries exceed the smallest average du ration listed in 
accordance with load resistance in Table below. 
(2)  The product specifications include a period of over  five years is required 
until the recommended expiration date. 
 
Factors for Consideration 201 Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into account 
ease of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal.  
Notes: 
1.  Disposable batteries under consideration in the evaluation criteria of t his section 
denote “D”, “C”, “AA”, or “AAA” 
2.  Smallest average duration is to be measured in accordance with the electric d ischarge 
test criteria designated in JIS C 8515. Disposable batteries that comply with the 
alkaline battery designated in JIS C 8515 meets thi s Evaluation Criteria (1). 
3.  If the products had purchased for its own business,  it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster. 
4.  Each procurement organization must take into accoun t the following.  
a.  In procuring stockpiles for disaster, design a syst em for storage and purchase of 
products based on their expiration date to enable a dequate maintenance and regular 
renewal of storage and purchase quantities. 
b.  In order to lengthen the storage time of products, consider a contract method that, 
for example, allows a set amount of time until deli very date, so that the supplier 
may prepare products that are as new as possible. 
 
 
  202 Table: Smallest Average Duration for Disposable Bat teries 
Common 
name Main 
applications  Discharge test conditions Smallest Average Duration  
Load 
Resistanc 
e 
(Ω) Discharg 
e time 
per day Cut-
off 
voltag 
e Initial 
Usage After 12 
Months 
Storage and 
Recommende 
d Period of 
Usage 
D 
(61.5mm 
: 
34.2mm)  Portable 
light 2.2 Ω Note1 0.9V 750minuit 
s 675minuits 
Equipment 
and toys 
using motors  2.2 Ω 1hour 0.8V 16hours 14hours 
Portable 
stereo 600mA 2hours 0.9V 11hours 9.9hours 
C 
(50.0mm 
: 
26.2mm)  Equipment 
and toys 
using motors  3.9 Ω 1hour 0.8V 14hours 12hours 
Portable 
stereo 3.9 Ω Note1 0.9V 790minuit 
s 710minuits 
Portable 
stereo 400mA 2hours 0.9V 8hours 7.2hours 
AA 
(50.5mm 
: 
14.5mm)  Digital 
camera 1,500mW  
650mW Note2 1.05V  40times 36times 
Portable 
light (LED) 3.9 Ω Note3 0.9V 230minuit 
s 205minuits 
Equipment 
and toys 
using motors  3.9 Ω 1hour 0.8V 5hours 4.5hours 
Toys(withou 
t motor)  250mA 1hour 0.9V 5hours 4.5hours 
CD player, 
electronic 
games 100mA 1hour 0.9V 15hours 13hours 
Radio, clock, 
Remote 
controller 50mA Note4 1.0V 30hours 27hours 
AAA 
(44.5mm 
: 
10.5mm)  Portable 
light 5.1 Ω Note5 0.9V 130minuit 
s 115minuits 
equipment 
used motor, 
toys 5.1 Ω 1hour 0.8V 120minuit 
s 105minuits 
Digital audio  50mA Note5 0.9V 12hours 10hours 
Remote 
controller 24 Ω Note6 1.0V 14.5hours  13.0hours 
Note 1: The cycle of 4 minutes discharge and 11 min utes discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 203 Note 2: The cycle of 5 minutes discharge (alternate  discharge of 1,500 mW for 2 seconds 
and 650 mW for 28 seconds) and the 55 minutes disch arge pause are repeated 
continuously for 24 hours. 
Note 3: The cycle of 4 minutes discharge and 56 min ute discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 
Note 4: The cycle of 1 hour discharge and 7 hours d ischarge pause is continuously repeated 
for 24 hours. 
Note 5: The cycle of 1 hour discharge and 11 hours discharge pause is continuously repeated 
for 24 hours. 
Note 6: The cycle of 15 seconds discharge and 45 se cond discharge pause is continuously 
repeated for 8 hours. 
 
 
Emergency 
portable fuel 
 
 Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Expiration date is over five years later. 
(2)  Name, ingredients, content amount, expiration date,  recommended 
method of storage, and name of manufacturer are lis ted. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Packaging and container of product is as simple as possible, and has been 
considered for ease of reuse and the reduction of e nvironmental load.  
Notes: 
1.  If the products had purchased for its own business,  it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster. 
2.  Each procurement organization must take into accoun t the following. 
a.  In procuring stockpiles for disaster, design a syst em for storage and purchase of 
products based on their expiration date to enable a dequate maintenance and regular 
renewal of storage and purchase quantities. 
b.  In order to lengthen the storage time of products, consider a contract method that, 
for example, allows a set amount of time until deli very date, so that the supplier 
may prepare products that are as new as possible. 
 
 
Portable 
generators 
 
 Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Fulfill one of the following. 
a.  For generators have a gasoline engine (include the one that uses 
natural gas or LP gas as a fuel) does not exceed th e standard rate 
shown in Table 1. 
b.  For generators have a diesel engine does not exceed  the standard 
rate shown in Table 2.  
(2)  The noise level is 98 decibels or less. 
(3)  The time for continuous run is three hours or more.  However, cassette 
gas cylinder type is one hour or more. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  The fuel cost efficiency is as possible as high. 
(2)  Having the function to control the engine rotationa l speed 
automatically according to the load under use.  204 (3)  The miniaturization and lightening the product shou ld be attempted.  
(4)  Design consideration takes into account product lif e, reuse of parts, 
or recycling of raw material. 
(5)  Packaging and container of product is as simple as possible, and has 
been considered for ease of reuse and the reduction  of environmental 
load.  
Notes: 
1.  Portable generators  under consideration for evaluation criteria in thi s section denotes 
power generators whose rated power is 3kV A or less.  
2.  The measuring method at the noise level depends on "Measuring method of 
measurements of the noise and the vibration of the construction machinery" (No.1537 
of the Ministry of Construction Notification in 199 7). 
3.  If the products had purchased for its own business,  it will be excluded from 
consideration as stockpiles for disaster. 
4.  Each procurement organization must note the frequen cy of electricity.  
 
 
Table 1: The standard of gas emission of portable g enerators with gasoline engine 
Category of engine 
displacement Gas emission standard (g/kWh) 
HC+NOx CO 
66cc or less 50 
610 Over 66cc and 100cc or less 40 
Over 100cc and 225cc or less 16.1 
Over 225cc 12.1 
Notes : The measuring method of gas emission is according  to JIS B 8008-4 G2 mode. 
 
 
Table 2: The standard of gas emission of portable g enerators with diesel engine 
Gas emission standard (g/kWh) 
NMHC+NOx CO PM 
7.5 8 0.4 
Notes : The measuring method of gas emission is according  to JIS B 8008-4 D2 mode. 
 
 
Portable power 
supply for 
emergency Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Electric capacitance is over 100Wh. 
(2)  The product specifications a period of over five ye ars or the 
recommended expiration date is over five years. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
It is easy to separate and take into account ease o f recycling and 
reduced environmental impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 205 Portable power supply for emergency  under consideration of the evaluation criteria in 
this section refers to an portable power supply for  emergency for generating electricity 
using an air battery subject to charging and supply ing power to devices such as mobile 
phones. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of products meeting the criteri a to the total number of products to be 
purchased in the fiscal year.  
The total for blankets, work gloves, tents, tarps a nd disposable batteries will include specified 
items for procurement used for normal business oper ations as outlined in this Basic Policy. 
 
  206  21. Public-Works Projects  
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Public works  Evaluation Criteria  
Contract with the participants, vendors and contrac tors building the public 
work should require the use of materials, construct ion equipment, 
processes and targets listed in Table 1 that reduce  the environmental impact 
of the public works project.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
Packaging is to be as simple as possible and take i nto account ease of 
recycling and reduced environmental impact upon dis posal.  
Notes: It is preferable to implement obligatory clauses wi thin the overall framework that 
considers the reduction of environmental impact.  
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline  
A guideline will be examined while studying ways to  evaluate performance.  
 
 
Table 1: Materials, Construction Machines, Construc tion Methods and Others  
Designated 
Procurement 
Item  Category  Item  Evaluation 
Criteria for 
Each Item  Item Type  Item Name  
Public works  Material  Banking 
materials, etc.  Treated soil recycled from 
construction sludge  Table 2  
Granulated blast furnace slag 
for earth work  
Caisson filler using copper 
slag  
Caisson filler using ferro-
nickel slag  
Ground 
improvement 
material  Steel slag for Ground 
improvement  
Slag aggregate 
for concrete  Blast furnace slag aggregate  
Ferro-nickel slag aggregate  
Copper slag aggregate  
Electric arc furnace oxidizing 
slag aggregate  
Asphalt 
compound  Recycled heated asphalt 
compound  
Asphalt compound with steel 
slag  207 Warm asphalt compound 
Roadbed 
material Roadbed material with steel 
slag  
Recycled aggregate, etc. 
Small 
-diameter logs  Lumber from thinning 
Blended 
cement Portland blast furnace 
cement 
Fly-ash cement 
Cement Eco-cement 
Concrete and 
products Water permeable concrete 
Hydrated 
solidified steel 
slag Steel slag block 
Spray on 
concrete Spray on concrete with fly-
ash 
Paint Base-coating paint (anti 
corrosive) 
Water based road paint using 
low volatility organic solvent  
High solar reflectance paints 
Water proof High solar reflectance water 
proof 
Pavement- 
Material Pavement blocks using 
recycled material (burnt) 
Pavement block products 
using recycled material 
(precast unreinforced 
concrete products)  
Gardening 
material Bark compost 
Fermented compost using 
sewage sludge (sewage 
sludge compost) 
Road 
illuminations LED road illuminations 
Central 
divider block Central divider block 
manufactured with recycled 
plastic 
Tiles Ceramic tiles 
Doors and 
windows Heat insulating sash, doors 
Lumber, etc. Lumber 
Glued laminated timber 
Plywood 
Laminated veneer lumber 
Cross laminated timber 208 Flooring Flooring 
Reconstituted 
wood boards Particle board 
Fiberboard 
Wood-type cement board 
Wood-plastic 
composite Wood-plastic recycled 
composite 
Vinyl floor 
covering Vinyl floor covering 
Insulation Insulation 
Lighting 
fittings Lighting control system 
Transformers Transformers 
Air 
conditioning 
units Cold and hot water 
absorption units   
Ice thermal storage air 
conditioning units 
Gas heat pump air 
conditioning units 
Fan 
Pump 
Plumbing 
material Recycle unplasticized 
polyvinyl chloride pipes for 
sewage or vent 
Plumbing 
fixtures Automatic shut off faucets 
Toilet and urinals equipped 
with automatic flushing 
system 
Toilets bowls 
 Concrete form  Form utilizing recycled 
material  
Plywood form 
Construction 
machines  
N/A 
  Low-emission construction 
machines Table 3 
Low-noise construction 
machines 
Construction 
methods Effective 
usage of soil 
resulting 
from 
construction Effective usage of low 
quality soil Table 4 
Recycling 
treatment of 
construction 
sludge Recycling treatment of 
construction sludge 209 Recycling 
treatment of 
concrete 
masses Recycling treatment of 
concrete masses 
Pavement 
(surface) Road surface recycling 
method 
Pavement 
(roadbed) Roadbed recycling method 
Slope surface 
greening 
method Slope surfaces greening 
method using thinning wood 
or soil obtained from 
construction process 
Sheathing 
method Soil cement pillar line wall 
method of reducing mad  
Others High 
performance 
paving 
material Porous pavement Table 5 
Permeable pavement 
Greening of 
rooftops Greening of rooftops 
 210 Table 2: Materials 
Item Type Item Name Evaluation Criteria, etc. 
Banking 
materials, etc.  Treated soil 
recycled 
from 
construction 
sludge Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Be treated soil recycled from construction dirt. 
(2)  Content and elution of toxic material such as heavy  
metals, etc., fulfill Regulation for Control of Soi l 
Contamination (Regulation No. 53, 2002) and 
Environmental Standards for Soil Contamination 
(Ministry of Environment Notice No. 46, 1991). 
Granulated 
blast furnace 
slag for earth 
work Evaluation Criteria  
Public works material that uses blast furnace slag that can 
replace part or all of natural sand (sea sand and l and sand), 
natural gravel, crushed sand, or crushed stone is u sed. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are ident ifiable. 
Caisson 
filler using 
copper slag Evaluation Criteria 
Caisson fillers are copper slag that can replace pa rt or all of 
natural sand (sea sand and land sand), natural grav el, 
crushed sand, or crushed stone. 
Caisson 
filler using 
ferro-nickel Evaluation Criteria 
Caisson fillers are ferro-nickel slag that can repl ace part or 
all of natural sand (sea sand and land sand), natur al gravel, 
crushed sand, or crushed stone. 
Ground 
improvement 
material Steel slag for 
ground 
improve- 
ment Evaluation Criteria 
Steel slag is capable of completely replacing natur al sand 
(sea sand and land sand) using sand compaction pile  
method. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are ident ifiable. 
Slag 
aggregate for 
concrete 
 Blast 
furnace slag 
aggregate Evaluation Criteria 
Blast furnace slag that can replace part or all of natural sand 
(sea sand and land sand), natural gravel, crushed s and, or 
crushed stone is used. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are ident ifiable. 
Notes:  As for  Blast furnace slag aggregate , material that meet the standard of JIS A 5011-
1(Slag aggregate for concrete-Part 1: Blast furnace  slag aggregate) fills this criteria. 
 
Slag 
aggregate for 
concrete 
 Ferro-nickel 
slag 
aggregate Evaluation Criteria 
Ferro-nickel slag that can replace part or all of n atural sand 
(sea sand and land sand), natural gravel, crushed s and, or 
crushed stone is used.  211 Notes: As for Ferro-nickel slag aggregate , material that meet the standard of JIS A 5011-
2(Slag aggregate for concrete-Part2 : Ferronnickel slag aggregate) fills this criteria. 
 
Slag 
aggregate for 
concrete 
 Copper slag 
aggregate Evaluation Criteria 
Copper slag that can replace part or all of natural  sand (sea 
sand and land sand), natural gravel, crushed sand, or 
crushed stone is used.  
Notes: As for Copper slag aggregate , material that meet the standard of JIS A 5011-3(S lag 
aggregate for concrete-Part3 : Copper slag aggregat e) fills this criteria.  
Slag 
aggregate for 
concrete 
 Electric arc 
furnace 
oxidizing 
slag 
aggregate Evaluation Criteria 
Electric arc furnace oxidizing slag that can replac e part or 
all of natural sand (sea sand and land sand), natur al gravel, 
crushed sand, or crushed stone is used. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are ident ifiable. 
Notes:  As for Electric arc furnace oxidizing slag aggregate , material that meet the 
standard of JIS A 5011-4(Slag aggregate for concret e-Part 4: Electric arc furnace oxidizing 
slag aggregate) fills this criteria.  
Asphalt 
compound Recycled 
heated 
asphalt 
compound Evaluation Criteria 
Includes aggregate manufactured from asphalt concre te 
masses.  
Asphalt 
compound 
with steel 
slag Evaluation Criteria 
Steel slag for roads is used as aggregate for heate d asphalt 
compound. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are ident ifiable.  
Notes: As for Steel slag for roads , material that meet the standard of JIS A 5015(Iro n and 
steel slag for road construction) fills this criter ia. 
 
Asphalt 
compound Warm 
asphalt 
compound Evaluation Criteria 
The asphalt compound that lowers the heating temper ature 
at about 30 degrees C when it is manufactured, secu ring a 
necessary quality by adding the adjustment medicine . 
Notes: Warm asphalt compound is promoted to use as the sur face and the base-course 
material in the asphalt paving. However, it uses a new aggregate for the present. Moreover, 
it doesn't use it for porous asphalt. 
 
Roadbed 
material Roadbed 
material 
with steel 
slag Evaluation Criteria 
Steel slag for roads is used for roadbed material. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Manufacturer and seller of the steel slag are ident ifiable.  212 Notes: As for Steel slag for roads , material that meet the standard of JIS A 5015(Iro n and 
steel slag for road construction) fills this criter ia. 
 
Roadbed 
material Recycled 
aggregate, 
etc. Evaluation Criteria 
Includes aggregate manufactured from asphalt concre te 
masses or concrete masses. 
Small-
diameter logs  Lumber 
from 
thinning Evaluation Criteria 
Lumber from thinning (including recycled wood piece s 
such as material left over from forestry and lumber  with a 
small diameter) that does not contain harmful decay s or 
cracks is used. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
In cases other than recycled resource such as left over from 
forestry and lumber with a small diameter, raw timb er is to 
be obtained from a forest that is conducting a sust ainable 
operation. 
Notes: Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest where lumber from 
thinning originates from is, as for Wood-related En tities, to be conducted in accordance 
with  Clean Wood Act and the Forest Agency’s “Guide line for Verification on Legality and 
Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” For other than Wood-
related Entities, to be conducted in accordance wit h the Forest Agency’s Guideline. In 
order for the National agent to procure, it is nece ssary to take into consideration the 
operation situation etc. of the industry etc. conce rning the proof of legality of the procured 
item.  
 
Blended 
cement Portland 
blast furnace 
cement Evaluation Criteria 
Portland blast furnace cement whose raw material co ntains 
more than 30% blast furnace slag.  
Notes: As for Portland blast furnace cement,  materials that meet the standard of species B 
or species C based on JIS R 5211 fills this criteri a. 
 
Blended 
cement Fly-ash 
cement Evaluation Criteria 
Fly-ash cement whose raw material contains more tha n 
10% fly-ash. 
Notes: As for Fly-ash cement,  materials that meet the standard of species B or s pecies C 
based on JIS R 5213 fills this criteria. 
 
Cement Eco-cement Evaluation Criteria 
Cement that uses ashes resulting from incineration of city 
waste, etc. as the main ingredient. Cement contains  no less 
than 500kg in dry weight of such waste material per  1 ton of 
final product.  
Notes:  
1.  Eco-cement  is to be used for concrete structures and concrete  products that do not 
require high strength. 
2.  As for Eco-cement,  materials that meet the standard of JIS R 5214 fil l this criteria. 213  
Concrete and 
concrete 
products Water 
permeable 
concrete Evaluation Criteria 
Water permeability of the concrete exceeds 1x10-2cm /sec. 
Notes: 
1.  Water permeable concrete  is to be used for areas that require rain water to permeate 
but do not require high strength. 
2.  As for Water permeable concrete , material that meet the standard of JIS A 
5371(Precast unreinforced concrete products Appendi x B pavement/boundary blocks 
Recommended specification B-1 Monotony) fills this criteria. 
 
Hydrated 
solidified 
steel slag Steel slag 
block Evaluation Criteria 
Steel slag listed in Table is no less than 50% by w eight of the 
aggregate. Product uses blast furnace slag powder a s binder. 
 
Table 
Category 
Converter slag (includes pig iron slag from 
preliminary treatment process) 
Electric furnace oxidized slag 
 
Factors for Consideration 
It is possible to find out the manufacturer and sel ler of steel 
slag. 
Spray-on 
concrete Spray-on 
concrete 
with fly-ash Evaluation Criteria 
Spray-on concrete that includes at least 100kg per 1m3 fly-ash 
in its admixture. 
Paint Base coat 
paint (anti 
corrosive) Evaluation Criteria 
Does not contain pigment using lead or chrome. 
Water based 
road paint 
using low 
volatility 
organic 
solvent Evaluation Criteria 
Water based road paint that contains no more than 5 % of 
volatile organic solvent (VOC) (ratio of volatile s olvent to 
total volume of paint).  
 High solar 
reflectance 
paints Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  The solar reflectance in the near infrared rays reg ion is 
over the ratio of the applicable in Table. 
(2)  The average of the solar reflectance retention in t he near 
infrared rays region is 80% or more. 
Notes: 
1. High solar reflectance paints in the evaluation criteria of this section are paints that 
contain pigments with high solar reflectance, and i t is necessary to be used for 
construction that gives painting to a metallic side  etc. in the rooftop and the roof, etc. 
in the building. 214 2. The solar reflectance in the near infrared rays region, L* value and the solar 
reflectance retention are measured and calculated b ased on JIS K 5675. 
3. As for High solar reflectance paints,  materials that meet the standard of JIS K 5675 
fills this criteria. 
Table: The solar reflectance in the near infrared r ays region 
L* value The solar reflectance in the 
near infrared rays region(%)  
40.0 or less 40.0 
More than 40.0, but less 
than 80.0 The ratio of L* value 
More than 80.0 80.0 
 
 
 
  
 
Waterproof High solar 
reflectance 
waterproof Evaluation Criteria 
The solar reflectance in the near infrared rays reg ion is 50.0% 
or more. 
Notes: 
1. High solar reflectance waterproof in the evaluat ion criteria of this section are paints 
that contain pigments with high solar reflectance i n the material in the water-resistant 
layer, or paints that have pigments with high solar  reflectance are given as finish of 
the water-resistant layer in the rooftop and the ro of, etc. in the building. 
2. The solar reflectance is calculated in accordanc e with JIS K 5602. 215 Pavement 
material Pavement 
blocks using 
recycled 
material 
(burnt) Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Uses recycled material (material such as those incl uded in 
the left column of Table below, and preprocessed wh ere 
indicated in the right column) as its raw material,  and 
burnt. 
(2)  Raw material contains 20% or more recycled material  by 
weight (total weight when using multiple materials) . 
However, when counting the weight of recycled mater ial, 
it may not include scraps from the same factory tha t is 
usually used. 
(3)  According to “Environmental Standards for Soil 
Contamination” (Ministry of Environment Notice No. 46, 
1991), there are no problems concerning the elution  of 
toxic material such as heavy metals, etc., in the o ne that the 
product or the burned product of the reworked mater ial 
used was crushed to 2mm or less.  
 
Factors for Consideration 
According to Regulation for Control of Soil Contami nation 
(Regulation No. 53, 2002), there are no problems 
concerning the content of toxic material such as he avy 
metals, etc., in the one that the product or the bu rned 
product of the reworked material used was crushed t o 2 mm 
or less. 
 
Table 
Category of recycled material 
to be used as raw material Preprocessing method 
Quarry or kiln waste No preprocessing 
required Inorganic silica sand 
Steel slag 
Non-ferrous slag 
Foundry sand 
Pottery shards 
Coal ash 
Building material waste  
Waste glass (does not include 
colorless and brown glass 
bottles) 
Paper sludge 
Aluminum sludge 
Polishing sand sludge 
Stone chips 
Municipal waste ashes Convert to molten slag 
Sewage sludge Convert to ashes or 
molten slag 
Waterworks sludge 216 Sludge from lakes, etc. No preprocessing 
required 
 217 Pavement 
block 
products 
using 
recycled 
material 
(precast 
unreinforced 
concrete 
products) Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Uses recycled material (material such as those incl uded in 
the left column of Table below, and preprocessed wh ere 
indicated in the right column) as its raw material.  
(2)  Raw material contains 20% or more recycled material  by 
weight (total weight when using multiple materials) . In 
cases where it is necessary to increase the ratio o f 
aggregates in order to maintain water permeability,  raw 
material contains 15% or more recycled material by 
weight. However, when counting the weight of recycl ed 
material, it may not include scraps from the same f actory 
that is usually used. 
(3)  There are no problems concerning content and elutio n of 
toxic material such as heavy metals in recycled mat erial.  
 
Table 
Category of recycled material to 
be used as raw material Preprocessing method 
Municipal waste ashes Convert to molten slag Sewage sludge 
 
Notes: Evaluation Criteria (3) is to be determined in acco rdance with the standards designated 
in JIS A 5031 (Solidified slag aggregate for concre te derived from melting and solidification 
of general waste material, sewage discharge, or the ir incinerated ash). 
 
Gardening 
material Bark 
compost Evaluation Criteria 
Meets the following criteria, uses as raw material 50% or 
more by dry weight of tree bark that has peeled off  from the 
tree component, and uses organic material including  
excrement of domestic animals, animal or plant food  residue, 
or wood based scrap material as other raw material with the 
exception of material used for fermentation assista nce: 
• Percentage of organic material (dry): no less than 70% 
• Carbon to nitrogen ratio (C/N ratio): no more than 35 
• Cation exchange capacity [CEC] (dry): no less than 
70meq/100g 
• pH: 5.5~7.5 
• Water content:  55 ～65% 
• Result of young plant test: no abnormalities includ ing 
growth impediment is recognized 
• Nitrogen content [N] (actual): no less than 0.5% 
• Phosphoric acid content [P2O5] (actual): no less th an 
0.2% 
• Potassium content [K2O] (actual): no less than 0.1%  218 Fermented 
compost 
using sewage 
sludge  
(Sewage 
sludge 
compost) Evaluation Criteria 
Meets the following criteria, uses as raw material 25% or 
more by weight of sewage sludge (dehydrated sludge based), 
and uses organic material including excrement of do mestic 
animals, animal or plant food residue, or wood base d scrap 
material as other raw material with the exception o f non-
organic soil conditioner. 
 
• Percentage of organic material (dry): no less than 35% 
• Carbon to nitrogen ratio (C/N ratio): no more than 20 
• pH: no more than 8.5  
• Water content: no more than 50% 
• Nitrogen content [N] (actual): no less than 0.8% 
• Phosphoric acid content [P2O5] (actual): no less th an 
1.0% 
• Alkaline content (actual): no more than 15% (This d oes 
not apply when used for the purpose of correcting t he 
acidity of the soil.) 
Notes: 
1.  Fermented compost using sewage sludge includes those used as a soil conditioner.  
2.  Material that satisfy the "Official standard of ord inary fertilizers" (Ministry of 
Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries Notification No . 284) based on the provisions of 
Articles 3 and 25 of the Fertilizer Control Law (Ac t No. 127, 1957). 
 
 
Road 
illuminations  LED road 
illuminations  Evaluation Criteria 
Road lighting facilities using LED, to satisfy one o f the 
following criteria. 
(1)  As road lighting equipment (Continuous lighting,  
sidewalk lighting, local lighting), meet all the following 
criteria.  
a.  Standard apparent power is less than the value of the 
applicable design condition type in Table 1.  
b.  Average color rendering index Ra of 60 or more. 
c.  Rated life of LED module and control device of LED 
modules are at least 60,000 hours.  
(2)  Tunnel lighting equipment (basic lighting) meet the 
following criteria.  
a.  Standard apparent power is less than the value of the 
applicable design condition type in Table 2. 
b.  Average color rendering index Ra of 80 or more  
c.  Rated life of LED module and control device of LED 
modules are at least 90,000 hours. 
(3)  Tunnel lighting equipment (entrance lighting) meet the 
following criteria.  
a.  Standard apparent power is less than the value of the 
applicable category type in Table 3. 219 b.  Average color rendering index Ra of 60 or more.  
c.  Rated life of LED module and control device of LED 
modules are at least 75,000 hours.  
Notes: 
1.  Measuring method of average color rendering index Ra  is in accordance with light 
source color and color rendition evaluation method of source of light by JIS C 
7801(Measuring methods of lamps for general lightin g) and JIS C 8152-2 (Photometry 
of white light emitting diode (LED) for general lig hting-Part 2: LED modules and LED 
light engines).  
2.  Rated life denotes the average time that the residual ratio of  lifetime of the LED 
modules of the same type produced over a period of time and the life of the LED 
module for the control device of the same type is 5 0%.Rated life of the LED module  
denotes either a short time of the time until the L ED module is not lit when used under 
the conditions prescribed or the total lighting tim e of up to the luminous flux is less 
than 80% of the values measured in the initial ligh ting stage (rated luminous flux of 
the LED module) (non-lighting regarded as). Rated life of the control device for LED 
modules  denotes the total lighting time of up to becomes unusable; the conditions of 
which the control device for LED module fails or th e output power of the device is 
less than the rated output power when used under th e conditions prescribed.  
 
 
Table 1 : Standard apparent power for road lighting equipment (continuous lighting, 
sidewalk lighting, local lighting)  
Cate 
gory Design conditions type   Standard 
apparent 
power  
continuous lighting A 2-lane road surface luminance 1.0 cd/m2 with side walk 125 VA 
B 2-lane road surface luminance 1.0 cd/m2 without s idewalk 
C 3-lane road surface luminance 1.0 cd/m2 with side walk 180 VA D 3-lane road surface luminance 1.0 cd/m2 without s idewalk 
E 2-lane road surface luminance 1.0 cd/m2 high-stan dard 175 VA 
F 2-lane road surface luminance 0.7 cd/m2 with side walk 95 VA G 2-lane road surface luminance 0.7 cd/m2 without s idewalk 
H 3-lane road surface luminance 0.7 cd/m2 with side walk 125 VA I 3-lane road surface luminance 0.7 cd/m2 without s idewalk 
J 2-lane road surface luminance 0.7 cd/m2 high-stan dard 120 VA 
K average road surface luminance 0.5 cd/m2 with sid ewalk 70 VA L average road surface luminance 0.5 cd/m2 without sidewalk 
Side 
walk 
lighting - Average road surface illuminance 5 lx 20 VA 
- Average road surface illuminance 10 lx 40 VA 
Local 
lightin 
g M crossroad (2-lane ×2 -lane )20 lx  160 V A  
N crossroad (2-lane ×2 -lane )15 lx  125 V A  
O crossroad (2-la ne ×2 -lane )10 lx   95 V A  220 p crossroad(4-lane×2-lane)20 lx for continuous 
lighting 125 V A 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part 120 V A 
Q crossroad(4-lane×2-lane)15 lx for continuous 
lighting  95 V A  
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  95 V A 
q' crossroad(4-lane×2-lane)10 lx for continuous 
lighting  70 V A  
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  70 V A 
R crossroad(4-lane×4-lane)20 lx for continuous 
lighting 125 V A 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part 120 V A 
S crossroad(4-lane×4-lane)15 lx for continuous 
lighting  95 V A  
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  95 V A 
T crossroad(6-lane×4-lane)20 lx for continuous 
lighting 125 V A 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part 120 V A 
U crossroad(6-lane×4-lane)15 lx for continuous 
lighting  95 V A 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  95 V A 
- T intersection (2-lane ×2 -lane ) 20 lx   95 V A  
- T intersection (2-lane ×2 -lane ) 15 lx   70 V A 
- T intersection (2-lane ×2 -lane ) 10 lx   70 V A  
- T intersection(4-lane×2-lane)20 lx for continuous 
lighting 125 V A 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part  120 V A  
- T intersection(4-lane×2-lane)15 lx for continuous 
lighting  95 V A 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part   95 V A  
- T intersection(4-lane×2-lane)10 lx for continuous 
lighting  70 V A 
for the intersection 
corner cutting part   70 V A  
- Y T intersection (4-lane ×2 -lane ) 20 lx  125 V A 
- Y T intersection (4-lane ×2 -lane ) 15 lx   95 V A  
- Y T intersection (4-lane ×2 -lane ) 10 lx   70 V A 221 V System to illuminate the b ackground of the pedestrian  20 lx  180 V A  
- System to illuminate the background of the pedestri an  10 lx   95 V A 
W System to illuminate the background of the pedestri an  20 lx  180 V A  
- System to illuminate the background of the pedestri an  10 lx   95 V A 
Notes:  
1.  Design condition type  is according to the "LED road and tunnel lighting introduced 
guidelines (draft)" (by Ministry of Land, Infrastru cture and Transport, March 2015). 
2.  Standard apparent power  is the value of the apparent power of the rated en d-of-life of 
the LED road lighting. 
3.  Apparent power in the case of using a light bulb co lor LED is a standard 1.2 times the 
value in the above table of apparent power.  
 
 
Table 2: Normal apparent power for Tunnel lighting fixture (standard lighting) 
Category Design condition type  Standard apparent 
power  
General national 
highway, etc. 
Roadway width 6m to 
7m (Including cross-
section of the 
sidewalk) x 
One-half 
reduction design speed 40(km/h) 2-
lane-lane 
0.75(cd/m 2) zigzag 
alignment 40 VA 
z 
One-half 
reduction  design speed 50(km/h) 2-
lane-lane 
0.95(cd/m 2) zigzag 
alignment 50 VA 
bb 
One-half 
reduction  design speed 60(km/h) 2-
lane 
1.15(cd/m 2) zigzag 
alignment 65 VA 
x design speed 40(km/h) 2-
lane 
1.5(cd/m 2) zigzag 
alignment 65 VA 
y design speed 40(km/h) 2-
lane 
1.5(cd/m 2 ) face to face 40 VA 
z design speed 50(km/h) 2-
lane 
1.9(cd/m 2 ) zigzag 
alignment 75 VA 
aa design speed 50(km/h) 2-
lane 
1.9(cd/m 2 ) face to face 50 VA 
bb design speed 60(km/h) 2-
lane 
2.3(cd/m 2 ) zigzag 
alignment 95 VA 222 cc design speed 60(km/h) 2-
lane 
2.3(cd/m 2 ) face to face 65 VA 
National expressway, 
etc. dd design speed 70(km/h) 2-
lane 
3.2(cd/m 2) zigzag 
alignment 95 VA 
ee design speed 70(km/h) 2-
lane 
3.2(cd/m 2) face to face 65 VA 
ff design speed 80(km/h) 2-
lane 
4.5(cd/m 2) zigzag 
alignment 125 VA 
gg design speed80(km/h) 2-
lane 
4.5(cd/m 2) face to face 95 VA 
Notes: 
1.  Design condition type  is according to "LED road and tunnel lighting intr oduced 
guidelines (draft) by Ministry of Land, Infrastruct ure and Transportation, March, 
2015". 
2.  Standard apparent power is the value of the apparen t power of the rated end-of-life of 
the LED road lighting. 
 
 
Table 3: Standard apparent power for Tunnel lighting equipme nt (entrance lighting)  
Type Standard 
apparent power  
NH 70W equivalent  50 VA 
NH 110W equivalent 75 VA 
NH 150W equivalent 105 VA 
NH 180W equivalent 160 VA 
NH 220W equivalent 205 VA 
NH 270W equivalent 250 VA 
NH 360W equivalent 290 VA 
Notes: 
Type  refers to the LED tunnel lighting fixtures of high  pressure sodium lamp equivalent. 
 
 
Central 
divider block Central 
divider 
block using 
recycled 
plastic Evaluation Criteria 
Raw material contains 70% or more recycled plastic by 
weight. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)A system exists for collection and reuse after 
removal. 223 (2)Plastics used for products should be collected a fter 
use and do not interfere with re-recycling. 
Notes: 
1. Recycled plastic  denotes  part or all of plastic once used as a part of a use ful product 
that has been discarded, remnants discarded during the manufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been 
recycled in the process of manufacturing the produc t.) 
2. As for Central divider block using recycled plastic , material that meet the standard of 
JIS A 9401(Recycled plastics median strip block) fi lls this criteria. 
 
 
Tiles  Ceramic tile  Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Uses recycled material (material such as those incl uded in the 
left column of Table below, and preprocessed where 
indicated in the right column) as its raw material.  
(2)  Raw material contains 20% or more recycled material  by 
weight (total weight when using multiple materials) . 
However, when counting the weight of recycled mater ial, it 
may not include scraps from the same factory that i s usually 
used. 
(3)  According to “Environmental Standards for Soil 
Contamination” (Ministry of Environment Notice No. 46, 
1991), there are no problems concerning the elution  of toxic 
material such as heavy metals, etc., in the one tha t the product 
or the burned product of the reworked material used  was 
crushed to 2 mm or less. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
According to Regulation for Control of Soil Contami nation 
(Regulation No. 53, 2002), there are no problems co ncerning the 
content of toxic material such as heavy metals, etc ., in the one 
that the product or the burned product of the rewor ked material 
used was crushed to 2 mm or less. 
 
 
Table Inser t 
Category of recycled material to be used 
as raw material Preprocessing Method 
Quarry or kiln waste 
Inorganic silica sand 
Steel slag 
Non-ferrous slag 
Foundry sand 
Pottery shards 
Coal ash 
Waste plastic 
Building material waste No preprocessing required 224 Waste rubber 
Waste glass (does not include colorless 
and brown glass bottles) 
Paper sludge 
Aluminum sludge 
Polishing sand sludge 
Stone chips 
Municipal waste ashes Convert to molten slag 
Sewage sludge Convert to ashes or molten slag 
Waterworks sludge No preprocessing required 
Sludge from lakes, etc. 
 
 
Item Type Item Name Evaluation Criteria, etc. 
Doors and 
windows Heat 
insulating 
sash, doors Evaluation Criteria 
Doors and windows that prevent loss of heat through  
themselves, while meeting any of the followings: 
(1)  Sash using multiple glasses. 
(2)  Double sash. 
(3)  Door using insulation material or other effective 
method of insulation. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  The measures of effective insulation or well-
insulated material is used in the sash frame, the s hoji 
frame or the glasses.  
(2)  For sash and multiple glass defined in the Order fo r 
Enforcement of the Regulation for the Efficient Use  
of Energy (Law No. 267, 1979), Article 22, No. 2 an d 
No. 3, the value of heat loss prevention performanc e 
is as small as possible if it is. 
Note: Definition and method of measuring “The value of he at loss prevention 
performance" are based on "The standards of the jud gment the sash of the performance 
improvement heat loss prevention building material manufacturers, etc. (Ministry of 
Economy, Trade and Industry Notification No. 234, 2 014), and “The standards of 
judgment of heat loss prevention construction manuf acturers, etc. related to the 
improvement of the performance of the pair glass (M inistry of economy, Trade and 
industry Notification No. 235, 2014).  225 Lumber, etc. Lumber Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Lumber from thinning and left over forest wood have  
a small diameter and lumber from thinning is to be in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry  
in its country or geographical area of origin. 
(2)  For cases other than above (1), the wood used is to  be 
in compliance with the regulations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of ori gin. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
Lumber that is used as the raw material is to be ob tained 
from a forest that is conducting a sustainable oper ation. 
However, recycled resources such as material left o ver 
from forestry and lumber with a small diameter will  not 
be applied. 
Glued 
laminated 
timber 
 
Plywood 
 
Laminated 
veneer    
lumber 
 
Cross 
laminated 
timber Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Lumber such as timber from thinning, obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over fro m 
forestry and lumber with a small diameter contain 
10% or more by volume and also lumber that is used 
other than obtained from plywood lumber factories, 
material left over from forestry and lumber with a 
small diameter is to be in compliance with the 
regulations concerning forestry in its country or 
geographical area of origin.   
(2)  For cases other than above (1), raw material wood i s 
to be in compliance with the regulations concerning  
forestry in its country or geographical area of ori gin. 
However lumber obtained from plywood or lumber 
factories, material left over from forestry and lum ber 
with a small diameter will not be applied. 
(3)  For material used to finish the interior of living 
spaces, average formaldehyde discharge may not 
exceed 0.3mg/L, maximum discharge may not exceed 
0.4mg/L. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Lumber that is used as the raw material is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a sustain able 
operation. However, recycled resources such as 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories, material  
left over from forestry, lumber with a small diamet er 
will not be applied. 
(2)  For wood based materials, the utilization ratio of 
recycled resources and lumber from thinning should 
be as high as possible. 
Notes: 226 1.  Lumber, glued laminated timber, plywood,  laminated veneer lumber and cross 
laminated timber  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section 
(referred to as lumber, etc .) are to be used for carpentry in buildings. 
2.  Evaluation Criteria (2) for lumber, etc.  is to be applicable only in cases where 
restrictions exist on either function or demand. 
3.  Measurement for formaldehyde discharge should be pe rformed in accordance with 
Japan Agricultural Standards. 
4.  Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest where lumber  and 
glued laminated timber  etc., originates from is, as for Wood-related Enti ties, to be 
conducted in accordance with Clean Wood Act and the  Forest Agency’s “Guideline 
for Verification on Legality and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (February 
15, 2006).” For other than Wood-related Entities, t o be conducted in accordance with 
the Forest Agency’s Guideline. 
Regarding  raw timber where the contract between the lumber co mpany and the 
processing and marketing companies has been made pr ior to April 1, 2006, a supplier 
who owns raw materials or products etc. as of April  1, 2006, specifies the raw 
materials or products etc., and reports them in adv ance to the Forestry Agency once 
a year, and is a specified raw material or product etc. If it is stated in the certificate, 
the proof that it is a legal wood prescribed in the  above guidelines is unnecessary. 
The period of time for which this exceptional claus e is applicable will be determined 
in consideration with market trend. 
 227 Flooring Flooring Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Uses lumber from thinning, obtained from plywood 
or lumber factories, material left over from forest ry 
and lumber with a small diameter and also lumber 
that is used other than obtained from plywood lumbe r 
factories, material left over from forestry and lum ber 
with a small diameter is to be in compliance with t he 
regulations concerning forestry in its country or 
geographical area of origin.   
(2)  For cases other than above (1), raw material wood i s 
to be in compliance with the regulations concerning  
forestry in its country or geographical area of ori gin. 
However lumber obtained from plywood or lumber 
factories, material left over from forestry and lum ber 
with a small diameter will not be applied. 
(3)  If wood is used for the base material of flooring, 
timber from thinning as a raw material wood is to b e 
in compliance with the regulations concerning 
forestry in its country or geographical area of ori gin.  
(4)  For material used to finish the interior of living 
spaces, average formaldehyde discharge may not 
exceed 0.3mg/L, maximum discharge may not 
exceed 0.4mg/L. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Lumber that is used as the raw material is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a 
sustainable operation. However, obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, material left over fro m 
forestry, lumber with a small diameter and timber 
from thinning (Only when wood is not used for the 
base material) will not be applied. 
(2)  For wood based materials, the utilization ratio of 
recycled resources and lumber from thinning should 
be as high as possible. 
Notes:   
1.  Flooring  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of t his section are to be used 
for carpentry in buildings. 
2.  Evaluation Criteria (2) for flooring is to be appli cable only in cases where restrictions 
exist on either function or demand. 
3.  Measurement for formaldehyde discharge should be pe rformed in accordance with 
Japan Agricultural Standards. 
4.  Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest of wood which becomes 
the raw material of flooring  are as follows. 
A. In the case of using wood for the base material,  Wood-related Entities  must comply 
with the Clean Wood Act for the timber, to be condu cted in accordance with the 
Forest Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Lega lity and Sustainability of Wood 
and Wood Products (February 15, 2006)”, which is in corporated herein by reference. 228 Also, in order for the state agencies procure, it i s necessary to take into 
consideration the operation situation etc. of the i ndustry etc. concerning the proof 
of legality of the procured items. For non-timber-r elated business operators, they 
shall be conducted in compliance with the guideline s. In order for a national agency 
to procure, it is necessary to take into considerat ion the operation situation etc. of 
the industry etc. concerning the proof of legality of the procured item.   
B. For goods other than the item (a) above, it shal l be carried out in compliance with 
the above guidelines. The certification system of f orests, timber etc. by prefectures 
etc. can also be used for confirmation of legality.  
Regarding  raw timber where the contract between the lumber co mpany and the 
processing and marketing companies has been made pr ior to April 1, 2006, a supplier 
who owns raw materials or products etc. as of April  1, 2006, specifies the raw materials 
or products etc., and reports them in advance to th e Forestry Agency once a year, and 
is a specified raw material or product etc. If it i s stated in the certificate, the proof that 
it is a legal wood prescribed in the above guidelin es is unnecessary. The period of time 
for which this exceptional clause is applicable wil l be determined in consideration with 
market trend. 
5. "When wood was used for the base material" of Ev aluation Criteria (3), and "When 
using wood for the base material" in Factors for Co nsideration (1), "Wood was used 
as a base material for the base material of Note 4 Wood "refers to what is subject to 
the Clean Wood Act. 
 
Reconstituted 
wood boards Particle 
board 
 
 
Fiberboard 
 Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  At least 50% (by weight) of the material consists o f 
lumber from thinning,  lumber obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, lumber recovered from 
dismantled structures, used crates, wood chips left  
over from paper manufacturing, logging scrap, 
shrubs, and lumber with a small diameter or plant 
fiber. In this case, it is possible to calculate th e weight 
ratio blend ratio without accounting for adhesives,  
admixtures or the like (such as a phenolic adhesive  in 
a particle board) having a volume ratio blend ratio  of 
20% or less in the whole recycled material. 
(2)  Lumber as the raw material is to be in compliance 
with the regulations concerning forestry in its cou ntry 
or geographical area of origin. However  lumber 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories, lumber 
recovered from dismantled structures, used crates, 
wood chips left over from paper manufacturing, 
logging scrap, shrubs, and lumber with a small 
diameter will not be applied. 
(3)  For material used to finish the interior of living 
spaces, formaldehyde discharge may not exceed 
0.3mg/l, maximum discharge may not exceed 0.4 
mg/l. 
 
Factors for Consideration 229 (1)  Lumber is to be obtained from a forest that is 
conducting a sustainable operation. However lumber 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories,  lumber 
recovered from dismantled structures, used crates, 
wood chips left over from paper manufacturing, 
material left over from forestry, shrubs, and lumbe r 
with a small diameter will not be applied.   
(2)  For wood based materials, the utilization ratio of 
recycled resources and lumber from thinning should 
be as high as possible.  
 
Reconstituted 
wood boards Wood-type 
cement 
board Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  At least 50% (by weight) of the material consists o f 
lumber from thinning,  lumber obtained from 
plywood or lumber factories, lumber recovered from 
dismantled structures, used crates, wood chips left  
over from paper manufacturing, logging scrap, 
shrubs, and lumber with a small diameter or plant 
fiber. In this case, it is possible to calculate th e weight 
ratio blend ratio without accounting for adhesives,  
admixtures or the like (such as cement in a woody 
cement board) having a volume ratio blend ratio of 
20% or less in the whole recycled material. 
(2)  Lumber as the raw material is to be in compliance 
with the regulations concerning forestry in its cou ntry 
or geographical area of origin. However  lumber 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories, lumber 
recovered from dismantled structures, used crates, 
wood chips left over from paper manufacturing, 
logging scrap, shrubs, and lumber with a small 
diameter will not be applied. 
(3)  For material used to finish the interior of living 
spaces, formaldehyde discharge may not exceed 
0.3mg/l, maximum discharge may not exceed 0.4 
mg/l. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Lumber that is used as the raw material is to be 
obtained from a forest that is conducting a 
sustainable operation. However  lumber obtained 
from plywood or lumber factories, lumber recovered 
from dismantled structures, used crates, wood chips  
left over from paper manufacturing, logging scrap, 
shrubs, and lumber with a small diameter will not b e 
applied.  
(2)  For wood based materials, the utilization ratio of 
recycled resources and lumber from thinning should 
be as high as possible.  230 Notes:   
1.  Measurement for formaldehyde discharge should be pe rformed in accordance with JIS 
A 1460. 
2.  Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest where particle board 
and fiberboard originates from is to be conducted i n accordance with the Forest 
Agency’s “Guideline for Verification on Legality an d Sustainability of Wood and 
Wood Products (February 15, 2006).” In addition, ce rtification system of forest, timber, 
etc. by prefectures etc. can be utilized for confir mation of legality.  
3.  Confirmation of the legality and the sustainability  of the forest where Wood-type 
cement board originates from is, as for Wood-relate d Entities, to be conducted in 
accordance with  Clean Wood Act and  the Forest Age ncy’s “Guideline for Verification 
on Legality and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Pro ducts (February 15, 2006).” For 
other than Wood-related Entities, to be conducted i n accordance with the Forest 
Agency’s Guideline.  
4.  As for Particle board and  Fiberboard, concerning Evaluation Criteria(3), materials 
that meet the standard of F four stars based on JIS  A 5908 and A 5905 fill this criteria. 
 
Wood-
plastic 
composite Wood-
plastic 
recycled 
composite Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Materials that are recognized as recycled materials  etc. are 
used at a weight ratio of raw materials of 60% or m ore (in 
the case where a plurality of materials are used, t he sum of 
those materials) is used. 
(2)  The woody material used as a raw material has 100% of the 
woody raw material recognized as a recycled materia l or the 
like. 
(3)  There is no problem concerning the inclusion and el ution of 
harmful substances such as heavy metals. 
(4)  Plastics used for products shall be collected after  use and 
shall not interfere with recycling 
 
Factors for Consideration 
There is a system to collect and recycle after remo val. 
Notes:   
1.  Wood-plastic recycled composite subject to the Evaluation criteria in this section 
shall be used for construction of the outer structu re of the building, construction of 
the garden road in the urban park, maintenance work  of the port green area. 
2.  Evaluation criteria (1) (2) and (3) according to th e criteria stipulated in Wood-Plastic 
Recycled Composite  specified in JIS A 5741. 
3.  Regarding Evaluation criteria (1) (3) and (4), Wood-Plastic Recycled Composite  
specified in JIS A 5741 4.2 Content Ratio of Recycl ed Materials, etc. Classification 
R60, R70, R80 and R90 satisfy this criteria. 
 
 231 Vinyl floor 
covering Vinyl floor 
covering Evaluation Criteria 
Total weight of recycled vinyl resin material used is no less than 
15% of total weight. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
A system for collection and reuse/recycling of mate rial left over 
from construction work is considered. 
Notes: Types of vinyl flooring material determined by JIS A 5705 (Vinyl floor covering) that 
is applicable to symbol KS is not to be included in  vinyl floor covering  discussed in Evaluation 
Criteria. 
 
Insulation Insulation Evaluation Criteria 
Material that prevents loss of heat through the out er walls of 
buildings, and meet the below criteria.  
(1)  Fluorocarbons are not used. 
(2)  Uses recycled material, or may be recycled after us e. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
As for extruded polystyrene foam insulator, the gla ss-wool 
insulation and the rock wool heat insulation, class  2 rigid 
urethane foam insulation and class 3 rigid urethane  foam 
insulation, the numerical value of the heat loss pr evention 
performance are small as small as possible.  
Notes: 
1.  Fluorocarbons  are the materials defined as the Fluorocarbons pre scribed in Article 2, 
Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Pro per Management of Fluorocarbons, 
(Act No. 64 of 2001). 
2.  Definition of the heat loss prevention performance and the measuring method are 
according to “Criteria of judgment such as manufact uring entrepreneurs of materials 
for building construction for heat loss prevention concerning improvement of 
performance of insulation” (Ministry of Economy, Tr ade and Industry Act No.270 of 
December, 2013). 
3.  Class 2 rigid urethane foam insulation and class 3 rigid urethane foam insulation refer 
to class 2 and class 3 of rigid urethane foam insul ation material specified in JIS A 9521, 
respectively 
 
 
Lighting 
fittings Lighting 
control system  Evaluation Criteria 
Comprised of equipment capable of continuous lighti ng, 
LED lighting equipment and lighting control system that 
controls the equipment. It possesses functions for the 
control and correction of initial luminance and the  control 
of natural light. 
Transformers  Transformers Evaluation Criteria 
Energy consumption efficiency shall not exceed the 
amount determined by the appropriate formula for ea ch 
category. 232  
Factors for Consideration 
Load factor during actual operation is taken into 
consideration. 
Notes:   
Transformers  under consideration in the evaluation criteria of this section refers to items 
whose rated primary voltage exceeds 600V and is 700 0V or less, and is used for an 
alternating current circuit. Items that meet any of  the following criteria will not be 
considered as transformers. 
 
(1)  Items that use gas as insulating material. 
(2)  Items that use H type insulating material. 
(3)  Scott connection transformers. 
(4)  Items equipped with more than 3 round rotors. 
(5)  Pole transformers. 
(6)  Single phase transformers with rated capacity of 5k V A or less, or over 500kV A. 
(7)  Triple phase transformers with rated capacity of 10 kV A or less, or over 2000kV A. 
(8)  Triple phase transformers using resin insulation ma terial used to transform triple 
phase alternating current to single phase and tripl e phased alternating current. 
(9)  Items whose rated secondary voltage of less than 10 0V or more than 600V . 
(10)  Wind cooled, or water cooled items. 
 
 
Table: Standard Energy Consumption Efficiency for T ransformers 
Category Formula for 
calculating standard 
energy consumption 
efficiency Type of 
transformer Phase 
number  Rated 
frequency Rated capacity 
Oil-filled 
transformers  Single 
phase 50 Hz  E=11.2S0. 732  
60 Hz  E=11.1S0. 725  
Triple 
phase 50 Hz 500 kV A or less E=16.6S0. 696  
Over 500 kV A E=11.1S0. 809  
60 Hz 500 kV A or less E=17.3S0. 678  
Over 500 kV A E=11.7S0. 790  
Molded 
transformers  Single 
phase 50 Hz  E=16.9S0. 674  
60 Hz  E=15.2S0. 691  
Triple 
phase 50 Hz 500 kV A or less E=23.9S0. 659  
Over 500 kV A E=22.7S0. 718  
60 Hz 500 kV A or less E=22.3S0. 674  
Over 500 kV A E=19.4S0. 737  
Notes: 
1.  Oil-filled transformers  refer to items that use insulation oil as the insu lating material. 
2.  Molded transformers  refer to item that uses resin insulation material.  
3.  E and S stand for the following: 
E: Standard energy consumption efficiency (unit: W)  
S: Rated capacity (unit: kV A) 233 4.  The table designation will be applied corresponding ly to those items not used in the 
standard specification conditions designated in JIS  C 4304 and C 4306 and Japan 
Electrical Industry Standards 1500 and 1501. In suc h cases, the formula for calculating 
standard energy consumption efficiency listed in th e right column of the chart will be 
modified by multiplying the right side of the formu la by 1.10 (for mold transformers, 
multiply by 1.05). 
5.  Energy consumption efficiency is calculated accordi ng to “7.4 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency”, based on JIS C 4304  or “7.4 Energy Consumption Efficiency”, based on 
JIS C 4306. 
 
 
 
Air 
conditioning 
units Cold and hot 
water 
absorption 
air 
conditioning 
unit   Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Coefficient of Performance for cooling is no less 
than what is designated in Table 1. 
(2)  Integrated part load value for cooling is no less t han 
what is designated in Table 2. 
Notes:  
1.  Evaluation criteria for Cold and hot water absorption air conditioning unit  under 
consideration in the evaluation criteria in this se ction only applies to units whose 
cooling capacity is no less than 105kW.  However, equipment that uses wood pellets as 
a fuel is excluded. 
2.  Coefficient of performance and integrated part load  value for cold and hot water 
absorption air conditioning unit shall be calculate d in accordance with JIS B 8622. 
 
Table 1: Coefficient of Performance for Cooling 
Category Coefficient of 
performance 
Cooling capacity is lower than 
352kW 1.20 
 
Table 2: Integrated Part Load Value for Cooling 
Category Integrated part load value 
for Cooling 
Cooling capacity is 352kW or higher  1.45 
 
 
Air 
conditioning 
units Ice thermal 
storage air 
conditioners  Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Includes an ice thermal storage tank. 
(2)  Cooling material does not use material capable of d estroying 
the ozone layer. 
(3)  Coefficient of performa nce for cooling is no less than what is 
specified in Table 3. 
Notes: 234 1.  Ice thermal storage air conditioner denotes an ice thermal storage unit or an ice 
thermal storage packaged air conditioner. 
2.  Evaluation criteria for Ice thermal storage air conditioner apply to ice thermal storage 
units whose non-thermal storage equivalent cooling capacity exceeds 28kW, or ice 
thermal storage packaged air conditioners whose rat ed thermal storage cooling 
capacity exceeds 28kW. 
3.  Coefficient of performance is calculated with the b elow formula using 10 hours as the 
daytime heat source unit operating duration.  
(1)  Ice thermal storage unit 
Coefficient of performance =Rated daily cooling cap acity (kW.h) / 
Rated electricity consumption for thermal storage ( kW.h) + Electricity consumption 
for daytime cooling operation of heat source unit ( kW.h) 
(2)  Ice thermal storage packaged air conditioner 
Coefficient of performance=Daily cooling efficiency  using thermal storage 
4.  Non-thermal storage equivalent cooling capacity denotes the peak heat load with the 
average head load factor per one hour of cooling (t he ratio of average load when the 
load factor per hour of peak load is 100%) at 85%.  
5.  Rated thermal storage cooling capacity  denotes the amount of heat load that the ice 
thermal storage packaged air conditioner removes fr om a room by primarily using 
thermal storage in accordance with the rated coolin g temperature conditions indicated 
on Table 1. 
 
Table 1: Temperature conditions Unit : degrees C 
 
 Temperature condition 
inside entryway Exterior temperature 
condition 
Dry bulb 
temperature  Wet bulb 
temperature  Dry bulb 
temperature  Wet bulb 
temperature  
Air 
conditioning  Rated cooling  27 19 35 － 
Thermal 
storage for 
rated cooling  － － 25 － 
 
6.  Rated daily cooling capacity  denotes the total daily heat value that may be sup plied to a 
secondary source with the temperature of cold water  outlet at 7 degrees C. The amount 
is calculated by adding the net effective heat stor age capacity derived from the heat 
value stored inside the heat storage tank, and the heat value cooled by the daytime 
operation of heat source equipment. 
7.  Rated electricity consumption for thermal storage  denotes the sum of electricity 
consumed (including electricity consumed by primary  supplementary equipment  such as 
a brine pump) in order to reach standard thermal st orage capacity in accordance with the 
thermal storage temperature conditions indicated on  Table 2.  235  
Table 2: Temperature conditions   Unit: degrees C 
 Exterior temperature condition 
Dry bulb 
temperature Wet bulb 
temperature 
Air 
condition- 
ing Rated cooling 35 - 
Thermal storage 
for rated cooling 25 - 
 
8.  Electricity consumption for daytime cooling operati on of heat source unit denotes the 
sum of electricity consumed when heat source and th ermal storage tank is connected in 
series and operated in accordance with the rated co oling temperature condition indicated 
on Table 2. 
9.  Daily cooling efficiency using thermal storage denotes the result of daily thermal storage 
cooling capacity divided by electricity consumed by  daily thermal storage cooling.  
10.  Daily thermal storage cooling capacity denotes the amount of heat removed from the 
room during the time that an ice heat storage packa ged air conditioner is operated under 
stable conditions for thermal storage for rated coo ling indicated on Table 1 for a maximum 
of 10 hours, and then operated using thermal storag e for the duration of thermal storage 
cooling period.  
11.  Electricity consumed by daily thermal storage cooli ng denotes electricity consumed 
during the time that an ice heat storage packaged a ir conditioner is operated under stable 
conditions for thermal storage for rated cooling in dicated on Table 1 for a maximum of 10 
hours, and then operated using thermal storage for the duration of thermal storage cooling 
period.  
 
Table 3: Coefficient of Performance for Cooling 
Category Coefficient of performance 
ice thermal storage unit 2.2 
ice thermal packaged air 
conditioner 3.0 
 
Air 
condition- 
ing units Gas engine 
heat pump 
air 
conditioner  Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Annual Performance does not fall below the values listed in 
Tables. 
(2)  Refrigerant does not include material capable of de stroying the 
ozone layer. 
Notes: 
1.  Gas engine heat pump air conditioner under consideration in the evaluation criteria 
includes units defined by JIS B 8627 whose rated co oling capacity is 28kW or more. 
2.  The calculation of Primary Annual Performance Facto r (APFp) will be executed in 
accordance with JIS B 8627.  
 236  
Table  : Annual Performance Factor 
Category Annual Performance Factor (APFp) 
Cooling capacity is 28kW or higher and 
lower than 35.5kW 1.22 or higher 
Cooling capacity is 35.5kW or higher   
and lower than 45kW 1.37 or higher 
Cooling capacity is 45kW or higher  and 
lower than 56kW 1.59 or higher 
Cooling capacity is 56kW or higher 1.70 or higher 
 
 
Air conditioning 
units Fan Evaluation Criteria 
Uses premium efficiency motor. 
Notes: 
1.  Premium efficiency motor  is to be JIS C 4213 (Low-voltage three-phase squir rel-cage 
induction motors-Low-voltage Top Runner Motor). 
2.  Range of applicability should include centrifugal f an for air conditioning and 
ventilation that uses three-phase induction motor w ith nominal voltage of 600V or 
lower. This does not include direct style induction  motor and smoke ventilator. 
 
 
Air conditioning 
units Pump Evaluation Criteria 
Uses high efficiency motor. 
Notes: 
1.  Premium efficiency motor  is to be JIS C 4213 (Low-voltage three-phase squir rel-cage 
induction motors-Low-voltage Top Runner Motor). 
2.  Range of applicability should include air condition ing pump that uses three-phase 
induction motor with nominal voltage of 600V or low er, and in particular, a centrifugal 
pump whose motor is directly connected to the pump.  
 
 
Plumbing 
material Recycle 
Recycled rigid  
PVC pipe for 
drainage and 
vent  Evaluation Criteria 
The item is recycled rigid polyvinyl chloride pipes  for drainage or 
vent and the use ratio does not fall below the numbers listed in 
Table. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
A system for collection and reuse/recycling after t he useful life of 
the item is considered. 
Notes: 237 1.  Evaluation criteria  applies to the no pressure piping only when used ri gid polyvinyl 
chloride pipes are used for the indoor drainage and  vent, and for the outdoor drainage in 
facilities for drainage in the site. 
2.  "Recycled rigid PVC pipe for drainage and vent " is according to "recycled rigid 
polyvinyl chloride three-layer pipe" specified in J IS K 9797, "recycled rigid polyvinyl 
chloride foamed three-layer pipe" specified in JIS K 9798 and "Recycled rigid PVC pipe 
for drainage" specified in AS58, 
3.  “Recycled material usage rate”  refers to the ratio of “recycled polyvinyl chloride” made 
from rigid polyvinyl chloride pipes and fittings to  the mass of the pipe. 
4.  “Reused polyvinyl chloride ” according to JIS K 9797 3.a) 4), JIS K 9798 3.a) 4 ) and AS 
58 3.1. 
 
 
 
Table: Recycled Material Usage Rate  
Classification of pipe Type of pipe Content ratio 
Three layer pipes Recycled rigid PVC pipe three lay er pipes 50% 
Recycled rigid PVC pipe foam three layer pipes 30% 
Single layer pipes Recycled rigid PVC pipe for drai nage 80% 
 
 
 
Plumbing 
fixtures Automatic 
faucet Evaluation Criteria 
By electric control system, water comes out in the automatic 
operation when the hand is close to the faucet with out touch 
and water stops in the automatic operation when the  hand is 
kept away. 
Toilet and 
urinal 
equipped with 
automatic 
flushing 
system Evaluation Criteria 
Amount of water flushed in one procedure does not e xceed 4 
liters. Amount of water can be controlled depending  on 
usage. 
 
Toilet bowls Evaluation Criteria 
Amount of water flushed in one procedure does not e xceed 
6.5 liters. 
Notes: 
1.  Automatic faucet in the evaluation criteria of this section is the o ne to be used for wash 
and toiletry of public washroom. It must be prompt still water after the hand is kept away 
to stop water. 
2.  Among the toilet bowls, high seat type and Japanese  style toilet bowls are excluded. 
3.  In introducing the toilet bowls, sufficient conside ration should be given to ensuring the 
drainage function of the entire drainage facility. 
 238 Concrete 
form 
 
 Form utilizing 
recycled 
material Evaluation Criteria 
Form utilizing recycled material is to be comprised  at least 
50% by weight of recycled material (those that uses  those 
listed in Attached Table as raw material), and is b eing 
recycled again after use. 
 
Attached Table 
Category of material that can be used as raw materi al 
for recycling 
Recycled plastic 
Pulp from recycled paper 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Form utilizing recycled material has been confirmed  for 
efficiency in construction and economy (material co st, 
reusability, cost of collection, recycling, etc.) t hat is 
equivalent to non-recycled examples. 
(2)  Plastics used for products should be collected afte r use 
and do not interfere with re-recycling. 
 
Notes: 
1.  Forms used as a part of structural components inclu ding precast forms, and ornamental 
molds are not to be included in this category. 
2.  Recycled plastic  denotes  part or all of plastic once used as a part of a use ful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been recycled 
in the process of manufacturing the product.). 
 239 Concrete 
form Plywood 
form Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Lumber from thinning, obtained from plywood or 
lumber factories, material left over from forestry and 
lumber with a small diameter contain 10% or more by  
volume and also lumber that is used other than obta ined 
from plywood lumber factories, material left over f rom 
forestry and lumber with a small diameter is to be in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry  in 
its country or geographical area of origin.   
(2)  For the cases other than (1), used lumbers are to b e in 
compliance with the regulations concerning forestry  in 
its country or geographical area of origin. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Lumber that is used as the raw material is to be ob tained 
from a forest that is conducting a sustainable oper ation. 
However, obtained from plywood or lumber factories,  
material left over from forestry, lumber with a sma ll 
diameter will not be applied. 
(2)  For wood based materials, the utilization ratio of 
recycled resources and lumber from thinning should be 
as high as possible. 
Notes: 
1.  Evaluation Criteria (2) for Plywood form  is to be applicable only under the 
restrictions of either function or supply. 
2.  Confirm that the contents shown in Note3 are displa yed on the surface of the plywood 
form when confirming the legality of lumbers and th e sustainability of the forest 
where the lumbers are produced from. 
3.  It is necessary to display the following content on  the surface of the plywood form. 
Those contents are based on Forest Agency’s “Guidel ine for Verification on Legality 
and Sustainability of Wood and Wood Products (Febru ary 15, 2006).” In addition, 
certification system of forest, timber, etc. by pre fectures etc. can be utilized for 
confirmation of legality. 
a.  The words or certificated marks which assure the us e of lumbers that are produced 
through appropriate procedure described in Evaluati on Criteria (1) or (2) in this 
section. 
b.  Number of accreditation or certification, and the n ame of certification 
organization. 
Those contents are displayed clearly in the area wh ich can easily be found on the 
surface of each plywood form. As for plywood for pr ocessed surface plywood form 
which are coated by paint or overlay even in the ba ck side, those contents are clearly 
displayed which can easily be found on the side sur face of plywood if it is difficult 
to display on the surface. 
In addition, plywood formwork should endeavor to be  reused, even plywood form in 
which the display above a. and b. on the plate surf ace, the case where the display 
on the plate surface cannot be confirmed because of  reusing, etc., it is considered as 
a designated item by the contractor of public works  projects submit a document 240 showing that using plywood form in which the displa y on the plate surface  to the 
procurement organization.  
In addition, certification system of forest, timber , etc. by prefectures etc. can be 
utilized for confirmation of legality. 
  241 Table 3:  Construction Machines  
Item Name Evaluation Criteria, etc. 
Low-
emission 
construction 
machines Evaluation Criteria  
Low-emission construction machines in attached Tabl es 1 and 2, emissions and soot 
from on-board engines do not exceed the ratio of se condary standard or less described 
below. 
 
Attached Table 1: Construction Machines for Tunnel 
Machine Type Application 
Back hoes Diesel engine output :30kW or more less t han 560 kW 
(include with a heavy weight breaker) 
Wheel loaders 
Crawler loaders  Diesel engine output :30kW or more less than 560 kW  
Dump trucks Diesel engine output :30kW or more less  than 560 kW. 
However, exclude the one to have received the deliv ery of 
an effective motor vehicle inspection certificate. 
Mixer trucks Diesel engine output :30kW or more les s than 560 kW. 
However exclude the one to have received the delive ry of an 
effective motor vehicle inspection certificate. 
 
Attached Table 2:Construction Machines for General Construction  
Machine Type Application 
Back hoes Diesel engine output :8kW or more less th an 560 kW  
Wheel loaders Diesel engine output :8kW or more les s than 560 kW  
Bulldozers Diesel engine output :8kW or more less t han 560 kW  
 
The Ratio of Secondary Standard 
 Substance (unit)  
 
 
Output classification HC 
(g/kWh)  NOx 
(g/kWh)  CO 
(g/kWh)  PM 
(g/kWh)  Soot  
(%)  
  
 8kW or more less than 
19kW 1.5 9 5 0.8 40  
 19kW or more less than 
37kW 1.5 8 5 0.8 40  
 37kW or more less than 
75kW 1.3 7 5 0.4 40  
 75kW or more less than 
130kW 1 6 5 0.3 40  
 130kW or more less than 
560kW 1 6 3.5 0.2 40  242  1. The measuring method is according to Specified Procedure for Low-
emission Construction Machines  (October 8, 1991, No.249, issued by The 
Ministry of Construction, Construction and Economic  Bureau, 
Construction Equipment Division) additionally provi ded. 
2.  The soot standard for tunnel construction machi ne is 1/5 or less of the above 
standard.  
 
Low-emission construction machines in attached Tabl es 3 and 4, emissions and 
soot from on-board engines do not exceed the ratio of primary standard or less 
described below  
 
Attached Table 3: Construction Machines for Tunnel 
Machine Type Application 
Drill Jumbo Diesel engine output :30kW or more less  than 260 
kW(40.8PS or more less than 353PS) 
Concrete 
spraying 
machine Diesel engine output :30kW or more less than 260 
kW(40.8PS or more less than 353PS) 
 
Attached Table 4: Construction Machines for General  Construction  
Machine Type Application 
Power 
generators Diesel engine output :7.5kW or more less than 260 
kW(10.2PS or more less than 353PS), 
transportable(including double as machine of weldin g) 
Air 
compressors Diesel engine output :7.5kW or more less than 260 
kW(10.2PS or more less than 353PS), transportable 
Hydraulic units  Diesel engine output :7.5kW or more less than 260 
kW(10.2PS or more less than 353PS), independent wit h 
machine for foundation work  
Rollers Diesel engine output :7.5kW or more less th an 260 
kW(10.2PS or more less than 353PS), Road rollers, 
Tyre rollers, Vibration rollers 
Wheel Cranes Diesel engine output :7.5kW or more le ss than 260 
kW(10.2PS or more less than 353PS), rough terrain 
crane 
  243  
The Ratio of Primary Standard  
Substance 
(unit) 
Output classification HC 
(g/kWh)  NOx 
(g/kWh)  CO 
(g/kWh)  Soot  
(%) 
7.5kW or more less than 15kW  2.4 12.4 5.7 50 
15kW or more less than 30kW 1.9 10.4 5.7 50 
30kW or more less than 272kW  1.3 9.2 5 50 
1. The measuring method is according to Specified Procedure for Low-emission 
Construction Machines  (October 8, 1991, No.249, issued by The Ministry o f 
Construction, Construction and Economic Bureau, Con struction Equipment 
Division) additionally provided. 
2. The soot standard for tunnel construction machin e is 1/5 or less of the above 
standard. 
Notes: In case of using the construction machine which spe cified as a target for Act on Regulation, Etc. 
of Emissions from Non-road Special Motor Vehicles ( Act No. 51 of May 25, 2005), it is necessary to 
use the machine that meets the technological standa rd of this law. 
 
 
Low-noise 
construction 
machines Evaluation Criteria  
Emissions and soot from on-board engines do not exc eed levels in attached Table. 
 
Attached Table. 
       
 Machine Type Machine Output 
(kW) Noise Standard 
(dB)  
 Bulldozers P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P 102 
105 
105  
 Back hoes P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P < 206 
206 ≤ P 99 
104 
106 
106  
 Drag lines 
Clamshells P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P < 206 
206 ≤ P 100 
104 
107 
107  
 Front-end loaders P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P 102 
104 
107  
 Crawler cranes 
Track cranes 
Wheel cranes P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P < 206 
206 ≤ P 100 
103 
107 
107  
 Vibro-hammers  107  244  Hydraulic pile drivers 
Hydraulic steel pipe 
driver/extractors 
Hydraulic pile extractors P < 55 
 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P 98 
 
102 
104  
 Earth augers P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P 100 
104 
107  
 All-casing excavators P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P < 206 
206 ≤ P 100 
104 
105 
107  
 Earth drills P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P 100 
104 
107  
 Concrete breakers  106  
 Load rollers 
Tire rollers 
Vibration rollers P < 55 
55 ≤ P 101 
104  
 Concrete pumps (vehicle) P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P 100 
103 
107  
 Concrete conditioners P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P < 206 
206 ≤ P 99 
103 
106 
107  
 Asphalt finishers P < 55 
55 ≤ P <103 
103 ≤ P 101 
105 
107  
 Concrete cutters  106  
 Air compressors P < 55 
55 ≤ P 101 
105  
 Power generators P < 55 
55 ≤ P 98 
102  
       
 
 245 Table 4: Construction Methods 
Item Type Item Name Evaluation Criteria, etc. 
Effective 
usage of soil 
resulting 
from 
construction Effective 
usage of low 
quality soil Evaluation Criteria 
The method decreases the amount of soil resulting f rom 
construction to be transported off site by usin g clayey low 
quality soil resulting from construction at the sam e construction 
site. 
Recycling 
treatment of 
construction 
sludge Recycling 
treatment of 
construction 
sludge Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Method for reusing construction sludge obtained fro m a 
construct ion sites within the same site by recycling the 
sludge into banking material and treated fluid soil .  
(2)  Liquation of hazardous material such as heavy metal, etc., 
complies with measures against soil contamination ( Law 
No. 53, 2002) and the environmental stan dards for soil 
contamination (Ministry of Environment Notification 
No.46, 1991). 
Recycling 
treatment of 
concrete 
masses Recycling 
treatment of 
concrete 
masses Evaluation Criteria 
Method for reusing concrete masses obtained from a 
construction site within the same site by recycling the concrete 
masses into concrete or aggregate. 
 
Pavement 
(surface) Road surface 
recycling 
method Evaluation Criteria 
Method for replacing the road surface on site or  the vicinity of a 
site concerned by pulverizing the existing asphalt pavement, 
adding new asphalt compound or additives as needed,  and 
mixing and compacting. 
Pavement 
(roadbed) Roadbed 
recycling 
method Evaluation Criteria 
Method for replacing the road surface on site by pu lverizing and 
mixing the existing roadbed a nd asphalt or concrete pavement, 
and stabilizing the resulting material. 
Notes: To be used on roads with the thickness of the layer  of an asphalt mixture of 10cm or 
less. 
 
Slope surface 
greening 
method Slope surface 
greening 
method using 
thinning 
wood or soil 
obtained 
from 
construction 
process Evaluation Criteria 
Method for effectively using thinning wood or soil obtained 
from construction process at a construction site wi thin the same 
site. However, the amount used which added together  felling 
material an d the construction generating ground should occupy 
70% or more by the capacity ratio of the growth base ma terial 
except the water added there. 
Sheathing 
method Soil cement 
pillar line 
wall method Evaluation Criteria 
The construction method to which the mud that generates the 
mud partially of the cement system solidification m edicine by 
reducing the injection rate of recycling or the cem ent system 246 of reducing 
mad solidification medicine along with construction can  be 
decreased. 
Notes: Soil cement pillar line wall method of mud reducing  in the evaluation criteria of this 
section is to be used for temporary construction. 
 
Table 5: Other 
Item Type Item Name  Evaluation Criteria, etc. 
High 
performance 
paving 
material Porous 
pavement Evaluation Criteria 
Paving m aterial that is capable of allowing rain water to p ermeate 
through the road surface to be discarded to drain p ipes, and 
reducing traffic noise. 
Notes: To be used when reduction of traffic noise is neede d. 
 
High 
performance 
paving 
material Permeable 
pavement Evaluation Criteria 
Paving material that is capable of allowing rain wa ter to permeate 
through the road surface. 
Notes: To be used on roads without automobile traffic, suc h as pedestrian paths that require 
rainwater to permeate through the surface. 
 
Greening of 
rooftops Greening 
of rooftops  Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Healthy growth of plants as well a bed for growth o f plants. 
(2)  Contributes to improvement of the improvements by 
alleviating heat island phenomenon, etc. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Uses plants suited for rooftops. 
(2)  Structure takes into consideration the use of rain water for 
sprinklers, as well as the securing of water and dr ainage for the 
plant beds. 
Notes: To be placed on the roof of buildings, etc. 
  247  22. Services  
22-1. Energy Conservation Diagnosis  
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Energy 
conservation 
diagnosis  Evaluation Criteria  
Persons with a technical qualification listed in Ta ble 1, or persons 
acknowledged to have skills equivalent to such qual ification, 
investigate and analyze the running status, operati onal manner and 
the amount of the energy use of equipment such as p ublic office 
buildings. Additionally, based on the results of th ose investigation 
and analysis, proposal to improve energy conservati on, are made, 
such as introducing new equipment or facilities, re furbishment,   
operational improvement and energy management syste m or 
management method, including those listed in Table 2  
Note:  
Proposals for setting various goals necessary for i mplementing energy management at the 
government building concerned are included in the e nergy management method.  
 
Table 1  
First class registered architects  
First class registered construction execution manag ing engineers  
First class registered electrical engineering execu tion managing engineers  
First class registered piping works execution manag ing engineers  
Engineers (construction, electrical/computer, mecha nical, sanitation, environmental)  
Energy management professionals  
Building engineers  
Electrical chief engineer  
 
Table 2  
History of energy consumption, actual lighting, hea ting, cooling, and water use costs, 
and state of facility maintenance and operation ove r the past 3 years.  
Performances or estimates of energy consumption by the facility and equipment, with 
the basis for the estimates.  
Estimates of the amount of energy conservation by t he installation of new facilities and 
equipment, and refurbishment, with the basis of est imates.  
Estimates of the amount of energy conservation by t he operational improvement items, 
with the basis of estimates.  
Estimated funds necessary for introduction of new e quipment with the basis for the 
estimates.  
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline  
Number of energy conservation diagnosis contracts t o be procured for the fiscal year.  
Notes: facilities which are eligible to undergo thi s diagnosis shall be concretely defined each 
fiscal year.  
  248  22-2. Printing  
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Printing  Evaluation Criteria  
<Common Criteria>  
(1)  Paper that conforms to the evaluation criteria for printing paper 
(refer to Paper  section). Cover page of bounded material will 
be excluded and if virgin pulp is used as the raw m aterial, the 
pulpwood used is to be in compliance with the regul ations 
concerning forestry in its country or geographical area of origin. 
This does not apply to virgin pulp manufactured wit h lumber 
from thinning, or virgin pulp manufactured by using  recycled 
wood pieces obtained from plywood or lumber factori es, 
material left over from forestry, or lumber with a small 
diameter.  
(2)  Material that will interfere with the recycle for p aper indicated 
in Table 1 Rank B, C and D are not used. When they must be 
used for the usage and purpose of the printed mater ial, it is 
necessary to note the part in which the material is  used as well 
as method of discarding or recycling.  
(3)  Recyclability is indicated on the printed material.  
(4)  At the each stage of work the printing, the measure s for the 
environmental consideration shown in Table 2 shall be taken.  
 
<Individual Criteria>  
(1)  Offset Printing  
a.  Inks contain biomass and inks whose aromatic compou nds 
are less than 1% are used.  
b.  Chemical safety of inks is confirmed.  
 
 Digital Printing  
a.  As for xerographic (Limited to dry toner method.), the toner 
is used that meets the evaluation criteria lies che mical 
safety of the toner cartridge (Refer to “Toner cart ridge”).  
b.  As for xerographic (Limited to wet toner method.) a nd as 
for inkjet method, chemical safety of toner and ink s is 
confirmed.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  Considering the usage and the purpose of printed ma tter, it is 
lightened as much as possible.  
(2)  Waste products are to be minimized through the prom otion of 
digitization (employment of DTP, CTP, and DDCP meth ods, 
etc.).  
(3)  Control of volatile organic material (VOC) is taken  into 
consideration.  
(4)  Materials and parts such as used ink can, container s of inks or 
toners, and ink photosensitive drums use again or w ill be 
recycled.  249 (5)  Use of the material that may produce harmful materi al for   
surface processing of cover page, etc. of printed m atter, should 
be limited as much as possible. 
(6)  If virgin pulp is used as the raw material, the pul pwood used is 
to be in compliance with the regulations concerning  forestry in 
its country or geographical area of origin. This do es not apply 
to virgin pulp manufactured with lumber from thinni ng, or 
virgin pulp manufactured by using recycled wood pie ces 
obtained from plywood or lumber factories, material  left over 
from forestry, or lumber with a small diameter. 
(7)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take 
into account ease of recycling and reduced environm ental 
impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1.  Printing  under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section denotes the 
printing service for production of report documents , posters, flyers and pamphlets, it 
doesn't apply when procuring it as other category i tems such as stationary.  However, 
if it is purchased as other category items, effort must be made to purchase which meet 
the evaluation criteria of printing section. 
2.  Offset printing  is the printing method of  shifting the printing inks to printing plate 
and re-shifting the inks to papers etc. 
3.  Digital printing  is the printing method of without printing plate b y electrophotography 
method or inkjet method. 
4.  Recyclability noted in Evaluation Criteria <Common Criteria>  (2) and (3) should be 
listed in accordance with “Guidelines for Producing  Recyclable Printed Matter” 
created by Paper Recycling Promotion Center and ope rated by Japan Federation of 
Printing Industries. However, it does not apply if recyclability ranking test for used 
paper is not provided in the material used. 
5.  Recyclability  in Evaluation Criteria <Common Criteria> (3) shoul d be indicated as 
follows. However, it does not apply to the printed matter not to assume to recycle, for 
instance, in the case of preserves or keeps it for a long term. Recyclability Ranking 
Test for used paper and method of display should ta ke into account the investigation 
results of “Guidelines for Producing Recyclable Pri nted Matter” and make alterations 
as needed.  
a.  When only material from rank A is used, May be recycled into printing paper  
must be indicated. 
b.  When only material from rank A or B is used (with t he exception of (1)), May be 
recycled into cardboard  must be indicated. 
c.  When material from ranks C or D is used, Unsuitable materials to recycling are 
used.  
In addition, calendars bound and processed, if the binding part and the body paper 
can be separated, the recycling suitability should be displayed for each sheet of 
the body paper. 
6.  Each procurement organization must confirm material  used with the Material 
Confirmation Sheet shown in Table 3. It is consider ed that it might be preferable to do 
the luster lamination etc. for long-term use and th e strength reinforcement etc. of 
printed matter. Select materials suitable for use a ppropriately. 250 7.  Inks contain  biomass refers to the proportion of biomass (the proportion  of the content 
of renewable organic raw materials (including plant -derived oils and excluding fossil 
resources)) and the proportion of petroleum-based s olvents (to the ink). The ratio of the 
content of the solvent contained in petroleum (foss il fuel) as a raw material) satisfies 
the requirements specified in the following table f or each type of ink. UV inks contain 
less than 3% of VOC components (volatile organic co mpounds classified as "highly 
volatile organic compounds" and "volatile organic c ompounds" in the classification of 
chemical substances of the World Health Organizatio n) and are recyclable. Judgment 
criteria <Individual matters> Pair criteria shall b e deemed to be the type UV ink.  
 
Ink types Ratio of biomass 
content Ratio of the 
solvent contained 
in petroleum 
Sheet-fed printing ink 30% or more 30% or less 
Offset printing ink for rotary 
press 20% or more 45% or less 
Gold ink （Sheet-fed ink / offset 
printing ink for rotary ） 10% or more 25% or less 
Journal ink （Non heat offset ink 
for rotary ） 30% or more 30% or less 
Notes: 
1. Ink includes OP varnish and medium. 
2. For oil-based business foam inks, apply the shee t-fed ink standard. 
 
8.  Aromatic compounds  denote aromatic hydrocarbon compounds detected whe n 
applying component testing method of petroleum prod ucts determined by JIS K2536. 
9.  Green Standards for Off-set Printing  and Green Printing Qualification System  by 
Japan Federation of Printing Industries should be r eferenced for Evaluation Criteria 
<Common Criteria> (4), Factors for Consideration (2 ) ,(3), (4) and (5). 
10. Each procurement organization must confirm the execution of standard of print at each 
stage of work, referring check list described as Ta ble 4, if necessary. 
11.  Chemical safety  of Evaluation Criteria <Individual Criteria> (1) b . denotes that fulfill 
the following a. and c. Chemical safety  of Evaluation Criteria < Individual Criteria> 
(2) b. denotes that fulfill the following a. or b. and c. 
a.  Comply with the Japan Printing Ink Maker’s Associat ion’s Self-
imposed Controls on Printing Ink (Negative List Control) (revision on 
September, 2011). 
b.The standard content rate of specified chemical s ubstances denotes the 
standard rate provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking f or presence of the 
specific chemical substances for electrical and ele ctronic equipment) 
Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified chemical substance s, chemical 
element symbol, substances applicable for calculati on, and standard 
content rate). Items for which content rate exceedi ng the standard is 
allowed are to be determined in accordance with App endix B of the 
above JIS. 
c.  Identifying the target substances of Act on Confirm ation, etc. of 
Release Amounts of Specific Chemical Substances in the Environment 251 and Promotion of Improvements to the Management The reof (Act No. 
86 of 1999) (It is necessary to have SDS (Safety Da ta Sheet).). 
12.  Each procurement organization must try to estimate the necessary number or amount 
of printed matter properly so as not to become an e xcessive order.  
13.  Each procurement organization shall make digital ca libration without using actual 
machine calibration equipment when proofreading pri nted matter so as to control VOC 
emissions as much as possible. 
14. Confirmation of the legality and the sustainabi lity of the forest where paper originates 
from is to be conducted in accordance with the Fore st Agency’s “Guideline for 
Verification on Legality and Sustainability of Wood  and Wood Products (February 15, 
2006).” In addition, certification system of forest , timber, etc. by prefectures etc. can 
be utilized for confirmation of legality. 252 Table 1: Recyclability Ranking Test for Used Paper 
 Rank A Rank B Rank C Rank D 
Will not 
interfere when 
recycling into 
paper or 
cardboard Will interfere 
when recycling 
into paper, but 
will not interfere 
when recycling 
into cardboard Will interfere 
when recycling 
into paper or 
cardboard Cannot be 
recycled into 
paper or 
cardboard as 
even small 
amounts cannot 
be removed 
(1)Paper Regular paper 
Construction 
paper, coated 
paper, high 
quality paper, 
medium quality 
paper, straw 
paper    
Processed 
paper 
Colored paper 
(Rank A), fancy 
paper (Rank A) 
Resin permeated 
paper (water 
soluble) Processed 
paper 
Colored paper 
(Rank B), fancy 
paper (Rank B), 
paper coated 
with resin such 
as polyethylene, 
etc., paper 
laminated with 
resin such as 
polyethylene, 
glassine paper, 
India paper Processed 
paper 
Colored paper 
(Rank C), fancy 
paper (Rank C) 
resin permeated 
paper (excluding 
water soluble 
types), sulfate 
(parchment) 
paper, tarpaulin 
paper, wax 
paper, 
cellophane, 
synthesized 
paper, carbon 
paper, carbon-
less paper, 
thermal paper, 
solderless paper Processed 
paper 
Sublimation 
transfer paper, 
thermal foam 
paper, aromatic 
paper 
(2) Inks Regular inks 
Relief printing 
inks, flat 
printing inks 
(offset printing 
inks), gravure 
ink solvent, 
flexo-ink 
solvent, screen 
inks Regular inks 
Water based 
gravure ink, 
water based 
flexo-ink   
Specialty inks Specialty inks Specialty inks Specia lty inks 253 Recycle-ready 
UV ink ☆, Silver 
and gold ink for 
offset printing, 
pearl ink, OCR 
ink (oil-based) UV ink, silver 
and gold ink for 
gravure printing, 
OCR UV ink, 
EB ink, 
fluorescent ink Thermal ink, 
low sensitivity 
ink, magnetic 
ink Sublimating ink, 
foam ink, 
aromatic ink 
Specialty 
processing 
OP varnish    
 Digital Printing 
Inks 
Recycle- 
ready Dry Toner 
☆ Digital Printing 
Inks 
 Dry Toner   
(3) 
Processing 
material Binding 
Processing  
Binding wire, 
stapler, etc.; fine 
retardant EV A 
hot melt ☆; PUR 
hot melt ☆; 
water based glue  Binding 
Processing  
Binding thread, 
EV A hot melt Binding 
Processing 
Cross 
coating(cloth 
cross, paper 
cross)  
Surface 
processing 
Glossy coat 
(varnished, press 
coating) Surface 
processing 
Glossy 
laminating (PP 
coating) ; UV 
coating; UV 
laminating; foil 
coating   
Other 
processing 
Recycle-ready 
seals (all 
dissolve 
adhesive paper) 
☆ Other 
processing 
Seals (with the 
exception of 
recycle-ready 
types) Other 
processing 
Three 
dimensional 
printed material 
(lenticular lens 
used)  
(4) Others   Foreign 
substance  
Adhesive tape 
(recycle-ready 
type) Foreign 
substance  
Stone, glass, 
metal (excluding 
binding stapler, 
metal, etc.), 
sand, wood 
chips, plastic, 
cloth, building 
material Foreign 
substance  
Fragrant 
accessories 
(deodorant, 
perfume, 
lipstick, etc.) 254 (gypsum board, 
etc.), non-woven 
cloth, adhesive 
tape (excluding 
recycle-ready 
types) 
Notes: 
1.  Each organization must confirm publishing in data b ase of “Producing Recyclable 
Printed Matter” operated by Japan Federation of Pri nting Industries, to use materials 
marked “ ☆” (Fi ne retardant EV A hot melt; PUR hot melt Recycle -ready UV ink, 
Recycle-ready seals, Recycle-ready Dry Toner). 
2.  Each organization must confirm the recycling aptitu de of each product about 
materials marked “*” (colored paper and fancy paper ), published by “The Ministry 
of the Environment Law on Promoting Green Purchasing. net. ” 
 
 255 Table 2: Environmental Consideration Item and Crite ria Relating Offset and Digital  
Printing at Each Process 
Process Item Criteria 
Proofing 
process Digitization The process digitization ratio (adopti on of DTP) is 
50% or more. 
Silver recovery from 
waste liquid and plate-
making film In the process to use plate-making film, silver is 
recovered from waste liquid and plate-making film. 
Plate 
process Reuse or recycling of 
printing plates Printing plates (of aluminum base material) are reu se 
or recycled. 
Printing 
process Offset VOC 
emission 
suppressing 
 Take one of the following measures. 
・ Waterless printing system is introduced. 
・ Damping water circulation system is introduced. 
・ To introduce environmentally friendly 
dampening water that contributes to measures for 
VOC. 
・ Automatic cloth washing is introduced or in case 
of automatic liquid washing, circulation system 
is introduced. 
・ To introduce environmentally friendly detergents 
contribute to measures for VOC. 
・ VOC emission suppressing measures such as 
placing covers to discarded waste-cloths 
containers and detergent containers are taken. 
In the case of hot air drying printing in rotary 
presswork, VOC emission treatment equipment is 
installed and properly operated and managed. 
Recycling for 
papermaking 
stock The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste sheet an d 
remain sheet generated from the presswork) to 
papermaking stock shall be 80% or more. 
Digital Decrease of 
negative 
environmental 
impact of the 
printing 
machine The activity of conservation of energy is taken suc h 
as use of power-saving feature and power off when 
unused. 
Recycling for 
papermaking 
stock The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste sheet an d 
remain sheet generated from printing process) to 
papermaking stock shall be 80% or more. 
Surface 
treatment  VOC emission 
suppressing Alcohols are used at the concentration less than 30 %. 
Recycling for 
papermaking stock The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste sheet, 
remain sheet and remain film generated from gloss 
coating process) to papermaking stock shall be 80% 
or more. 256 Binding 
treatment  Suppress noise and 
vibrations Approaches are made to suppress noise and 
vibrations such as prohibiting windows and doors 
from being kept open, etc. 
Recycling for 
papermaking stock The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste sheet 
generated from binding treatment process) to 
papermaking stock shall be 70% or more. 
Notes: 
1.  This criteria is assumed the one applied to the oth er party does the main process of the 
print service regardless of the main contractor or the subcontract of the print service, 
and not applied to the other party who does a part of process of the print service that 
relates to the offset printing or digital printing.  
2.  In proofing process, it only has to fill either of Digitalization or Silver recovery from 
the waste liquid and the make-up film . 
3.  Silver recovery in proofing process indicates having a silver colle ction system or hand 
it over to the recycling trader and the waste colle ction trader who has adopted the silver 
collection system. It is necessary to execute the s ilver recovery from the waste liquid 
and the plate-making film, exclude an impossible ca se technically. 
4.  It is necessary to execute the printing plates reus e or recycling (recycling is included 
which the printing plates while keeping the quality  and the reproducing to the printing 
plates again.) in plate process, exclude an impossi ble case technically. 
5.  Environmentally friendly dampening water and enviro nmentally friendly detergents in 
offset generation of VOC in the offset printing pro cess were certified in the Green 
Printing Equipment Certification System  operated by the Japan Printing Industry 
Association. For the etchant (dampening water) and detergent can refer to the certified 
product. 
6.  It is considered as meeting the evaluation criteria  if making and operating the .manual 
etc., to execute measures concerned about VOC emission  in offset printing process, 
installation of VOC processing equipment for coveri ng waste clogs container and 
washing agent container, etc. , appropriate operati on management for rotary printing 
process decrease of negative environmental impact of the pr inting machin e in digital 
printing process and suppress noise and vibrations  in binding treatment process. 
7.  Recycling to the papermaking stock etc.  in digital printing process and surface 
treatment process includes recycling (processing to  RPF and energy recovery etc.) other 
than recycling for papermaking stock etc.  
 257 Table 3: Material Confirmation Sheet (sample) 
Date: 
To: 
XYZ Company  
Subject: 
Material Confirmation Sheet  
Printing material Used  Recyclability 
ranking Category Manufacturer, 
product name Note 
Paper Text  X A High quality 
paper xx paper 
manufacturing  
Front 
cover  X A Construction 
paper xx paper 
manufacturing  
Back 
cover X A High quality 
paper xx paper 
manufacturing  
Covering 
material      
      
      
Ink X A Flat printing 
ink xx ink 
company  
     
     
     
Processing  Binding 
processing  
 X A PUR Hot 
melt    
Surface 
processing  X A OP varnish xx chemicals  
Other 
processing       
Others      
     
     
     
↓ 
Recycling procedures Evaluation 
Only material from rank A 
is used May be recycled into 
printing paper  X 
Only material from ranks A 
and B are used May be recycled into 
cardboard   
Material from ranks C or D 
are used Unsuitable materials to 
recycling are used   
 
Notes:   258 1.  Refer to latest “Guidelines for Producing Recyclabl e Printed Matter, published in 
Producing Recyclable Printed Matter,” when filled i n Material Confirmation Sheet 
about the printing material.  
2.  In case of using materials such as paper and ink th at recyclability ranking test for used 
paper is not provided, fill out "Outside the rank" in the column of recyclability 
ranking.  
3.  This sheet form can be changed according to the nec essity for the inquiry of content 
and the necessity for stamps, etc. 
 
 259  Table 4 : Environmental Consideration Checklist for  Offset Printing Process (sample)  
Date:  
To: 
XYZ Company  
Environmental Consideration Checklist for Offset Pr inting Process  
Process  Achievement  Standard (Content of demand) 
Proofing 
process  Yes ／No  (1) Meet the one of the following.  
A: The process digitization ratio (adoption 
of DTP) is 50% or more.  
B: In the process to use plate-making film, 
silver is recovered from waste liquid and 
plate-making film. 
Plate 
process  Yes ／No  (2) Printing plates (of aluminum base material) 
are reuse or recycled. 
Printing 
process  Offset  Yes ／No   VOC emission suppressing measures such 
as introducing a waterless printing system, 
introducing a dampening water circulation 
system, introducing environmentally 
friendly dampening water, introducing 
automatic cloth cleaning, in case of 
automatic liquid cleaning, circulation system 
has introduced, introducing environmentally 
friendly cleaning agents,  placing covers to 
discarded waste-cloths containers and 
detergent containers are taken.  
Yes ／No  (4) In the case of hot air drying printing in 
rotary presswork, VOC emission treatment 
equipment is installed and properly operated 
and managed. 
Yes ／No  (5) The recycling ratio of spoilage (waste sheet 
and remain sheet generated from the 
presswork) to papermaking stock shall be 
80% or more. 
Digital  Yes ／No  (6) The activity of conservation of energy is 
taken such as use of power-saving feature 
and power-off when unused.  
Yes ／No  (7) The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste 
sheet and remain sheet generated from 
printing process) to papermaking stock shall 
be 80% or more. 
Surface 
processing  Yes ／No  (8) Alcohols are used at the concentration less 
than 30%. 
Yes ／No  (9) As an approach for promoting recycling, 
the recycle ratio of waste sheets, etc. (waste 
sheet, remain sheet and remain film 
generated from gloss coating process) to 
recycled paper, etc. is 80% or more. 260 Binding 
processing 
 Yes ／No (10) Approaches are made to suppress noise 
and vibrations such as prohibiting windows 
and doors from being kept open, etc. 
Yes ／No (11) The recycle ratio of spoilage, etc. (waste 
sheet generated from binding treatment 
process) to papermaking stock shall be 70% 
or more. 
 
Notes:  This sheet form can be changed according to the ne cessity for the inquiry of content and 
the necessity for stamps, etc. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of printing jobs that meet the criteria to the number of printing jobs to be 
procured (including those that are ordered as a par t of other services such as commissions to 
outside groups) in the fiscal year. 
  261  22-3. Cafeteria  
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Cafeteria  Evaluation Criteria  
Cafeteria operating under commission in a governmen t building or its 
grounds fulfills the criteria below:  
(1)  Cafeteria practices appropriate measures for recycl e and reuse including 
the reduction in type and volume of garbage.  
(2)  Dishes used are capable of repeated use.  
(3)  Do not use single-use plastic containers, etc. in p roviding food and drink 
in the cafeteria. However, this item shall not appl y in cases where it 
disrupts the eating and drinking of the user, and w hen there is no 
alternative means.  
(4)  To grasp the amount of food waste emission, formula te plans and setting 
of goals for suppressing occurrence and recycling.  
(5)  When the category of industry falls under in which the target value of 
suppression of food waste, etc. is set, the amount generated per unit food 
waste, etc., shall be less than its target value.  
(6)  Ministerial Ordinance that specifies matters that s hould be standards for 
food-related business operators to promote recyclin g and recycling of 
food circulation resources (Ministry of Finance, Ministry of Health,  
Labor and Welfare, Ministry of Agriculture, Forestr y and Fisheries, 
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry, Ministry o f Land, 
Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism, Ministry of the Environment 
Ordinance No.4, hereinafter referred to as Minister ial ordinance of 
Judgment Standards) or formulate plans to achieve t he target value for 
the target year.  
(7)  To make it possible to adjust the amount of food an d drink to be 
provided or to reduce food loss such as leftover fo ods by providing a 
takeaway container when asked by consumers.  
(8)  In order to reduce leftovers of food and drink, cal ls and enlightenment, 
etc. to the user are carried out by using postings in the cafeteria.  
(9)  To grasp the amount of energy used (electricity, ga s, etc.) and water 
usage amount accompanying the operation of the cafe teria, and to take 
measures for energy conservation and water conserva tion.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  Garbage that has been treated in a disposal, etc. s hall be used as 
fertilizer, livestock feed, or converted into energ y.  
(2)  Biodegradable bags and draining nets, if used, are composted with 
garbage.  
(3)  Ingredients used in cafeteria are the one contribut ing to the promotion 
of utilization of the agriculture, forestry and fis hery products in the 
region.   
(4)  Sustainable raw materials are used if plant oils an d fats are used as raw 
materials of processed foods and chemical products used in the 
cafeteria.  
(5)  Dishes shall be used that can be used again by mend ing, or for which 
the reworked material are used.  262 (6)  Return and collect of the containers and packaging are executed to re-
use. 
(7)  Take measures for reduction of environmental impact  associated with 
transportation of foodstuffs, etc. 
Notes: 
1. Evaluation criteria listed here is to be applied  when ordering food and drinks to be used 
for conferences, etc., from cafeterias, coffee shop s, etc. that is operating under a 
commission agreement in the government buildings an d their sites. 
2. Recycling, etc.  of the evaluation criteria (4) and (6) refer to re cycling etc. based on the 
Law Concerning the Promotion of Recycling Food Cycl ical Resources (Act No. 116 
of 2000, hereinafter referred to as the Food Recycling Law ). 
3. Suppression of the occurrence of food waste etc. of the evaluation criteria (4) and (5) 
refer to suppression of the occurrence of food wast e etc. based on the Ministerial 
Ordinance of Judgment Standards). 
4. With regard to evaluation criteria (5), in cases  where it does not fall under the food 
waste generation large volume generation business o perator under the Food Recycling 
Law, the amount of food waste generated per unit is  below the target value or achieves 
the target value, regarded as conforming by formula ting a voluntary plan to do. 
5. With regard to evaluation criteria (7), when the  cafeteria is asked to take out foods from 
the customer, provide container after adequately ex plaining hygiene precautions, such 
as food poisoning risks and handling methods. In ad dition, if the high risk of food 
poisoning etc., adjust amount of food not to custom er’s request and make efforts to 
avoid as much residue as possible, if items such as  raw or half-raw foods or when the 
outside temperature is high in midsummer. 
6.  For evaluation criteria (9), it is applied when  it is possible to grasp the energy usage 
amount and water usage amount accompanying the cafe teria operation. 
7. Utilization the of the agriculture, forestry and  fishery products in the region in 
Factors for consideration (3) refers to consume agr iculture, forestry and fishery 
products produced in domestic region and to consume  agriculture, forestry and fishery 
products produced in  other region when the supply of those are insuffici ent. It is based 
on the outline of Article 25 of Law concerning crea tion of new business such as 
agriculture and forestry fishermen utilizing region al resource and promotion of 
utilization of agriculture, forestry and fishery pr oducts in the region (Law No.67, 2010). 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
The number of cafeteria meeting the criteria in the  fiscal year. 
  263  22-4. Recapped Automobile Tires  
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Recapped 
automobile 
tires  Evaluation Criteria  
Fulfills one of the following:  
(1)  Automobile tire that has ended its first life due t o wear is restored by 
replacing the surface rubber material so that it ma y be used for a 
second life.  
(2)  Tire that can be cutting tread again (Regroovable) without recapped.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  Extended life of the item should be accounted for b y the use of radial 
tires, etc.  
(2)  Noise reduction during operation is taken into acco unt.  
(3)  (3)Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as poss ible and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
Notes:  
1.  Recapped automobile tires  under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section 
refers to “tires for small trucks” and “tires for t rucks and busses,” as well as “tires for 
industrial automobiles” and “tires for construction  automobiles,”  
2.  Recapped automobile tires that meet the standard of  JIS K 6329 (Retreaded tires) fills 
Evaluation Criteria (1).  
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline  
The number of recapped automobile tires to be purch ased in the fiscal year (including those 
that are purchased as a part of automobile maintena nce).  
  264  22-5. Automobile Maintenance  
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Automobile 
maintenance  Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Automobile recycled parts (refers to reuse parts (c ommercial 
automobile parts removed from a car that can no lon ger be used for its 
original purpose, certified for quality, and cleane d), or rebuilt parts 
(commercial automobile parts removed from a car tha t can no longer 
be used for its original purpose, worn or degenerat ed parts replaced and 
rebuilt, certified for quality, and cleaned)) are u sed.  
(2)  When cleaning the engine, the following are fulfill ed: 
a.  The cleaning process decreases material that causes  environmental 
pollution (hydrocarbon and carbon monoxide) by 20% or more.  
Cleaning of the engine should be performed on autom obiles whose 
hydrocarbon and carbon monoxide levels as determine d by 
measuring instruments of respective material after performing the 
typical maintenance required for the prevention of environmental 
emission prevention exceed those listed category-wi se in Table.  
b.  Effect of the evaluation criteria is assessed immed iately after the 
engine is cleaned, as well as at the designated twe lve month 
inspection. A system is set up so that a service th at is free of charge 
is available when the cleaning process does not dec rease 
aforementioned material by 20% or more when engine is cleaned 
on automobiles on which the necessary maintenance h as been 
adequately performed.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
(1)  Measures are in place for the collection and compil ation of information 
concerning the reduction of environmental load thro ugh engine 
cleaning. Detailed information concerning effects o n the reduction of 
environmental through engine cleaning and its cost are actively 
provided. Relevant information is open to public.  
(2)  Effort is made for recycling of long life coolant.  
(3)  Concerning automobile maintenance, efforts are made  for the adequate 
use of resources including energy and solvent; cons ideration is made 
for the reduction of environmental load.  
(4)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal.  
Notes:  
1.  Evaluation criteria (1) in this section refers to p rocedures referred to automobile 
maintenance businesses that involves replacement of  parts (excluding replacement of 
expendable parts), including regular inspection, an d automobile maintenance required 
as a result of a breakdown or an accident.  
2.  Automobile  under consideration refers to passenger cars, smal l-size cars, and mini-size 
cars (but does not include motorcycles).  
3.  When automobile parts are not available or difficul t to obtain, maintenance using new 
parts will be considered in this section.  265 4.  Engine cleaning  in Evaluation Criteria (2) refers to a service com missioned to 
automobile maintenance company, etc. for a regular inspection and maintenance, etc. 
that includes assessment using instruments for meas uring hydrocarbon and carbon 
monoxide levels. In cases where levels exceed the c riteria listed in Table, engine 
combustion room will be cleaned in order to remove carbon, sludge, etc. that have 
accumulated inside.  
5.  Evaluation Criteria (2) applies to regular automobi les, small-sized automobiles, and 
light automobiles (excluding those with two cycle e ngines) that use gasoline as its fuel.  
6.  Criteria for gas emission that requires engine clea ning noted in Evaluation Criteria (2) 
must comply with allowable limit of automobile gas emission based on environmental 
pollution prevention guideline (Ministry of the Env ironment Notification No.1, January 
21, 1974).  
7.  A system is in place to accommodate requests for ab ove tasks from automobile 
maintenance businesses and automobile dealers that do not perform engine cleaning.  
 
 
Table: Criteria for Gas Emission that Requires Engi ne Cleaning 
Type of Automobile Carbon Monoxide (CO) Hydrocarbon  (HC) 
Regular Automobiles, 
Small-Sized Automobiles 1% 300ppm 
Light Automobiles  2% 500ppm 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of automobile maintenances that  meet the criteria to the number of 
Automobile Maintenances conducted in the fiscal yea r. 
  266  22-6. Management of Government Office Buildings, et c.  
 Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Management of 
government 
office buildings  
 Evaluation Criteria  
(1)  Products used for management of government office b uildings, when 
applicable to the designated procurement items, ful fill the evaluation 
criteria of each items.  
(2)  To rationalize energy use based on management stand ards concerning 
facilities, measurement and recording, maintenance and inspection of 
facilities related to from the following a to d.  
a. Air conditioning equipment, ventilation equipmen t  
b. Boiler equipment, hot water equipment  
c. Lighting equipment, elevator, power plant  
d. Receiving and transforming equipment  
(3)  Specify plans for energy conservation at the facili ty, select energy 
conservation measures to be implemented, and report  the 
implementation status and countermeasure effect to the facility 
manager on a monthly basis based on the implementat ion standard etc., 
of the measures. Also, based on the implementation results of the 
countermeasures, review necessary energy saving mea sures.  
(4)  In stationed management, monthly reports are provid ed to the facility 
manager on the usage of energy and water, and amoun t of waste 
material discharged. When a substantial increase is  observed when 
compared to the previous month or the same month of  the previous 
year, the measures listed below are proposed to the  facility manager. 
When a substantial decrease is observed, the cause of the decrease is 
examined.  
a.  In the case of increase in energy usage, analyze th e cause of the 
increase, and put in place appropriate energy savin g measures that 
takes into account the analysis (includes energy sa ving measures 
that are conducted in cooperation with facility use rs). 
b.  In the case of increase in water usage, analyze the  cause of the 
increase, and put in place appropriate energy savin g measures that 
take into account the analysis (includes water savi ng measures that 
are conducted in cooperation with facility users).  
c.  In the case of increase in discharge of waste mater ial, analyze the 
cause of the increase and put into place appropriat e measures for 
decreasing waste material and for material saving ( includes 
measures for decreasing waste material and for mate rial saving that 
are conducted in cooperation with facility users).  
(5)  In non-stationed management, when substantial incre ase in energy 
consumption, water consumption and amount of discha rge in waste 
material are observed compared to the previous mont h or the same 
month of the previous year, analysis of its cause i s performed and 
measures to decrease are proposed in cooperation wi th the facility 
manager. When a substantial decrease is observed, t he cause of the 
decrease is examined.  267 (6)  For a building that conducted energy conservation d iagnosis, measures 
to improve the operation of facilities and equipmen t etc., are being 
taken based on the results. 
(7)  For facilities installing energy management system,  measures are taken 
to visualize energy consumption and measures to imp rove energy 
consumption efficiency based on the analysis result  of the data.  
(8)  When the maintenance of air conditioning and heatin g installation are 
included in the management of government office bui ldings, 
appropriate measures for prevention of chlorofluoro carbon leakage of 
chlorofluorocarbon are made. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Being considerate to building environmental health management 
standards etc. based on  Act on Maintenance of Sanitation in Buildings 
(Act No. 20 of 1970). 
(2)   An appropriate and effective methods for energy ef ficiency in 
government buildings and measures to contribute to leveling of demand 
for electricity are to be conducted in consideratio n of “Guidelines for 
Companies in Relation to the measures to contribute  to leveling of 
demand for electricity in Factories” (No.271 of the  Ministry of 
Economy, Trade and Industry notification in 2013), based on the 
Regulations for the Efficient Use of Energy (Act No .49 of 1979), in 
consideration of Criteria for Sanitation Management  of Architectural 
Environment, etc. based on Architectural Sanitation  Law. 
(3)  To reduce greenhouse gas emissions,  
based on analyzing and evaluating of energy use, et c. in detail, 
appropriately managing and operating facilities, eq uipment, etc. and 
systems.  
(4)  Efforts should be made to utilize various tools for  management and 
evaluation in the analysis and evaluation of energy  management and 
use in facilities. 
(5)  Personnel with expertise are placed involved in ene rgy conservation, 
resource saving, waste emission control, etc. neces sary for government 
building management, and continuous implementation of education 
and training, etc. to train engineers will be condu cted.  
(6)  When considerable increase compared to the previous  month is 
identified upon tallying the collected garbage, the  causes are to be 
identified and measures are to be proposed. 
Notes: 
1.  Stationed management  refers to a system of management where personnel t hat 
performs the operation, surveillance, and daily ins pection and maintenance, etc. is 
stationed on site. 
2.  Evaluation Criteria (2) to (5) for Government Build ing Management should be applied 
to the case where the scope of the business subject  to the contract includes the contents 
related to the criteria. 
3.  The management standards on evaluation criteria (2)  concerning government building 
management are based on Act on the Rational Use of Energy. (Law No. 49 of 1947) 
shown in Attachment 1, with reference of “The stand ard of judgement for a business 268 operator concerning the rational use of energy in f actories, etc. (Notification No. 66 of 
the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry)", and shall decide upon consultation with 
the facility manager as necessary. 
4.  The plan concerning energy conservation at the faci lity in accordance with Evaluation 
Criteria (3) for Government Building Management sha ll be included targets for energy 
conservation, energy saving measures to be implemen ted and promotion system, etc. 
with an understanding of the management status of t he facility, size of buildings, usage 
of facilities and machines in the building, in cons ultation with the facility manager. In 
addition, energy saving measures to be implemented (including the implementation 
standards concerning the measures) shall be selecte d with reference to Appendix Table 
2. 
5.  Building users refers to people who work in or visit the building.  
6.  Evaluation Criteria (2), (3) and (4) for Government  Building Management shall not 
include renovation of the facility, or the renewal or introduction of large scaled facilities 
and equipment. 
7.   Energy Conservation Diagnosis  noted in Evaluation Criteria (6) referred to “22-1  
Energy Conservation Diagnosis” section in this Basi c Policy. 
8.  Energy Management system  noted in Evaluation Criteria (7) referred to “19 F acilities” 
section Energy Management System noted in this Basi c Policy. 
9.  Fluorocarbons  are defined as the Fluorocarbons prescribed in Art icle 2, Paragraph 1 of 
the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of Fluorocarbons, (Act No. 64 of 
2001). 
10.  Factors for C onsideration (4) Various management and evaluation tools, etc.  includes 
manuals and guidelines prepared by academic societi es, industry associations, etc.  
11.  From the viewpoint of promoting energy conservation  and low carbonization, each 
procurement organization should pay attention to th e following. 
a.  With a multiple-year contract of government buildin g management, set targets 
for greenhouse gas emission reduction, etc. accordi ng to the contract period, 
evaluate achievement situation every year and try t o continuous improve 
operation. Even in the case of contracts for a sing le year, make efforts to ensure 
appropriate measures. 
b.  Regarding the introduction of energy conservation d iagnosis and energy 
management system, make efforts to positively respo nd by giving priority to 
possible facilities.  
 
 
Appendix Table 1: Standards of Judgment for Busines s Operators on the Rational Use 
of Energy for Factories, etc. (abstract) 
Object Management  Measurement  and 
Record  Maintenance and 
Inspection  
Air 
conditio 
ning 
equipm 
ent, 
Ventilat 
ion a.  Set management 
standards concerning 
load reduction by 
management of blinds 
etc., operation time of 
facilities, indoor 
temperature, number of 
ventilation, humidity, a.  Management 
standards for 
measurement and 
recording of matters 
necessary for 
grasping the 
temperature, 
humidity and other a.  Heat source 
equipment, heat 
conveyance 
equipment and air 
conditioner 
equipment 
constituting the 
air conditioning 269 Object Management  Measurement  and 
Record  Maintenance and 
Inspection  
equipm 
ent effective use of outside 
air, etc. by limiting the 
section to be air-
conditioned. The cooling 
/ heating temperature 
shall be the management 
standard taking into 
consideration the setting 
temperature 
recommended by the 
government. 
b.  Management of heat 
source equipment that 
performs combustion 
sets management 
standards on air ratio. 
c.  Management of heat 
source equipment, heat 
conveying equipment 
and air conditioner 
equipment improves 
comprehensive energy 
efficiency of air 
conditioning equipment 
by setting cooling water 
temperature, cold / hot 
water temperature, 
pressure etc. according 
to changes in outside air 
conditions set 
management standard to 
make it. 
d.  In the case where it is 
composed of multiple 
heat source machines, it 
is necessary to adjust the 
number of operating 
machines or select the 
operating equipment 
according to the seasonal 
fluctuation of the outside 
air condition and the 
load fluctuation, etc. so 
as to improve the total 
energy efficiency of the air conditions and 
improving the 
efficiency of air 
conditioning are set 
for each section 
subject to air 
conditioning. 
Periodically measure 
these items and 
record the results. 
b.  Heat source 
equipment, heat 
conveyance 
equipment and air 
conditioner 
equipment 
constituting the air 
conditioning 
equipment 
management 
standards related to 
measuring and 
recording matters 
necessary for 
improving the 
efficiency of 
individual 
equipment and the 
overall efficiency of 
the air conditioning 
equipment. 
Periodically measure 
these items and 
record the results. 
c.  Establish a 
management 
standard for 
measurement and 
recording of items 
necessary for 
grasping the 
temperature, carbon 
dioxide 
concentration and 
other air conditions 
and improving equipment are 
required to 
maintain heat 
insulation 
materials and heat 
insulation 
materials, to clog 
filters, to remove 
scale attached to 
condensers and 
heat exchangers, 
etc. Set 
management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection of 
matters necessary 
for improvement 
of efficiency and 
overall efficiency 
of air conditioning 
equipment. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 
b.  Setting 
management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection of 
matters necessary 
for management 
of automatic 
control equipment 
of air conditioning 
equipment and 
ventilation 
equipment. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 
c.  Fans, ducts, etc. 
constituting the 
ventilation facility 270 Object Management  Measurement  and 
Record  Maintenance and 
Inspection  
heat source equipment 
standards. 
e.  When the heat transport 
facility is composed of 
multiple pumps, the 
management standard is 
set so as to improve 
overall energy efficiency 
by adjusting the number 
of operating units or 
selecting operating 
equipment according to 
seasonal fluctuations and 
the like. 
f.  In the case that the air 
conditioner equipment is 
composed of multiple air 
conditioners, in order to 
prevent mixing loss and 
to adjust energy 
efficiency more 
comprehensively by 
adjusting the number of 
operating machines or 
choosing operating 
equipment according to 
the state of load Set 
management standard to.  
g.  For the management of 
ventilation equipment, 
limit the section to be 
ventilated, set 
management standards 
for ventilation volume, 
operation time, 
temperature, etc. 
 ventilation 
efficiency for each 
section to be 
ventilated. 
Periodically measure 
these items and 
record the results. set management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection of 
matters necessary 
for improving the 
efficiency of 
individual 
equipment such as 
filter clogging and 
overall efficiency 
of ventilation 
equipment. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 
Boiler 
equip- 
ment, 
water 
heater 
equip- 
ment a.  The boiler facility sets 
management standards 
on the air ratio according 
to the capacity of the 
boiler and the type of 
fuel used. 
b.  The management 
standard of a. is set to 
lower the air ratio with a.  Boiler facility shall 
control the 
measurement and 
recording of matters 
necessary for 
improving the 
efficiency of boilers, 
such as the supply 
amount of fuel, the a.  Set management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection of 
matters necessary 
for improving the 
efficiency of 
boiler facilities. 
Maintain regular 271 Object Management  Measurement  and 
Record  Maintenance and 
Inspection  
reference to the 
reference air ratio value 
on the boiler. 
c.  The boiler facility sets 
management standards 
concerning the pressure, 
temperature and 
operation time of steam 
etc., operates 
appropriately, and 
eliminates supply of 
excessive steam and the 
like and supply of fuel. 
d.  Water supply to boiler 
sets water quality 
management standards 
and controls water 
quality. Management of 
feed water quality is 
performed according to 
JIS B 8223 (water 
quality of boiler feed 
water and boiler water) 
(including standards 
equivalent to this). 
e.  When using multiple 
boiler facilities, set 
management standards to 
improve overall energy 
efficiency, and set the 
number of suitable 
operating units. 
f.  In the management of 
hot water supply 
facilities, management 
standards are set for 
items necessary for 
improving the supply 
point, supply hot water 
temperature, hot water 
supply pressure, hot 
water supply pressure 
and other hot water 
supply efficiency 
according to the season 
and work content. pressure of steam, 
the temperature of 
hot water, the 
amount of oxygen 
remaining in exhaust 
gas, the temperature 
of waste gas, boiler 
feed water volume 
Set standards. 
Periodically measure 
these items and 
record the results. 
b.  Hot water supply 
facilities set 
management 
standards related to 
measurement and 
recording of matters 
necessary for 
improving the water 
supply volume, hot 
water supply 
temperature and 
other hot water 
supply efficiency. 
Periodically measure 
these items and 
record the results. 
 
 
 
 
 maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 
b.  Establish 
management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection so as to 
prevent heat 
retention and 
insulation of 
boiler facilities, 
steam leakage of 
steam trap, and 
clogging. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 
c.  The hot-water 
supply facility 
sets items 
necessary for 
improving hot-
water supply 
efficiency, such as 
removal of scale 
attached to the 
heat exchanger, 
and management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection of 
matters necessary 
for management 
of the automatic 
control device. 
Maintain regular 
maintenance and 
check, keep it in 
good condition. 272 Object Management  Measurement  and 
Record  Maintenance and 
Inspection  
g.  In management of heat 
source facilities of hot-
water supply facilities, 
management standards 
are set to improve 
comprehensive energy 
efficiency including 
auxiliary equipment such 
as heat source equipment 
and pumps according to 
load fluctuations. 
h.  When the heat source 
equipment of the hot 
water supply facility 
consists of multiple heat 
source equipment, the 
management standard is 
set so as to improve the 
overall energy efficiency 
of the heat source 
equipment by adjusting 
the number of operating 
units according to the 
load condition. 
 
Lightin 
g 
equipm 
ent, 
elevator 
, power 
plant  a.  The lighting equipment 
is used after setting the 
management standard 
according to JIS Z 9110 
(Illuminance standard) 
or Z 9125 (Lighting 
standard of indoor 
workshop) and 
standards conforming to 
these standards. In 
addition, a management 
standard is set so as to 
eliminate excessive or 
unnecessary lighting, 
and dimming or turning 
off is performed by 
dimming. 
b.  The elevator sets a 
management standard 
concerning the 
limitation of the The lighting equipment 
management standards 
related to measuring and 
recording the 
illuminance of the work 
place where the lighting 
is applied. Measure 
regularly and record the 
result. a.  Lighting 
equipment 
management 
standards 
concerning 
maintenance and 
inspection such as 
cleaning of 
lighting fixtures 
and lamps, 
replacement of 
light sources, etc. 
Maintenance and 
inspection at 
regular intervals. 
b.  The elevator sets 
management 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection so as to 
reduce the 273 Object Management  Measurement  and 
Record  Maintenance and 
Inspection  
stopping floor due to the 
time zone, the day of the 
week, etc., the limitation 
of the number of 
operating units when 
there are plural units, 
and performs efficient 
operation. mechanical losses 
of the equipment 
that serves as the 
load of the 
electric motor, the 
power 
transmission part, 
and the electric 
motor. 
Maintenance and 
inspection at 
regular intervals. 
c.  Power facilities 
such as plumbing 
and drainage 
facilities, machine 
parking facilities, 
etc. shall be 
managed in 
accordance with 
the standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection so as to 
reduce the 
mechanical losses 
in the load 
machine (meaning 
the machine 
serving as the 
load of the motor, 
the same shall 
apply hereinafter), 
the power 
transmission unit 
and the motor The 
set. Maintenance 
and inspection at 
regular intervals. 
In addition, when 
the load machine 
is a fluid machine 
such as a pump or 
a fan, control 
standards for 
maintenance and 
inspection are set 274 Object Management  Measurement  and 
Record  Maintenance and 
Inspection  
so as to prevent 
fluid leakage and 
to reduce the 
resistance of 
piping and ducts 
transporting 
fluids. 
Maintenance and 
inspection at 
regular intervals. 
Receivi 
ng and 
trans- 
forming 
equip- 
ment a.  Transformers and 
uninterruptible power 
supply units shall be set 
up with management 
standards so that the 
overall efficiency of the 
transformer and 
uninterruptible power 
supply will be high 
considering the 
efficiency at partial load 
and the adjustment of the 
number of operating 
units and the appropriate 
load Distribute. 
b.  The power factor at the 
power receiving end is 
managed by setting the 
management standard to 
control the phase 
advancing capacitor etc. 
based on the fact that the 
power factor is 95% or 
more. Establishment of 
management standards 
concerning the 
measurement and 
recording of items 
necessary for reducing 
the amount of electricity 
used at offices and other 
business sites and the 
loss of electricity such as 
voltage and current of 
receiving and 
transforming equipment. 
Periodically measure 
these items and record 
the results. Set up the 
management standards 
for maintenance and 
inspection so that the 
receiving and 
transforming 
equipment is kept in 
good condition. 
Maintenance and 
inspection at regular 
intervals. 
 
 
Appendix Table 2: Examples of Energy Efficient Stra tegies for Management and Use of 
Government Buildings 
Facilities  Energy Efficient Strategies (examples) Standards for 
Practice(examples) 
Stationed 
Manage- 
ment Non- 
Stationed 
Manage- 
ment 275 Common 
factors for 
heating and 
air-
conditioning 
facilities Change in standards for interior temperature 
and humidity In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  Seasonally 
Setting the optimal operation and suspension 
of machines, including reduction of operation 
hours Daily Seasonally 
Setting the optimal operation methods based 
on interior load factors for each season Weekly or 
more Seasonally 
Promote the practice of turning off related 
functions (outdoor units and thermal source 
devices) before turning off the air conditioner Daily -- 
Seasonal operation of heating and cooling in 
the interior perimeter area In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  -- 
Confirmation and prevention of mixing loss 
due to simultaneous use of cooling and 
heating As needed As needed 
Mount the temperature / humidity sensor in 
the proper position   As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Unification of temperature distribution 
through adjustment of placement and 
direction of vents As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Reduction of heating and cooling period In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  -- 
Stoppage of ventilation in empty rooms, 
storage, etc. As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Reduction of operation period  Daily -- 
Restricting air conditioning during overtime 
hours Daily -- 
Closing blinds and curtains before the 
weekend to lessen the air-conditioning load at 
the beginning of the work week  Daily -- 
Restricting air conditioning during early 
morning and late night cleaning period Daily -- 
Prohibiting opening of windows and doors 
during air conditioning hours In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  -- 
Change in the layout of partitions and desks 
that obstruct air conditioning As needed -- 276 Employ milder temperatures for common 
areas  Daily Seasonally 
Implementation of Cool Biz / Warm Biz  Seasonally S easonally 
Sprinkling water on the rooftop, etc. during 
summertime In 
accordance 
with 
outdoor 
temperature 
for the 
relevant 
period -- 
Individual air 
conditioning 
units Optimization of automatic control functions 
including sensors  As needed As needed 
Regular cleaning of air filters Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Regular cleaning of hot and cold water fin 
coils Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Elimination of obstructive objects from the 
vent area As needed -- 
Application of warm-up control Daily -- 
Increase in thermostat temperature by 2~3 
degrees C after air conditioner has started up 
and is running normally In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  -- 
Natural ventilation through opening and 
closing of windows In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  -- 
Application of night purge to capture 
optimum temperature outside air during 
nighttime outside air temperature is low In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  -- 
Prevention of short circuiting caused by the 
proximity of the inlet and the outlet As needed As needed 
Enforcement of scheduled operation As needed As nee ded 
Prevention of air and water leakage from 
ducts thorough enforcement of maintenance 
of insulation material Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 277 Cleaning and maintenance of heat 
interchanger Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Suspension of heat interchanger operation In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  Seasonally 
Setting of zero-energy band to control 
temperature and humidity within a certain 
range Daily -- 
Central air 
conditioning 
system For temperature management, set cold water 
is high, hot water is low, cooling water is low Daily -- 
Controlled operation of maximum 
temperature difference operation (reduction of 
pump transportation ability) As needed -- 
Periodic water quality management in hot and 
cold water as well as cooling water 
(prevention of decrease in ratio of heat 
transmission)  Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Suspension of heat source machine operation 
30 minutes prior to turning off the air 
conditioning system  Daily -- 
Freezers Optimization of freezer operation pressure  As needed As needed 
Cleaning tube interior of equipment including 
chemical and brush cleansing of vaporizers 
and condensers As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Maintenance and inspection of measuring 
instruments including thermometers and 
pressure gauges Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance of function, inspection, and 
maintenance of measuring equipment 
including manometers and sensors Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance of COP value (efficiency) in 
equipment As needed -- 
Cold and hot 
water 
generators, 
absorption 
freezers Optimization and maintenance of airtight 
components of the equipment As needed As needed 
Cleaning tube interior of equipment including 
chemical and brush cleansing of vaporizers 
and condensers Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance and inspection of measuring 
instruments including thermometers and 
pressure gauges Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance of function, inspection, and 
maintenance of measuring equipment 
including manometers and sensors Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance of COP value (efficiency) in 
equipment As needed -- 278 Cooling tower  Optimization of cooling water inlet / outlet 
temperature As needed -- 
Management and removal of filth from fillers, 
management of water quality As needed As needed 
Cleaning of cooling tower tank As needed As needed 
Check valve opening / closing state As needed -- 
Maintenance of chemical components in 
cooling water As needed As needed 
Heat storage 
tank Implementation of optimum operation of 
water / ice heat storage amount in heat storage 
tank based on air conditioning load prediction 
etc. As needed -- 
Optimization of temperature distribution in 
tank As needed -- 
Fan coil Optimum operation of the fan coil for the 
perimeter (time period, temperature setting) In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  -- 
Periodic cleaning of air filters Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Period cleaning of cold and hot water fin coils  Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Ventilation of air conditioners, removal of 
obstructive material from vents  As needed -- 
Air-cooled 
heat pumps Period cleaning of outdoor unit fin coils Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Period cleaning of indoor unit fin coils Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Period cleaning of indoor unit air filters Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Confirmation and maintenance of operation 
conditions including operation pressure and 
operation current Daily -- 
Cleaning of heat transformer Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Suspension measures for heat transformer 
operation In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  Seasonally 279 Water-cooled 
packaging 
method Periodic cleaning of indoor unit fin coil Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Periodic cleaning of air filters Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Confirmation and maintenance of operation 
conditions including operation pressure and 
operation current Daily -- 
Cleaning of heat transformer Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 
Suspension measures for heat transformer 
operation In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  Seasonally 
Chemical cleansing of cooling water Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Ventilation 
facilities Restriction of ventilation in machine and 
electric rooms and storage As needed As needed 
Turning off ventilation in unused rooms 
(storage, machine room, etc.) As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Natural ventilation through opening and 
closing of windows In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  -- 
Inspection and replacement of fan belts Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Changing activation setting temperature of 
ventilation fan for waste heat As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Remove clogging of filters such as fans and 
ducts 
 As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Setting the ventilation air volume to an 
appropriate value, reducing the amount of 
outside air As 
appropriate -- 
Pump related Set up so that startup, stop, pressure , and flow 
rate of the secondary pump are optimized As needed -- 
Optimization of water quantity in ground 
packing, etc. Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Maintenance of insulation material Twice or 
more per 
year Twice or 
more per 
year 280 Suspension of operation as needed for three or 
four pipe equipment As needed -- 
Boilers Appropriate setting of combustion equipment  
including air ratio, exhaust gas temperature, 
etc. As needed As needed 
Appropriate setting of pressure of steam etc., 
temperature of hot water As needed As needed 
Cleaning of heat transmission surfaces, 
removal of scales, etc. Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Maintenance of heat transmission surfaces. Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Boiler water quality management(JIS B 8223)  Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Maintenance of steam trap function (drain 
recovery) Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Maintenance of COP value (efficiency) in 
equipment As needed -- 
Hot water 
supply facility  Limitation of hot water supply time and 
reduction of hot water supply range In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  Seasonally 
Stop hot water supply such as hand wash 
place in summer Daily in 
summer Daily in 
summer 
Change of hot water supply temperature 
setting 
 In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  Seasonally 
For use, narrow down the branch valves of 
hot water in a range that does not interfere As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Lighting 
facilities Turn off excessive lighting in the work space, 
utilize natural lighting turn off the window 
area Based on 
usage Based on 
usage 
Dimming Based on 
usage Based on 
usage 
Turning off, or selective lighting in hallways Base d on 
usage Based on 
usage 
Turning off lights in un-occupied restrooms 
and kitchens Daily -- 
Turning off lights in empty rooms and storage  Daily As 
appropriate 
Turning off lights during lunch break Daily -- 281 Partially turning off in overtime hours by 
concentrating overtime work areas Daily -- 
Shortening or restricting of lighting during 
opening time Daily -- 
Cleaning of lighting fixtures for increased 
lighting efficiency Once or 
more per 
year Once or 
more per 
year 
Periodic exchange of lamps(Fluorescent lamp, 
HID lamp, etc.) Once every 
2~3 years Once every 
2~3 years 
Initialization of initial illuminance correction 
at lamp replacement Implemente 
d at 
replacement  -- 
Elimination of partitions As 
appropriate -- 
Proper disposition of desks and work areas 
that are easy to turn off partially in the 
lighting range  As 
appropriate -- 
Frequent adjustment of solar timers Once or 
more per 
month Once or 
more per 
month 
Employment of area-specific lighting As needed -- 
Displayed lighting range on light switch As 
appropriate -- 
Operation check of lighting control 
equipment. As 
appropriate -- 
Frequent manual turning off of light switches As ne eded -- 
Transportation 
system Selective operation of elevators and escalators 
Controlling the number of elevators / 
escalators to be operated (limitation of stop 
floor, control of the number of operating 
units) Daily -- 
Promotion of stairway use Daily -- 
Cooperation with in-building delivery system Daily -- 
Maintenance and inspection to reduce the 
equipment loss of the motor, the power 
transmission section and the motor losses As 
appropriate -- 
Plumbing and 
sanitary 
facilities Confirmation of rust, corrosion and water leak 
in piping As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 
Improve energy consumption efficiency 
including auxiliary equipment such as heat 
source equipment and pump As 
appropriate -- 
Narrowing of branch valves for  water supply 
to an extent that does not result in 
inconvenience As 
appropriate As 
appropriate 282 Stoppage of hot water in restrooms, etc. 
during summer In 
accordance 
with season 
and outdoor 
temperature  Seasonally 
Receiving and 
transforming 
electricity Reconsideration of interior temperature of 
substations Seasonally -- 
Frequent load adjustment by demand situation   As needed -- 
Thorough management of power factor using 
phase acceleration condensers As needed -- 
Detachment of transformer in unnecessary 
period or time zone. As 
appropriate -- 
Adjustment of the number of transformers 
operating and maintenance of proper load As needed -- 
Adjust the number of uninterruptible power 
supply units in operation and maintain proper 
load As needed -- 
Others Energy conservation in vending machines 
(turning off illumination, turning off the 
machine at night) Daily -- 
Disconnection of the power of the office 
equipment during the period not in use such 
as lunch break  Daily -- 
Efficient use of blinds and curtains Daily -- 
Confirmation of set values of target 
facilities/equipment, etc., 
measurement/recording of operation result Daily Once or 
more per 
month 
Understanding and utilization of energy data 
necessary for energy conservation Daily Once or 
more per 
month 
 
  283 Landscape 
management Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Products that fulfill the evaluation criteria are t o be used when products 
used for landscape management apply to specified it ems for 
procurement. 
(2)  A system is in place for comprehensive management o f vermin and 
harmful insects and weeds capable of maintaining th em at a low 
concentration through appropriate pruning and trimm ing that would 
result in improved ventilation and securing of adeq uate sunlight, in 
addition to executing appropriate prevention and co ntrol methods. 
(3)  Efforts should be made to decrease the frequency an d quantity of 
pesticides. Only the appropriate pesticides that ha ve been registered in 
accordance with pesticide control law should be use d adequately and 
effectively by following the label instructions on method of use 
(frequency, quantity, concentration, etc.) and labe l warnings. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Consideration is made for use of irrigated rainwate r. 
(2)  A system is in place for the reduction of environme ntal load from 
compost, etc. when disposing branches and leaves re sulting from 
pruning and weeding. 
(3)  Compost created from leaves, etc. that resulted fro m landscape 
management (soil improvement material) is used for fertilization. 
(4)  When using a chain saw for pruning, logging, etc., the chain saw oil 
must be biodegradable. 
(5)  When transplanting is required, a proposal should b e made to facility 
manager for the selection of tree types with low po ssibility of 
harvesting vermin and harmful insects, while in con sideration for the 
existing landscape. 
(6)  Equipment and tools used for landscape management s hould be 
selected upon taking into consideration their abili ty to decrease 
environmental load. 
(7)  Using the planting material that substitute for the  soil for landscape 
management as much as possible. 
Notes: 
1.  Landscape management  under consideration in Evaluation Criteria refers to the 
management of landscaping around government office buildings, etc. and rooftop 
landscaping, etc. 
2.  A system for comprehensive management of vermin and  harmful insects and weeds in 
Evaluation Criteria (2) of Landscape Management ref ers to a system that considers 
comprehensively the reduction of load upon health a nd environment while taking 
financial efficiency in consideration. Measures inc lude research of outbreak 
conditions, early detection of damage, and selectio n of physical removal strategies 
including pruning and catch-and-kill. 
3.  Evaluation Criteria (2) and (3) of Landscape Manage ment should conform to “Use of 
Agricultural Chemicals in Residential Districts (No .175, April 26, 2013, decision No. 
1304261 ; joint notice by Director of Consumption and Safet y  of Ministry of 
Agriculture, Forestry and Fisheries, and Director o f Water and Atmospheric 
Environment of Ministry of Environment),” related s uch as information provision for 284 the dissemination facilities manager who lies use o f pesticides and for the surrounding 
area, splash prevention and retention of records fo r agricultural chemicals. 
4.  Biodegradation testing should employ one of the fol lowing methods. 10-d window 
shall not be used for these testing methods. 
*OECD (Organization for Economic Co-Operation and D evelopment) Chemical 
Substance Testing Guideline 
• 301B (CO2 Production Testing) 
• 301C (Modified MITI (I) Testing) 
• 301F (Manometric Respirometry Testing) 
*ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 
• D5864 (Standard testing method to determine the deg ree of aerobic 
biodegradation in water environment for lubricants and lubricant components) 
• D6731 (Standard testing method to determine the deg ree of aerobic 
biodegradation in water environment for lubricant i nside an airtight respirometer 
and lubricant components) 
 
Smoke 
Detectors Test 
 Evaluation Criteria 
Fluorocarbons are not used in smoke bodies of smoke  tester.  
 
Factors for Consideration  
Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
Notes: 
1.  The Evaluation criteria in this section shall also be applied even when the smoke-free 
test is included in fire-fighting equipment inspect ion work etc. 
2.  Fluorocarbons are the materials defined as the Fluo rocarbons prescribed in Article 2, 
Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Pro per Management of 
Fluorocarbons (Act No. 64 of 2001). 
 
 
Cleaning Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Products used for cleaning of government office bui ldings, when 
applicable to the specified items for procurement, fulfill the evaluation 
criteria. 
(2)  From the perspective of efficient use of resources,  liquid soap or soap 
used for hand washing in the lavatory are to use as  raw materials waste 
oil or animals and plant oil. However,  sustainable raw materials are 
used if plant oils and fats are used as raw materia ls of detergents used 
for cleaning.  
(3)  Waste collection is to be distinguished between rec yclable waste 
(paper, cans, glass bottles, plastic bottles, etc.) , kitchen waste, 
combustible waste, and incombustible waste, and col lected 
appropriately. 
(4)  Among the recyclable recycled paper waste is separa ted and collected 
with consideration for recycling of used paper. In cases where 
separation is inadequate or discharge amount has dr amatically 
increased when compared to the previous month or th e same month of 285 the previous year, a plan for improvement should be  presented in 
cooperation with the facility manager. 
(5)  The content of volatile organic compound in product s for floor 
maintenance (wax), detergent, etc. is below the amo unt specified in the 
guideline. 
(6)  The business possesses the skills that contributes to the reduction of 
environmental load, and makes specific proposals to  further decrease 
environmental load in their cleaning methods. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Consideration is made for the reduced use or approp riate use of 
material for floor maintenance, detergents, etc. us ed for cleaning.  
(2)  Replacement items will not be supplied in excess.  
 
(3)  Cleansers have the hydrogen ion concentration (pH) that is appropriate 
for their use.  
(4)  Wax, cleaning agent used for floor maintenance, cle aning, etc. do not 
contain designated chemical material.as much as pos sible. 
(5)  When cleaning, effort is made to reduce the amount of energy 
resources such as electricity and gas, as well as r esources such as water.  
(6)  Effort is made to suggest frequency of cleaning tha t is appropriate for 
the building condition. 
(7)  Even when items necessary for the cleaning of gover nment office 
buildings do not apply to the designated procuremen t items, 
consideration will be paid to the reduction of envi ronmental load 
during its lifecycle from the collection of resourc es to disposal.  
Notes: 
1.  The use of sustainable raw materials  in evaluation criteria (2) means that the 
manufacturer of the soap solution or soap creates a  sustainable procurement policy 
pertaining to the raw materials and procures raw ma terials based on the policy. 
2.  For Evaluation Criteria (4) of Cleaning, each procu rement organization should refer to 
Appendix Tables 1 and 2, while taking into consider ation the state of paper use and 
disposal in government buildings, etc., and determi ne the separation criteria for 
discharged used paper in cooperation with cleaning businesses. Separation must be 
conducted thoroughly by eliminating material that m ay obstruct paper recycling. 
Recyclable printed matter that fulfils the Evaluati on Criteria for printed matter should 
be adequately separated so that it may be used as r aw material for paper. 
3.  The specified amount for volatile organic compound in Evaluation Criteria (5) of 
Cleaning is to conform to the amount for indoor con centration designated by the 
Ministry of Health, Labor and Welfare. 
4.  Cleaning methods that contribute to the reduction o f environmental load , as noted 
in Evaluation Criteria (6) refers to tactics such a s the application of cleaning methods 
based on the level of contamination, application of  preventative cleaning methods that 
removes before the contamination of room environmen t, enforcement of reliable 
contamination removal through maintenance of cleani ng machinery performance. 
5.  In Factors for Consideration (3) of Cleaning, refer ence should be made to the hydrogen 
ion concentration (pH) of synthetic detergent based  on Household Products Quality 286 Indicator. The hydrogen ion concentration of produc ts for floor maintenance and floor 
detergents as undiluted solution should ideally be between pH5 and pH9. 
6.  Designated chemical material  noted in Factors for Consideration (4) of Cleaning  
refers to material that apply to “Act on Confirmati on, etc. of Release Amounts of 
Specific Chemical Substances in the Environment and  Promotion of Improvements to 
the Management Thereof (Act No. 86 of July 13, 1999 ).” 
7.  Each procurement organization shall take necessary measures to properly treat the 
waste liquid accompanying the cleaning work of buil dings such as flushing washing 
liquid of floor maintenance agent.  
 
Appendix Table 1: Separation procedure for used pap er (sample)  
Classification Item 
Newspaper Newspaper (includes enclosed advertisemen ts) 
Cardboard Cardboard 
Magazines  Poster, ads, magazines, reports, catalog s, pamphlets, bound material such 
as books, notes 
OA paper Copier paper and its equivalents 
Recyclable 
printed matter Printed matter that May be recycled into printing paper  (uses only 
materials in Rank A) 
Printed matter that May be recycled into cardboard (uses only materials 
in Ranks A and B) 
Other 
miscellaneous 
paper Envelopes, paper boxes, DM, memo paper, wrapping pa per, and others 
that are not included in the above 
Shredder pieces  Paper that has been shredded within government buil dings, etc. 
Notes: Recyclable printed matter  refers to printed matter on which the recyclabilit y is 
displayed in the standards for judgments concerning  printing (refer to printing  section) of the 
printed matter. 
 
 
Appendix Table 2: Materials that may interfere with  recycling of used paper (sample) 
Category Type 
Paper products  Envelopes with adhesive material 
Paper treated with waterproof material 
Carbon paper, carbon-less paper (duplicate receivin g slip for package 
delivery, etc.) 
Privacy sealed postcards 
Thermal paper 
Photographs, Inkjet photo paper, blueprint paper 
Paper made of composite material such as plastic fi lm and aluminum foil  
Paper on which metal foils such as gold and silver are mounted 
Fragrant paper (wrapper for soap, detergent contain er made of paper, 
paper box for incense) 
Sublimation transfer paper, iron print paper, etc. 
Thermal foam paper 
Composite paper 287 Dirty paper (used sanitary paper, dirty paper due t o food residue, etc.)  
Material other 
than paper Adhesive tape 
Iron on patch 
Metal used in files 
Film 
Styrofoam 
Cellophane 
Plastic products 
Glass products 
Cloth products 
Carpet tile 
cleaning  Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  The power consumption of the equipment used for cle aning is 0.22 
kWh / m2 or less. 
(2)  The amount of water used for cleaning is 40 L / m 2  or less. 
(3)  The detergent etc. used for cleaning shall meet the  criteria for 
judgment concerning cleaning (see Cleaning section) . 
(4)  The transparency of the recovered water which wash the tile carpet 
after completion of cleaning is 5 points or more 
 
Factors for Considerations 
(1)  The detergent etc. to be used for cleaning is consi dered to reduce the 
amount used or to use the proper amount. 
(2)  In the case where plant oils and fats are used as r aw materials of 
detergent, sustainable raw materials are used. 
(3)  The detergent etc. to be used for cleaning is those  which do not 
contain designated chemical substances. 
(4)  To make efforts to reduce energy such as electricit y and water used 
for cleaning. 
Notes: 
1.  Carpet tile cleaning under the evaluation criteria in this section denote remove the tile 
carpet laid, release dirt, disassemble and wash awa y at the work site or office etc., as well 
as leave no sewage so as to aspirate or dehydrate. 
2.  Transparency noted of in the evaluation criteria (4 ) is according to JIS K 0120. 
3.  Designated chemical material  noted in Factors for Consideration (3) refers to m aterial 
that apply to “Act on Confirmation, etc. of Release  Amounts of Specific Chemical 
Substances in the Environment and Promotion of Impr ovements to the Management 
Thereof (Act No. 86 of July 13, 1999).” 
 
Treatment of 
confidential 
documents Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Type and amount of paper to be discharged at the fa cility concerned 
is taken into consideration, methods of separation and treatment is 
proposed in accordance with the facility conditions , and adequate 
collection is enforced to use as raw material for p aper. 
(2)  For disposal of confidential documents, the followi ng should be 
fulfilled in order to enable reuse as raw material for paper upon taking 
adequate measures to avoid leaking of confidential information 288 during each step of treatment, including discharge and temporary 
storage, collection, transportation, and disposal. 
a.  Facilities and systems are in place to remove mater ial that may 
obstruct paper recycling. 
b.  Direct dissolution treatment is to be conducted at a facility 
equipped with a system for removal of foreign mater ial. 
c.  Treatment involving crushing should be conducted in  a way that 
would preserve as much fiber in the paper as possib le. 
(3)  Confidential treatment / Recycling management manif est indicating 
that proper processing of confidential documents ha s been performed 
can be shown to the client. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Discharge amount of confidential documents is measu red regularly 
and reported to the client. 
(2)  Treatment is conducted in such a way to enable recy cling as paper 
(printing paper, information paper and hygienic pap er). 
(3)  For transportation, planning is conducted to enable  efficiency for 
loading methods, transportation methods and transpo rtation routes. 
(4)  Transportation utilizes as much as possible vehicle s with fuel 
efficiency and low environmental impact.  
Notes: 
1.  Each procurement organization should consider the d egree and necessity of 
confidentiality when discharging documents, and red uce as much as possible the 
amount of confidential documents to be discharged. 
2.  Each procurement organization should fully consider  the following: 
a.  For ordering treatment involving crushing noted in the evaluation criteria (2), size 
of the cut paper pieces should be confirmed (From t he standpoint of paper 
recycling, larger sized paper is desirable. Standar d for paper size as noted by 
businesses is 10mmx50mm or larger.). 
b.  Keeping in mind that shredder treatment inside gove rnment buildings etc. 
generally decreases the applicability for recycling , it should be conducted with 
consideration for the degree and necessity of confi dentiality. Efforts should be 
made to request for collection of shredded paper by  businesses that collect paper 
for recycling, businesses that treat confidential d ocuments, etc., so that they may 
be used appropriately according to paper type (pape r width appropriate for 
recycling is 5mm or more). 
c.  By referring to Appendix 1 shown in "Cleaning" in t his section, set up a separation 
method according to the situation of the facility a nd remove materials that will 
inhibit the recycling of used paper shown in Append ix 2 and strive for appropriate 
sorted collection about. 
3.  A certification that indicates that the disposal of  confidential documents noted in the 
evaluation criteria (3) refers to documents that ce rtify that the collected confidential 
documents have been used as raw material for paper after being treated to eliminate 
confidential information. This document only applie s to instances when an outside 
business is commissioned to conduct treatment such as melting and crushing, and does 
not apply to shredded paper pieces resulting from s hredder treatment within each 
procuring facility. 289  
 
Pest prevention  Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  When material used for pest prevention falls in the  category of 
specified items for procurement, products that fulf ill the evaluation 
criteria is used. 
(2)  Abuse of rodenticides and pesticides is avoided. A comprehensive 
prevention method taking into consideration researc h of their 
habitation condition, etc. is in place. 
(3)  Measures for preventing outbreak and invasion of pe sts, etc. are in 
place. 
(4)  A predetermined plan or target for prevention work is in place. 
Judgment of effectiveness (confirmation and examina tion, evaluation 
of prevention effectiveness, etc.) is conducted aft er the prevention 
work. 
(5)  Rodenticides and pesticides are pharmaceutical prod ucts that have 
been approved of manufacture and sales through “Act  on securing 
quality, effectiveness and safety of pharmaceutical s, medical 
equipment, etc.(Act No.145 of 1960)”, and applied a ppropriately in 
accordance with the designated frequency, amount an d concentration. 
 
Factors for Consideration  
Effort is made to propose pest prevention method th at is most appropriate 
for the habitat condition. 
Note: Pest prevention that is under consideration in the evaluation crite ria refers to the 
prevention of animals, etc., including mice, insect s, and foreign life that can potentially cause 
damage to people’s health in government office buil dings based on Laws Concerning the 
Securing of Hygienic Environment in Buildings (Law No.20 of 1970). 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of jobs per category that meet the criteria to the number of jobs conducted 
in the fiscal year. 
 
  290 22-7 Transportation and Delivery 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Transportation 
and delivery  Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  The state of energy use, as well as the effects of energy efficiency 
efforts is being reviewed periodically. 
(2)  System and organization for environmental conservat ion is being 
developed.  
(3)  Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion. 
(4)  Inspection and maintenance of cars for environmenta l protection 
including reduction of environmental pollutant emis sion and 
maintenance of energy efficiency is being conducted . 
(5)  Modal shift is put in place. 
(6)  Measures are put in place for improved efficiency i n transportation and 
delivery. 
(7)  Information regarding the above criteria (the actua l state of use and 
numbers showing the effect for criteria (1), and wh ether or not the 
measures are put in place for criteria (2) to (5)) are publicized on 
websites and environmental reports, etc., so that t hey may be easily 
confirmed, or, is judged objectively by a third par ty. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Adequate and effective application for the efficien t use of energy and 
measures to contribute to leveling of demand for el ectricity in 
transportation and delivery is arranged, with consi deration for 
“Evaluation Criteria for Freight Transportation Com panies in Relation 
to the Efficient use of Energy in Freight Transport ation (Ministry of 
Economy, Trade and Industry; Ministry of L and, Infrastructure and 
Transport (Notification No.7 of 2006) and “Guidelin es for Freight 
Transportation Companies in Relation to the measure s to contribute to 
leveling of demand for electricity in Passenger Tra nsportation” 
(Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry; Ministry of Lan d, 
Infrastructure and Transport (Notification No.2 of 2014), based on the 
Regulation for the Efficient Use of Energy (Act No. 49 of 1979). 
(2)  Incorporation of fuel-efficient, low pollution cars  promoted. At the 
same time, transportation and delivery using fuel-e fficient, low 
pollution cars is being conducted as much as possib le. 
(3)  Improvements in carrying capacity are considered in  order to decrease 
the number of cars being used for transportation an d delivery. 
(4)  Cooperative transportation and delivery is consider ed in order to 
decrease the frequency of transportation and delive ry. 
(5)  Efforts to reduce redelivery are being implemented.  
(6)  Devices to promote eco-drive are in place as much a s possible. 
(7)  Measures are taken for the incorporation of Intelli gent Transport 
System (ITS) including Vehicle Information and Comm unication 
System (VICS) adaptable car navigation system, and Electronic Toll 
Collection System (ETC). 291 (8)  Commercial packaging for home delivery service item s and small 
postal packages are to take into account ease of re cycling and reduced 
environmental impact upon disposal. 
(9)  Maintain an understanding of energy use conditions at offices and 
delivery distribution centers, and make an effort t o decrease energy use 
rate in said facilities. 
(10)  Request to those who are undertaking by contract pa rt of the 
transportation and delivery to undertake, as much a s possible, 
measures constructive towards the reduction of envi ronmental load.  
(11)Being conducted by car fills the emission stand ard as much as 
possible, when driving in the measures region of th e Law concerning 
Special Measures for Total Emission Reduction of Ni trogen Oxides 
and Small Particles from automobiles in specified a reas (June 3, 1992 
No.70). 
Notes: 
1.  Transportation and delivery  under consideration includes domestic letter 
correspondences, home delivery service, small posta l packages (general, documents, 
etc.), as well as mail service. 
a.  Letter correspondences  refer to documents that are meant to express the 
intentions of the sender, or to notify factual info rmation, to a specified recipient. 
b.  Home delivery service  refers to delivery service that uses one or more o f the 
following: special cargo transportation undertaken by general automotive cargo 
transportation business, or a corresponding cargo t ransportation, and train cargo 
transportation, domestic sea transportation, automo tive cargo transportation, and 
air cargo transportation. Each cargo is to be 30 kg  or less. 
c.  Mail service  refers to a transportation service that receives fr om the sender, 
relatively light packages of books, magazine, produ ct catalogs, etc., and completes 
the delivery by placing those material into the mai l box, etc. of the receiver. Each 
package is to be comprised of one document, and wei gh 1 kg or less. 
2.  Establishment of mechanisms and systems for environ mental conservation means to 
formulate plans and targets related to the environm ent, establish implementation 
systems for such plans, and promote efforts toward environmental conservation.  
3.  Eco-drive  refers to “Recommendation for Eco-drive 10” publis hed by Eco-drive 
Popularization Network (January 2020). 
Note: (1) Understand fuel cost, (2)Soft accelerator  e-start ; (3) Keep a distance between 
cars and d riving with little acceleration and deceleration; ( 4) Early stopping of 
acceleration when deceleration; (5) Appropriate use of air conditioner; (6) Stop a 
useless idling; (7) Avoid getting congested, have time and leave; (8)  Inspection and 
maintenance of cars start from a ir pressure in the tires; (9) Removal of unnecessar y 
load fro m car; and (10)  Stop parking that disturbs running. 
4.  Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion  noted in Evaluation Criteria (3) 
requires the fulfillment of the following: 
a.  The driver has been informed of eco-drive. 
b.  A manager responsible for eco-drive has been assign ed, manual has been created 
(including the use of an existing manual), and a sy stem for promoting eco-drive 
has been put in place. 
c.  Education and training regarding eco-drive is being  performed. 292 d.  Energy use is being maintained through the maintena nce of operation records 
under the categories of driver and car type. 
5.  Inspection and maintenance of cars  in the evaluation criteria (4) refers to the 
observance of the items outlined in the Regulations  for Road Transportation and 
Delivery, including daily and regular inspections, as well as the establishing and 
execution of voluntary maintenance standards based on inspection and maintenance 
factors listed in Table. The objective here is to s ecure an environment that can maintain 
energy efficiency in automobiles. 
6.   Modal-shift  refers to the shifting of transportation mode thro ugh the employment of 
mass transportation system with little environmenta l load including cargo 
transportation and domestic sea transportation. How ever, if its main task does not 
involve trunk transport, the evaluation criteria (5 ) is not applied. 
7.  Measures are put in place for improved efficiency i n transportation and delivery  
noted in evaluation criteria (6) requires the fulfi llment of the following: 
a.  An energy efficient delivery route is selected befo rehand, and the driver is notified 
thereof. 
b.  A system for an appropriate delivery route, taking into account traffic information, 
is put in place. 
c.  An adequate automobile type, taking into account am ount of delivery items and 
regional characteristics, is selected. 
d.  Transportation and delivery distance is shortened b y differentiating between 
delivery station-based method and direct method. 
8.  Environmental Report  refers to the environmental report designated by R egulations 
for Promoting Businesses that Takes into Considerat ion Environment of Specified 
Businesses, etc. through Promotion of Environmental  Information Provision (2004 
Regulation 77) Article 2, Item 4. 
9.  Fuel-efficient, low pollution cars  in Factors for Consideration (2) should be referre d 
to “13-1 Vehicles” in this Basic Policy. 
10.  Those who are undertaking by contract part of the t ransportation and delivery  refers 
to cases where part of transportation and delivery operation under consideration here 
is being undertaken for the services concerned.  
 293 Table: Inspection and Maintenance Items for Environ mental Preservation, Including 
Maintenance of Automobile Energy Efficiency, etc.  
Promotional structure for inspection and maintenanc e 
 □ Inspection and maintenance is conducted in accordan ce with specified operation 
plan, and the results are recorded. 
□ A system is put in place to review the contents of  inspection and maintenance, based 
on the results of inspection and maintenance. 
Adequate inspection and maintenance of automobiles 
 ■ When commissioning inspection and maintenance to a  maintenance business, 
maintain an understanding of the automobile conditi on on a daily basis, and relay the 
condition when commissioning. 
■ Conduct inspection and maintenance when an increas e in black smoke is confirmed 
by the eye. 
■ When the air-conditioner gas is considered to have  decreased, based on the 
effectiveness of the car air-conditioner, conduct i nspection and maintenance of the car 
air-conditioner, in order to prevent the discharge of chlorofluorocarbon into the 
atmosphere. 
Inspection and maintenance based on voluntary maint enance standards 
 (Air cleaner element-related) 
■ For cleaning and replacement of air cleaner elemen t, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and de termine a voluntary maintenance 
standard based on either the distance driven or the  amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct inspection and ma intenance accordingly. 
(Engine oil related) 
■ For the change of engine oil, refer to the mainten ance notebook, etc. provided by the 
manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance  standard based on either the 
distance driven or the amount of time that has pass ed since the previous maintenance. 
Conduct oil change accordingly. 
■ For the replacement of engine oil filter, refer to  the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a volun tary maintenance standard based 
on either the distance driven or the amount of time  that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct replacement accordingly. 
(Fuel equipment related) 
□ For overhauling or replacement of fuel equipment, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and de termine a voluntary maintenance 
standard based on either the distance driven or the  amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct overhaul or repla cement accordingly. 
(Related to equipment for the reduction of gas emis sion) 
■ For the inspection of equipment for the reduction of gas emission (DPF, Oxidized 
catalyst), refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and 
determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on  either the distance driven or the 
amount of time that has passed since the previous m aintenance. Conduct inspection 
accordingly. 
(Others) 
 ■ For the inspection and adjustment of tire air-pres sure, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and de termine a voluntary maintenance 294 standard based on either the distance driven or the  amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct adjustment in acc ordance with the actual 
measurement of air-pressure. 
□ For the inspection of transmission oil leakage, re fer to the maintenance notebook, 
etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount o f time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct maintenance according ly. 
□ For changing the transmission oil, refer to the ma intenance notebook, etc. provided 
by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary main tenance standard based on either 
the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct change accordingly. 
□ For the inspection of deferential oil leakage, ref er to the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a volun tary maintenance standard based 
on either the distance driven or the amount of time  that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct maintenance accordingly. 
□ For changing the deferential oil, refer to the mai ntenance notebook, etc. provided by 
the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary mainten ance standard based on either the 
distance driven or the amount of time that has pass ed since the previous maintenance. 
Conduct change accordingly. 
■ refers to items that must be conducted for inspect ion and maintenance of automobiles. 
□ refers to items for which execution is desirable f or inspection and maintenance of 
automobiles. 
 
 
 
(2) Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of transportation and delivery businesses that meet the criteria to the 
number of transportation and delivery businesses co mmissioned in the fiscal year. 
  295 22-8 Passenger Transportation (Automobiles) 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Passenger 
transportation  Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  The state of energy use, as well as the effects of energy efficiency efforts 
is being reviewed periodically. 
(2)  System and organization for environmental conservat ion is being 
developed . 
(3)  Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion. 
(4)  Inspection and maintenance of cars for environmenta l protection 
including reduction of environmental pollutant emis sion and 
maintenance of energy efficiency is being conducted . 
(5)  Measures are put in place for improved efficiency i n passenger 
transportation, or decrease in traveling distance o f non-passenger 
occupied cars. 
(6)  Information regarding the above criteria (the actua l state of use and 
numbers showing the effect for criteria (1), and wh ether or not the 
measures are put in place for criteria (2)-(5)) are  publicized on websites 
and environmental reports, etc., so that they may b e easily confirmed, 
or, is judged objectively by a third party. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Adequate and effective application for the efficien t use of energy and 
measures to contribute to leveling of demand for el ectricity in passenger 
transportation is arranged, with consideration for “Evaluation Criteria 
for Passenger Transportation Companies in Relation to the Efficient use 
of Energy in Passenger Transportation (Ministry of Economy, Trade 
and Indust ry; Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport  
(Notification No.6 of 2006)), and “Guidelines for P assenger 
Transportation Companies in Relation to the measure s to contribute to 
leveling of demand for electricity in Passenger Tra nsportation (Ministry 
of Economy, Trade and Industry; Ministry of Land, Infr astructure and 
Transport(Notification No.3 of 2014)) based on the Regulation for the 
Efficient Use of Energy (Act No.49 of 1979). 
(2)  Incorporation of fuel-efficient and low pollution c ars is promoted.  At 
the same time, passenger transportation using fuel- efficient, low 
pollution cars is being conducted as much as possib le. 
(3)  Devices to promote eco-drive are in place as much a s possible. 
(4)  Measures are taken for the incorporation of Intelli gent Transport 
System (ITS) including Vehicle Information and Comm unication 
System (VICS) adaptable car navigation system, and Electronic Toll 
Collection System (ETC). 
(5)  Maintain an understanding of energy use conditions at business and 
sales offices, and make an effort to decrease energ y use rate in said 
facilities. 
(6)  Effort is made for efficient dispatching of cars wi th the incorporation of 
GPS-A VM system. 
Notes: 296 1.  Eco-drive  refers to “Recommendation for Eco-drive 10” publis hed by Eco-drive 
Popularization Network (January 2020). 
Note: (1) Understand fuel cost, (2)Soft accelerator  e-start ; (3) Keep a distance between 
cars and d riving with little acceleration and deceleration; ( 4) Early stopping of 
acceleration when deceleration; (5) Appropriate use of air conditioner; (6) Stop a 
usele ss idling; (7) Avoid getting congested, have time and leave; (8)  Inspection and 
maintenance of cars start from a ir pressure in the tires; (9) Removal of unnecessar y 
load from car; and (10)  Stop parking that disturbs running. 
2.  Establishment of mechanisms and systems for environ mental conservation means to 
formulate plans and targets related to the environm ent, establish implementation 
systems for such plans, and promote efforts toward environmental conservation. 
3.  Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion  noted in Evaluation Criteria (3) 
requires the fulfillment of the following: 
a.  The driver has been informed of eco-drive. 
b.  A manager responsible for eco-drive has been assign ed, manual has been created 
(including the use of an existing manual), and a sy stem for promoting eco-drive has 
been put in place. 
c.  Education and training regarding eco-drive is being  performed. 
d.  Energy use is being maintained through the maintena nce of operation records under 
the categories of driver and car type. 
4.  Inspection and maintenance of cars  in Evaluation Criteria (4) refers to the observanc e 
of the items outlined in the Regulations for Road T ransportation and Delivery, 
including daily and regular inspections, as well as  the establishing and execution of 
voluntary maintenance standards based on inspection  and maintenance factors listed 
in Table. The objective here is to secure an enviro nment that can maintain energy 
efficiency in automobiles. 
5.  Measures are put in place for improved efficiency i n passenger transportation  and 
decrease in traveling distance of non-passenger occ upied cars  noted in Evaluation 
Criteria (5) require the fulfillment of the followi ng  
General charted passenger automobiles must fulfill items a. and b. below.  
a.  An energy efficient route is selected beforehand, a nd the driver is notified thereof. 
b.  An appropriate automobile type, taking into account  number of passengers to 
transport and regional characteristics, is selected . 
General passenger automobiles must fulfill item c. below.  
c. Dispatching of automobiles utilizes wireless tra nsmission. Otherwise, a system is 
put in place that enables communication with the dr iver through other means of 
communication or information devices. 
6.  Fuel-efficient, low pollution cars  noted in Factors for Consideration (2) should be 
referred to “13-1 Vehicles” section in this Basic P olicy. 
7.  Environmental Report  refers to the environmental report designated by R egulations 
for Promoting Businesses that Takes into Considerat ion Environment of Specified 
Businesses, etc. through Promotion of Environmental  Information Provision (2004 
Regulation 77) Article 2, Item 4. 297 Table: Inspection and Maintenance Items for Environ mental Preservation, Including 
Maintenance of Automobile Energy Efficiency, etc.  
Promotional structure for inspection and maintenanc e 
 □ Inspection and maintenance is conducted in accordan ce with specified operation 
plan, and the results are recorded. 
□ A system is put in place to review the contents of  inspection and maintenance, 
based on the results of inspection and maintenance.  
Adequate inspection and maintenance of automobiles 
 ■Inspection and maintenance is conducted immediately  when the phenomenon with 
the environmental influence is found by daily under standing the state of the 
automobiles.  
■ For diesel-fueled automobiles, conduct inspection and maintenance when an 
increase in black smoke is confirmed by the eye. 
■ When the air-conditioner gas is considered to have  decreased, based on the 
effectiveness of the car air-conditioner, conduct i nspection and maintenance of the 
car air-conditioner, in order to prevent the discha rge of chlorofluorocarbon into the 
atmosphere. 
Inspection and maintenance based on voluntary maint enance standards 
 (Air cleaner element-related) 
■ For cleaning and replacement of air cleaner elemen t in diesel-fueled automobiles, 
refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by  the manufacturer, and determine 
a voluntary maintenance standard based on either th e distance driven or the amount 
of time that has passed since the previous maintena nce. Conduct inspection and 
maintenance accordingly. 
(Engine oil related) 
■ For the change of engine oil, refer to the mainten ance notebook, etc. provided by 
the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary mainten ance standard based on either 
the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct oil change accordingly. 
■ For the replacement of engine oil filter, refer to  the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a volun tary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount o f time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct replacement according ly. 
(Fuel equipment related) 
□ For overhauling or replacement of fuel equipment i n diesel-fueled automobiles, 
refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by  the manufacturer, and determine 
a voluntary maintenance standard based on either th e distance driven or the amount 
of time that has passed since the previous maintena nce. Conduct overhaul or 
replacement accordingly. 
(Related to equipment for the reduction of gas emis sion) 
■ For the inspection of equipment for the reduction of gas emission (DPF, Oxidized 
catalyst) in diesel-fueled automobiles, refer to th e maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a volun tary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount o f time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct inspection accordingl y. 
(Others) 298  ■ For the inspection and adjustment of tire air-pres sure, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and de termine a voluntary maintenance 
standard based on either the distance driven or the  amount of time that has passed 
since the previous maintenance. Conduct adjustment in accordance with the actual 
measurement of air-pressure. 
□ For the inspection of transmission oil leakage, re fer to the maintenance notebook, 
etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount o f time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct maintenance according ly. 
□ For changing the transmission oil, refer to the ma intenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a volun tary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount o f time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct change accordingly. 
□ For the inspection of deferential oil leakage, ref er to the maintenance notebook, 
etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount o f time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct maintenance according ly. 
□ For changing the deferential oil, refer to the mai ntenance notebook, etc. provided 
by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary main tenance standard based on either 
the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct change accordingly. 
■ refers to items that must be conducted for inspect ion and maintenance of automobiles. 
□ refers to items for which execution is desirable f or inspection and maintenance of 
automobiles. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of passenger transportation bus inesses that meet the criteria to the number 
of passenger transportation businesses commissioned  in the fiscal year.  
  299 22-9 Illumination Services 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Fluorescent 
illumination 
services 
 
 Evaluation Criteria 
The service is a function supplying service (servic izing) that fulfills the 
following criteria: 
(1)  Fluorescent light that fulfills the Evaluation Crit eria for fluorescent light 
(refer to Lamps section) is used as long as it does not cause any i ssues 
for objective of use and is suitable for the equipm ent. 
(2)  The recycle rate of collected used fluorescent lamp s that are in its 
complete form should comprise 95% or more of the co llected fluorescent 
lamps. 
(3)  A certificate for the completion of adequate proces sing of fluorescent 
lamp is issued, and presented to the client upon re quest. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Collection bin for used fluorescent lamps should be  capable of recycling 
in order to decrease environmental load. 
(2)  Collection of used fluorescent lamps will be conduc ted upon cooperation 
with facility manager. Efforts should be made to co llect without damage.  
(3)  An effective method of distribution network utilizi ng regular collection, 
collaborative shipping, etc. is in place for shippi ng and collecting of 
fluorescent lamps. 
(4)  Packaging and stowage is as simple as possible, and  ease of reuse and 
decrease in environmental load upon disposal is con sidered. 
Notes: 
1.  Function supplying service (servicizing)  noted in Evaluation Criteria refers to a 
service in which only the function of the fluoresce nt lamp is supplied; the ownership 
of the fluorescent lamp remains with the service pr ovider who remains responsible for 
transportation, collection and disposal. 
2.  Certificate for the completion of adequate processi ng of fluorescent lamp  noted in 
Evaluation Criteria (3) can be an equivalent of a c ertificate including electronic 
manifesto and manifesto management system utilizing  IT. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
The total number of function supplying service prov ider for fluorescent lamps commissioned 
in the fiscal year. 
  300 22-10 Retail Businesses 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Retail 
businesses that 
operate in 
government 
buildings, etc.  Evaluation Criteria 
Stores for retail businesses that operate through c ommission in government 
buildings and associated sites need to fulfill one of the following criteria:  
(1)  An original system is put in place to restrict exce ssive use of containers 
and packaging.  
(2)  An original system is put in place to restrict cons umers’ excessive use 
of single-use products, containers and packaging. 
(3)  If providing foods, the following requirements shal l be satisfied. 
a.  It is necessary to understand the amount of food wa ste generated, 
to formulate plans and to set targets for restraini ng occurrence and 
recycling. 
b.  To suppress the occurrence of food waste, announce to 
consumers, enlightenment, etc. are being carried ou t. 
c.   To ensure sustainable production and consumption o f raw 
materials in procurement of food, procurement polic ies on 
sustainability have been proclaimed. 
d.  When the target value of suppression of food waste,  etc. is 
applicable, the amount generated per unit such as f ood waste shall 
be less than this target value. 
e.  To make sure that the implementation rate of recycl ing and 
utilization of food circulation resources has reach ed the standard 
implementation rate specified by ministerial criter ia or plan to 
achieve target value in target year. 
(4)  Among the containers and packages of products handl ed at stores, 
those that are premised on reuse must be returned a nd collected at the 
store. 
(5)  In the case of providing single-use plastic shoppin g bags (hereinafter   
referred to as plastic shopping bags), meet the fol lowing criteria. 
a. Made from plant whose reduction effect of enviro nmental load has 
been confirmed accounts for no less than 25% by wei ght. 
b. Nominal thickness shall be 0.02 mm or less. 
c. Ingenuity for reuse, such as a single material s hall be done. 
(6) When using plastic trash bags, the item that me ets the evaluation criteria for 
plastic trash bags 23. Trash bags, etc.,  in this basic policy  shall  be used . 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Containers and packaging of merchandise sold at the  stores are 
reduced amount of through simplified packaging, etc . 301 (2)  When filling in beverages at a store and offering i t, it is possible to 
correspond to reusable cup or bottle of customers.  
(3)  When providing plastic shopping bags, the content r atio of plastics 
whose reduction effect of environmental load has be en confirmed 
must be as high as possible. 
(4)  When handling foods, treat foods produced using fee ds, fertilizers, etc. 
manufactured by recycling food waste, etc. with pri ority.  
(5)  To cooperate in efforts that contribute to reducing  the environmental 
impact of the entire food chain, such as relaxing t he delivery deadlines 
to reduce food losses. 
(6)  When using plastic trash bags, the item shall meet the evaluation 
criteria for plastic trash bags in this basic polic y "23. Trash bags, etc."  
Notes: 
1.  Original system  noted in the evaluation criteria (1) refers to mea sures taken by the retail 
businesses to promote the control of discharge of w aste material derived from containers 
and packaging through the use of thinner or light w eight containers and packaging, 
choosing adequately-sized containers and packaging for the merchandise, etc. 
2.  Original system  noted in the evaluation criteria (2) refers to mea sures to promote the 
control of discharge of waste material derived from  containers and packaging by the 
consumers through providing containers and packagin g for sold merchandise at a cost, 
providing reusable shopping bags for those consumer s who do not bring their own 
shopping bags, etc., and confirming with the consum ers the retailer’s intent concerning the 
use of containers and packaging. 
3.  Recycling etc.  of the evaluation criteria (3) and factors for con sideration (4) refer to 
recycling etc. based on Food Recycling Law. 
4.  Control of generation  in Judgment Criteria (3) means control of generati on of food waste, 
etc. based on the Ordinance of the Ministry of Judg ment Standards. 
5.  Procurement policies on sustainability, etc. the evaluation criteria (3) c. means policies 
that businesses showed in the direction of the envi ronment, society, economic activities, 
etc. including a description on sustainable procure ment.   
6.  With regard to the evaluation criteria (3) d, in ca ses where it does not fall under the Food 
Waste Generation Large V olume Generation Business O perator under the Food 
Recycling Law, the amount of food waste generated p er unit is below the target value or 
achieves the target value It is regarded as conform ing by formulating a voluntary plan to 
do. 
7.  Evaluation criteria (4) means to install a collecti on box or the like so that when selling 
beverages using the reuse bottle at the store, the container packaging of the product sold 
can be returned or collected. 
8.  Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed  denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed by a third party 
such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objec tive and scientific analysis and 
evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle and such as polyethylene m ade from plants is applicable. 
9.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate of the evaluation criteria (5) a. and factors for 
consideration (3) based on the bio-based synthetic polymer content is multiplied by the 
bio-based synthetic polymer content rate (ratio of the weight of the plant-derived 
material component contained in the plastics based on the plant to the plastic weight). 302 10.  Nominal thickness  in evaluation criteria (5) b. shall be applied mai nly to general 
shopping bags provided at retail stores that sell f ood and drink and daily necessities. In 
addition, the test method, allowable range, etc. of  the standard shall conform to JIS Z 
1702, and the allowable error of the average thickn ess shall be in the range of -0.001 mm 
to +0.002 mm of the nominal thickness. 
11.  Evaluation criteria (5) c. does not prevent the add ition of substances whose main purpose 
is to change the function of plastics, such as colo ring, reinforcement, antistatic, etc. 
12.  For plastic shopping bags manufactured before Febru ary 19, 2021 that use 10% or more 
of plastics made from plants that have been confirm ed to have an environmental load 
reduction effect shall be deemed to meet the criter ia (5). 
13.  The standard for content ratio of plant based plast ic in Evaluation Criteria (5)a. will 
consider the market trends of products that meet th e criteria and carry out examinations 
and raise them appropriately based on “About the po licy of charging for plastic shopping 
bags” (December 25, 2019). 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
The number of retail businesses in operation in gov ernment buildings etc. that meet the criteria 
in the fiscal year. 
  303 22-11 Laundry and Dry Cleaning  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Laundry and 
dry cleaning Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Measures are put in place for energy conservation a nd the water 
resource saving, etc., collecting and recycling of the drain water for 
reduction of environmental impact. 
(2)  Measures are put in place for eco-drive promotion. 
(3)  A system for collection and reuse or recycling of u sed hangers is 
established. 
(4)  An original approach is put in place to reduce bags  and packaging 
materials. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  Control of volatile organic material is taken into consideration. 
(2)  Efforts are made for the adequate use of laundry wa ter and detergent. 
(3)  Maintain an understanding of energy use conditions at business and 
sales offices, and make an effort to decrease energ y use rate in said 
facilities. 
(4)  Incorporation of fuel-efficient, low pollution cars  is promoted. 
(5)  When providing plastic bags, plant-based plastic wh ose reduction effort 
of environmental load has been confirmed are used. 
(6)  The introduction in the cleaning equipment, the mac hine, and air 
conditioning facilities, etc. of the energy conserv ation type are 
attempted. 
Notes: 
1. Laundry and dry cleaning  under consideration in the evaluation criteria in this section 
denotes the cleaning business, based on the Law of cleaning business (Act No.207 of 
1950). However, evaluation criteria in this section  is not applied to the cleaning of the 
product that the procurement destination does conce rned when procuring as other 
items such as “Blankets,” “Comforters,” and “Mops” by lease or rental agreements. 
2. Drain water  means the steam (saturated steam)  is the one that the state changed into 
the flocculated water by radiating heat and using h eat.  
3. Eco-drive  refers to “Recommendation for Eco-drive 10” publis hed by Eco-drive 
Popularization Network (January 2020). 
Note: (1) Understand fuel cost, (2)Soft accelerator  e-start ; (3) Keep a distance between 
cars and driving with little a cceleration and deceleration; (4) Early stopping of 
acceleration when deceleration; (5) A ppropriate use of air conditioner; (6) Stop a 
useless idling; (7) Avoid getting congested, have time and leave; (8) Inspection and 
maintenance of cars start from air p ressure in the tires; (9) Removal of unnecessary 
load from car;  and (10) Stop parking that disturbs running. 
4. Measures are put in place for eco-drive promotion  noted in the evaluation criteria (2) 
requires the fulfillment of the following: 
a.  The driver has been informed of eco-drive. 
b.  A manager responsible for eco-drive has been assign ed, manual has been created 
(including the use of an existing manual), and a sy stem for promoting eco-drive has 
been put in place. 304  c.  Energy use is being maintained under the categories  of driver and car type. It is 
desirable to use the operation records of automobil e. 
 
5. A system for collection and reuse or recycling of u sed hangers is established noted in 
the evaluation criteria (3) denotes fulfillment of the below requirements.  
a.  Specific information for the collection of used han ger (collection method, collection 
location, etc.) is available for the users to colle ct appropriately.  
b.  A system is in place to wash and reuse used hangers .  
c.  If collected plastic hangers are enable to reuse, i t is material recycled as much as 
possible.  
6. Bag / packaging material  refers to a bag for storing a cleaned goods or the  like for 
take-out, a bag for preventing dust, dirt, or the l ike from adhering to the cleaned goods.  
7. Original approach  of the Evaluation criteria (4) is refers to recomm end the use of eco-
bags, etc. to confirm the intention of using take-o ut bags, etc. or any other action taken 
to encourage users to reduce their take-out bags an d packaging in providing services.  
8. Fuel-efficient, low pollution cars refer to “13-1 Vehicles” section . 
9. . Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed  denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed by a third 
party such as an LCA expert through a quantitative,  objective and scientific analysis 
and evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle.  
10. Each procurement organization should use less b ags and packaging materials, such as 
using eco bags when receiving cleaned goods.  
 
 
 
 Target Setting Guideline  
Ratio of the number of laundry and dry cleaning bus inesses that meet the criteria to the number 
of laundry and dry cleaning businesses commissioned  in the fiscal year.  
  305 22-12  Installation of Vending Machines  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria  
Installation of 
vending 
machines for 
beverages Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  Vending machines for canned or bottled beverages, f ulfill the following 
criteria. 
a. Energy consumption efficiency is less than 1000k Wh. 
b. Accomplishment rate of energy consumption effici ency is more than 
120%. 
(2) Vending machines for beverages in paper contain er or beverages served 
in cup, energy consumption efficiency doesn’t excee d the amount of 
energy consumption efficiency calculated by using t he formula listed in 
Table 1 for each category. 
(3) Fluorocarbons are not used as refrigerant or ex panding agent for 
insulation. 
(4) The implementations of environmentally consciou s design defined in the 
evaluation criteria in Table 2 are made. Moreover, the states of 
implementations are published and can be easily con firmed on websites, 
etc. 
(5) Light emitting diode is used for the body of ma chine.  
(6) Contents of specified chemical substances do no t exceed the standard 
content rate. The content rates are published and c an be easily confirmed 
on websites, etc. 
(7) In the case of indoors set up, the lighting sho uld be turned off all the time, 
except when there is no lighting in surroundings at  nighttime and it 
interferes to the selection and the purchase of the  commodity. 
(8)A collection box for beverage containers is set up and separate 
collection and recycling should be done according t o the material of 
beverage containers.  
(9)Systems for the collection and recycle of used v ending machines and 
for the appropriate disposal of parts that cannot b e recycled are in place. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  The information about main body of vending machine such as annual 
power consumption, accomplishment rate of energy co nsumption 
efficiency standard and refrigerant (kind, global w arming potential and 
enclosed capacity) of vending machines are displaye d on the main body 
of vending machine so that it can be seen easily an d it is also disclosed 
on websites. 
(2)  In the case of outdoors set up, the consideration s hould be taken so that 
direct sunshine should not strike into the main bod y of vending 
machines. 
(3)  For vending machines for beverage served in cups, u ser's own cup should 
be available. 
(4)  The heat insulator with a low thermal conductivity such as the vacuum 
heat insulators should be used. 
(5)  Take measures such as using fuel-efficient vehicles  with low pollution 
and improving the efficiency of delivery when setup  or recovery of the 306 vending machines and replenishing beverages or coll ection of 
containers. 
(6)  When using plastic trash bags in collecting beverag e containers, the item 
that meets the evaluation criteria for “Plastic tra sh bags”“23. Trash bags, 
etc. ”, in this basic policy shall be used . 
(7)  Packaging and stowage is to be as simple as possibl e and take into 
account ease of recycling and reduced environmental  impact upon 
disposal. 
(8)  A system for the collection and reuse/recycling of packaging, etc. is 
considered. 
Notes: 
1.  Installation of vending machines for beverages  under consideration in this section 
refer to those for canned/bottled beverages, those for beverage in paper containers, 
and those for beverage served in cups. However, it doesn't apply to installation of the 
one as follows: 
(1)  Those having storage space for goods kept at or nea r room temperature. 
(2)  Compact table-top models used on tables. 
(3)  Those intended to be used at specific places such a s in vehicles. 
(4)  Those cooling beverages (raw materials) by means of  an electronic cooling. 
(e.g., Peltier cooling) 
2.  Evaluation Criteria in this section doesn't apply i f there will be no replacement of the 
vending machines in the cases duration of the insta llation contract or renewal of the 
contract, etc. 
3.  Accomplishment rate of energy consumption efficienc y denotes the numerical value 
that showed by percentage which the product’s stand ard energy consumption 
efficiency calculated by the Evaluation Criteria (1 ) divided by the energy 
consumption efficiency (rounds off below the decima l point.). 
4.  Evaluation Criteria (1) and (2) doesn't apply to ve nding machines for the ones 
preparing for a disaster, the universal design vend ing machines, and the social 
contribution type vending machines, which increases  power consumption by having 
those functions. 
5.  Fluorocarbons  are the materials defined as the Fluorocarbons pre scribed in Article 
2, Paragraph 1 of the Act for Rationalized Use and Proper Management of 
Fluorocarbons, (Act No. 64 of 2001). Available mate rials in Evaluation Criteria (3) 
are Carbon Dioxide, Hydrocarbon and Hydro-Fluoro-Ol efin (HFO-1234fy), etc. 
6.  Global warming potential  denotes the numerical value that showed degree to which 
heat-trapping gas brings global warming in ratio to  which carbon dioxide brings 
global warming. 
7.  Evaluation criteria (6) does not apply to the reuse  parts. 
8.  Specified chemical substances  denotes lead and its compounds, mercury and its 
compounds, cadmium and its compounds, chromium (VI)  compound, 
polybrominated biphenyl and polybrominated diphenyl  ether. 
9.  The standard content rate of specified chemical sub stances denotes the standard rate 
provided by JIS C 0950 (The marking for presence of  the specific chemical 
substances for electrical and electronic equipment)  Appendix A, chart A.1 (specified 
chemical substances, chemical element symbol, subst ances applicable for calculation, 
and standard content rate). Items for which content  rate exceeding the standard is 
allowed are to be determined in accordance with App endix B of the above JIS. 307 10.  With regard to the evaluation criteria (8) , taking  into account the number and place 
of vending machines to be installed and the amount of sales of beverages etc., it 
should be installed appropriately so as not to hind er collection. 
11.  Each procurement organization is to take the follow ing into careful account: 
a． Consider enough the number of consumers and the vol ume of sales, etc. and set 
up the vending machines adequate in number and size . 
b． Examine where to place vending machines so that the  environmental impact is 
as low as possible because the load of environmenta l impact such as energy 
consumption varies according to the installation lo cation (indoor, outdoor, sun or 
shade, etc.). 
c． When setting up the vending machine available of us er’s own cups, confirm the 
cleaning and hygienic conditions in the set up loca tion and the surroundings, 
make it known to users, and determine responsibilit y in case the problem on the 
hygiene is caused. 
 308 Table1: Calculation Formula of Standard Energy Cons umption Efficiency for Vending 
Machines for Beverages 
Category Calculation formula 
of standard energy 
consumption efficiency Beverages to 
be sold Type of Vending machines 
Canned 
or bottled 
beverages Machines serving cold only, or Machines 
serving hot or cold E=0.218V+401 
Machines serving hot and cold 
(Internal depth is below 400 mm) E=0.798Va+414 
Machines serving 
hot and cold 
(Internal depth is 
400mm or 
greater) Without electronic 
money processing 
Device E=0.482Va+350 
With electronic money 
processing 
Device E=0.482Va+500 
Beverages 
in paper 
container Type A 
(Dummy samples  
are used for 
selling 
goods) Machines serving cold 
only E=0.948V+373 
Machines serving hot 
and cold 
(having two internal 
compartments) E=0.306Vb+954 
Machines serving hot 
and cold 
(having three internal 
compartments) E=0.63Vb+1474 
Type B 
(Actual goods are  
used for visual 
display and 
selling goods) Machines serving cold 
only E=0.477V+750 
Machines serving hot 
and cold E=0.401Vb+1261 
Beverages 
served in cups - E=1020[T<1500] 
E=0.293T+580[T>1500]  
Notes: 
1. Machines serving cold only  refers to vending machines that refrigerate the pr oducts 
sold. 
2.  Machines serving hot or cold  refers to vending machines that refrigerate or war m the 
products sold. 
3. Machines serving hot and cold  refers to vending machines which have warm section  
and cold section separated by internal partitions, so that the products sold are kept 
refrigerated or warmed respectively. 
4. E, V, and Va express the following numeric value s. 
E : Standard energy consumption efficiency (unit: k Wh per year) 
V : Actual internal volume (indicates the numeric v alue calculated from the internal 
dimensions of the goods storage area) (unit: liter)  
Va : Adjusted internal volume (indicates numeric va lue acquired first by multiplying 
the actual internal volume of the hot storage compa rtment by 40, which is divided 309 by 11, and then by adding the result to the actual internal volume of the cold 
storage compartment) (unit: liter) 
Vb : Adjusted internal volume (numeric value acquir ed first by multiplying the actual 
internal volume of the hot storage compartment by 4 0, which is devided by 10, 
and then by adding the result to the actual interna l volume of the cold storage 
compartment) (Unit: L) 
T : Adjusted heat capacity (numeric value obtained by totaling the hot-water tank 
capacity multiplied by 80, the cold-water tank capa city multiplied by 15, and the 
ice storage capacity multiplied by 95 and then divi ded by 0.917, and then 
multiplying the total sum by 4.19. (Unit: kJ) 
5. Energy consumption efficiency is calculated acco rding to “3 Energy Consumption 
Efficiency Measurement Methods (2),” based on “Crit eria for judgment of 
manufacturers of energy consuming equipment etc. re lated to improvement of energy 
consumption performance of vending machines (Minist ry of Economy, Trade and 
Industry Notification No.289 of 2007).  
 
 
Table 2: Design Criteria for Environmental Consider ation in Vending Machine for 
Beverages 
Objective Evaluation criteria Evaluation standard 
Reduce(reduction 
of resources) 
 Reduction of 
resource  The weight of product is reduced. 
Using of recycled 
materials Promotion of the use of recycled materials. 
Longer life of 
product Consideration for overhauling and renewal. 
Consideration and improvement for the 
separation. 
Consideration for repair and maintenance. 
Reduction of energy 
power consumption  The energy power consumption of product is 
reduced. Attempt is made for developing low 
energy consumption technology. 
Reuse(use again as 
parts) Selection of reused 
parts Consideration for communalization or 
standardization, selecting of reused parts 
from design stage. 
Consideration for 
products Consideration for separation and assembling 
of reusable parts. 
Design for parts 
reuse Consideration for ease of display, cleaning 
and washing, determination of longevity. 
Recycling(use 
again as materials)  Material Selection of recyclable materials. 
Standardization and indication of materials 
of kind of plastics. 
Reduction of use of parts of difficult to 
recycle. 
Consideration of ease 
of separation The structure allows for easy dismantling of 
pre-separation parts. 
 310  
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of installation of vending mach ines for beverages installation by contract 
or licensing agreement that meet the criteria to th e number of vending machines for beverages 
commissioned in the fiscal year. 
  311 22-13 Moving Transportation  
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Moving 
Transportation Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  As for products used for packing or curing, when ap plicable to the 
designated procurement items, are used which fulfil l those evaluation 
criteria. 
(2)  Materials for packing and curing that can be used r epetitive are used.  
(3)  The collection of materials for packing is executed  after the moving 
ends.  
(4)  In the case of transportation with a car, fulfill f ollowing criteria. 
a.  The state of energy use, as well as the effects of energy efficiency 
efforts is being reviewed periodically. 
b.  System and organization for environmental conservat ion is being 
developed . 
c.  Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion. 
d.  Inspection and maintenance of cars for environmenta l protection 
including reduction of environmental pollutant emis sion and 
maintenance of energy efficiency is being conducted . 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  The appropriate proposal concerning the moving tran sportation method 
shall be made to contribute to decrease of environm ental load. 
(2)  As for packing and curing material, taking into acc ount for saving 
resource such as aggregate packing or reduction of materials use. 
(3)  As for packing and curing material, recycled materi al or plastic made 
from plant whose reduction effect of environmental load has been 
confirmed are used, also taking into consideration of ease of recycling 
and environmental load upon disposal.  
(4)  In the case of transportation with a car, taking in to consideration of 
following. 
a.  Adequate and effective application for the efficien t use of energy 
and measures to contribute to leveling of demand fo r electricity in 
moving transportation is arranged, with considerati on for 
“Evaluation Criteria for Freight Transportation Com panies in 
Relation to the Efficient use of Energy in Freight Transportation 
(Ministry of Economy, Trade and Indust ry; Ministry of Land, 
Infrastructure and Transport, Notification No.7 of 2006) and 
“Guidelines for Freight Transportation Companies in  Relation to 
the measures to contribute to leveling of demand fo r electricity in 
Transportation” (Ministry of Economy, Tra de and Industry; 
Ministry of Land, Infrastructure and Transport (Not ification No.2 
of 2014)), based on the Regulation for the Efficien t Use of Energy 
(Act No.49 of 1979). 
b.  Incorporation of fuel-efficient, low pollution cars  are promoted. At 
the same time, transportation using fuel-efficient,  low pollution cars 
is being conducted as much as possible. 
c.  Measures are put in place for improved efficiency i n moving 
transportation. 312 d.  Devices to promote eco-drive are introduced as much  as possible. 
e.  Measures are taken for the incorporation of Intelli gent Transport 
System (ITS) including Vehicle Information and Comm unication 
System (VICS) adaptable car navigation system, and Electronic 
Toll Collection System (ETC). 
f.  Being conducted by car fills the emission standard as much as 
possible, when driving in the measures region of th e Law 
concerning Special Measures for Total Emission Redu ction of 
Nitrogen Oxides and Small Particles from automobile s in specified 
areas (June 3, 1992 No.70). 
Notes: 
1.  Moving transportation under consideration in the evaluation criteria in t his section 
denotes moving transportation business of the fixtu re and furniture, the article, and the 
document, etc., and service of packing, unpacking, arrangement, and care, etc. 
incidental to those, according to the moving of the  public office building, etc. (includes 
the moving between the public office buildings, the  moving within the public office 
building, and the moving in the floor of the public  office building.)  However, the 
moving transportation to need special packing, tran sportation, and the management, 
etc. such as the work of art, the precision instrum ent, and animals and plants is 
excluded. 
2.  Evaluation Criteria (3) applies when packing materi als made of paper such as 
cardboards are offered by the business provider, an d executes the collection according 
to purchaser's request. However, provide the collec tion time limit and the frequency 
beforehand. 
3.  Evaluation Criteria (4) and Factors for Considerati on (4) are applied to the business 
that does transportation using the car, regardless of the main contractor or subcontract 
of the moving transportation business.  
4.  Establishment of mechanisms and systems for environ mental conservation means to 
formulate plans and targets related to the environm ent, establish implementation 
systems for such plans, and promote efforts toward environmental conservation . 
5.  Eco-drive  refers to “Recommendation for Eco-drive 10” publis hed by Eco-drive 
Popularization Network (January 2020). 
Note: (1) Understand fuel cost, (2)Soft accelerator  e-start ; (3) Keep a distance between 
cars and d riving with little acceleration and deceleration; ( 4) Early stopping of 
acceleration when deceleration; (5) Appropriate use of air conditioner; (6) Stop a 
useless idling; (7) Avoid getting congested, have time and leave; (8)  Inspection and 
maintenance of cars start from a ir pressure in the tires; (9) Removal of unnecessar y 
load from car; and (10)  Stop parking that disturbs running. 
6.  Measures are in place for eco-drive promotion  noted in the evaluation criteria (4) c. 
requires the fulfillment of the following: 
a.  The driver has been informed of eco-drive. 
b.  A manager responsible for eco-drive has been assign ed, manual has been created 
(including the use of an existing manual), and a sy stem for promoting eco-drive 
has been put in place. 
c.  Education and training regarding eco-drive is being  performed. 
d.  Energy use is being maintained through the maintena nce of operation records 
under the categories of driver and car type. 313 7.  Inspection and maintenance of cars  in the evaluation criteria (4) d. refers to the 
observance of the items outlined in the Regulations  for Road Transportation and 
Delivery, including daily and regular inspections, as well as the establishing and 
execution of voluntary maintenance standards based on inspection and maintenance 
factors listed in Table. The objective here is to s ecure an environment that can maintain 
energy efficiency in automobiles. 
8.  The appropriate proposal concerning the move transp ortation method of Factors for 
Consideration (1) applies to the contract type when  the concrete suggestion is possible. 
9.  Recycled material  denotes part or all of material once used as a part  of a product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles. (This excludes  plastic that has been recycled in the 
same process of manufacturing the product.) 
10.  Synthetic fiber whose reduction effect of environme ntal load has been confirmed  
denotes material whose reduction effect of environm ental load has been confirmed by 
a third party such as an LCA expert through a quant itative, objective and scientific 
analysis and evaluation, including effects of trade  off, of the environmental load of the 
product throughout its lifecycle. 
11.  Fuel-efficient, low pollution cars  in Factors for Consideration (4) b. should be refe rred 
to “13-1 Automobiles” in this Basic Policy. 
12.   Measures are put in place for improved efficiency in moving transportation  noted 
in Factors for Consideration (4)c. requires the ful fillment of the following: 
a.  An energy efficient delivery route is selected befo rehand, and the driver is notified 
thereof. 
b.  A system for an appropriate delivery route, taking into account traffic information, 
is put in place. 
c.  An adequate automobile type, taking into account am ount of delivery items and 
regional characteristics, is selected. 
13.  Each procurement organization notes the following e nough. 
a.  It is necessary to consign the following respective ly when collection, transport 
or disposal of the waste generated along with the m oving is requested from the 
third party ; the municipal waste to the municipality or the mun icipal waste 
disposal business person (The one that corresponds to Article 2, paragraph 1 
and Article 2-3, paragraph 1 (Ministry of Health an d Welfare Ordinance No. 
35of 1971) in the Waste Management and Public Clean ing Law Ordinance for 
Enforcement is included.), Industrial waste to the industrial waste disposal 
trader (The one that corresponds to Article 9, para graph 1 and Article 10-3, 
paragraph 1 in the Waste Management and Public Clea ning Law Ordinance for 
Enforcement is included.). It is possible to reques t the collection or the 
transportation of the municipal waste from the movi ng business after the letter 
of attorney is delivered. 
b.  It is necessary to follow the consignment standard when collection, transportation 
or disposal of the waste along with the moving tran sportation business is 
consigned, and to contract industrial waste to the industrial waste disposal 
contractor who consigns the industrial waste collec tion transportation trader and 
disposal that consigns the collection or transporta tion beforehand, with confirm 
the address and the disposal method of the industri al waste disposal facility that is 
the transportation destination also. Moreover, it i s necessary to confirm the 314 address in the final disposal dump when it is dispo sed finally. It is preferable to 
do the confirmation of the municipal waste based on  industrial waste. 
c.  In the delivery of waste, about industrial waste, i t is necessary to confirm 
transportation by delivering the control manifest f or industrial waste at the same 
time as handing it over, and receiving sending the copy of the control manifest for 
industrial waste that described from the processing  trader so after transportation 
and disposal are ended like the content of the cons ignment it, and disposal. 
Moreover, it is preferable to do the confirmation o f the municipal waste based on 
industrial waste. 
 
 
Table: Inspection and Maintenance Items for Environ mental Preservation, Including 
Maintenance of Automobile Energy Efficiency, etc.  
Promotional structure for inspection and maintenanc e 
 □ Inspection and maintenance is conducted in accordan ce with specified operation 
plan, and the results are recorded. 
□ A system is put in place to review the contents of  inspection and maintenance, based 
on the results of inspection and maintenance. 
Adequate inspection and maintenance of automobiles 
 ■ When commissioning inspection and maintenance to a  maintenance business, 
maintain an understanding of the automobile conditi on on a daily basis, and relay the 
condition when commissioning. 
■ Conduct inspection and maintenance when an increas e in black smoke is confirmed 
by the eye. 
■ When the air-conditioner gas is considered to have  decreased, based on the 
effectiveness of the car air-conditioner, conduct i nspection and maintenance of the car 
air-conditioner, in order to prevent the discharge of chlorofluorocarbon into the 
atmosphere. 
Inspection and maintenance based on voluntary maint enance standards 
 (Air cleaner element-related) 
■ For cleaning and replacement of air cleaner elemen t, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and de termine a voluntary maintenance 
standard based on either the distance driven or the  amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct inspection and ma intenance accordingly. 
(Engine oil related) 
■ For the change of engine oil, refer to the mainten ance notebook, etc. provided by the 
manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance  standard based on either the 
distance driven or the amount of time that has pass ed since the previous maintenance. 
Conduct oil change accordingly. 
■ For the replacement of engine oil filter, refer to  the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a volun tary maintenance standard based 
on either the distance driven or the amount of time  that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct replacement accordingly. 
(Fuel equipment related) 
□ For overhauling or replacement of fuel equipment, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and de termine a voluntary maintenance 315 standard based on either the distance driven or the  amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct overhaul or repla cement accordingly. 
(Related to equipment for the reduction of gas emis sion) 
■ For the inspection of equipment for the reduction of gas emission (DPF, Oxidized 
catalyst), refer to the maintenance notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and 
determine a voluntary maintenance standard based on  either the distance driven or the 
amount of time that has passed since the previous m aintenance. Conduct inspection 
accordingly. 
(Others) 
 ■ For the inspection and adjustment of tire air-pres sure, refer to the maintenance 
notebook, etc. provided by the manufacturer, and de termine a voluntary maintenance 
standard based on either the distance driven or the  amount of time that has passed since 
the previous maintenance. Conduct adjustment in acc ordance with the actual 
measurement of air-pressure. 
□ For the inspection of transmission oil leakage, re fer to the maintenance notebook, 
etc. provided by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary maintenance standard 
based on either the distance driven or the amount o f time that has passed since the 
previous maintenance. Conduct maintenance according ly. 
□ For changing the transmission oil, refer to the ma intenance notebook, etc. provided 
by the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary main tenance standard based on either 
the distance driven or the amount of time that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct change accordingly. 
□ For the inspection of deferential oil leakage, ref er to the maintenance notebook, etc. 
provided by the manufacturer, and determine a volun tary maintenance standard based 
on either the distance driven or the amount of time  that has passed since the previous 
maintenance. Conduct maintenance accordingly. 
□ For changing the deferential oil, refer to the mai ntenance notebook, etc. provided by 
the manufacturer, and determine a voluntary mainten ance standard based on either the 
distance driven or the amount of time that has pass ed since the previous maintenance. 
Conduct change accordingly. 
■ refers to items that must be conducted for inspect ion and maintenance of automobiles. 
□ refers to items for which execution is desirable f or inspection and maintenance of 
automobiles. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of moving transportation busine sses that meet the criteria to the number 
of moving transportation businesses commissioned in  the fiscal year.  316 22-14 Meeting Operation 
(1) Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Meeting 
Operation Evaluation Criteria 
Meet the applicable following criteria when executi ng the business 
including meeting operation by the consignment cont ract, etc. 
(1)  If the documents are distributed, to promote reduct ion of paper 
consumption though the printing of proper number of  paper handouts 
and double-sided copies for a meeting. If the paper  correspond to the 
designated procurement items, is used which fulfill  those evaluation 
criteria. 
(2)  Meet the evaluation criteria of printing  when printing such as poster, 
leaflet and pamphlet.  
(3)  The rest of handouts and printed matter shall be re cycled. 
(4)  Providing following information about the approach to decrease of 
environmental load to the meeting participant. 
a． Use of the public transportation 
b． Cool Biz and Warm Biz. 
c． Bring pens 
(5)  If serving beverages, meet the following. 
a． Do not use single-use plastic products, containers and packaging.  
b． Served in the reusable cups or returned and collect ed container and 
packages. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  For goods to be used for conferences, use existing items as much as 
possible. As for products used for packing or curin g, when applicable 
to the designated procurement items, are used which  fulfill those 
evaluation criteria.  
(2)  To reduce paper resources by using terminals such a s laptop 
computers and tablets. 
(3)  In the case of transportation with a car, use fuel- efficient, low 
pollution cars possibly, to carry material, machine ry and participants, 
with eco-driving.  
(4)  When providing meals, do not use single-use plastic  products, 
containers and packaging . 
(5)  Materials for the packing used to transport of the material and 
machinery, it is to be as simple as possible and ta ke into account ease 
of recycling and reduced environmental impact upon disposal. 
Notes: 
1.  Fuel-efficient, low pollution cars  in Factors for Consideration should be referred to  
13-1. Vehicles  in this Basic Policy. 
2.  Eco-drive  refers to “Recommendation for Eco-drive 10” publis hed by Eco-drive 
Popularization Network (January 2020). 
Note: (1) Understand fuel cost, (2)Soft accelerator  e-start ; (3) Keep a distance between 
cars and d riving with little acceleration and deceleration; ( 4) Early stopping of 
acceleration when deceleration; (5) Appropriate use of air conditioner; (6) Stop a 
useless idling;  (7) Avoid getting congested, have time and leave; (8)  Inspection and 317 maintenance of cars start from a ir pressure in the tires; (9) Removal of unnecessar y 
load from car; and (10)  Stop parking that disturbs running. 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of commissioned businesses incl uding the meeting operation that meet 
the criteria to the total number of commissioned bu sinesses including the meeting operation 
contracted in the fiscal year. 
  318 22-15. Providing imaging equipment, etc., as a serv ice 
(1)  Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Providing imaging 
equipment, etc., as 
a service Evaluation Criteria 
(1)  When installing devices related to providing imagin g equipment, 
etc., as a service, the following requirements shal l be satisfied. 
a.  Copiers, Multifunction devices and Upgradeable digi tal 
copiers satisfy the evaluation criteria concerned i n this basic 
policy. 
b.  Printers and Multifunction Printers satisfy the eva luation 
criteria concerned in this basic policy. 
c.  Fax machines satisfy the evaluation criteria concer ned in this 
basic policy. 
d.  Scanners satisfy the evaluation criteria concerned in this basic 
policy. 
e.  Digital duplicators satisfy the evaluation criteria  concerned in 
this basic policy. 
f.  Collecting the provided equipment after the contrac t of 
providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service. Al so recovery 
of parts and material recycling are put in place. I n addition, for 
parts that cannot be reused or recycled from the co llected 
equipment, after being reduced, etc., they are prop erly 
processed and not simply landfilled. 
(2)  In the case of supplying cartridges, etc., it is ne cessary to meet the 
evaluation criteria concerned in this basic policy.  
(3)  In the case of supplying paper, it is necessary to meet the evaluation 
criteria concerned in this basic policy if the pape r corresponds to 
specified procurement goods. 
(4)  To grasp the actual results of use of equipment rel ated to providing 
imaging equipment, etc., as a service and make the following 
proposals based on the situation. 
a.  Measures to reduce the amount of paper and toner or  ink used 
in the case of equipment related to providing imagi ng 
equipment, etc., as a service. 
b.  Product specifications and installed number of equi pment 
related to providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service for 
reducing environmental impact. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  When introducing copiers, multifunction devices and  upgradeable 
digital copiers, use reproducing machines or partia l reuse type 
machine as much as possible. 
(2)  To recover used cartridges, toner containers, ink c ontainers or 
photoconductors, and reuse or recycle the recovered  parts. In 
addition, with regard to parts that cannot be reuse d or recycled, such 
as collected used cartridges, toner containers, ink  containers, or 
photoreceptors, after being reduced, etc., they are  properly 
processed and not simply landfilled. 319 (3)  Packaging materials used for equipment introduction  and supply of 
consumables in providing imaging equipment, etc., a s a service, are 
reused as much as possible, easy to reuse, and cons idered for 
recycling at the time of disposal and reduction of environmental 
impact. 
Notes:  
1.  Devices related to providing imaging equipment, etc ., as a service  means Copiers, 
Multifunction devices, Upgradeable digital copiers,  Printers, Multifunction Printers, 
Fax machines and Scanners subject to 5. Imaging Equipment, etc. in this basic policy , 
and  Digital duplicators subject to  7. Office Equipment, etc. in this basic policy . 
2.  Cartridge, etc.  means toner cartridges and ink cartridges subject to  5-6 Cartridges, etc.  
in this basic policy.  
3.  Introduction of devices related to providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service 
means that the contractor introduces all or a part of the equipment related to providing 
imaging equipment, etc., as a service, and the cont ractor introduces items other than 
equipment at the same time.  
4.  Providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service  subject to the evaluation criteria in this 
section is the provision of functions related to pr inting and output by the equipment 
providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service, ei ther one of the following. 
a.  Introduction of equipment, maintenance work and sup plies of consumable used 
by the equipment concerned providing imaging equipm ent, etc., as a service. 
b.  Introduction of equipment and maintenance work conc erned providing imaging 
equipment, etc., as a service. 
c.  Maintenance work of equipment and supplies of consu mable used by the 
equipment concerned providing imaging equipment, et c., as a service.  
5.  Evaluation criteria (1) f. applicable to specified recycling industries under the Act on 
Promotion of Effective Utilization of Resources. 
6.  With regard to proposals of the evaluation criteria  (4) a. and b., if it is possible to 
propose after consultation between the purchaser an d the contractor, implement it at an 
appropriate time or periodically within the perform ance period of the business. 
7.  Measures to reduce the amount of paper and toner or  ink  of the evaluation criteria (4) 
a. includes double-sided printing (only in the case  of equipment that do not apply the 
requirements for automatic duplexing function), red uction printing, promotion of 
consolidated printing, visualization of environment al load information (number of 
printed sheets, color printing ratio, duplex utiliz ation rate, aggregate utilization rate, 
paper reduction rate, etc.) by the equipment panel,  management of paper reusing 
function, toner or ink saving by software, user aut hentication and so on. 
8.  Evaluation criteria (4) b, taking into consideratio n the environmental impact reduction 
effect (reduction of power consumption, reduction o f greenhouse gas emissions, 
consumption of consumable items, etc.), cost effect iveness and efficiency of 
procurement affairs, etc. This item applies when qu antitative proposal is possible. 
9.  Factors for consideration (2) are applied when the contractor supplies a cartridge, a 
toner container, an ink container or a photorecepto r. 
10.  Each organization that procures will make efforts t o examine countermeasures for 
reducing environmental impact, such as implementati on of management by user 
authentication, suppression of usage of paper, etc.  
 
 320 (2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of commissioned businesses incl uding providing imaging equipment, etc., 
as a service that meet the criteria to the total nu mber of commissioned businesses including 
providing imaging equipment, etc., as a service con tracted in the fiscal year. 
 
  321 23. Trash bags, etc. 
(1)  Items and Evaluation Criteria 
Plastic Trash bags  Evaluation Criteria 
〇Fulfill one of the following. 
(1)  Fulfill following criteria either a. or b. In addit ion, both c and d 
shall be met. 
a.  Plant based plastics whose reduction effect of envi ronmental 
load has been confirmed shall be used at least 25% of the 
weight of the plastic. 
b.  Recycled plastic shall be used at least 40% of the weight of 
plastic. 
c.  Information about the above a. or b. must be displa yed. 
d.  The filler is not used as a plastic additive. 
(2) Meet the Eco Mark Certification Criteria or equ ivalent. 
 
Factors for Consideration 
(1)  To reduce the weight of a sheet as much as possible  by make it thin.  
(2)  A plant based plastic whose reduction effect of env ironmental load 
has been confirmed shall be used as high content ra te as possible. 
(3)  Product packaging or packaging should be as simple as possible, 
with consideration given to ease of recycling and r eduction of 
disposal load. 
1.  Plastic Trash bags  that are subject to the Evaluation criteria in thi s section are plastic 
trash bags intended to be used for the incineration  of waste generated in general 
administrative affairs. This does not apply to case s where the quality and standards to be 
satisfied are specified in, where local governments  have specified for waste disposal, or 
when they are used for special purposes. 
2.  Eco Mark Certification Criteria  in Evaluation Criteria (2) in this section denote the 
certification criteria for Category E. Cleaning/Storage Goods  of the product Type No. 
128 Daily Necessities after Version 1  among the product category of the Eco Mark system 
operated by the Eco Mark Office of the Japan Enviro nment Association.  
3.  Plastics whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed  denotes 
material whose reduction effect of environmental lo ad has been confirmed by a third party 
such as an LCA expert through a quantitative, objec tive and scientific analysis and 
evaluation, including effects of trade off, of the environmental load of the product 
throughout its lifecycle.  This includes such as po lyethylene made from plants. 
4.  Bio-based synthetic polymer content rate based on the bio-based synthetic polymer 
content is multiplied by the bio-based synthetic po lymer content rate (ratio of the weight 
of the plant-derived material component contained i n the plastics based on the plant to 
the plastic weight). 
5.  Recycled plastic  denotes  part or all of plastic once used as a part of a use ful product that 
has been discarded, remnants discarded during the m anufacturing process, or the 
recycle/reuse of defective articles (This excludes,  however, plastic that has been recycled 
in the process of manufacturing the product.) 
6.  Display information  in Evaluation Criteria (1) c. means that the conte nt ratio of plant 
based plastic in Evaluation Criteria (1) a. or recy cled plastic in Evaluation Criteria (1) b. 
indicated on the product itself or product packagin g, provided in catalogs or websites, etc. 322 7.  Filler  in Evaluation Criteria(1) d. refers to a substance whose main purpose is to increase 
its capacity (increase in volume) by adding it to p lastic, and mainly to change the function 
of plastic such as coloring, reinforcement and anti static, not applicable to substances 
added for the purpose. 
8.  For plastic trash bags manufactured before February  19, 2021, transitional period will be 
provided until September 30, 2021, and during this period, procurement of environmental 
goods, etc.,  product that meet the Evaluation Criteria for plasti c trash bags in Basic Policy 
on Promoting Green Procurement (decided by the Cabi net on February 7, 2020) shall be 
deemed to meet the criteria in this section . 
9.   The standard for content ratio of plant based plastic in Evaluation Criteria (1) will consider 
the market trends of products that meet the criteri a and carry out examinations and raise 
them appropriately based on the Plastic Resource Re cycling Strategy (May 31, 2019). 
 
 
 
(2)Target Setting Guideline 
Ratio of the number of plastic trash bags that meet  the criteria to the total number of plastic 
trash bags purchased in the fiscal year.